HOLLOWAY HALL AUDITORIUM
RENOVATION
BID DOCUMENTS
PROJECT MANUAL
JANUARY 2, 2013
SALISBURY UNIVERSITY
FACILITIES PLANNING AND CAPITAL PROJECTS
1101 CAMDEN AVENUE
SALISBURY, MARYLAND 21801
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
601 EAST PRATT STREET, SUITE 300, BALTIMORE, MARYLAND 21202
TEL: 410.685.6655 FAX: 410.539.6242
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
TABLE OF CONTENTS
This Table of Contents is provided for convenience only and its completion is not guaranteed. It shall not be considered a part of
the Contract Documents. It does not imply division of the work into specific subcontracts.
SPECIFICATIONS GROUP
General Requirements Subgroup
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01 10 00
SUMMARY
01 23 00
ALTERNATES
01 25 00
SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
01 26 00
CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
01 29 00
PAYMENT PROCEDURES
01 31 00
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
01 32 00
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
01 33 00
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
01 40 00
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
01 50 00
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
01 60 00
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
01 73 00
EXECUTION
01 74 19
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
01 77 00
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
01 78 23
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
01 78 39
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
Facility Construction Subgroup
DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE
03 01 30
MAINTENANCE OF CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03 54 13
GYPSUM CEMENT UNDERLAYMENT
DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES
06 10 00
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06 20 23
INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY
06 43 00
WOOD STAIRS
DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07 92 00
JOINT SEALANTS
DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS
08 11 13
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
08 14 33
STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS
08 31 13
ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
08 71 00
DOOR HARDWARE
DIVISION 09 - FINISHES
09 22 16
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
09 24 00
CEMENT PLASTERING
09 29 00
GYPSUM BOARD
09 51 13
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
09 65 13
RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES
09 65 17
LINOLEUM FLOORING
09 68 16
SHEET CARPETING
09 84 13
FIXED SOUND-ABSORPTIVE PANELS
09 91 23
INTERIOR PAINTING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
TOC - 1
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT
11 52 00
AUDIO - VISUAL EQUIPMENT
11 61 00
THEATRE AND STAGE EQUIPMENT
11 61 13
ACOUSTICAL SHELLS
11 61 33
RIGGING SYSTEMS AND CONTROLS
11 61 43
STAGE CURTAINS AND TRACKS
DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS
12 61 00
FIXED AUDIENCE SEATING
DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT
14 42 00
WHEELCHAIR LIFTS
Facility Services Subgroup
DIVISION 21 - FIRE SUPPRESSION
21 13 13
FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
DIVISION 23 - MECHANICAL
23 05 00
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR MECHANICAL
23 05 13
COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT
23 05 29
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR MECHANICAL PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
23 05 48
MECHANICAL VIBRATION CONTROL
23 05 53
IDENTIFICATION FOR MECHANICAL
23 05 93
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
23 07 00
MECHANICAL INSULATION
23 09 00
HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS
23 21 13
HYDRONIC PIPING
23 23 00
REFRIGERANT PIPING
23 31 13
METAL DUCTS
23 34 23
HVAC POWER VENTILATORS
23 37 13
DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES
23 81 26
SPLIT SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 05 19
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
26 05 26
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 29
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 33
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 53
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 09 34
EMERGENCY LIGHTING TRANSFER CABINET
26 22 00
LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
26 24 16
PANELBOARDS
26 27 26
WIRING DEVICES
26 28 16
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
26 51 00
INTERIOR LIGHTING (HOUSE AND BACK OF HOUSE)
DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
28 31 11
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
TOC - 2
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
SECTION 01 10 00 - SUMMARY
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Project information.
2. Work covered by Contract Documents.
3. Phased construction.
4. Work by Owner.
5. Access to site.
6. Work restrictions.
7. Specification and drawing conventions.
1.3
PROJECT INFORMATION
A. Project Identification: Holloway Hall Theater Renovation.
1. Project Location: Salisbury, Maryland.
B. Owners:
1. Salisbury University.
C. Architect: Design Collective, Inc., 601 East Pratt Street, Suite 300, Baltimore, MD, 21202.
D. Type of Contract
1. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract.
E. Description:
1. The project consists of the renovation of the theater and stage of Holloway Hall at Salisbury University in Maryland. Holloway Hall is the first building built on the campus for
Salisbury University and currently houses the office of the president, administrative offices and the 776 seat Auditorium. The renovation is focused on the Auditorium and the
back of house support systems for the Auditorium. The project will consist of demolition
of the existing theater lighting, sound and electrical systems as well as the existing seating and finishes. New theater lighting, sound, video projection and rigging systems will be
included in the renovation. The space will have a sound booth and ticket booth added
within the space.
1.4
ACCESS TO SITE
A. General: Contractor shall have full use of Project site for construction operations during construction period. Contractor's use of Project site is limited only by Owner's right to perform
work or to retain other contractors on portions of Project and as follows:
1. Driveways, Walkways and Entrances: Keep driveways loading areas, and entrances
serving premises clear and available to Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials.
a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances by construction operations.
SUMMARY
01 10 00 - 1
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
b. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials
and equipment on-site.
1.5
WORK RESTRICTIONS
A. Work Restrictions, General: Comply with restrictions on construction operations.
1. Comply with limitations on use of public streets and other requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Nonsmoking Site: Smoking is not permitted on site.
C. Controlled Substances: Use of tobacco products and controlled substances on the Campus
is prohibited.
1.6
SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS
A. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language
and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows:
1. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. The
words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied
where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.
2. Specification requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically stated
otherwise.
B. Division 01 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division 01 apply to the
Work of all Sections in the Specifications.
C. Drawing Coordination: Requirements for materials and products identified on the Drawings
are described in detail in the Specifications. One or more of the following are used on the
Drawings to identify materials and products:
1. Terminology: Materials and products are identified by the typical generic terms used in
the individual Specifications Sections.
2. Abbreviations: Materials and products are identified by abbreviations published as part of
the U.S. National CAD Standard and scheduled on Drawings.
PART 2
PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3
EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION 01 10 00
SUMMARY
01 10 00 - 2
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
SECTION 01 23 00 - ALTERNATES
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for alternates.
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A. Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined in the bidding requirements that may be added to or deducted from the base bid amount
if Owner decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be
completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract Documents.
1. Alternates described in this Section are part of the Work only if enumerated in the
Agreement.
2. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract
Sum to incorporate alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Contract Sum.
B. Bid Option: Same as Alternate except that the base bid item is to “build nothing”.
1.4
PROCEDURES
A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate
work of the alternate into Project.
1. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar
items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part
of alternate.
B. Notification: Immediately following award of the Contract, notify each party involved, in writing, of the status of each alternate. Indicate if alternates have been accepted, rejected, or
deferred for later consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated revisions to alternates.
C. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract.
D. Schedule: A schedule of alternates is included at the end of this Section. Specification Sections referenced in schedule contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve the
work described under each alternate.
ALTERNATES
01 23 00 - 1
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
PART 2
PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.1
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES
A. Alternate No. 1 – AV Equipment Upgrades: Provide the following AV equipment:
1. (3) PTZ Cameras. (Note base bid to include cabling rough-in and wall jacks). Provide
control for the PTZ camera as alternate. 16 port model with integrated controller and input/outputs.
2. (1) Piano Microphone.
3. Additional Wireless Microphone Devices - base bid is 4 lav/4 handheld. Alternate adds 4
additional lav units.
4. (1) ATEM M/E Broadcast Panel.
5. (8) Stage Monitors.
B. Alternate No. 2 – Acoustical Treatments:
1. Furnish specified Stage Acoustical Shell.
2. Remove existing acoustical wall treatments and provide new sound panels at locations
not otherwise indicated to be provided under base bid.
C. Alternate No. 3 – Rigging Equipment Upgrades:
1. Provide the following Rigging Equipment upgrades in lieu of specified base bid systems:
a. Chandelier Motorized Hoist and associated electrical.
b. Truss at FOH B. (Note Base Bid to include all ceiling penetrations with escutcheons,
electrical raceways and boxes, circuit wiring, dimmers, and chain hoist top anchors.
D. Alternate No. 4 – Stage Area Upgrades:
1. Provide the following upgrades to the Stage Area and Back of House in lieu of, or in addition to, specified base systems:
a. C1 Blue Light Fixtures in backstage Storage Room/Shop and all associated rough-in
and devices.
b. On Stage 200A and 400A Company Switch.
c. Wireless comm system - locate in AR-04 and connect to stage circuit and circuit 8
from SB-704.
E. Alternate No. 5 – Auditorium Upgrades:
1. Provide the following Auditorium upgrades in lieu of specified base bid systems:
a. Beam mounted Auditorium Seats at Level 1 seating.
b. Premium Velour Auditorium Seating Fabric.
c. Tandus Powerbond Carpet.
F. Alternate No. 6 – Theater Equipment Upgrades:
1. Provide the following Theater Equipment Upgrades:
a. (4) additional Intelligent Theater Lighting Fixtures.
G. Alternate No. 7 – Miscellaneous Upgrades:
1. Provide the following miscellaneous upgrades above and beyond, or in lieu of, specified
base bid work:
a. Ticket Booth in its entirety.
END OF SECTION 01 23 00
ALTERNATES
01 23 00 - 2
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
SECTION 01 25 00 - SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for substitutions.
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from
those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor.
1. Substitutions for Cause: Changes proposed by Contractor that are required due to
changed Project conditions, such as unavailability of product, regulatory changes, or unavailability of required warranty terms.
2. Substitutions for Convenience: Changes proposed by Contractor or Owner that are not
required in order to meet other Project requirements but may offer advantage to Contractor or Owner.
1.4
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number
and title and Drawing numbers and titles.
1. Substitution Request Form: Use facsimile of form provided in Project Manual.
2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following,
as applicable:
a. Statement indicating why specified product or fabrication or installation cannot be
provided, if applicable.
b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or revisions needed to other
parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors,
that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution.
c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the
Work specified. Include annotated copy of applicable Specification Section. Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability,
visual effect, sustainable design characteristics, warranties, and specific features and
requirements indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the Work specified.
d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures.
e. Samples, where applicable or requested.
f. Certificates and qualification data, where applicable or requested.
g. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses
and names and addresses of architects and owners.
h. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test
results for compliance with requirements indicated.
i. Research reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project, from
ICC-ES.
j. Detailed comparison of Contractor's construction schedule using proposed substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Contract
SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
01 25 00 - 1
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the
Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating
date of receipt of purchase order, lack of availability, or delays in delivery.
k. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum.
l. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in the
Contract Documents except as indicated in substitution request, is compatible with
related materials, and is appropriate for applications indicated.
m. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results.
3. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within seven days of receipt of a request for substitution. Architect
will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within 15 days of
receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation,
whichever is later.
a. Forms of Acceptance: Change Order, Construction Change Directive, or Architect's
Supplemental Instructions for minor changes in the Work.
b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a proposed
substitution within time allocated.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed substitution with related products and materials. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform compatibility tests recommended by manufacturers.
1.6
PROCEDURES
A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected work as necessary to integrate work of the approved
substitutions.
PART 2
2.1
PRODUCTS
SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately on discovery of need
for change, but not later than 15 days prior to time required for preparation and review of related submittals.
1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:
a. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce
indicated results.
b. Requested substitution provides sustainable design characteristics that specified
product provided for achieving LEED prerequisites and credits.
c. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted.
d. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule.
e. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction.
f. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work.
g. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work.
h. Requested substitution provides specified warranty.
i. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution
has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is
compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.
SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
01 25 00 - 2
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
B. Substitutions for Convenience: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received
within 60 days after commencement of the Work. Requests received after that time may be
considered or rejected at discretion of Architect.
1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:
a. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy
conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities
Owner must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation
to Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction
by Owner, and similar considerations.
b. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents.
c. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce
indicated results.
d. Requested substitution provides sustainable design characteristics that specified
product provided for achieving LEED prerequisites and credits.
e. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted.
f. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule.
g. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction.
h. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work.
i. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work.
j. Requested substitution provides specified warranty.
k. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution
has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is
compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.
PART 3
EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION 01 25 00
SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
01 25 00 - 3
DESIGN
C O L L E C T I V E
SUBSTITUTION REQUEST
Project:
Substitution Request Number:
From:
To:
Date:
A/E Project Number:
Re:
Contract For:
Specification Title:
Section:
Description:
Page:
Article/Paragraph:
Proposed Substitution:
Manufacturer:
Address:
Phone:
Trade Name:
Installer:
Model No.:
Address:
Phone:
History: • New product • 1-4 years old • 5-10 years old • More than 10 years old
Differences between proposed substitution and specified product:
• Point-by-point comparative data attached - REQUIRED BY A/E
Reason for not providing specified item:
Similar Installation:
Project:
Architect:
Address:
Owner:
Date Installed:
Proposed substitution affects other parts of Work: • No • Yes; explain
Savings to Owner for accepting substitution:
Proposed substitution changes Contract Time: • No • Yes [Add] [Deduct]
($
).
days.
Supporting Data Attached: • Drawings • Product Data • Samples • Tests • Reports •
SUBSTITUTION REQUEST
PAGE 1 OF 2
DESIGN
C O L L E C T I V E
SUBSTITUTION REQUEST
The Undersigned certifies:
• Proposed substitution has been fully investigated and determined to be equal or superior in all respects to specified product.
• Same warranty will be furnished for proposed substitution as for specified product.
• Same maintenance service and source of replacement parts, as applicable, is available.
• Proposed substitution will have no adverse effect on other trades and will not affect or delay progress schedule.
• Cost data as stated above is complete. Claims for additional costs related to accepted substitution which may subsequently
become apparent are to be waived.
• Proposed substitution does not affect dimensions and functional clearances.
• Payment will be made for changes to building design, including A/E design, detailing, and construction costs caused by the
substitution.
• Coordination, installation, and changes in the Work as necessary for accepted substitution will be complete in all respects.
Submitted by:
Signed by:
Firm:
Address:
Telephone:
Attachments:
A/E’s REVIEW AND ACTION
• Substitution approved - Make submittals in accordance with Specification Section 01 25 00 Substitution Procedures.
• Substitution approved as noted - Make submittals in accordance with Specification Section 01 25 00 Substitution Procedures.
• Substitution rejected - Use specified materials.
• Substitution Request received too late - Use specified materials.
Signed by:
Date:
Approvals are based upon the opinion, knowledge, information, and belief of Architect and reliance upon data submitted at time
of issuance . Approvals are therefore interim in nature and subject to reconsideration as additional data, materials, workmanship, and coordination with other work are observed and reviewed. In proposing items, Contractor assumes all risks, costs, and
responsibilities for items’ final acceptance, integration into Work, and performance.
Additional Comments: • Contractor • Subcontractor • Supplier • Manufacturer • A/E •
SUBSTITUTION REQUEST
PAGE 2 OF 2
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
100% CONST. DOCS.
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
SECTION 01 26 00 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing
Contract modifications.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Division 01 Section "Substitution Procedures" for administrative procedures for handling
requests for substitutions made after the Contract award.
1.3
PROPOSAL REQUESTS/ARCHITECT’S SUPPLEMENTAL INSTRUCTIONS
A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed
changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time.
If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications.
1. Work Change Proposal Requests issued by Architect are not instructions either to stop
work in progress or to execute the proposed change.
2. Within time specified in Proposal Request or 20 days, when not otherwise specified, after
receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change.
a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total
amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to
substantiate quantities.
b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade
discounts.
c. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change.
d. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the
change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish
times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time.
e. Quotation Form: Use forms acceptable to Architect.
B. Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or changed conditions require modifications to the
Contract, Contractor may initiate a claim by submitting a request for a change to Architect.
1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the
Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the
proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time.
2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total
amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities.
3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts.
4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change.
5. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the
change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times,
CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
01 26 00 - 1
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
100% CONST. DOCS.
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the
Contract Time.
6. Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Substitution Procedures" if the proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified.
7. Proposal Request Form: Use form acceptable to Architect.
1.4
CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES
A. On Owner's approval of a Work Changes Proposal Request, Architect will issue a Change
Order for signatures of Owner and Contractor on AIA Document G701.
1.5
CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE
A. Construction Change Directive will be in accordance with the project’s General Terms and
Conditions of the Contract, or in the absence thereof, as mutually agreed to by both Owner
and Contractor.
PART 2
PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3
EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION 01 26 00
CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
01 26 00 - 2
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
SECTION 01 29 00 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process Applications for Payment.
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A. Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract
Sum to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's Applications for Payment.
1.4
SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the schedule of values with preparation of Contractor's construction schedule.
1. Coordinate line items in the schedule of values with other required administrative forms
and schedules, including the following:
a. Application for Payment forms with continuation sheets.
b. Submittal schedule.
c. Items required to be indicated as separate activities in Contractor's construction
schedule.
2. Submit the schedule of values to Architect at earliest possible date, but no later than
seven days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment.
B. Format and Content: Use Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items
for the schedule of values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section.
1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the schedule of values:
a. Project name and location.
b. Name of Architect.
c. Architect's project number.
d. Contractor's name and address.
e. Date of submittal.
2. Arrange schedule of values consistent with format of AIA Document G703
3. Arrange the schedule of values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the following for each item listed:
a. Related Specification Section or Division.
b. Description of the Work.
c. Name of subcontractor.
d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator.
e. Name of supplier.
f. Change Orders (numbers) that affect value.
g. Dollar value of the following, as a percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest onehundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent.
(1) Labor.
(2) Materials.
PAYMENT PROCEDURES
01 29 00 - 1
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
(3) Equipment.
4. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with Project Manual
table of contents. Provide multiple line items for principal subcontract amounts in excess
of five percent of the Contract Sum.
5. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum.
6. Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each part of the Work where
Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated
and stored, but not yet installed.
a. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. If required, include evidence of insurance.
7. Provide separate line items in the schedule of values for initial cost of materials, for each
subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work.
8. Each item in the schedule of values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item.
a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual workin-place may be shown either as separate line items in the schedule of values or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option.
9. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the schedule of values before the next Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a
change in the Contract Sum.
1.5
APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
A. Each Application for Payment following the initial Application for Payment shall be consistent
with previous applications and payments as certified by Architect and paid for by Owner.
1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion,
and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements.
B. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Agreement between Owner and Contractor. The period of construction work covered by each Application for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement.
C. Application for Payment Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703 as form
for Applications for Payment.
D. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person
authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete
applications without action.
1. Entries shall match data on the schedule of values and Contractor's construction schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made.
2. Include amounts for work completed following previous Application for Payment, whether
or not payment has been received. Include only amounts for work completed at time of
Application for Payment.
3. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before
last day of construction period covered by application.
4. Indicate separate amounts for work being carried out under Owner-requested project acceleration.
E. Stored Materials: Include in Application for Payment amounts applied for materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. Differentiate between items
stored on-site and items stored off-site.
1. Provide certificate of insurance, evidence of transfer of title to Owner, and consent of
surety to payment, for stored materials.
PAYMENT PROCEDURES
01 29 00 - 2
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
2. Provide supporting documentation that verifies amount requested, such as paid invoices.
Match amount requested with amounts indicated on documentation; do not include overhead and profit on stored materials.
3. Provide summary documentation for stored materials indicating the following:
a. Value of materials previously stored and remaining stored as of date of previous Applications for Payment.
b. Value of previously stored materials put in place after date of previous Application for
Payment and on or before date of current Application for Payment.
c. Value of materials stored since date of previous Application for Payment and remaining stored as of date of current Application for Payment.
F. Transmittal: Submit three signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to Architect by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall include
waivers of lien and similar attachments if required.
1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate
information about application.
G. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or
coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following:
1. List of subcontractors.
2. Schedule of values.
3. Contractor's construction schedule (preliminary if not final).
4. Submittal schedule (preliminary if not final).
5. List of Contractor's staff assignments.
6. Copies of building permits.
7. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for performance
of the Work.
8. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies.
9. Performance and payment bonds.
H. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After Architect issues the Certificate of
Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion
for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete.
1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a
statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum.
2. This application shall reflect Certificate(s) of Substantial Completion issued previously for
Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work.
I.
Final Payment Application: After completing Project closeout requirements, submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted
and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following:
1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements.
2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof
that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid.
3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum.
4. AIA Document G706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims."
5. AIA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens."
6. AIA Document G707, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment."
7. Evidence that claims have been settled.
8. Final liquidated damages settlement statement.
PAYMENT PROCEDURES
01 29 00 - 3
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
PART 2
PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3
EXECUTION (NOT USED)
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
END OF SECTION 01 29 00
PAYMENT PROCEDURES
01 29 00 - 4
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
SECTION 01 31 00 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project
including, but not limited to, the following:
1. General project coordination procedures.
2. Administrative and supervisory personnel.
3. Coordination drawings.
4. Requests for Information (RFIs).
5. Project meetings.
6. Hot work permits.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 01 Section "Execution" for procedures for coordinating general installation and
field-engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control points.
2. Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for coordinating closeout of the Contract.
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A. RFI: Request from Owner, Architect, or Contractor seeking information from each other during construction.
1.4
COORDINATION
A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations, included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation.
1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where
installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before
or after its own installation.
2. Coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.
3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.
B. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees
at meetings.
1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their
Work is required.
C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of
the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Preparation of Contractor's construction schedule.
2. Preparation of the schedule of values.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
01 31 00 - 1
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
1.5
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls.
Delivery and processing of submittals.
Progress meetings.
Preinstallation conferences.
Project closeout activities.
Startup and adjustment of systems.
Project closeout activities.
COORDINATION DRAWINGS
A. Coordination Drawings, General: Prepare coordination drawings in accordance with requirements in individual Sections, where installation is not completely shown on Shop Drawings, where limited space availability necessitates coordination, or if coordination is required
to facilitate integration of products and materials fabricated or installed by more than one entity.
1. Content: Project-specific information, drawn accurately to a scale large enough to indicate and resolve conflicts. Do not base coordination drawings on standard printed data.
Include the following information, as applicable:
a. Use applicable Drawings as a basis for preparation of coordination drawings. Prepare sections, elevations, and details as needed to describe relationship of various
systems and components.
b. Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural, structural,
civil, mechanical, and electrical systems.
c. Indicate space requirements for routine maintenance and for anticipated replacement
of components during the life of the installation.
d. Show location and size of access doors required for access to concealed dampers,
valves, and other controls.
e. Indicate required installation sequences.
f. Indicate dimensions shown on the Drawings. Specifically note dimensions that appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum clearance requirements. Provide alternate sketches to Architect indicating proposed resolution of such
conflicts. Minor dimension changes and difficult installations will not be considered
changes to the Contract.
B. Coordination Drawing Organization: Organize coordination drawings as follows:
1. Floor Plans and Reflected Ceiling Plans: Show architectural and structural elements, and
mechanical, plumbing, fire protection, fire alarm, and electrical Work. Show locations of
visible ceiling-mounted devices relative to acoustical ceiling grid. Supplement plan drawings with section drawings where required to adequately represent the Work.
2. Plenum Space: Indicate subframing for support of ceiling and wall systems, mechanical
and electrical equipment, and related Work. Locate components within ceiling plenum to
accommodate layout of light fixtures indicated on Drawings. Indicate areas of conflict between light fixtures and other components.
3. Mechanical Rooms: Provide coordination drawings for mechanical rooms showing plans
and elevations of mechanical, plumbing, fire protection, fire alarm, and electrical equipment.
4. Structural Penetrations: Indicate penetrations and openings required for all disciplines.
5. Mechanical and Plumbing Work: Show the following:
a. Sizes and bottom elevations of ductwork, piping, and conduit runs, including insulation, bracing, flanges, and support systems.
b. Dimensions of major components, such as dampers, valves, diffusers, access doors,
cleanouts and electrical distribution equipment.
c. Fire-rated enclosures around ductwork.
6. Electrical Work: Show the following:
a. Runs of vertical and horizontal conduit 1-1/4 inch diameter and larger.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
01 31 00 - 2
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
b. Light fixture, exit light, emergency battery pack, smoke detector, and other fire alarm
locations.
c. Panel board, switch board, switchgear, transformer, busway, generator, and motor
control center locations.
d. Location of pull boxes and junction boxes, dimensioned from column center lines.
7. Fire Protection System: Show the following:
a. Locations of standpipes, mains piping, branch lines, pipe drops, and sprinkler heads.
8. Review: Architect will review coordination drawings to confirm that the Work is being coordinated, but not for the details of the coordination, which are the Contractor's responsibility. If the Architect determines that the coordination drawings are not being prepared in
sufficient scope or detail, or are otherwise deficient, the Architect will so inform the Contractor, who shall make changes as directed and resubmit.
9. Coordination Drawing Prints: Prepare coordination drawing prints in accordance with requirements of Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures."
1.6
REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFIS)
A. General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information or interpretation of
the Contract Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified.
1. Architect will return RFIs submitted to Architect by other entities controlled by Contractor
with no response.
2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's
work or work of subcontractors.
3. Prior to issuing an RFI, carefully study and compare the Contract Documents, other
Owner provided information, Contractor prepared coordination Drawings, and other project correspondence or documentation for the required information.
B. Frivolous RFI’s:
1. A frivolous RFI is an RFI for which the answer is simply a reference to the plans or specifications with no additional input required to clarify or answer the question.
C. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information or interpretation and the following:
1. Project name.
2. Project number.
3. Date.
4. Name of Contractor.
5. Name of Architect.
6. RFI number, numbered sequentially.
7. RFI subject.
8. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate.
9. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
10. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate.
11. Contractor's suggested resolution. If Contractor's solution(s) impacts the Contract Time
or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI.
12. Contractor's signature certifying that the request has been researched in the drawings and
specifications, and is not answered by the Contract Documents.
13. Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data,
Shop Drawings, coordination drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe
items needing interpretation.
a. Include dimensions, thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected
materials, assemblies, and attachments on attached sketches.
D. RFI Forms: Software-generated form with substantially the same content as indicated above,
acceptable to Architect.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
01 31 00 - 3
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
E. Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and respond.
Allow seven working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received by Architect
after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day.
1. The following RFIs will be returned without action:
a. Requests for approval of submittals.
b. Requests for approval of substitutions.
c. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract Documents.
d. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum.
e. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals.
f. Incomplete RFIs or inaccurately prepared RFIs.
g. RFIs deemed by the Architect to be frivolous.
2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case Architect's time for response will date from time of receipt of additional information.
3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to Division 01 Section "Contract Modification Procedures."
a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or the
Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within 10 days of receipt of the RFI response.
F. On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within seven days if Contractor disagrees with response.
G. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number.
Submit log weekly. Software log with not less than the following:
1. Project name.
2. Name and address of Contractor.
3. Name and address of Architect.
4. RFI number including RFIs that were dropped and not submitted.
5. RFI description.
6. Date the RFI was submitted.
7. Date Architect's response was received.
8. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and
Proposal Request, as appropriate.
1.7
PROJECT MEETINGS
A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site, unless otherwise
indicated.
1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is
required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled
meeting dates and times.
2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees.
3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record significant discussions and
agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including
Owner and Architect, within three days of the meeting.
B. Preconstruction Conference: Schedule and conduct a preconstruction conference before
starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 15 days
after execution of the Agreement.
1. Conduct the conference to review responsibilities and personnel assignments.
2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. Participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.
3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following:
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
01 31 00 - 4
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
a. Tentative construction schedule.
b. Phasing.
c. Critical work sequencing and long-lead items.
d. Designation of key personnel and their duties.
e. Lines of communications.
f. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders.
g. Procedures for RFIs.
h. Procedures for testing and inspecting.
i. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment.
j. Distribution of the Contract Documents.
k. Submittal procedures.
l. Preparation of record documents.
m. Use of the premises.
n. Work restrictions.
o. Working hours.
p. Owner's occupancy requirements.
q. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls.
r. Procedures for moisture and mold control.
s. Procedures for disruptions and shutdowns.
t. Construction waste management and recycling.
u. Parking availability.
v. Office, work, and storage areas.
w. Equipment deliveries and priorities.
x. First aid.
y. Security.
z. Progress cleaning.
4. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting
minutes.
C. Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each
construction activity that requires coordination with other construction.
1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or
affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect of
scheduled meeting dates.
2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following:
a. Contract Documents.
b. Options.
c. Related RFIs.
d. Related Change Orders.
e. Purchases.
f. Deliveries.
g. Submittals.
h. Review of mockups.
i. Possible conflicts.
j. Compatibility problems.
k. Time schedules.
l. Weather limitations.
m. Manufacturer's written recommendations.
n. Warranty requirements.
o. Compatibility of materials.
p. Acceptability of substrates.
q. Temporary facilities and controls.
r. Space and access limitations.
s. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
01 31 00 - 5
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
t. Testing and inspecting requirements.
u. Installation procedures.
v. Coordination with other work.
w. Required performance results.
x. Protection of adjacent work.
y. Protection of construction and personnel.
3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including
required corrective measures and actions.
4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to other parties
requiring information.
5. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work
and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date.
D. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at biweekly intervals.
1. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests.
2. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.
3. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review
other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as
appropriate to status of Project.
a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in
relation to Contractor's construction schedule. Determine how construction behind
schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent
activities will be completed within the Contract Time.
(1) Review schedule for next period.
b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following:
(1) Interface requirements.
(2) Sequence of operations.
(3) Status of submittals.
(4) Deliveries.
(5) Off-site fabrication.
(6) Access.
(7) Site utilization.
(8) Temporary facilities and controls.
(9) Progress cleaning.
(10) Quality and work standards.
(11) Status of correction of deficient items.
(12) Field observations.
(13) Status of RFIs.
(14) Status of proposal requests.
(15) Pending changes.
(16) Status of Change Orders.
(17) Pending claims and disputes.
(18) Documentation of information for payment requests.
4. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting the meeting will record and distribute the
meeting minutes to each party present and to parties requiring information.
a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's construction schedule after each progress
meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
01 31 00 - 6
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
1.8
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
HOT WORK PERMITS
A. Contractors who performs hot work operations are obligated to assure that the proposed
work area is safe, the work itself is performed in a safe manner, and that the surrounding environment and people are protected from the work. These requirements shall be accomplished by means of hot work permitting process
B. Designate one employee to act as the Authorized Hot Work Permit Signer.
C. Advise the University representative when the hot work operations will occur before the work
begins.
D. Post the permit in the immediate work area.
E. The Authorized Signer shall present evidence of training on the hazards of hot work operation.
F. Suspend hot work In the event of a sprinkler system outage.
G. Comply with Factory Mutual Global System procedures. Ref. form 2630 (5-92)
H. Inform Department of Occupational Health and Safety for procedures, forms and training.
PART 2
PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3
EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION 01 31 00
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
01 31 00 - 7
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
SECTION 01 32 00 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of
construction during performance of the Work, including the following:
1. Startup construction schedule.
2. Contractor's construction schedule.
3. Construction schedule updating reports.
4. Daily construction reports.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting schedules and reports.
2. Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements" for submitting a schedule of tests and inspections.
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A. Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring, and controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule
consume time and resources.
1. Critical Activity: An activity on the critical path that must start and finish on the planned
early start and finish times.
2. Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network.
3. Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network.
B. Cost Loading: The allocation of the schedule of values for the completion of an activity as
scheduled. The sum of costs for all activities must equal the total Contract Sum unless otherwise approved by Architect.
C. CPM: Critical path method, which is a method of planning and scheduling a construction project where activities are arranged based on activity relationships. Network calculations determine when activities can be performed and the critical path of Project.
D. Critical Path: The longest connected chain of interdependent activities through the network
schedule that establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no float.
E. Event: The starting or ending point of an activity.
F. Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity.
1. Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either Owner or Contractor, but is a
jointly owned, expiring Project resource available to both parties as needed to meet
schedule milestones and Contract completion date.
2. Free float is the amount of time an activity can be delayed without adversely affecting the
early start of the successor activity.
3. Total float is the measure of leeway in starting or completing an activity without adversely
affecting the planned Project completion date.
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
01 32 00 - 1
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
G. Resource Loading: The allocation of manpower and equipment necessary for the completion
of an activity as scheduled.
1.4
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Format for Submittals: Submit required submittals in the following format:
1. Working electronic copy of schedule file, where indicated.
2. PDF electronic file.
B. Startup construction schedule.
C. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Initial schedule, of size required to display entire schedule for entire construction period.
1. Submit a working electronic copy of schedule, using software indicated, and labeled to
comply with requirements for submittals. Include type of schedule (initial or updated) and
date on label.
D. Construction Schedule Updating Reports: Submit with Applications for Payment.
E. Daily Construction Reports: Submit at weekly intervals.
F. Special Reports: Submit at time of unusual event.
1.5
COORDINATION
A. Coordinate preparation and processing of schedules and reports with performance of construction activities and with scheduling and reporting of separate contractors.
B. Coordinate Contractor's construction schedule with the schedule of values, list of subcontracts, submittal schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules
and reports.
1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from entities involved.
2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule
them in proper sequence.
PART 2
2.1
PRODUCTS
CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for commencement of the Work to date
of final completion.
1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows
an early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order.
B. Activities: Treat each separate area as a separate numbered activity for each main element
of the Work. Comply with the following:
1. Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 20 days, unless specifically allowed by Architect.
2. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for the following long lead
items and major items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities in
schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals, approvals, purchasing, fabrication, and delivery.
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
01 32 00 - 2
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
3. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Division 01
Section "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in Contractor's construction schedule with submittal schedule.
4. Startup and Testing Time: Include no fewer than 10 days for startup and testing.
5. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for Substantial Completion, and allow time for Architect's administrative procedures necessary for
certification of Substantial Completion.
6. Punch List and Final Completion: Include not more than 20 days for completion of punch
list items and final completion.
C. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents
and as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected.
1. Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule:
a. Coordination with existing and on-going base building construction.
b. Use of premises restrictions.
c. Seasonal variations.
d. Environmental control.
D. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including,
but not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and final completion.
E. Cost Correlation: Superimpose a cost correlation timeline, indicating planned and actual
costs. On the line, show planned and actual dollar volume of the Work performed as of
planned and actual dates used for preparation of payment requests.
1. See Division 01 Section "Payment Procedures" for cost reporting and payment procedures.
F. Upcoming Work Summary: Prepare summary report indicating activities scheduled to occur
or commence prior to submittal of next schedule update. Summarize the following issues:
1. Unresolved issues.
2. Unanswered Requests for Information.
3. Rejected or unreturned submittals.
4. Notations on returned submittals.
5. Pending modifications affecting the Work and Contract Time.
G. Recovery Schedule: When periodic update indicates the Work is 14 or more calendar days
behind the current approved schedule, submit a separate recovery schedule indicating
means by which Contractor intends to regain compliance with the schedule. Indicate
changes to working hours, working days, crew sizes, and equipment required to achieve
compliance, and date by which recovery will be accomplished.
H. Computer Scheduling Software: Prepare schedules using current version of a program that
has been developed specifically to manage construction schedules.
2.2
CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (GANTT CHART)
A. Gantt-Chart Schedule: Submit a comprehensive, fully developed, horizontal, Gantt-charttype, Contractor's construction schedule within 20 days of date established for the Notice of
Award. Base schedule on the startup construction schedule and additional information received since the start of Project.
B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday
of each week with a continuous vertical line.
1. For construction activities that require three months or longer to complete, indicate an estimated completion percentage in 10 percent increments within time bar.
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
01 32 00 - 3
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
2.3
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
REPORTS
A. Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following information concerning events at Project site:
1. List of subcontractors at Project site.
2. List of separate contractors at Project site.
3. Approximate count of personnel at Project site.
4. Equipment at Project site.
5. Material deliveries.
6. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions, including presence of rain or
snow.
7. Accidents.
8. Meetings and significant decisions.
9. Unusual events (see special reports).
10. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses.
11. Meter readings and similar recordings.
12. Emergency procedures.
13. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction.
14. Change Orders received and implemented.
15. Construction Change Directives received and implemented.
16. Services connected and disconnected.
17. Equipment or system tests and startups.
18. Partial completions and occupancies.
19. Substantial Completions authorized.
2.4
SPECIAL REPORTS
A. General: Submit special reports directly to Owner within one day(s) of an occurrence. Distribute copies of report to parties affected by the occurrence.
B. Reporting Unusual Events: When an event of an unusual and significant nature occurs at
Project site, whether or not related directly to the Work, prepare and submit a special report.
List chain of events, persons participating, response by Contractor's personnel, evaluation of
results or effects, and similar pertinent information. Advise Owner in advance when these
events are known or predictable.
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
A. Scheduling Consultant: Engage a consultant to provide planning, evaluation, and reporting
using CPM scheduling.
1. In-House Option: Owner may waive the requirement to retain a consultant if Contractor
employs skilled personnel with experience in CPM scheduling and reporting techniques.
Submit qualifications.
2. Meetings: Scheduling consultant shall attend all meetings related to Project progress, alleged delays, and time impact.
B. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule to reflect actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule one week before each regularly scheduled progress meeting.
1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have
been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each
such meeting.
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
01 32 00 - 4
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not
limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations.
3. As the Work progresses, indicate final completion percentage for each activity.
C. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect Owner, separate contractors, testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a needto-know schedule responsibility.
1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices.
2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in
the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities.
END OF SECTION 01 32 00
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
01 32 00 - 5
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
SECTION 01 33 00 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. Section includes requirements for the submittal schedule and administrative and procedural
requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals.
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require Architect's responsive action. Action submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as "action submittals."
B. Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not
require Architect's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements. Informational submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification
Sections as "informational submittals."
C. File Transfer Protocol (FTP): Communications protocol that enables transfer of files to and
from another computer over a network and that serves as the basis for standard Internet protocols. An FTP site is a portion of a network located outside of network firewalls within which
internal and external users are able to access files.
D. Portable Document Format (PDF): An open standard file format licensed by Adobe Systems
used for representing documents in a device-independent and display resolution-independent
fixed-layout document format.
E. Portable Document Format (PDF) Electronic Files - Preferred Format: PDF files produced by
using either Adobe Acrobat or another similar PDF creation software, that create searchable
electronic documents.
1. Documents produced by a scanning process that create a non-searchable image file may
be submitted, at Contractor’s risk. Documents produced in this manner that are unclear,
incomplete, or illegible, in the opinion of the Architect, will be rejected.
1.4
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Submittal Schedule: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by
dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include additional time required
for making corrections or revisions to submittals noted by Architect and additional time for
handling and reviewing submittals required by those corrections.
1. Coordinate submittal schedule with list of subcontracts, the schedule of values, and Contractor's construction schedule.
2. Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's construction schedule.
a. Submit revised submittal schedule to reflect changes in current status and timing for
submittals.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
01 33 00 - 1
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
3. Format: Arrange the following information in a tabular format:
a. Scheduled date for first submittal.
b. Specification Section number and title.
c. Submittal category: Action; informational.
d. Name of subcontractor.
e. Description of the Work covered.
f. Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval.
g. Scheduled date of fabrication.
1.5
SUBMITTAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Architect's Digital Data Files: Electronic digital data files of the Contract Drawings will be provided by Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals.
1. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data drawing files of the Contract Drawings for use in preparing Shop Drawings.
a. Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital data drawing files as they relate to the Contract Drawings.
b. Digital Drawing Software Program: The Contract Drawings are available in Revit
2011.
c. Contractor shall execute a data licensing agreement in the form of Agreement form
acceptable to Owner and Architect.
d. The following digital data files will by furnished for each appropriate discipline:
(1) Floor plans.
(2) Reflected ceiling plans.
B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities.
1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals,
and related activities that require sequential activity.
2. Submit all submittal items required for each Specification Section concurrently unless
partial submittals for portions of the Work are indicated on approved submittal schedule.
3. Submit action submittals and informational submittals required by the same Specification
Section as separate packages under separate transmittals.
4. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination.
a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination
with other submittals until related submittals are received.
C. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows.
Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of
the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals.
1. Submittals received by the Architect after 12:00 Noon on Friday will be deemed received
on the following Monday.
2. Submittals received by the Architect after 12:00 Noon on a day prior to a national holiday
will be deemed received on the following work day.
3. Initial Review: Allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if
coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor
when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.
4. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner
as initial submittal.
5. Resubmittal Review: Allow 15 days for review of each resubmittal.
6. Concurrent Consultant Review: Where the Contract Documents indicate that submittals
may be transmitted simultaneously to Architect and to Architect's consultants, allow 15
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
01 33 00 - 2
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
days for review of each submittal. Submittal mustl be returned to Architect before being
returned to Contractor.
D. Electronic Submittals: Identify and incorporate information in each electronic submittal file as
follows:
1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file incorporating submittal
requirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form with links enabling
navigation to each item.
2. Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.
a. File name shall use project identifier and Specification Section number followed by a
decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., LNHS-061000.01). Resubmittals
shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g., LNHS061000.01.A).
3. Provide means for insertion to permanently record Contractor's review and approval
markings and action taken by Architect.
4. Transmittal Form for Electronic Submittals: Use software-generated form from electronic
project management software acceptable to Owner, containing the following information:
a. Project name.
b. Date.
c. Name and address of Architect.
d. Name of Contractor.
e. Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal.
f. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier.
g. Category and type of submittal.
h. Submittal purpose and description.
i. Specification Section number and title.
j. Specification paragraph number or drawing designation and generic name for each
of multiple items.
k. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
l. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate.
m. Related physical samples submitted directly.
n. Indication of full or partial submittal.
o. Transmittal number, numbered consecutively.
p. Submittal and transmittal distribution record.
q. Other necessary identification.
r. Remarks.
5. Metadata: Include the following information as keywords in the electronic submittal file
metadata:
a. Project name.
b. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.
c. Manufacturer name.
d. Product name.
E. Options: Identify options requiring selection by Architect.
F. Deviations and Additional Information: On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, record relevant information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by Architect on previous submittals, and deviations from requirements in the Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations. Include same identification information as related submittal.
G. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal.
1. Note date and content of previous submittal.
2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of revision.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
01 33 00 - 3
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked with approval notation from Architect's action
stamp.
H. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers,
fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance
of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.
I.
PART 2
2.1
Use for Construction: Retain complete copies of submittals on Project site. Use only final action submittals that are marked with approval notation from Architect's action stamp.
PRODUCTS
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A. General Submittal Procedure Requirements: Prepare and submit submittals required by individual Specification Sections. Types of submittals are indicated in individual Specification
Sections.
1. Post electronic submittals as PDF electronic files directly to Architect's internet-based
Project Information Management Project Center specifically established for Project.
a. Architect will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as an electronic Project record document file.
2. Submit electronic submittals via email as PDF electronic files.
a. Architect will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as an electronic Project record document file.
3. Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Provide a statement that includes signature of
entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be
signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity.
a. Provide a digital signature with digital certificate on electronically submitted certificates and certifications where indicated.
B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and
type of product or equipment.
1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard published data
are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.
2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable.
3. Include the following information, as applicable:
a. Manufacturer's catalog cuts.
b. Manufacturer's product specifications.
c. Standard color charts.
d. Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards.
e. Testing by recognized testing agency.
f. Application of testing agency labels and seals.
g. Notation of coordination requirements.
h. Availability and delivery time information.
4. For equipment, include the following in addition to the above, as applicable:
a. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring.
b. Printed performance curves.
c. Operational range diagrams.
d. Clearances required to other construction, if not indicated on accompanying Shop
Drawings.
5. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples.
6. Submit Product Data in the following format:
a. PDF electronic file.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
01 33 00 - 4
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not
base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data, unless submittal based on Architect's digital data drawing files is otherwise permitted.
1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following information, as applicable:
a. Identification of products.
b. Schedules.
c. Compliance with specified standards.
d. Notation of coordination requirements.
e. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.
f. Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated.
g. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified.
2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop
Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches, but no larger than 30 by 42 inches.
3. Submit Shop Drawings in the following format:
a. PDF electronic file.
D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these
characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between
submittal and actual component as delivered and installed.
1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in one submittal package.
2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following:
a. Generic description of Sample.
b. Product name and name of manufacturer.
c. Sample source.
d. Number and title of applicable Specification Section.
e. Specification paragraph number and generic name of each item.
3. For projects where electronic submittals are required, provide corresponding electronic
submittal of Sample transmittal, digital image file illustrating Sample characteristics, and
identification information for record.
4. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for qualitycontrol comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be
used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set.
a. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's property, are the property of Contractor.
5. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or
sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available.
a. Number of Samples: Submit one full set(s) of available choices where color, pattern,
texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's
product line. Architect will return submittal with options selected.
6. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared
from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and
physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of
color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers
of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection.
a. Number of Samples: Submit three sets of Samples. Architect will retain one Sample
sets; remainder will be returned.
(1) Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication
techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to be
demonstrated.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
01 33 00 - 5
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
(2)
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of paired
units that show approximate limits of variations.
E. Product Schedule: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include
the following information in tabular form:
1. Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product indicated in the Contract Documents or assigned by Contractor if none is indicated.
2. Manufacturer and product name, and model number if applicable.
3. Number and name of room or space.
4. Location within room or space.
5. Submit product schedule in the following format:
a. PDF electronic file.
F. Coordination Drawing Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 31 00
"Project Management and Coordination."
G. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 32 00
"Construction Progress Documentation."
H. Test and Inspection Reports and Schedule of Tests and Inspections Submittals: Comply with
requirements specified in Section 01 40 00 "Quality Requirements."
I.
Closeout Submittals and Maintenance Material Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures."
J.
Maintenance Data: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 78 23 "Operation and
Maintenance Data."
K. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience
of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, contact information of architects and owners, and other information specified.
L. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel
comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure
Specification and Procedure Qualification Record on AWS forms. Include names of firms and
personnel certified.
M. Installer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that
Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project.
N. Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying
that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence
of manufacturing experience where required.
O. Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that
product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.
P. Material Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that
material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
01 33 00 - 6
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
Q. Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.
R. Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating that current product produced by
manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on
comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency.
S. Research Reports: Submit written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project.
Include the following information:
1. Name of evaluation organization.
2. Date of evaluation.
3. Time period when report is in effect.
4. Product and manufacturers' names.
5. Description of product.
6. Test procedures and results.
7. Limitations of use.
T. Compatibility Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing
agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed
before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate
preparation needed for adhesion.
U. Field Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for
compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.
V. Design Data: Prepare and submit written and graphic information, including, but not limited
to, performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations.
Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of
loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any,
used for calculations. Include page numbers.
2.2
MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEETS (MSDS)
A. Submit information directly to Owner; do not submit to Architect.
B. Architect will not review submittals that include MSDS and will return entire submittal for resubmission.
2.3
DELEGATED-DESIGN SERVICES
A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a
design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated.
1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a
written request for additional information to Architect.
B. Delegated-Design Services Certification: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and
other required submittals, submit digitally signed PDF electronic file and three paper copies of
certificate, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and
system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
01 33 00 - 7
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the
Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing
these services.
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW
A. Action and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination with
other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect.
B. Project Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals:
tion 01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures."
See requirements in Sec-
C. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project
name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.
3.2
ARCHITECT'S ACTION
A. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or
revisions required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and
will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action.
B. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party.
C. Partial submittals prepared for a portion of the Work will be reviewed when use of partial
submittals has received prior approval from Architect.
D. Incomplete submittals are unacceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned for resubmittal without review.
E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may be returned by the Architect without
action.
END OF SECTION 01 33 00
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
01 33 00 - 8
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
SECTION 01 40 00 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control.
B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified
or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with
the Contract Document requirements.
1. Specific quality-assurance and -control requirements for individual construction activities
are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also cover production of standard products.
2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other qualityassurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document
requirements.
3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services required
by Architect, Owner, Commissioning Authority, or authorities having jurisdiction are not
limited by provisions of this Section.
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during
execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements.
B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and
completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect.
C. Mockups: Full-size physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are constructed to verify selections made under Sample submittals; to demonstrate aesthetic effects
and, where indicated, qualities of materials and execution; to review coordination, testing, or
operation; to show interface between dissimilar materials; and to demonstrate compliance
with specified installation tolerances. Mockups are not Samples. Unless otherwise indicated,
approved mockups establish the standard by which the Work will be judged.
1. Integrated Exterior Mockups: Mockups of the exterior envelope erected separately from
the building but on Project site, consisting of multiple products, assemblies, and subassemblies.
2. Room Mockups: Mockups of typical interior spaces complete with wall, floor, and ceiling
finishes, doors, windows, millwork, casework, specialties, furnishings and equipment, and
lighting.
D. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with specified requirements.
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
01 40 00 - 1
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
E. Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, e.g.,
plant, mill, factory, or shop.
F. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation of the Work and for completed Work.
G. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing
laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.
H. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation,
including installation, erection, application, and similar operations.
1. Use of trade-specific terminology in referring to a trade or entity does not require that certain construction activities be performed by accredited or unionized individuals, or that
requirements specified apply exclusively to specific trade(s).
I.
1.4
Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, "experienced" means having successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in nature, size, and extent to this
Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS
A. Referenced Standards: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels,
comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer conflicting requirements that are different,
but apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding.
B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be
the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To
comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding.
1.5
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: For integrated exterior mockups, provide plans, sections, and elevations, indicating materials and size of mockup construction.
1. Indicate manufacturer and model number of individual components.
2. Provide axonometric drawings for conditions difficult to illustrate in two dimensions.
1.6
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Contractor's Quality-Control Plan: For quality-assurance and quality-control activities and responsibilities.
B. Contractor's Statement of Responsibility: When required by authorities having jurisdiction,
submit copy of written statement of responsibility sent to authorities having jurisdiction before
starting work on the following systems:
1. Main wind-force-resisting system or a wind-resisting component listed in the wind-forceresisting system quality-assurance plan prepared by Architect.
C. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following:
1. Specification Section number and title.
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
01 40 00 - 2
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
1.7
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections.
Description of test and inspection.
Identification of applicable standards.
Identification of test and inspection methods.
Number of tests and inspections required.
Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections.
Requirements for obtaining samples.
Unique characteristics of each quality-control service.
CONTRACTOR'S QUALITY-CONTROL PLAN
A. Quality-Control Plan, General: Submit quality-control plan within 10 days of Notice of Award,
and not less than five days prior to preconstruction conference. Submit in format acceptable
to Architect. Identify personnel, procedures, controls, instructions, tests, records, and forms
to be used to carry out Contractor's quality-assurance and quality-control responsibilities.
Coordinate with Contractor's construction schedule.
B. Quality-Control Personnel Qualifications: Engage qualified full-time personnel trained and
experienced in managing and executing quality-assurance and quality-control procedures
similar in nature and extent to those required for Project.
1. Project quality-control manager may also serve as Project superintendent.
C. Submittal Procedure: Describe procedures for ensuring compliance with requirements
through review and management of submittal process. Indicate qualifications of personnel
responsible for submittal review.
D. Testing and Inspection: In quality-control plan, include a comprehensive schedule of Work
requiring testing or inspection, including the following:
1. Contractor-performed tests and inspections including subcontractor-performed tests and
inspections. Include required tests and inspections and Contractor-elected tests and inspections.
2. Special inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction and indicated on the
"Statement of Special Inspections."
3. Owner-performed tests and inspections indicated in the Contract Documents, including
tests and inspections indicated to be performed by the Commissioning Authority.
E. Continuous Inspection of Workmanship: Describe process for continuous inspection during
construction to identify and correct deficiencies in workmanship in addition to testing and inspection specified. Indicate types of corrective actions to be required to bring work into compliance with standards of workmanship established by Contract requirements and approved
mockups.
F. Monitoring and Documentation: Maintain testing and inspection reports including log of approved and rejected results. Include work Architect has indicated as nonconforming or defective. Indicate corrective actions taken to bring nonconforming work into compliance with requirements. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
1.8
REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS
A. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified in other
Sections. Include the following:
1. Date of issue.
2. Project title and number.
3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency.
4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections.
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
01 40 00 - 3
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Names of individuals making tests and inspections.
Description of the Work and test and inspection method.
Identification of product and Specification Section.
Complete test or inspection data.
Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results.
Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and
inspecting.
11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with
the Contract Document requirements.
12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector.
13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting.
B. Manufacturer's Technical Representative's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting manufacturer's technical representative's tests and inspections specified in other
Sections. Include the following:
1. Name, address, and telephone number of technical representative making report.
2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product.
3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements.
4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken.
5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance
complies with requirements.
6. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty.
7. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.
C. Factory-Authorized Service Representative's Reports: Prepare written information documenting manufacturer's factory-authorized service representative's tests and inspections specified
in other Sections. Include the following:
1. Name, address, and telephone number of factory-authorized service representative making report.
2. Statement that equipment complies with requirements.
3. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance
complies with requirements.
4. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty.
5. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.
D. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses,
certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee
payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for
compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.
1.9
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification levels
required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance,
as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.
C. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated
for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient
production capacity to produce required units.
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
01 40 00 - 4
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
D. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling
work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has
resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering
services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar in material, design, and extent
to those indicated for this Project.
F. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according
to ASTM E 329; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and, where
required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities.
1. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7.
2. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory
Accreditation Program.
G. Manufacturer's Technical Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of
manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to observe and inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.
H. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of
manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.
I.
1.10
Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each
form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work:
1. Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect.
2. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed.
3. Employ supervisory personnel who will oversee mockup construction. Employ workers
that will be employed during the construction at Project.
4. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.
5. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or construction.
a. Allow seven days for initial review and each re-review of each mockup.
6. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work.
7. Demolish and remove mockups when directed unless otherwise indicated.
QUALITY CONTROL
A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility, Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services.
1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing
agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged
to perform.
2. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work
that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor, and the
Contract Sum will be adjusted by Change Order.
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
01 40 00 - 5
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
B. Contractor Responsibilities: Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor's responsibility. Perform additional quality-control activities required to verify that the
Work complies with requirements, whether specified or not.
1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services specified and those required
by authorities having jurisdiction. Perform quality-control services required of Contractor
by authorities having jurisdiction, whether specified or not.
2. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing
agency to perform these quality-control services.
a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in writing by Owner.
3. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing or inspecting will be performed.
4. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service.
5. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are Contractor's responsibility.
6. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction,
when they so direct.
C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures."
D. Manufacturer's Technical Services: Where indicated, engage a manufacturer's technical representative to observe and inspect the Work. Manufacturer's technical representative's services include participation in preinstallation conferences, examination of substrates and conditions, verification of materials, observation of Installer activities, inspection of completed
portions of the Work, and submittal of written reports.
E. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for
construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents.
F. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect, Commissioning Authority and
Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests
and inspections.
1. Notify Architect, Commissioning Authority, and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services.
2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests
are conducted.
3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and
inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements.
4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar qualitycontrol service through Contractor.
5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve or accept any portion of the Work.
6. Do not perform any duties of Contractor.
G. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and
similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide
the following:
1. Access to the Work.
2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections.
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
01 40 00 - 6
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples.
4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples.
5. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing
agency.
6. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project
site.
H. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance
and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting.
1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.
I.
1.11
Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and similar
quality-control services required by the Contract Documents as a component of Contractor's
quality-control plan. Coordinate and submit concurrently with Contractor's construction
schedule. Update as the Work progresses.
1. Distribution: Distribute schedule to Owner, Architect, Commissioning Authority, testing
agencies, and each party involved in performance of portions of the Work where tests
and inspections are required.
SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS
A. Special Tests and Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency and special inspector to conduct special tests and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction as
the responsibility of Owner.
PART 2
PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.1
TEST AND INSPECTION LOG
A. Test and Inspection Log: Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following:
1. Date test or inspection was conducted.
2. Description of the Work tested or inspected.
3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect.
4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection.
B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and revisions as they occur. Provide access to
test and inspection log for Architect's, Commissioning Authority's,reference during normal
working hours.
3.2
REPAIR AND PROTECTION
A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair
damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.
1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Specification Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore patched areas and
extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for cutting and patching in Section 017300 "Execution."
B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
01 40 00 - 7
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality-control services.
END OF SECTION 01 40 00
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
01 40 00 - 8
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
SECTION 01 50 00 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities.
1.3
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Site Plan: Show temporary facilities, utility hookups, staging areas, and parking areas for
construction personnel.
B. Moisture-Protection Plan: Describe procedures and controls for protecting materials and
construction from water absorption and damage, including delivery, handling, and storage
provisions for materials subject to water absorption or water damage, discarding waterdamaged materials, protocols for mitigating water intrusion into completed Work, and replacing water damaged Work.
1. Indicate sequencing of work that requires water, such as sprayed fire-resistive materials,
plastering, and terrazzo grinding, and describe plans for dealing with water from these
operations. Show procedures for verifying that wet construction has dried sufficiently to
permit installation of finish materials.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70.
1.5
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Engage installer of each permanent service to assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service
during its use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously
assigned responsibilities.
PART 2
2.1
PRODUCTS
MATERIALS
A. Portable Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch, 0.148-inch- thick, galvanized steel, chain-link
fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet high with galvanized steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch- OD
line posts and 2-7/8-inch- OD corner and pull posts, with 1-5/8-inch- OD top and bottom rails.
Provide galvanized steel bases for supporting posts.
B. Polyethylene Sheet: Reinforced, fire-resistive sheet, 10 mils minimum thickness, with flamespread rating of 15 or less per ASTM E 84.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
01 50 00 - 1
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
2.2
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
TEMPORARY FACILITIES
A. Field Offices, General: Prefabricated or mobile units with serviceable finishes, temperature
controls, and foundations adequate for normal loading.
B. Common-Use Field Office: Of sufficient size to accommodate needs of Owner, Architect, and
construction personnel office activities and to accommodate project meetings specified in
other Division 01 Sections. Keep office clean and orderly. Furnish and equip offices as follows:
1. Furniture required for Project-site documents including file cabinets, plan tables, plan
racks, and bookcases.
2. Conference room of sufficient size to accommodate meetings of 12 individuals. Provide
electrical power service and 120-V ac duplex receptacles, with not less than 1 receptacle
on each wall. Furnish room with conference table, chairs, and 4-foot- square tack and
marker boards.
3. Drinking water and private toilet.
4. Coffee machine and supplies.
5. Heating and cooling equipment necessary to maintain a uniform indoor temperature of 68
to 72 deg F.
6. Lighting fixtures capable of maintaining average illumination of 20 fc at desk height.
C. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate materials and equipment for construction operations.
1. Store combustible materials apart from building.
2.3
EQUIPMENT
A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by locations and classes of fire exposures.
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference
with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the
Work.
1. Locate facilities to limit site disturbance.
B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities
are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities.
3.2
TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION
A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service.
1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services.
B. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of
construction personnel. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for type,
number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities.
C. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination
for construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
01 50 00 - 2
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements
without operating entire system.
2. Install lighting for Project identification sign.
D. Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service in common-use facilities for use by
all construction personnel. Install three telephone line(s) for each field office.
1. Provide additional telephone lines for the following:
a. Provide a dedicated telephone line for each facsimile machine in each field office.
2. At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers.
a. Police and fire departments.
b. Ambulance service.
c. Contractor's home office.
d. Architect's office.
e. Engineers' offices.
f. Owner's office.
g. Principal subcontractors' field and home offices.
3. Provide superintendent with cellular telephone or portable two-way radio for use when
away from field office.
3.3
SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with the following:
1. Provide construction for temporary offices, shops, and sheds located within construction
area or within 30 feet of building lines that is noncombustible according to ASTM E 136.
Comply with NFPA 241.
2. Maintain support facilities until Architect schedules Substantial Completion inspection.
Remove before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner.
B. Temporary Use of Permanent Roads and Paved Areas: Locate temporary roads and paved
areas in same location as permanent roads and paved areas. Construct and maintain temporary roads and paved areas adequate for construction operations. Extend temporary roads
and paved areas, within construction limits indicated, as necessary for construction operations.
1. Coordinate elevations of temporary roads and paved areas with permanent roads and
paved areas.
2. Prepare subgrade and install subbase and base for temporary roads and paved areas
according to Division 31 Section "Earth Moving."
3. Recondition base after temporary use, including removing contaminated material, regrading, proofrolling, compacting, and testing.
4. Delay installation of final course of permanent hot-mix asphalt pavement until immediately before Substantial Completion. Repair hot-mix asphalt base-course pavement before installation of final course according to Division 32 Section "Asphalt Paving."
C. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities.
2. Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants.
D. Parking: Park in areas designated on Site Plan.
E. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
Maintain Project site, excavations, and construction free of water.
1. Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or adjoining
properties nor endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities.
2. Remove snow and ice as required to minimize accumulations.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
01 50 00 - 3
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
F. Waste Disposal Facilities: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Construction Waste Management and Disposal."
G. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle
waste from construction operations. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Comply with Division 01 Section "Execution" for progress cleaning requirements.
H. Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel.
1. Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and
equipment" and not temporary facilities.
I.
3.4
Temporary Use of Permanent Stairs: Use of new stairs for construction traffic will be permitted, provided stairs are protected and finishes restored to new condition at time of Substantial
Completion.
SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction as required to comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air,
waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects.
B. Tree and Plant Protection: Install temporary fencing located as indicated or outside the drip
line of trees to protect vegetation from damage from construction operations. Protect tree
root systems from damage, flooding, and erosion.
C. Staging Area Fence: Before construction operations, furnish and install site enclosure fence
in a manner that will prevent people and animals from easily entering site except by entrance
gates.
1. Extent of Fence: As indicated on Drawings.
D. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types
needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with
NFPA 241.
1. Prohibit smoking in construction areas.
2. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar
sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
3. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and -protection program for personnel
at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be
followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information.
4. Provide temporary standpipes and hoses for fire protection. Hang hoses with a warning
sign stating that hoses are for fire-protection purposes only and are not to be removed.
Match hose size with outlet size and equip with suitable nozzles.
3.5
MOISTURE AND MOLD CONTROL
A. Contractor's Moisture-Protection Plan: Avoid trapping water in finished work. Document visible signs of mold that may appear during construction.
B. Exposed Construction Phase: Before installation of weather barriers, when materials are
subject to wetting and exposure and to airborne mold spores, protect as follows:
1. Protect porous materials from water damage.
2. Protect stored and installed material from flowing or standing water.
3. Keep porous and organic materials from coming into prolonged contact with concrete.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
01 50 00 - 4
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
C. Controlled Construction Phase of Construction: After completing and sealing of the building
enclosure but prior to the full operation of permanent HVAC systems, maintain as follows:
1. Control moisture and humidity inside building by maintaining effective dry-in conditions.
2. Use permanent HVAC system to control humidity.
3. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, relative humidity, and
exposure to water limits.
a. Hygroscopic materials that may support mold growth, including wood and gypsumbased products, that become wet during the course of construction and remain wet
for 48hours are considered defective.
b. Measure moisture content of materials that have been exposed to moisture during
construction operations or after installation. Record daily readings over a forty-eight
hour period. Identify materials containing moisture levels higher than allowed. Report findings in writing to Architect.
c. Remove materials that can not be completely restored to their manufactured moisture
level within 48 hours.
3.6
OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL
A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and
abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses.
B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal.
1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results
and to avoid possibility of damage.
C. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has
ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than
Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may
have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work,
clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.
1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor.
2. At Substantial Completion, repair, renovate, and clean permanent facilities used during
construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Division 01
Section "Closeout Procedures."
END OF SECTION 01 50 00
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
01 50 00 - 5
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
SECTION 01 60 00 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use
in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on
products; special warranties; and comparable products.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 01 25 00 "Substitution Procedures" for requests for substitutions.
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A. Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or
taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material,"
"equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent.
1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or
model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product
literature, that is current as of date of the Contract Documents.
2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or
facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products.
3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal
process to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service
performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product.
B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: A specification in which a specific manufacturer's
product is named and accompanied by the words "basis-of-design product," including make
or model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type,
function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other
characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of additional manufacturers
named in the specification.
1.4
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Comparable Product Requests: Submit request for consideration of each comparable product. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.
1. Include data to indicate compliance with the requirements specified in "Comparable
Products" Article.
2. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable product request. Architect will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable product request within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later.
a. Form of Approval: As specified in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures."
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
01 60 00 - 1
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a comparable
product request within time allocated.
B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal:
Comply with requirements in Section 01 33 00 "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, select product compatible with products previously selected, even if
previously selected products were also options.
1. Each contractor is responsible for providing products and construction methods compatible with products and construction methods of other contractors.
2. If a dispute arises between contractors over concurrently selectable but incompatible
products, Architect will determine which products shall be used.
1.6
PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft and vandalism. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Delivery and Handling:
1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces.
2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that
are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other
losses.
3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original
sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for
handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing.
4. Inspect products on delivery to determine compliance with the Contract Documents and
to determine that products are undamaged and properly protected.
C. Storage:
1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units.
2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure.
3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight
enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation.
4. Protect foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of
installation and concealment.
5. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage.
6. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing.
1.7
PRODUCT WARRANTIES
A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other
warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations
on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents.
1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty furnished by individual manufacturer for a
particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner.
2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by the Contract Documents to provide specific rights for Owner.
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
01 60 00 - 2
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution.
1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and
properly executed.
2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a
written document using indicated form properly executed.
3. See other Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for
submitting special warranties.
C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Section 01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures."
PART 2
2.1
PRODUCTS
PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES
A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents,
are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, are new at time of installation.
1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items
needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect.
2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are
specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects.
3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with
requirements of the Contract Documents.
4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make selection.
5. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish salient characteristics of products.
B. Single Product or Manufacturer Listed:
1. Product: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer and product, provide the
named product that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions
for Contractor's convenience will not be considered.
a. This situation is indicated by the phrase: “Subject to compliance with requirements,
provide the following:.”
2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source, provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements.
Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered.
a. This situation is indicated by the phrase: “Subject to compliance with requirements,
provide products by the following:.”
C. Multiple Products Listed:
1. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both manufacturers and
products, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements. Substitutions for Contractor's convenience will be considered unless otherwise indicated. Refer
to Section 01 25 00 “Substitution Procedures” for requirements and Substitution Request
Form.
a. This situation is indicated by the phrase: “Subject to compliance with requirements,
provide one of the following:.”
2. Nonrestricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both available manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed product, that
complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article
for consideration of an unnamed product.
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
01 60 00 - 3
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
a. This situation is indicated by the phrase: “Subject to compliance with requirements,
available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited
to, the following:.”
D. Multiple Manufacturers Listed:
1. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a
product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements. Substitutions
for Contractor's convenience will be considered unless otherwise indicated. Refer to
Section 01 25 00 “Substitution Procedures” for requirements and Substitution Request
Form.
a. This situation is indicated by the phrase: “Subject to compliance with requirements,
provide products by one of the following:.”
2. Nonrestricted List: Where Specifications include a list of available manufacturers, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or a product by an unnamed manufacturer, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed manufacturer's product.
a. This situation is indicated by the phrase: “Subject to compliance with requirements,
available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:.”
E. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a product indicated on Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or indicated
product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and
Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on
the product named. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by one of the other named manufacturers.
1. For requests for products by unnamed manufacturers comply with requirements in Section 01 25 00 "Substitution Procedures" for proposal of product.
F. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require "match Architect's sample", provide a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's
decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches.
1. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other specified requirements, comply with requirements in Section 01 25 00 "Substitution Procedures" for proposal of product.
G. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range" or similar phrase, select a product that complies with
requirements. Architect will select color, gloss, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items.
2.2
COMPARABLE PRODUCTS
A. Conditions for Consideration: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable
product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect may return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these
requirements:
1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated
results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work.
2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the
Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size,
durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated.
3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty.
4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and
names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested.
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
01 60 00 - 4
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
5. Samples, if requested.
PART 3
EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION 01 60 00
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
01 60 00 - 5
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
SECTION 01 73 00 - EXECUTION
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution of
the Work including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Construction layout.
2. Field engineering and surveying.
3. Installation of the Work.
4. Cutting and patching.
5. Progress cleaning.
6. Starting and adjusting.
7. Protection of installed construction.
8. Correction of the Work.
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A. Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of
other work.
B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore construction to original conditions after
installation of other work.
1.4
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For land surveyor.
B. Certificates: Submit certificate signed by land surveyor certifying that location and elevation
of improvements comply with requirements.
C. Cutting and Patching Plan: Submit plan describing procedures at least 10 days prior to the
time cutting and patching will be performed. Include the following information:
1. Extent: Describe reason for and extent of each occurrence of cutting and patching.
2. Changes to In-Place Construction: Describe anticipated results. Include changes to
structural elements and operating components as well as changes in building appearance and other significant visual elements.
3. Products: List products to be used for patching and firms or entities that will perform
patching work.
4. Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed.
5. Utilities and Mechanical and Electrical Systems: List services and systems that cutting
and patching procedures will disturb or affect. List services and systems that will be relocated and those that will be temporarily out of service. Indicate length of time permanent
services and systems will be disrupted.
a. Include description of provisions for temporary services and systems during interruption of permanent services and systems.
EXECUTION
01 73 00 - 1
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
1.5
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Cutting and Patching: Comply with requirements for and limitations on cutting and patching
of construction elements.
1. Structural Elements: When cutting and patching structural elements, notify Architect of
locations and details of cutting and await directions from Architect before proceeding.
Shore, brace, and support structural elements during cutting and patching. Do not cut
and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity
or increase deflection
2. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components
in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in
increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety.
3. Other Construction Elements: Do not cut and patch other construction elements or components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety.
4. Visual Elements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch exposed construction in a manner
that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and
replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.
B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Obtain and maintain on-site manufacturer's written
recommendations and instructions for installation of products and equipment.
PART 2
2.1
PRODUCTS
MATERIALS
A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections.
1. For projects requiring compliance with sustainable design and construction practices and
procedures, use products for patching that comply with requirements in Section 01 81 13
"Sustainable Design Requirements"
B. In-Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For exposed
surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent
possible.
1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will provide a match acceptable to Architect for the visual and functional performance of in-place materials.
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
EXAMINATION
A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate
and verify the existence and location of underground utilities, mechanical and electrical systems, and other construction affecting the Work.
1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping; underground electrical services, and
other utilities.
2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities
serving Project site.
EXECUTION
01 73 00 - 2
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
B. Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of the
Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where
indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations.
1. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of
connections before equipment and fixture installation.
2. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are
to be installed.
3. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing
finishes or primers.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
3.2
PREPARATION
A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid
delaying the Work.
B. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings.
C. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need
for clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field conditions outside the
control of Contractor, submit a request for information to Architect according to requirements
in Section 01 31 00 "Project Management and Coordination."
D. Surface and Substrate Preparation: Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations
for preparation of substrates to receive subsequent work.
3.3
CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT
A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are discovered, notify Architect promptly.
3.4
INSTALLATION
A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and
elevation, as indicated.
1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level.
2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance
and ease of removal for replacement.
3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas unless otherwise indicated.
4. Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 96 inches in occupied spaces and 90 inches in
unoccupied spaces.
B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products
in applications indicated.
C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results.
Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.
EXECUTION
01 73 00 - 3
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations
or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.
E. Sequence the Work and allow adequate clearances to accommodate movement of construction items on site and placement in permanent locations.
F. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels.
G. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be
factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements.
H. Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of adequate
size and number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately located and aligned
with other portions of the Work. Where size and type of attachments are not indicated, verify
size and type required for load conditions.
1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at
heights directed by Architect.
2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction.
3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and
items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver
such items to Project site in time for installation.
3.5
I.
Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.
J.
Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous.
CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Cutting and Patching, General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay.
1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance
of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their
original condition.
B. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during installation or cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so
as not to void existing warranties.
C. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut.
D. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage.
Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations.
E. Adjacent Occupied Areas: Where interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of
free passage to adjoining areas is unavoidable, coordinate cutting and patching according to
requirements in Section 01 10 00 "Summary."
EXECUTION
01 73 00 - 4
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
F. Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems:
Where existing services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before cutting to prevent interruption to occupied areas.
G. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar
operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or
adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply
with original Installer's written recommendations.
1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots neatly to minimum size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use.
2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces.
3. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond-core drill.
4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Sections where required by cutting and patching operations.
5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be
removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting.
6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.
H. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as
practicable. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other
Sections, where applicable.
1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate physical integrity of installation.
2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will minimize evidence of patching and refinishing.
a. Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing
materials.
b. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition.
3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area
into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even
surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall
coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance.
a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, prepare substrate and apply primer and
intermediate paint coats appropriate for substrate over the patch, and apply final
paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch. Provide additional
coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces.
4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an evenplane surface of uniform appearance.
5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a
weathertight condition and ensures thermal and moisture integrity of building enclosure.
I.
3.6
Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Remove
paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials from adjacent finished surfaces.
PROGRESS CLEANING
A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.
1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and
debris.
EXECUTION
01 73 00 - 5
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
2. Do not hold waste materials more than seven days during normal weather or three days if
the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F.
3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste.
Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations.
a. Use containers intended for holding waste materials of type to be stored.
4. Coordinate progress cleaning for joint-use areas where Contractor and other contractors
are working concurrently.
B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.
C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for
proper execution of the Work.
1. Remove liquid spills promptly.
2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the entire work area, as appropriate.
D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials
specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning
materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces.
E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.
F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to
ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
G. Waste Disposal: Do not bury or burn waste materials on-site. Do not wash waste materials
down sewers or into waterways. Comply with waste disposal requirements in Section 01 74 19 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal."
H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from
damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.
3.7
I.
Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary
through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components
to ensure operability without damaging effects.
J.
Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period.
STARTING AND ADJUSTING
A. Coordinate startup and adjusting of equipment and operating components with requirements
in Section 01 91 13 "General Commissioning Requirements."
B. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.
C. Adjust equipment for proper operation. Adjust operating components for proper operation
without binding.
EXECUTION
01 73 00 - 6
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
D. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
E. Manufacturer's Field Service: Comply with qualification requirements in Section 01 40 00
"Quality Requirements."
3.8
PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage
or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.
END OF SECTION 01 73 00
EXECUTION
01 73 00 - 7
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
SECTION 01 74 19 - CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. Section included administrative and procedural requirements for the following:
1. Construction waste management plan.
2. Construction waste recycling, salvage, or reuse.
1.3
REFERENCES
A. ASTM International:
1. ASTM E1609 - Standard Guide for Development and Implementation of a Pollution
Prevention Program.
B. EPA Construction and Demolition Debris Region 3 Recycling Contact:
1. EPA Web Site Link: http://www.epa.gov/reg3wcmd/solidwastecd.html
1.4
PROJECT REQUIREMENTS
A. Develop and implement construction waste management plan in accordance with ASTM
E1609 and as approved by Owner.
B. Intent:
1. Divert construction, demolition, and land clearing debris from landfill disposal.
2. Recycle, salvage, or reuse construction waste material.
3. Redirect recyclable material back to manufacturing process.
4. Generate cost savings or increase minimal additional cost to Project for waste disposal.
1.5
SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals.
1. Reference Forms CWM-1 and CWM-2 for examples of Construction Waste Management
Plan and Construction Waste Management Progress Report provided with this
specification.
B. Construction Plan: Submit Form CWM-1 Construction Waste Management Plan (14)
calendar days from the Notice to Proceed describing methods and procedures for
implementation and monitoring compliance including the following:
1. Transportation company hauling construction waste to waste processing facilities.
2. Recycling and adaptive reuse processing facilities and waste type each facility will
accept.
3. Construction waste materials anticipated for recycling, salvage, or reuse.
4. On site sorting and site storage methods.
C. Submit Form CWM-2 Waste Management Progress Report with each application for payment
substantiating construction waste management plan was maintained and goals are being or
were achieved.
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
01 74 19 - 1
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
1. Trash: Quantity by weight deposited in landfills. Include associated fees, transportation
costs, container rentals, and taxes for total cost of disposal.
2. Salvaged Material: Quantity by weight with destination for each type of material salvaged
for resale, recycling, or adaptive reuse.
D. Recycling and Processing Facility Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of recyclable
waste by recycling and processing facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests,
weight tickets, receipts, and invoices.
E. Landfill and/or Incinerator Disposal Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of waste by
landfills and incinerator facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight tickets,
receipts, and invoices.
1.6
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN
A. Construction Waste Landfill Diversion: Minimum 75 percent by weight of construction waste
materials for duration of Project through resale, recycling, or adaptive reuse.
B. Implement construction waste management plan at start of construction.
C. Review construction waste management plan at pre-construction meeting and progress
meetings specified in Section 01 30 00.
D. Distribute approved construction waste management plan to subcontractors and others
affected by Plan Requirements.
E. Oversee plan implementation, instruct construction personnel for plan compliance, and
document plan results.
F. Purchase Products to prevent waste by:
1. Ensuring correct quantity of each material is delivered to site.
2. Choosing products with minimal or no packaging.
3. Requiring suppliers to use returnable pallets or containers.
4. Requiring suppliers to take or buy-back rejected or unused items.
1.7
CONSTRUCTION WASTE RECYCLING
A. Use source separation method or co-mingling method suitable to sorting and processing
method of selected recycling center. Dispose non-recyclable trash separately into landfill.
B. Source Separation Method: Recyclable materials separated from trash and sorted into
separate bins or containers, identified by waste type, prior to transportation to recycling
center.
C. Co-Mingling Method: Recyclable materials separated from trash and placed in unsorted bins
or container for sorting at recycling center.
D. Construction Waste Materials that can be recycled, salvaged, or re-used, include, but are not
limited to:
1. Asphalt materials (shingles)
2. Bitumen materials
3. EPDM Roofing
4. Metal (ferrous and non-ferrous)
5. Wood (pallets, packing crates, lumber, formboards, plywood, trim)
6. Insulation
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
01 74 19 - 2
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
7. Gypsum Board
8. Electrical Wiring
9. Source separated recyclables, such as:
a. Glass, Plastic and Metal containers.
b. Paper
c. OCC/Cardboard
d. Packaging – Plastic sheet or film
e. Packaging - Polystyrene
PART 2
PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.1
CONSTRUCTION WASTE COLLECTION
A. Collect construction waste materials in marked bins or containers and arrange for
transportation to recycling centers or adaptive salvage and reuse processing facilities.
B. Maintain recycling and adaptive reuse storage and collection area in orderly arrangement
with materials separated to eliminate co-mingling of materials required to be delivered
separately to waste processing facility.
C. Store construction waste materials to prevent environmental pollution, fire hazards, hazards
to persons and property, and contamination of stored materials.
D. Cover construction waste materials subject to disintegration, evaporation, settling, or runoff to
prevent polluting air, water, and soil.
3.2
CONSTRUCTION WASTE DISPOSAL
A. Deliver construction waste to waste processing facilities. Obtain receipt for deliveries.
B. Dispose construction waste not capable of being recycled or adaptively reused by delivery to
landfill, incinerator, or other legal disposal facility. Obtain receipt for deliveries.
END OF SECTION 01 74 19
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
01 74 19 - 3
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
FORM CWM-1 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN
Contract No:
Project: Salisbury University Commons Building Low Slope Roof Replacement
SU-CB-70-12
Contract # :
Contractor:
Date:
Material
Estimated
Quantity
Disposal Method
Handling Procedure
Asphalt Materials
Bitumen Materials
EDPM Roofing
Metals - Ferrous
Metals – Non Ferrous
Wood
Insulation
Gypsum Board
Electrical Wiring
Glass Containers
Plastic Containers
Metal Containers
Paper
OCC/Cardboard
Packaging – Plastic
Packaging - Polystyrene
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
01 74 19 - 4
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
FORM CWM-2 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT PROGRESS REPORT
Project: Salisbury University Commons Building Low Slope Roof Replacement
Contract #:
Contractor:
Date:
SU Project No:
SU-CB-70-12
Diverted from Landfill
Material
Disposed in Waste Landfill
Recycle
Salvage
Reuse
Asphalt Materials
Bitumen Materials
EPDM Roofing
Metals - Ferrous
Metals – Non Ferrous
Wood
Insulation
Gypsum Board
Electrical Wiring
Glass Containers
Plastic Containers
Metal Containers
Paper
OCC/Cardboard
Pkg – Plastic
Pkg- Polystyrene
TOTAL (In Weight)
PERCENTAGE OF WASTE DIVERTED
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
(total of all above values – in weight)
(total waste divided by total diverted)
01 74 19 - 5
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
SECTION 01 77 00 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including,
but not limited to, the following:
1. Substantial Completion procedures.
2. Final completion procedures.
3. Warranties.
4. Final cleaning.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 01 Section "Execution" for progress cleaning of Project site.
2. Division 01 Section “Operation And Maintenance Data”.
3. Division 01 Section “Project Record Documents”.
4. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning requirements
for the Work in those Sections.
1.3
SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial
Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete with request.
1. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on
the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete.
2. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements.
3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final
certifications, and similar documents.
4. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to
services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases.
5. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by
Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable.
6. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's
personnel of changeover in security provisions.
7. Complete startup testing of systems.
8. Submit test/adjust/balance records.
9. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements.
10. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities.
11. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance.
12. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting.
13. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual
defects.
B. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of
request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled re-
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
01 77 00 - 1
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
quirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection
or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.
1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as
incomplete is completed or corrected.
2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final completion.
1.4
FINAL COMPLETION
A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining final completion,
complete the following:
1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 01 Section "Payment Procedures."
2. Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be
completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. The certified copy
of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance.
3. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements.
4. Submit pest-control final inspection report and warranty.
5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products,
equipment, and systems.
B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.
1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as
incomplete is completed or corrected.
1.5
LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)
A. Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected by
construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction.
1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first and proceeding from lowest floor to highest floor.
2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling,
individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems.
3. Include the following information at the top of each page:
a. Project name.
b. Date.
c. Name of Architect.
d. Name of Contractor.
e. Page number.
4. Submit list of incomplete items in one of the following formats:
a. PDF electronic file.
b. Three paper copies of product schedule or list, unless otherwise indicated. Architect
will return two copies.
1.6
WARRANTIES
A. Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of
the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is
indicated.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
01 77 00 - 2
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
B. Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within 15 days of completion of designated portions of the Work that are completed and occupied or used by Owner during construction period by separate agreement with Contractor.
C. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the
Project Manual.
1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders,
thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch
paper.
2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark
tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer.
3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES,"
Project name, and name of Contractor.
4. Scan warranties and bonds and assemble complete warranty and bond submittal package into a single indexed electronic PDF file with links enabling navigation to each item.
Provide table of contents at beginning of document.
D. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.
PART 2
2.1
PRODUCTS
MATERIALS
A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
FINAL CLEANING
A. General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply
with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations.
B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean
each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and
maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification
of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project:
a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities,
including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other
foreign substances.
b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other
foreign deposits.
c. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured surface.
d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project
site.
e. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building.
f. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition,
free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
01 77 00 - 3
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
g. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces.
h. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces.
i. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; shampoo
if visible soil or stains remain.
j. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials. Replace
chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish mirrors
and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces.
k. Remove labels that are not permanent.
l. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces.
Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or
that already show evidence of repair or restoration.
(1) Do not paint over "UL" and other required labels and identification, including
mechanical and electrical nameplates.
m. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, elevator equipment, and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other
foreign substances.
n. Replace parts subject to operating conditions during construction that may impede
operation or reduce longevity.
o. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure.
p. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills.
q. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during construction or that display contamination with particulate matter upon inspection.
(1) Clean HVAC system in compliance with NADCA Standard 1992-01. Provide
written report upon completion of cleaning.
r. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. Replace burned-out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective
and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures.
s. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.
C. Pest Control: Engage an experienced, licensed exterminator to make a final inspection and
rid Project of rodents, insects, and other pests. Prepare a report.
3.2
COORDINATION
A. Coordinate Closeout procedures with requirements of Division 01 Sections “Operation And
Maintenance Data” and “Project Record Documents”.
B. Provide information required by University on form attached at the end of this Section.
END OF SECTION 01 77 00
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
01 77 00 - 4
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
SECTION 01 78 23 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and
maintenance manuals, including the following:
1. Operation and maintenance documentation directory.
2. Emergency manuals.
3. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment.
4. Product maintenance manuals.
5. Systems and equipment maintenance manuals.
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A. System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regular interaction.
B. Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system.
1.4
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Manual Content: Operations and maintenance manual content is specified in individual
Specification Sections to be reviewed at the time of Section submittals. Submit reviewed
manual content formatted and organized as required by this Section.
1. Architect will comment on whether content of operations and maintenance submittals are
acceptable.
2. Where applicable, clarify and update reviewed manual content to correspond to revisions
and field conditions.
B. Format: Submit operations and maintenance manuals in the following format:
1. PDF electronic file. Assemble each manual into a composite electronically indexed file.
Submit on digital media acceptable to Architect.
a. Name each indexed document file in composite electronic index with applicable item
name. Include a complete electronically linked operation and maintenance directory.
b. Enable inserted reviewer Comments on draft submittals.
C. Final Manual Submittal: Submit each manual in final form prior to requesting inspection for
Substantial Completion and at least 15 days before commencing demonstration and training.
Architect will return copy with comments.
1. Correct or revise each manual to comply with Architect's comments. Submit copies of
each corrected manual within 15 days of receipt of Architect's comments and prior to
commencing demonstration and training.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
01 78 23 - 1
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
PART 2
2.1
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
PRODUCTS
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION DIRECTORY
A. Directory: Prepare a single, comprehensive directory of emergency, operation, and maintenance data and materials, listing items and their location to facilitate ready access to desired
information. Include a section in the directory for each of the following:
1. List of documents.
2. List of systems.
3. List of equipment.
4. Table of contents.
B. List of Systems and Subsystems: List systems alphabetically. Include references to operation and maintenance manuals that contain information about each system.
C. List of Equipment: List equipment for each system, organized alphabetically by system. For
pieces of equipment not part of system, list alphabetically in separate list.
D. Tables of Contents: Include a table of contents for each emergency, operation, and maintenance manual.
E. Identification: In the documentation directory and in each operation and maintenance manual, identify each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment with same designation used in
the Contract Documents. If no designation exists, assign a designation according to
ASHRAE Guideline 4, "Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building Systems."
2.2
REQUIREMENTS FOR EMERGENCY, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for
each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of
a system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed:
1. Title page.
2. Table of contents.
3. Manual contents.
B. Title Page: Include the following information:
1. Subject matter included in manual.
2. Name and address of Project.
3. Name and address of Owner.
4. Date of submittal.
5. Name and contact information for Contractor.
6. Name and contact information for Construction Manager.
7. Name and contact information for Architect.
8. Name and contact information for Commissioning Authority.
9. Names and contact information for major consultants to the Architect that designed the
systems contained in the manuals.
10. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals.
C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed
to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project
Manual.
1. If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to accommodate data, include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each volume of the
set.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
01 78 23 - 2
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically
by system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems,
equipment, and components of one system into a single binder.
E. Manuals, Electronic Files: Submit manuals in the form of a multiple file composite electronic
PDF file for each manual type required.
1. Electronic Files: Use electronic files prepared by manufacturer where available. Where
scanning of paper documents is required, configure scanned file for minimum readable
file size.
2. File Names and Bookmarks: Enable bookmarking of individual documents based on file
names. Name document files to correspond to system, subsystem, and equipment
names used in manual directory and table of contents. Group documents for each system and subsystem into individual composite bookmarked files, then create composite
manual, so that resulting bookmarks reflect the system, subsystem, and equipment
names in a readily navigated file tree. Configure electronic manual to display bookmark
panel on opening file.
2.3
EMERGENCY MANUALS
A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each of the following:
1. Type of emergency.
2. Emergency instructions.
3. Emergency procedures.
B. Type of Emergency: Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below, include
instructions and procedures for each system, subsystem, piece of equipment, and component:
1. Fire.
2. Flood.
3. Gas leak.
4. Water leak.
5. Power failure.
6. Water outage.
7. System, subsystem, or equipment failure.
8. Chemical release or spill.
C. Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, error messages,
and similar codes and signals. Include responsibilities of Owner's operating personnel for notification of Installer, supplier, and manufacturer to maintain warranties.
D. Emergency Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:
1. Instructions on stopping.
2. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency.
3. Operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits.
4. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.
5. Special operating instructions and procedures.
2.4
OPERATION MANUALS
A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in individual Specification Sections and the following information:
1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. Use designations for systems and
equipment indicated on Contract Documents.
2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor has delegated design responsibility.
3. Operating standards.
4. Operating procedures.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
01 78 23 - 3
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
Operating logs.
Wiring diagrams.
Control diagrams.
Piped system diagrams.
Precautions against improper use.
License requirements including inspection and renewal dates.
B. Descriptions: Include the following:
1. Product name and model number. Use designations for products indicated on Contract
Documents.
2. Manufacturer's name.
3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component.
4. Equipment function.
5. Operating characteristics.
6. Limiting conditions.
7. Performance curves.
8. Engineering data and tests.
9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts.
C. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:
1. Startup procedures.
2. Equipment or system break-in procedures.
3. Routine and normal operating instructions.
4. Regulation and control procedures.
5. Instructions on stopping.
6. Normal shutdown instructions.
7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions.
8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.
9. Special operating instructions and procedures.
D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls
as installed.
E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for
identification.
2.5
PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and
sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below.
B. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference
Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or schedule designation
or identifier where applicable.
C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable:
1. Product name and model number.
2. Manufacturer's name.
3. Color, pattern, and texture.
4. Material and chemical composition.
5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
01 78 23 - 4
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following:
1. Inspection procedures.
2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning.
3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product.
4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance.
5. Repair instructions.
E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and
related services.
F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances
and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.
1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.
2.6
SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include
source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures,
maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance
service contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below.
B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each
product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance
service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual
and drawing or schedule designation or identifier where applicable.
C. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation
including the following information for each component part or piece of equipment:
1. Standard maintenance instructions and bulletins.
2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly
and component removal, replacement, and assembly.
3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components.
4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.
D. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential
maintenance procedures:
1. Test and inspection instructions.
2. Troubleshooting guide.
3. Precautions against improper maintenance.
4. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions.
5. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions.
6. Demonstration and training video recording, if available.
E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine maintenance and service with standard time allotment.
1. Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly, monthly, quarterly, semiannual, and annual frequencies.
2. Maintenance and Service Record: Include manufacturers' forms for recording maintenance.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
01 78 23 - 5
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
F. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with
parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local
sources of maintenance materials and related services.
G. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and
telephone number of service agent.
H. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances
and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.
1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
MANUAL PREPARATION
A. Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory: Prepare a separate manual that provides an organized reference to emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
B. Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures for use by emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for types of
emergencies indicated.
C. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care
and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work.
D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of
equipment not part of a system.
1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information
for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.
2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's operating personnel.
E. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include
only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each
product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a
tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents.
Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable.
1. Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not available and
where the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment
or systems.
F. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and
flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in record Drawings to
ensure correct illustration of completed installation.
1. Do not use original project record documents as part of operation and maintenance
manuals.
2. Comply with requirements of newly prepared record Drawings in Division 01 Section
"Project Record Documents."
G. Comply with Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation
and maintenance documentation.
END OF SECTION 01 78 23
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
01 78 23 - 6
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
SECTION 01 78 39 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for Project Record Documents, including the following:
1. Record Drawings.
2. Record Specifications.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for general closeout procedures.
2. Divisions 02 through 33 Sections for specific requirements for Project Record Documents
of the Work in those Sections.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following:
1. Number of Copies: Submit one set(s) of marked-up Record Prints.
B. Record Specifications: Submit one copy of Project's Specifications, including addenda and
contract modifications.
PART 2
2.1
PRODUCTS
RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of blue- or black-line white prints of the Contract Drawings
and Shop Drawings.
1. Preparation: Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies
from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data,
whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to prepare the
marked-up Record Prints.
a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult
to identify or measure and record later.
b. Accurately record information in an understandable drawing technique.
c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations.
2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Dimensional changes to Drawings.
b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings.
c. Depths of foundations below first floor.
d. Locations and depths of underground utilities.
e. Changes made by Change Order or Construction Change Directive.
f. Changes made following Architect's written orders.
g. Details not on the original Contract Drawings.
h. Field records for variable and concealed conditions.
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
01 78 39 - 1
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
i. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically.
3. Mark the Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings, whichever is most capable of showing
actual physical conditions, completely and accurately. If Shop Drawings are marked,
show cross-reference on the Contract Drawings.
4. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same location.
5. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted
from original Drawings.
6. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification, where applicable.
B. Format: Identify and date each Record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT
RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location.
1. Record Prints: Organize Record Prints and newly prepared Record Drawings into manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on
cover sheets.
2. Identification: As follows:
a. Project name.
b. Date.
c. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS."
d. Name of Architect.
e. Name of Contractor.
2.2
RECORD SPECIFICATIONS
A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation
varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications.
1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later.
2. For each principal product, indicate whether Record Product Data has been submitted in
operation and maintenance manuals instead of submitted as Record Product Data.
3. Note related Change Ordersand Record Drawings where applicable.
2.3
MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS
A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous
record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file
miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference.
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE
A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for Project
Record Document purposes. Post changes and modifications to Project Record Documents
as they occur; do not wait until the end of Project.
B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store Record Documents and Samples in
the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use Project
Record Documents for construction purposes. Maintain Record Documents in good order
and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access
to Project Record Documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours.
END OF SECTION 01 78 39
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
01 78 39 - 2
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
SECTION 03 01 30 - MAINTENANCE OF CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Removal of deteriorated concrete and subsequent replacement and patching.
1.3
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include construction details, material descriptions,
chemical composition, physical properties, test data, and mixing, preparation, and application
instructions.
1.4
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Field quality-control reports.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Each manufacturer shall employ factory-trained technical representatives who are available for consultation and Project-site inspection and assistance at no
additional cost.
B. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and
approved by manufacturer to apply packaged patching-mortar materials.
1.6
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for minimum and maximum temperature requirements and other conditions for storage.
B. Store cementitious materials off the ground, under cover, and in a dry location.
C. Store aggregates covered and in a dry location; maintain grading and other required characteristics and prevent contamination.
1.7
FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations for Epoxies: Do not apply when air and substrate temperatures
are outside limits permitted by manufacturer. During hot weather, cool epoxy components
before mixing, store mixed products in shade, and cool unused mixed products to retard setting. Do not apply to wet substrates unless approved by manufacturer.
1. Use only Class A epoxies when substrate temperatures are below or are expected to go
below 40 deg F within 8 hours.
2. Use only Class A or B epoxies when substrate temperatures are below or are expected
to go below 60 deg F within 8 hours.
MAINTENANCE OF CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03 01 30 - 1
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
3. Use only Class C epoxies when substrate temperatures are above and are expected to
stay above 60 deg F for 8 hours.
PART 2
2.1
PRODUCTS
MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each color, grade, finish, type, and variety of product from single
source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical
properties.
B. VOC Content: Provide materials that comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction.
2.2
BONDING AGENTS
A. Epoxy Bonding Agent: ASTM C 881/C 881M, Type II and free of VOCs.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
a. BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems.
b. Dayton Superior Corporation.
c. Euclid Chemical Company (The); an RPM company.
d. US SPEC; Division of US MIX Products Company.
e. W. R. Meadows, Inc.
2.3
PATCHING MORTAR
A. Patching Mortar, General:
1. Only use patching mortars that are recommended by manufacturer for each applicable
horizontal, vertical, or overhead use orientation.
B. Rapid-Strengthening, Cementitious Patching Mortar: Packaged, dry mix, ASTM C 928 for
repair of concrete.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
a. BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems.
b. Dayton Superior Corporation.
c. Euclid Chemical Company (The); an RPM company.
d. US SPEC; Division of US MIX Products Company.
e. W. R. Meadows, Inc.
2. Compressive Strength: Not less than 7000 psi within three hours when tested according
to ASTM C 109/C 109M.
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
APPLICATION
A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for application of products, including surface preparation.
B. Epoxy Bonding Agent: Apply to reinforcing bars and concrete by brush, roller, or spray according to manufacturer's written instructions, leaving no pinholes or other uncoated areas.
MAINTENANCE OF CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03 01 30 - 2
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
Apply to reinforcing bars in at least two coats, allowing first coat to dry before applying second coat. Place patching mortar or concrete while epoxy is still tacky. If epoxy dries, recoat
before placing patching mortar or concrete.
C. Slurry Coat for Cementitious Patching Mortar: Wet substrate thoroughly and then remove
standing water. Scrub a slurry of neat patching mortar into substrate, filling pores and voids.
D. Placing Patching Mortar: Place as follows unless otherwise recommended in writing by
manufacturer:
1. Provide forms where necessary to confine patch to required shape.
2. Wet substrate and forms thoroughly and then remove standing water.
3. Pretreatment: Apply specified bonding agent and slurry coat.
4. General Placement: Place patching mortar by troweling toward edges of patch to force
intimate contact with edge surfaces. For large patches, fill edges first and then work toward center, always troweling toward edges of patch. At fully exposed reinforcing bars,
force patching mortar to fill space behind bars by compacting with trowel from sides of
bars.
5. Consolidation: After each lift is placed, consolidate material and screed surface.
6. Multiple Lifts: Where multiple lifts are used, score surface of lifts to provide a rough surface for placing subsequent lifts. Allow each lift to reach final set before placing subsequent lifts.
7. Finishing: Allow surfaces of lifts that are to remain exposed to become firm and then finish to a surface matching adjacent concrete.
8. Curing: Wet-cure cementitious patching materials, including polymer-modified cementitious patching materials, for not less than seven days by water-fog spray or watersaturated absorptive cover.
3.2
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B. Product will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
C. Prepare test and inspection reports.
END OF SECTION 03 01 30
MAINTENANCE OF CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03 01 30 - 3
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
SECTION 03 54 13 - GYPSUM CEMENT UNDERLAYMENT
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. Section includes gypsum-cement-based, self-leveling underlayment for application below interior floor coverings.
1.3
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1.4
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of underlayment and floor-covering systems
certifying that products are compatible.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Installer who is approved by manufacturer for application of underlayment products required for this Project.
B. Product Compatibility: Manufacturers of underlayment and floor-covering systems certify in
writing that products are compatible.
C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.6
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store materials to comply with manufacturer's written instructions to prevent deterioration
from moisture or other detrimental effects.
1.7
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for substrate
temperature, ventilation, ambient temperature and humidity, and other conditions affecting
underlayment performance.
1. Place gypsum-cement-based underlayments only when ambient temperature and temperature of substrates are between 50 and 80 deg F.
1.8
COORDINATION
A. Coordinate application of underlayment with requirements of floor-covering products and adhesives, specified in Division 09 Sections, to ensure compatibility of products.
GYPSUM CEMENT UNDERLAYMENT
03 54 13 - 1
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
PART 2
2.1
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
PRODUCTS
GYPSUM-CEMENT-BASED UNDERLAYMENTS
A. Underlayment: Gypsum-cement-based, self-leveling product that can be applied in minimum
uniform thickness of 1/8 inch and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor elevations.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Hacker Industries, Inc.
b. Maxxon Corporation
c. USG Industrial Products.
2. Cement Binder: Gypsum or blended gypsum cement as defined by ASTM C 219.
3. Compressive Strength: Not less than 3500 psi at 28 days when tested according to
ASTM C 109/C 109M.
4. Underlayment Additive: Resilient-emulsion product of underlayment manufacturer, formulated for use with underlayment when applied to substrate and conditions indicated.
B. Water: Potable and at a temperature of not more than 70 deg F.
C. Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended in writing for substrate, conditions, and application indicated.
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for conditions affecting performance.
1. Proceed with application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
PREPARATION
A. General: Prepare and clean substrate according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Treat nonmoving substrate cracks according to manufacturer's written instructions to prevent cracks from telegraphing (reflecting) through underlayment.
2. Fill substrate voids to prevent underlayment from leaking.
B. Wood Substrates: Mechanically fasten loose boards and panels to eliminate substrate
movement and squeaks. Sand to remove coatings that might impair underlayment bond and
remove sanding dust.
1. Install underlayment reinforcement recommended in writing by manufacturer.
C. Adhesion Tests: After substrate preparation, test substrate for adhesion with underlayment
according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3.3
APPLICATION
A. General: Mix and apply underlayment components according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Close areas to traffic during underlayment application and for time period after application
recommended in writing by manufacturer.
2. Coordinate application of components to provide optimum underlayment-to-substrate and
intercoat adhesion.
B. Apply primer over prepared substrate at manufacturer's recommended spreading rate.
GYPSUM CEMENT UNDERLAYMENT
03 54 13 - 2
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
C. Apply underlayment to produce uniform, level surface.
1. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations.
D. Cure underlayment according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent contamination
during application and curing processes.
E. Do not install floor coverings over underlayment until after time period recommended in writing by underlayment manufacturer.
F. Remove and replace underlayment areas that evidence lack of bond with substrate, including
areas that emit a "hollow" sound when tapped.
3.4
PROTECTION
A. Protect underlayment from concentrated and rolling loads for remainder of construction period.
END OF SECTION 03 54 13
GYPSUM CEMENT UNDERLAYMENT
03 54 13 - 3
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
SECTION 06 10 00 - ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Framing with dimension lumber.
2. Wood blocking and nailers.
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal or greater but less than 5 inches nominal in
least dimension.
B. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following:
1. NeLMA: Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association.
2. NLGA: National Lumber Grades Authority.
1.4
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component
materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.
1. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content
of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site.
2. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of
treatment.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking for fireretardant treated material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction
that periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing the classification
marking is representative of the material tested.
1.6
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Stack lumber flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation.
Protect lumber from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.
PART 2
2.1
PRODUCTS
WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading
agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06 10 00 - 1
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency
certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated.
1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency.
2. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed
sizes for dry lumber.
3. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 19 percent unless otherwise indicated.
2.2
DIMENSION LUMBER FRAMING
A. Non-Load-Bearing Interior Partitions: Construction or No. 2 grade.
1. Application: All interior partitions.
2. Species:
a. Northern species; NLGA.
b. Eastern softwoods; NeLMA.
B. Joists, Rafters, and Other Framing Not Listed Above: No. 2 grade.
1. Species:
a. Hem-fir (north); NLGA.
b. Spruce-pine-fir; NLGA.
c. Spruce-pine-fir (south); NeLMA,.
2.3
MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER
A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of
other construction, including the following:
1. Blocking.
2. Nailers.
3. Cants.
B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Standard, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber of any
species.
C. For blocking not used for attachment of other construction, Utility, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber of any species may be used provided that it is cut and selected to eliminate defects that
will interfere with its attachment and purpose.
D. For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to
eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work.
2.4
FASTENERS
A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture.
B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667.
C. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272.
2.5
METAL FRAMING ANCHORS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06 10 00 - 2
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
1. Cleveland Steel Specialty Co.
2. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.
3. USP Structural Connectors.
B. Allowable Design Loads: Provide products with allowable design loads, as published by
manufacturer, that meet or exceed those of products of manufacturers listed. Manufacturer's
published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis
and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing
agency.
C. Galvanized-Steel Sheet:
Hot-dip, zinc-coated
ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 coating designation.
1. Use for interior locations unless otherwise indicated.
steel
sheet
complying
with
D. Joist Hangers: U-shaped joist hangers with 2-inch- long seat and 1-1/4-inch- wide nailing
flanges at least 85 percent of joist depth.
1. Thickness: 0.062 inch.
E. Bridging: Rigid, V-section, nailless type, 0.050 inch thick, length to suit joist size and spacing.
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's WCD 1, "Details for Conventional Wood Frame
Construction," unless otherwise indicated.
B. Metal Framing Anchors: Install metal framing anchors to comply with manufacturer's written
instructions. Install fasteners through each fastener hole.
C. Do not splice structural members between supports unless otherwise indicated.
D. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim.
1. Provide metal clips for fastening gypsum board or lath at corners and intersections where
framing or blocking does not provide a surface for fastening edges of panels. Space clips
not more than 16 inches o.c.
E. Provide fire blocking in furred spaces, stud spaces, and other concealed cavities as indicated
and as follows:
1. Fire block concealed spaces between floor sleepers with same material as sleepers to
limit concealed spaces to not more than 100 sq. ft. and to solidly fill space below partitions.
F. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics will not interfere with installation or with
fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with
function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement.
G. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated,
complying with the following:
1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners.
2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code.
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06 10 00 - 3
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
H. Use steel common nails unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully
penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood.
Drive nails snug but do not countersink nail heads unless otherwise indicated.
3.2
WALL AND PARTITION FRAMING INSTALLATION
A. General: Provide single bottom plate and double top plates using members of 2-inch nominal
thickness whose widths equal that of studs, except single top plate may be used for non-loadbearing partitions. Fasten plates to supporting construction unless otherwise indicated.
1. For interior partitions and walls, provide 2-by-4-inch nominal- size wood studs spaced 16
inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated.
B. Construct corners and intersections with three or more studs, except that two studs may be
used for interior non-load-bearing partitions.
3.3
FLOOR JOIST FRAMING INSTALLATION
A. General: Install floor joists with crown edge up and support ends of each member with not
less than 1-1/2 inches of bearing on wood or metal, or 3 inches on masonry. Attach floor
joists as follows:
1. Where supported on wood members, by[ toe nailing or by] using metal framing anchors.
2. Where framed into wood supporting members, by using wood ledgers as indicated or, if
not indicated, by using metal joist hangers.
B. Frame openings with headers and trimmers supported by metal joist hangers; double headers and trimmers where span of header exceeds 48 inches.
C. Do not notch in middle third of joists; limit notches to one-sixth depth of joist, one-third at
ends. Do not bore holes larger than 1/3 depth of joist; do not locate closer than 2 inches from
top or bottom.
D. Provide solid blocking of 2-inch nominal thickness by depth of joist at ends of joists unless
nailed to header or band.
E. Lap members framing from opposite sides of beams, girders, or partitions not less than 4
inches or securely tie opposing members together. Provide solid blocking of 2-inch nominal
thickness by depth of joist over supports.
F. Under non-load-bearing partitions, provide double joists separated by solid blocking equal to
depth of studs above.
1. Provide triple joists separated as above, under partitions receiving ceramic tile and similar heavy finishes or fixtures.
G. Provide bridging of type indicated below, at intervals of 96 inches o.c., between joists.
1. Steel bridging installed to comply with bridging manufacturer's written instructions.
END OF SECTION 06 10 00
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06 10 00 - 4
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
SECTION 06 20 23 - INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Interior trim and base.
2. Interior plywood paneling.
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A. MDF: Medium-density fiberboard.
B. MDO: Plywood with a medium-density overlay on the face.
1.4
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component
materials, dimensions, profiles, textures, and colors and include construction and application
details.
B. Samples for Verification:
1. For each species and cut of lumber and panel products with non-factory-applied finish,
with 1/2 of exposed surface finished, 50 sq. in. for lumber and 8 by 10 inches for panels.
2. For each finish system and color of lumber and panel products with factory-applied finish,
50 sq. in. for lumber and 8 by 10 inches for panels.
1.5
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's warranty.
1.6
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air
circulation. Protect materials from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely
anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.
B. Deliver interior finish carpentry materials only when environmental conditions meet requirements specified for installation areas. If interior finish carpentry materials must be stored in
other than installation areas, store only where environmental conditions meet requirements
specified for installation areas.
1.7
FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install interior finish carpentry materials until
building is enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in space is completed and nominally dry,
and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY
06 20 23 - 1
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
B. Do not install finish carpentry materials that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.
1. Indications that materials are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,
discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
2. Indications that materials are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or
splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
PART 2
2.1
PRODUCTS
MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and the following grading rules:
1. NeLMA: Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association, "Standard Grading Rules for
Northeastern Lumber."
2. NHLA: National Hardwood Lumber Association, "Rules for the Measurement and Inspection of Hardwood & Cypress."
3. NLGA: National Lumber Grades Authority, "Standard Grading Rules for Canadian Lumber."
4. SPIB: The Southern Pine Inspection Bureau, "Standard Grading Rules for Southern Pine
Lumber."
5. WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau, Standard No. 17, "Grading Rules for
West Coast Lumber."
6. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association, "Western Lumber Grading Rules."
B. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of inspection agency indicating grade,
species, moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill.
1. For exposed lumber, mark grade stamp on end or back of each piece.
C. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1, with MDO face..
2.2
INTERIOR TRIM
A. Hardwood Lumber Trim for Transparent Finish (Stain or Clear Finish):
1. Species and Grade: White maple; Clear; NHLA.
2. Maximum Moisture Content: 10 percent.
3. Finger Jointing: Not allowed.
4. Gluing for Width: Allowed. Use for lumber trim wider than 6 inches.
5. Veneered Material: Not allowed.
6. Face Surface: Surfaced (smooth).
7. Matching: Selected for compatible grain and color.
B. Lumber Trim for Opaque Finish (Painted Finish):
1. Species and Grade: Eastern white, Idaho white, lodgepole, ponderosa, radiata, or sugar
pine; Finish or 1 Common (Colonial); NeLMA, NLGA, or WWPA.
2. Species and Grade: Spruce-pine-fir, 1 Common; NeLMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA.
3. Species and Grade: Alder, aspen, basswood, cottonwood, gum, magnolia, soft maple,
sycamore, tupelo, or yellow poplar; A Finish; NHLA.
4. Maximum Moisture Content: 15 percent.
5. Finger Jointing: Allowed.
6. Face Surface: Surfaced (smooth).
7. Optional Material: Primed MDF of same actual dimensions as lumber indicated may be
used in lieu of lumber.
C. Moldings for Opaque Finish (Painted Finish): Made to patterns included in WMMPA WM 12
or as otherwise required to match existing moldings.
1. Softwood Moldings: WMMPA WM 4, P grade.
INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY
06 20 23 - 2
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
a. Species: Eastern white, Idaho white, lodgepole, ponderosa, radiata, or sugar pine.
b. Maximum Moisture Content: 15 percent with at least 85 percent of shipment at 12
percent or less.
2. Finger Jointing: Allowed.
2.3
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Fasteners for Interior Finish Carpentry: Nails, screws, and other anchoring devices of type,
size, material, and finish required for application indicated to provide secure attachment, concealed where possible.
B. Paneling Adhesive: Comply with paneling manufacturer's written recommendations for adhesives.
C. Multipurpose Construction Adhesive: Formulation complying with ASTM D 3498 that is recommended for indicated use by adhesive manufacturer.
2.4
FABRICATION
A. Back out or kerf backs of the following members except those with ends exposed in finished
work:
1. Interior standing and running trim except shoe and crown molds.
B. Ease edges of lumber less than 1 inch in nominal thickness to 1/16-inch radius and edges of
lumber 1 inch or more in nominal thickness to 1/8-inch radius.
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Examine finish carpentry materials before installation. Reject materials that are wet, moisture
damaged, and mold damaged.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
PREPARATION
A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application.
B. Before installing interior finish carpentry, condition materials to average prevailing humidity in
installation areas for a minimum of 24 hours unless longer conditioning is recommended by
manufacturer.
3.3
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Do not use materials that are unsound, warped, improperly treated or finished, inadequately
seasoned, too small to fabricate with proper jointing arrangements, or with defective surfaces,
sizes, or patterns.
B. Install interior finish carpentry level, plumb, true, and aligned with adjacent materials. Use
concealed shims where necessary for alignment.
INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY
06 20 23 - 3
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
1. Scribe and cut interior finish carpentry to fit adjoining work. Refinish and seal cuts as
recommended by manufacturer.
2. Where face fastening is unavoidable, countersink fasteners, fill surface flush, and sand
unless otherwise indicated.
3. Install to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches for level and plumb. Install adjoining interior
finish carpentry with 1/32-inch maximum offset for flush installation and 1/16-inch maximum offset for reveal installation.
4. Coordinate interior finish carpentry with materials and systems in or adjacent to it. Provide cutouts for mechanical and electrical items that penetrate interior finish carpentry.
3.4
STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM INSTALLATION
A. Install with minimum number of joints practical, using full-length pieces from maximum
lengths of lumber available. Do not use pieces less than 24 inches long, except where necessary. Stagger joints in adjacent and related standing and running trim. Cope at returns,
miter at outside corners, and cope at inside corners to produce tight-fitting joints with fullsurface contact throughout length of joint. Use scarf joints for end-to-end joints. Plane backs
of casings to provide uniform thickness across joints where necessary for alignment.
1. Install trim after gypsum-board joint finishing operations are completed.
2. Install without splitting; drill pilot holes before fastening where necessary to prevent splitting. Fasten to prevent movement or warping. Countersink fastener heads on exposed
carpentry work and fill holes.
3.5
PANELING INSTALLATION
A. Plywood Paneling: Leave 1/4-inch gap to be covered with trim at top, bottom, and openings.
Install with uniform tight joints between panels.
1. Attach panels to supports with manufacturer's recommended panel adhesive and fasteners. Space fasteners and adhesive as recommended by panel manufacturer.
2. Conceal fasteners to greatest practical extent.
3.6
ADJUSTING
A. Replace interior finish carpentry that is damaged or does not comply with requirements. Interior finish carpentry may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and
shows no evidence of repair or refinishing. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.
3.7
CLEANING
A. Clean interior finish carpentry on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Restore damaged or
soiled areas and touch up factory-applied finishes, if any.
3.8
PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products from damage from weather and other causes during construction.
B. Remove and replace finish carpentry materials that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold
damaged.
1. Indications that materials are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,
discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
2. Indications that materials are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or
splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
END OF SECTION 06 20 23
INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY
06 20 23 - 4
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
SECTION 06 43 00 - WOOD STAIRS
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Wood stairs, including rough carriages for stairs.
2. Shop finishing of wood stairs.
1.3
PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at [Project site] <Insert location>.
1.4
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale
details, attachment devices, and other components.
1. Apply AWI Quality Certification Program label to Shop Drawings.
B. Samples for Initial Selection:
1. Shop-applied transparent finishes.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program.
1.6
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Do not deliver wood stairs until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork
have been completed in installation areas. If wood stairs must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements
specified in "Field Conditions" Article.
1.7
FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install wood stairs until building is enclosed, wet
work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60
and 90 deg F and relative humidity between 25 and 55 percent during the remainder of the
construction period.
B. Field Measurements: Where wood stairs are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to
avoid delaying the Work.
1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by field
measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
WOOD STAIRS
06 43 00 - 1
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
C. Established Dimensions: Where wood stairs are indicated to fit to other construction, establish dimensions for areas where woodwork is to fit. Provide allowance for trimming at site,
and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.
1.8
COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related
units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that wood stairs can be supported and installed as indicated.
PART 2
2.1
PRODUCTS
WOOD STAIRS
A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork
Standards" for grades of interior architectural woodwork indicated for construction, finishes,
installation, and other requirements.
1. Provide certificates from AWI certification program indicating that woodwork, including installation, complies with requirements of grades specified.
2. The Contract Documents contain selections chosen from options in the quality standard
and additional requirements beyond those of the quality standard. Comply with those selections and requirements in addition to the quality standard.
B. Grade: Custom.
C. Wood for Transparent Finish: Walnut.
D. Finishes for Stair Parts: As follows:
1. Treads: Transparent.
2. Risers: Transparent.
2.2
WOOD MATERIALS
A. Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated.
1. Wood Moisture Content: 5 to 10 percent.
2.3
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln dried to
less than 15 percent moisture content.
B. Rough Carriages for Stairs: One of the following:
1. Laminated veneer lumber, made with an exterior-type adhesive complying with
ASTM D 2559, and with the following allowable design values as determined according to
ASTM D 5456:
a. Extreme Fiber Stress in Bending, Edgewise: 2900 psi for 12-inch nominal- depth
members.
b. Modulus of Elasticity, Edgewise: 1,800,000 psi.
2. Rough Carriages for Stairs: Select Structural grade and the following species, kiln dried
to 15 percent maximum moisture content:
C. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide metal expansion sleeves or expansion bolts for post-installed anchors.
WOOD STAIRS
06 43 00 - 2
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
Use nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts at inside face of exterior
walls and at floors.
2.4
FABRICATION
A. Fabricate wood stairs to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius indicated for the following:
1. Corners of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members: 1/16 inch unless otherwise indicated.
B. Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, to maximum
extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary
for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for
scribing, trimming, and fitting.
1. Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled. Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be removed
after trial fitting. Verify that various parts fit as intended and check measurements of assemblies against field measurements before disassembling for shipment.
C. Cut carriages to accurately fit treads and risers. Glue treads to risers, and glue and nail
treads and risers to carriages.
1. House wall and face stringers and glue and wedge treads and risers.
2. Fabricate stairs with treads and risers no more than 1/8 inch from indicated position and
no more than 1/16 inch out of relative position for adjacent treads and risers.
2.5
SHOP FINISHING
A. General: Finish wood stairs at fabrication shop as specified in this Section. Defer only final
touchup, cleaning, and polishing until after installation.
B. Preparation for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing architectural woodwork, as applicable to each unit of work.
C. Transparent Finish:
1. Grade: Custom.
2. Finish: System - 5, conversion varnish.
3. Staining: None required.
4. Open Finish for Open-Grain Woods: Do not apply filler to open-grain woods.
5. Sheen: Satin, 31-45 gloss units measured on 60-degree gloss meter per ASTM D 523.
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
PREPARATION
A. Before installation, condition wood stairs to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas.
B. Before installing wood stairs, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete
work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A. Grade: Install wood stairs to comply with same grade as item to be installed.
WOOD STAIRS
06 43 00 - 3
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
B. Assemble wood stairs and complete fabrication at Project site to the extent that it was not
completed in the shop.
C. Stairs: Securely anchor carriages to supporting substrates. Install stairs with treads and risers no more than 1/8 inch from indicated position.
D. Touch up finishing work specified in this Section after installation of wood stairs. Fill nail
holes with matching filler where exposed.
1. Apply specified finish coats, including stains and paste fillers if any, to exposed surfaces
where only sealer/prime coats are applied in shop.
3.3
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Repair damaged and defective wood stairs, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual
defects; where not possible to repair, replace wood stairs. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.
B. Clean wood stairs on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to
restore damaged or soiled areas.
END OF SECTION 06 43 00
WOOD STAIRS
06 43 00 - 4
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
SECTION 07 92 00 - JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Latex joint sealants.
2. Acoustical joint sealants.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.
B. Samples for Verification: For each kind and color of joint sealant required, provide Samples
with joint sealants in 1/2-inch- wide joints formed between two 6-inch- long strips of material
matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants.
C. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified
testing agency, indicating that sealants comply with requirements.
D. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each kind of joint sealant from single source from single manufacturer.
1.5
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:
1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by jointsealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F.
2. When joint substrates are wet.
3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for applications indicated.
4. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed
from joint substrates.
1.6
WARRANTY
A. Special Installer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair
or replace joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
JOINT SEALANTS
07 92 00 - 1
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which joint-sealant manufacturer agrees to furnish joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
C. Special warranties specified in this article exclude deterioration or failure of joint sealants
from the following:
1. Movement of the structure caused by structural settlement or errors attributable to design
or construction resulting in stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression.
2. Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding design specifications.
3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents.
4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric contaminants.
PART 2
2.1
PRODUCTS
MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as
demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
B. VOC Content of Interior Sealants: Provide sealants and sealant primers for use inside the
weatherproofing system that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Part 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):
1. Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L.
2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L.
3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.
C. Liquid-Applied Joint Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated
for each liquid-applied joint sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates.
2.2
LATEX JOINT SEALANTS
A. Latex Joint Sealant: Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C 834, Type OP,
Grade NF.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Pecora Corporation; AC-20+.
b. Schnee-Morehead, Inc.; SM 8200.
c. Tremco Incorporated; Tremflex 834.
2.3
ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS
A. Acoustical Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission
through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing
representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Pecora Corporation; AIS-919.
b. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.
JOINT SEALANTS
07 92 00 - 2
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
2.4
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of
sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealantsubstrate tests and field tests.
B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated
to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates.
C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints.
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
EXAMINATION
A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting
joint-sealant performance.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to
comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:
1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of
joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and
approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost.
2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, mechanical abrading, or a
combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing
optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous
joint substrates include the following:
a. Concrete.
b. Masonry.
c. Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile.
3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.
4. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do
not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint
sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following:
a. Metal.
b. Glass.
c. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile.
B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or
as indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer
to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of
joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.
C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with
adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact
JOINT SEALANTS
07 92 00 - 3
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after
tooling without disturbing joint seal.
3.3
INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS
A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.
B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of
joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.
C. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to
joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.
1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.
2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings.
3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application
and replace them with dry materials.
D. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between
sealants and backs of joints.
E. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time
backings are installed:
1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.
2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration.
3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.
F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or
curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to
form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure
contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.
1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints.
2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not
discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.
3. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated.
a. Use masking tape to protect surfaces adjacent to recessed tooled joints.
G. Acoustical Sealant Installation: At sound-rated assemblies and elsewhere as indicated, seal
construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a
continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at
perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's
written recommendations.
3.4
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Evaluation of Field-Adhesion Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from
testing or noncompliance with other indicated requirements will be considered satisfactory.
Remove sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing or to comply with other
requirements. Retest failed applications until test results prove sealants comply with indicated requirements.
JOINT SEALANTS
07 92 00 - 4
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
3.5
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
CLEANING
A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by
methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants
and of products in which joints occur.
3.6
PROTECTION
A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants
are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint
sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original
work.
END OF SECTION 07 92 00
JOINT SEALANTS
07 92 00 - 5
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
SECTION 08 11 13 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. Section includes hollow-metal work.
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings according to
NAAMM-HMMA 803 or SDI A250.8.
1.4
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
PART 2
2.1
PRODUCTS
EXTERIOR HOLLOW-METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
A. Heavy-Duty Doors and Frames: SDI A250.8, Level 2.
1. Physical Performance: Level B according to SDI A250.4.
2. Doors:
a. Type: As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule.
b. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches.
c. Face: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch, with minimum
A40 coating.
d. Edge Construction: Model 1, Full Flush.
e. Core: Manufacturer's standard insulation material.
3. Frames:
a. Materials: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch, with minimum A40 coating.
b. Construction: Full profile welded.
4. Exposed Finish: Prime.
2.2
FRAME ANCHORS
A. Jamb Anchors:
1. Postinstalled Expansion Type for In-Place Concrete or Masonry: Minimum 3/8-inch- diameter bolts with expansion shields or inserts. Provide pipe spacer from frame to wall,
with throat reinforcement plate, welded to frame at each anchor location.
2.3
MATERIALS
A. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
08 11 13 - 1
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
B. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 879/A 879M, Commercial Steel (CS), 04Z coating designation; mill
phosphatized.
1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M
or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M,
Class B.
C. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M.
D. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing).
2.4
FABRICATION
A. Fabricate hollow-metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form
metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for metal thickness. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site,
clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment.
B. Hollow-Metal Doors:
1. Exterior Doors: Provide weep-hole openings in bottoms of exterior doors to permit moisture to escape. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration.
C. Hollow-Metal Frames:
1. Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face seams or joints, fabricated
from same material as door frame. Fasten members at crossings and to jambs by butt
welding.
2. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners
unless otherwise indicated.
D. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow-metal work to receive templated mortised
hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to
SDI A250.6, the Door Hardware Schedule, and templates.
1. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted
door hardware.
2. Comply with applicable requirements in SDI A250.6 and BHMA A156.115 for preparation
of hollow-metal work for hardware.
2.5
STEEL FINISHES
A. Prime Finish: Clean, pretreat, and apply manufacturer's standard primer.
1. Shop Primer: SDI A250.10.
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
A. Hollow-Metal Frames: Install hollow-metal frames of size and profile indicated. Comply with
SDI A250.11 or NAAMM-HMMA 840 as required by standards specified.
1. Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent
anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving
surfaces smooth and undamaged.
a. Check plumb, square, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances.
2. Concrete Walls: Solidly fill space between frames and concrete with mineral-fiber insulation.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
08 11 13 - 2
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
3. In-Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with postinstalled
expansion anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible
on exposed faces.
4. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow-metal door frames for squareness, alignment, twist,
and plumb to the following tolerances:
a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees
from jamb perpendicular to frame head.
b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to
plane of wall.
c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.
d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs at floor.
B. Hollow-Metal Doors: Fit hollow-metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified
below. Shim as necessary.
1. Non-Fire-Rated Steel Doors:
a. Between Door and Frame Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/32 inch.
b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch to 1/4 inch plus or minus 1/32 inch.
c. At Bottom of Door: [3/4 inch] [5/8 inch] plus or minus 1/32 inch.
d. Between Door Face and Stop: 1/16 inch to 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/32 inch.
3.2
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including hollow-metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.
B. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of
prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer.
C. Metallic-Coated Surface Touchup: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair
paint according to manufacturer's written instructions.
END OF SECTION 08 11 13
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
08 11 13 - 3
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
SECTION 08 14 33 - STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Interior stile and rail wood doors.
2. Priming stile and rail wood doors.
3. Fitting stile and rail wood doors to frames and machining for hardware.
1.3
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Include details of construction.
2. Include factory-finishing specifications.
B. Shop Drawings: For stile and rail wood doors. Indicate location, size, and hand of each
door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data, including those for stiles, rails, panels, and moldings (sticking); and other pertinent data.
1.4
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.
1.5
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Package doors individually in opaque plastic bags or cardboard cartons.
C. Mark each door on bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings.
1.6
FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and
weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and
maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 deg F and relative humidity between 25 and 55
percent during remainder of construction period.
1.7
WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that fail in materials or
workmanship, or have warped (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch in a 42-by-84-inch section, within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or
replacement of defective doors.
2. Warranty shall be in effect during the following period of time from date of Substantial
Completion:
STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS
08 14 33 - 1
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
a. Interior Doors: Life of installation.
PART 2
2.1
PRODUCTS
MATERIALS
A. General: Use only materials that comply with referenced standards and other requirements
specified.
1. Assemble interior doors, including components, with either dry-use or wet-use adhesives
complying with ASTM D 5572 for finger joints and with ASTM D 5751 for joints other than
finger joints.
2.2
INTERIOR STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS
A. Interior Stile and Rail Wood Doors: Interior doors complying with WDMA I.S.6, "Industry
Standard for Wood Stile and Rail Doors," and with other requirements specified.
1. Finish and Grade: Opaque and Standard.
2. Wood Species: Manufacturer's standard softwood species and cut.
3. Stile and Rail Construction: Edge-glued solid lumber or veneered, structural composite
lumber or veneered edge- and end-glued lumber.
4. Raised-Panel Construction: Edge-glued solid lumber.
5. Raised-Panel Thickness: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than that required by
WDMA I.S.6 for design group indicated.
6. Molding Profile (Sticking): As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
7. Mark, label, or otherwise identify stile and rail wood doors as complying with WDMA I.S.6
and grade specified. Include panel design number if applicable.
2.3
STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOOR FABRICATION
A. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply
with DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings,
BHMA-156.115-W, and hardware templates.
1. Coordinate measurements of hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and
alignment before factory machining.
2.4
SHOP PRIMING
A. Doors for Opaque Finish: Shop prime faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises
with one coat of wood primer specified in Section 09 91 23 "Interior Painting."
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
EXAMINATION
A. Examine doors and installed door frames, with Installer present, before hanging doors.
1. Verify that installed frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location,
and swing characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs.
2. Reject doors with defects.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A. Hardware: Use existing hardware from doors being replaced.
STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS
08 14 33 - 2
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
B. Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and
referenced quality standard, and as indicated.
C. Job-Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as indicated below; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted
with fire-rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal edges of doors, edges of cutouts,
and mortises after fitting and machining.
1. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. Provide 1/4
inch from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering unless otherwise indicated.
2. Bevel non-fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches at lock and hinge edges.
3.3
ADJUSTING
A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely.
B. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or do not comply with requirements.
Doors may be repaired or refinished if Work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing.
END OF SECTION 08 14 33
STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS
08 14 33 - 3
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
SECTION 08 31 13 - ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Access doors and frames for walls.
1.3
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
PART 2
2.1
PRODUCTS
ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Acudor Products, Inc.
2. Cesco Products.
3. Elmdor/Stoneman; Div. of Acorn Engineering Co.
4. J. L. Industries, Inc.
5. Karp Associates, Inc.
6. Larsen's Manufacturing Company.
7. Milcor Limited Partnership.
8. Nystrom Building Products Co.
9. Williams Bros. Corporation of America (The).
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of access door and frame from single source from single manufacturer.
C. Flush Access Doors with Exposed Flanges:
1. Assembly Description: Fabricate door to fit flush to frame. Provide manufacturer's standard-width exposed flange, proportional to door size.
2. Locations: Walls.
3. Door Size: .As indicated
4. Uncoated Steel Sheet for Door: Nominal 0.060 inch, 16 gage.
a. Finish: Factory prime.
5. Frame Material: Same material, thickness, and finish as door.
6. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard piano hinge.
7. Hardware: Latch.
D. Hardware:
1. Latch: Self-latching bolt operated by screwdriver.
ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
08 31 13 - 1
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
2.2
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
MATERIALS
A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
B. Steel Sheet: Uncoated or electrolytic zinc coated, ASTM A 879/A 879M, with cold-rolled steel
sheet substrate complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), exposed.
C. Frame Anchors: Same type as door face.
D. Inserts, Bolts, and Anchor Fasteners:
ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329.
2.3
Hot-dip
galvanized
steel
according
to
FABRICATION
A. General: Provide access door and frame assemblies manufactured as integral units ready
for installation.
B. Metal Surfaces: For metal surfaces exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed pitting,
seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness.
C. Doors and Frames: Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Furnish
attachment devices and fasteners of type required to secure access doors to types of supports indicated.
D. Latching Mechanisms: Furnish number required to hold doors in flush, smooth plane when
closed.
2.4
FINISHES
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,
temporary protective covering before shipping.
C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.
Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range
of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
D. Steel Finishes:
1. Factory Prime: Apply manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal primer immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment.
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing access doors and frames.
B. Install doors flush with adjacent finish surfaces or recessed to receive finish material.
ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
08 31 13 - 2
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
3.2
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
ADJUSTING
A. Adjust doors and hardware, after installation, for proper operation.
B. Remove and replace doors and frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise damaged.
END OF SECTION 08 31 13
ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
08 31 13 - 3
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
SECTION 08 71 00 - DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Mechanical door hardware for the following:
a. Swinging doors.
2. Cylinders for door hardware specified in other Sections.
B. Alternates: Refer to Section 01 23 00 "Alternates, for alternates affecting the work of this
Section.
1.3
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Other Action Submittals:
1. Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of Installer, detailing fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as installation procedures and diagrams.
Coordinate final door hardware schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure
proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Supplier of products and an employer of workers trained and approved by product manufacturers and an Architectural Hardware Consultant who is available
during the course of the Work to consult with Contractor, Architect, and Owner about door
hardware and keying.
B. Accessibility Requirements: For door hardware on doors in an accessible route, comply with
the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility
Guidelines and ICC/ANSI A117.1.
1. Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the
wrist and that operate with a force of not more than 5 lbf.
2. Comply with the following maximum opening-force requirements:
a. Interior, Non-Fire-Rated Hinged Doors: 5 lbf applied perpendicular to door.
3. Adjust door closer sweep periods so that, from an open position of 70 degrees, the door
will take at least 3 seconds to move to a point 3 inches from the latch, measured to the
leading edge of the door.
1.5
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver keys to Owner by registered mail or overnight package service.
DOOR HARDWARE
08 71 00 - 1
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
1.6
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within specified
warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion, unless otherwise indicated.
a. Manual Closers: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2
2.1
PRODUCTS
SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE
A. Provide door hardware for each door as scheduled on Drawings to comply with requirements
in this Section.
1. Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color indicated, and named
manufacturers' products.
2. Sequence of Operation: Provide electrified door hardware function, sequence of operation, and interface with other building control systems indicated.
B. Designations: Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive
qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in Part 3 "Door Hardware Schedule" Article. Products are identified by using door hardware designations, as follows:
1. Named Manufacturers' Products: Manufacturer and product designation are listed for
each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing minimum requirements.
Manufacturers' names are abbreviated in Part 3 "Door Hardware Schedule" Article.
2.2
HINGES
A. Hinges: BHMA A156.1.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Bommer Industries, Inc.
b. Hager Companies.
c. McKinney Products Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.
d. Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div. of The Stanley Works.
2.3
MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHES
A. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard strike for each lock bolt or latchbolt complying with
requirements indicated for applicable lock or latch and with strike box and curved lip extended to protect frame; finished to match lock or latch.
B. Bored Locks: BHMA A156.2; Grade 1; Series 4000.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:
a. Yale Security Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.
2.4
AUXILIARY LOCKS
A. Bored Auxiliary Locks: BHMA A156.5: Grade 1; with strike that suits frame.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Yale Security Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.
DOOR HARDWARE
08 71 00 - 2
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
2.5
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
LOCK CYLINDERS
A. Lock Cylinders: Tumbler type, constructed from brass or bronze, stainless steel, or nickel silver.
1. Manufacturer: Same manufacturer as for locking devices.
2.6
KEYING
A. Keying System:
1. Existing System:
a. Master key or grand master key locks to Owner's existing system.
B. Keys: Nickel silver.
2.7
MECHANICAL STOPS AND HOLDERS
A. Wall Bumpers: 2 1/2” diameter; 1” nominal projection
1. Finish: BHMA #630
2. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. McKinney: WS03
b. Ives: WS407CCV
c. Trimco: 1270CV
2.8
DOOR GASKETING
A. Door Gasketing: BHMA A156.22; air leakage not to exceed 0.50 cfm per foot of crack length
for gasketing other than for smoke control, as tested according to ASTM E 283; with resilient
or flexible seal strips that are easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained
by manufacturer.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:
a. McKinney Products Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.
2.9
FABRICATION
A. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws that comply with commercially recognized industry standards for application intended, except aluminum fasteners are
not permitted. Provide Phillips flat-head screws with finished heads to match surface of door
hardware, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Concealed Fasteners: For door hardware units that are exposed when door is closed,
except for units already specified with concealed fasteners. Do not use through bolts for
installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed unless it is the only
means of securely attaching the door hardware. Where through bolts are used on hollow
door and frame construction, provide sleeves for each through bolt.
2. Fasteners for Wood Doors: Comply with requirements in DHI WDHS.2, "Recommended
Fasteners for Wood Doors."
3. Gasketing Fasteners: Provide noncorrosive fasteners for exterior applications and elsewhere as indicated.
2.10
FINISHES
A. Provide finishes complying with BHMA A156.18 as indicated in door hardware schedule.
DOOR HARDWARE
08 71 00 - 3
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,
temporary protective covering before shipping.
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
A. Steel Doors and Frames: For surface applied door hardware, drill and tap doors and frames
according to ANSI/SDI A250.6.
B. Wood Doors: Comply with DHI WDHS.5 "Recommended Hardware Reinforcement Locations
for Mineral Core Wood Flush Doors."
C. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights to comply with the following unless
otherwise indicated or required to comply with governing regulations.
1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: ANSI/SDI A250.8.
2. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for
Wood Flush Doors."
D. Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where
cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to
be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing work. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved.
1. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation.
2. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space
fasteners and anchors according to industry standards.
E. Hinges: Install types and in quantities indicated in door hardware schedule but not fewer than
the number recommended by manufacturer for application indicated or one hinge for every
30 inches of door height, whichever is more stringent, unless other equivalent means of support for door, such as spring hinges or pivots, are provided.
F. Stops: Provide floor stops for doors unless wall or other type stops are indicated in door
hardware schedule. Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic.
G. Perimeter Gasketing: Apply to head and jamb, forming seal between door and frame.
H. Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure
proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate
as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and
ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements.
DOOR HARDWARE
08 71 00 - 4
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
3.2
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE
HW-01
2
1
1
EA HINGE
EA DUMMY LEVER
SET WEATHERSTRIP
T4A3786 4.5 X 4.5
MATCH EXISTING
MCKS88BL
652
MCK
BLK
MCK
ONITY DEADLOCK PROVIDED BY OWNER. DOOR AND FRAME PREP BY DOOR & FRAME
SUPPLIER.
HW-02
3
1
EA
EA
HINGE
WALL STOP
T4A3786 4.5 X 4.5
WS03
652
630
MCK
MCK
ONITY CLASSROOM FUNCTION LOCK PROVIDED BY OWNER. DOOR AND FRAME PREP BY
DOOR & FRAME SUPPLIER.
END OF SECTION 08 71 00
DOOR HARDWARE
08 71 00 - 5
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
SECTION 09 22 16 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. This Section includes non-load-bearing steel framing members for the following applications:
1. Interior framing systems (e.g., supports for partition walls, framed soffits, furring, etc.).
2. Interior suspension systems (e.g., supports for ceilings, suspended soffits, etc.).
1.3
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies that incorporate
non-load-bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in
assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.
B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according
to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.
PART 2
2.1
PRODUCTS
NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL
A. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.
1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40, hot-dip galvanized, unless otherwise indicated.
2.2
SUSPENSION SYSTEM COMPONENTS
A. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625-inch- diameter
wire, or double strand of 0.0475-inch- diameter wire.
B. Hanger Attachments to Concrete:
1. Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with holes or loops for attaching
wire hangers and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 5 times that imposed by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488 by an independent testing agency.
a. Type: Cast-in-place anchor, designed for attachment to concrete forms.
C. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.162-inch diameter.
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
09 22 16 - 1
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
D. Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base-metal thickness of
0.0538 inch and minimum 1/2-inch- wide flanges.
1. Depth: 1-1/2 inches.
E. Furring Channels (Furring Members):
1. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, 7/8 inch deep.
a. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch.
2.3
FRAMING SYSTEMS
A. Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. Provide one of the following:
1. Standard studs and runners:
a. Minimum yield strength: 33 ksi.
b. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 33 mil.
c. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.
2. Studs and Runners fabricated from high strength steel:
a. Minimum yield strength:
(1) Studs: 65 ksi.
(2) Runners: 50 ksi.
b. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 26 mil.
c. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.
d. Basis of Design: ProSTUD Drywall Framing System by ClarkDietrich Building Systems.
3. Do not mix stud and runner types. Provide one of the above systems throughout the project.
B. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide one of the following:
1. Single Long-Leg Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runner with 2-inch- deep flanges in
thickness not less than indicated for studs, installed with studs friction fit into top runner
and with continuous bridging located within 12 inches of the top of studs to provide lateral
bracing.
2. Double-Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runners, inside runner with 2-inch- deep
flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs and fastened to studs, and outer
runner sized to friction fit inside runner.
C. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated.
1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0312 inch.
D. Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: 0.0538-inch bare-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inchwide flanges.
1. Depth: 1-1/2 inches.
2. Clip Angle: Not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches, 0.068-inch- thick, galvanized steel.
E. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645.
1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch.
2. Depth: 7/8 inch.
F. Resilient Furring: Provide one of the following products. No Substitutions allowed.
1. Clark Dietrich RC-Deluxe
2. Phillips RC-2.
2.4
AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards.
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
09 22 16 - 2
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
1. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding
power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal
frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other
conditions affecting performance.
1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
PREPARATION
A. Suspended Assemblies: Coordinate installation of suspension systems with installation of
overhead structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building
structure have been installed to receive hangers at spacing required to support the Work and
that hangers will develop their full strength.
1. Furnish concrete inserts and other devices indicated to other trades for installation in advance of time needed for coordination and construction.
B. Coordination with Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials:
1. Before sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, attach offset anchor plates or ceiling
runners (tracks) to surfaces indicated to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials. Where
offset anchor plates are required, provide continuous plates fastened to building structure
not more than 24 inches o.c.
2. After sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, remove them only to extent necessary
for installation of non-load-bearing steel framing. Do not reduce thickness of fire-resistive
materials below that required for fire-resistance ratings indicated. Protect adjacent fireresistive materials from damage.
3.3
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754, except comply with framing sizes and spacing indicated.
1. Portland Cement Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 1063
that apply to framing installation.
2. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to
framing installation.
B. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy
trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction.
C. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies.
D. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing members. Frame both sides of joints independently.
3.4
INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS
A. Install suspension system components in sizes and spacings indicated on Drawings, but not
less than those required by referenced installation standards for assembly types and other
assembly components indicated.
B. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by
building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement.
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
09 22 16 - 3
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
C. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows:
1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling
plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system.
a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.
2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices.
a. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within
performance limits established by referenced installation standards.
3. Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to inserts,
eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate,
and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail.
4. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck.
5. Do not attach hangers to permanent metal forms. Furnish cast-in-place hanger inserts
that extend through forms.
6. Do not attach hangers to rolled-in hanger tabs of composite steel floor deck.
7. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit.
D. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Wire tie furring channels to supports.
E. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet
measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between
parallel members that will receive finishes.
3.5
INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES
A. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.
B. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction.
1. Space studs as follows:
a. Single-Layer Application: 16 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
b. Multilayer Application: 16 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
C. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated
to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions
above ceiling.
1. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to
produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished assemblies.
2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs.
a. Install two studs at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated.
b. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-inch
clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished assembly.
c. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead
structure.
3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings, unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads.
4. Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to
underside of solid structure.
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
09 22 16 - 4
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
5. Sound-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound-rated assembly indicated.
D. Direct Furring:
1. Screw to wood framing.
2. Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment,
or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c.
E. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than
1/8 inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.
END OF SECTION 09 22 16
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
09 22 16 - 5
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
SECTION 09 24 00 - CEMENT PLASTERING
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 - General Requirements, apply to work specified in this Section.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Patching and repair of existing Portland Cement plaster.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Cement Plaster: Perform work in accordance with ASTM C926.
B. Allowable Tolerances: For flat surfaces, do not exceed 1/8 inch in 10 feet for bow, warp,
plumb or level, including surfaces to receive applied finishes (tile, etc.).
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturer's Data Plaster: For information only, submit copies of the manufacturer's
product specifications and installation instructions for each material, and include other data
as may be required to show compliance with these specifications. Distribute an additional
copy of each installation instruction to the Installer.
1.5
PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Except for sand and water, deliver materials to the site in sealed containers or bags fully
identified with manufacturer's name, brand, type, and grade. Store all materials in a dry, well
ventilated space, under cover and off the ground.
1.6
JOB CONDITIONS
A. Temporary Heat and Ventilation: Comply with ANSI A42.1 and A42.2 as applicable to the
work.
B. Do not apply plaster when ambient temperature is less than 50 degrees F both during
installation and until cured.
C. Protect contiguous work from soiling, spattering, moisture deterioration and other harmful
effects, which might result from plastering.
PART 2
2.1
PRODUCTS
METAL LATH
A. Expanded-Metal Lath: ASTM C 847 with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60, hot-dip galvanized zinc
coating.
1. Diamond-Mesh Lath: Self-furring, 2.5 lb/sq. yd..
CEMENT PLASTERING
09 24 00 - 1
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
2.2
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
PLASTER MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I.
1. Color for Finish Coats: White, gray or mix as needed to match existing.
B. Lime: ASTM C 206, Type S; or ASTM C 207, Type S.
C. Sand Aggregate: ASTM C 897.
1. Color for Job-Mixed Finish Coats: White, gray or mix as needed to match existing.
D. Ready-Mixed Finish-Coat Plaster: Mill-mixed portland cement, aggregates, coloring agents,
and proprietary ingredients.
2.3
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Water for Mixing: Potable and free of substances capable of affecting plaster set or of
damaging plaster, lath, or accessories.
B. Fiber for Base Coat: Alkaline-resistant glass or polypropylene fibers, 1/2 inch long, free of
contaminants, manufactured for use in portland cement plaster.
C. Bonding Compound: ASTM C 932.
D. Steel Drill Screws: For metal-to-metal fastening, ASTM C 1002 or ASTM C 954, as required
by thickness of metal being fastened; with pan head that is suitable for application; in lengths
required to achieve penetration through joined materials of no fewer than three exposed
threads.
E. Fasteners for Attaching Metal Lath to Substrates: Complying with ASTM C 1063.
F. Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, not less than 0.0475-inch
diameter, unless otherwise indicated.
2.4
PLASTER MIXES
A. General: Comply with ASTM C 926 for applications indicated.
1. Fiber Content: Add fiber to base-coat mixes after ingredients have mixed at least two
minutes. Comply with fiber manufacturer's written instructions for fiber quantities in mixes,
but do not exceed 1 lb of fiber/cu. yd. of cementitious materials.
B. Base-Coat Mixes for Use over Metal Lath: Scratch and brown coats for three-coat
plasterwork as follows:
1. Portland Cement Mixes:
a. Scratch Coat: For cementitious material, mix 1 part portland cement and 3/4 to 1-1/2
parts lime. Use 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material.
b. Brown Coat: For cementitious material, mix 1 part portland cement and 3/4 to 1-1/2
parts lime. Use 3 to 5 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material, but not less
than volume of aggregate used in scratch coat.
C. Base-Coat Mixes: Single base coats for two-coat plasterwork as follows:
1. Portland Cement Mix: For cementitious material, mix 1 part portland cement and 3/4 to 11/2 parts lime. Use 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material.
D. Job-Mixed Finish-Coat Mixes:
CEMENT PLASTERING
09 24 00 - 2
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
1. Portland Cement Mix: For cementitious materials, mix 1 part portland cement and 1-1/2
to 2 parts lime. Use 1-1/2 to 3 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material.
E. Factory-Prepared Finish-Coat Mixes: For ready-mixed finish-coat plasters, comply with
manufacturer's written instructions.
PART 3
EXECUTION
A. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
PREPARATION
A. Protect adjacent work from soiling, spattering, moisture deterioration, and other harmful
effects caused by plastering.
B. Prepare solid substrates for plaster that are smooth or that do not have the suction capability
required to bond with plaster according to ASTM C 926.
3.3
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Install components according to requirements for design
designations from listing organization and publication indicated on Drawings.
3.4
INSTALLING METAL LATH
A. Expanded-Metal Lath: Install according to ASTM C 1063.
1. Partition Framing and Vertical Furring: Install flat diamond-mesh lath.
2. Flat-Ceiling and Horizontal Framing: Install flat diamond-mesh lath.
3. Curved-Ceiling Framing: Install flat diamond-mesh lath.
4. On Solid Surfaces, Not Otherwise Furred: Install self-furring, diamond-mesh lath.
3.5
INSTALLING ACCESSORIES
A. Install according to ASTM C 1063 and at locations indicated on Drawings.
B. Reinforcement for External Corners:
1. Install cornerbead at interior locations.
3.6
PLASTER APPLICATION
A. General: Comply with ASTM C 926.
1. Do not deviate more than plus or minus 1/4 inch in 10 feet from a true plane in finished
plaster surfaces, as measured by a 10-foot straightedge placed on surface.
2. Finish plaster flush with metal frames and other built-in metal items or accessories that
act as a plaster ground unless otherwise indicated. Where casing bead does not
terminate plaster at metal frame, cut base coat free from metal frame before plaster sets
and groove finish coat at junctures with metal.
3. Provide plaster surfaces that are ready to receive field-applied finishes indicated.
B. Bonding Compound: Apply on plaster bases.
C. Walls; Base-Coat Mixes for Use over Metal Lath: Scratch and brown coats for three-coat
plasterwork; 3/4-inch thickness.
1. Portland cement mixes.
CEMENT PLASTERING
09 24 00 - 3
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
D. Ceilings; Base-Coat Mixes for Use over Metal Lath: Scratch and brown coats for three-coat
plasterwork; 1/2 inch thick.
1. Portland cement mixes.
E. Walls; Base-Coat Mix: Scratch coat for two-coat plasterwork, 3/8 inch thick on existing
plaster.
1. Portland cement mixes.
F. Ceilings; Base-Coat Mix: Scratch coat for two-coat plasterwork, 1/4 inch thick on existing
plaster.
1. Portland cement mixes.
G. Plaster Finish Coats: Apply to provide finish to match existing.
H. Concealed Interior Plasterwork:
1. Where plaster application will be concealed behind built-in cabinets, similar furnishings,
and equipment, apply finish coat.
2. Where plaster application will be concealed above suspended ceilings and in similar
locations, finish coat may be omitted.
3.7
PLASTER REPAIRS
A. Repair or replace work to eliminate cracks, dents, blisters, buckles, crazing and check
cracking, dry outs, efflorescence, sweat outs, and similar defects and where bond to
substrate has failed.
3.8
PROTECTION
A. Remove temporary protection and enclosure of other work. Promptly remove plaster from
door frames, windows, and other surfaces not indicated to be plastered. Repair floors, walls,
and other surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during plastering.
END OF SECTION 09 24 00
CEMENT PLASTERING
09 24 00 - 4
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
SECTION 09 29 00 - GYPSUM BOARD
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Interior gypsum board.
1.3
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Samples: For the following products:
1. Trim Accessories: Full-size Sample in 12-inch- long length for each trim accessory indicated.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Mockups: Before beginning gypsum board installation, install mockups of at least 100 sq. ft.
in surface area to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and
execution.
1. Install mockups for the following:
a. Each level of gypsum board finish indicated for use in exposed locations.
2. Apply or install final decoration indicated, including painting and wallcoverings, on exposed surfaces for review of mockups.
3. Simulate finished lighting conditions for review of mockups.
4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the
completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
1.5
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage. Stack
panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging.
1.6
FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent.
B. Do not install paper-faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned.
C. Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold
damaged.
1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
GYPSUM BOARD
09 29 00 - 1
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or
splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
PART 2
2.1
PRODUCTS
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials
and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by
an independent testing agency.
B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according
to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.
2.2
GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL
A. Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area
and that correspond with support system indicated.
2.3
INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. CertainTeed Corp.
2. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC.
3. Lafarge North America Inc.
4. National Gypsum Company.
5. USG Corporation.
B. Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.
1. Thickness: 5/8 inch.
2. Long Edges: Tapered.
2.4
TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.
1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet, plastic, or paper-faced galvanized
steel sheet.
2. Shapes:
a. Cornerbead.
b. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.
c. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.
d. Expansion (control) joint.
2.5
JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS
A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.
B. Joint Tape:
1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper.
C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat use formulation that is compatible
with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.
1. Prefilling: At open joints and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound.
GYPSUM BOARD
09 29 00 - 2
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and
trim flanges, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.
a. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories.
3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.
4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.
2.6
AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and
manufacturer's written recommendations.
B. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from
0.033 to 0.112 inch thick.
C. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing) produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag
wool, or rock wool.
1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of assembly.
D. Acoustical Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission
through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing
representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Hilti, Inc: CP 506 Smoke and Acoustic Sealant.
b. Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR.
c. Specified Technologies, Inc.; Smoke N Sound Acoustical Sealant.
d. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.
2. Acoustical joint sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and substrates including welded hollow-metal frames and framing, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold
damaged.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL
A. Comply with ASTM C 840.
B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to
avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member.
C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends
with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place.
GYPSUM BOARD
09 29 00 - 3
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate
supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered
edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do
not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings.
E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels.
F. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally.
1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area.
2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits.
3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof
slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow
1/4- to 3/8-inch- wide joints to install sealant.
G. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- wide spaces at these locations and trim edges
with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting
structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.
H. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.
3.3
I.
STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant
at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919
and with manufacturer's written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off
sound-flanking paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings.
J.
Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels unless blankets are readily
installed after panels have been installed on one side.
APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations:
1. Type X: Vertical surfaces unless otherwise indicated.
B. Single-Layer Application:
1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing unless otherwise indicated.
2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) or horizontally
(perpendicular to framing) unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated
assembly, and minimize end joints.
a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of
panels.
3. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.
3.4
INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions.
GYPSUM BOARD
09 29 00 - 4
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
B. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect.
C. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations:
1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners.
2. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges.
3. L-Bead: Use where indicated.
3.5
FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD
A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations,
fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.
B. Prefill open joints and damaged surface areas.
C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as
not intended to receive tape.
D. Curved Surfaces:
1. Install panels horizontally (perpendicular to supports) and unbroken, to extent possible,
across curved surface plus 12-inch- long straight sections at ends of curves and tangent
to them.
2. For double-layer construction, fasten base layer to studs with screws 16 inches o.c. Center gypsum board face layer over joints in base layer, and fasten to studs with screws
spaced 12 inches o.c.
E. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to
ASTM C 840:
1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated.
2. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise indicated.
3.6
FINISHING SOLID MINERAL PROFILE PANELING
A. Finish joints in accordance with panel manufacturer’s recommendations.
3.7
PROTECTION
A. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors and other
non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall
application.
B. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.
C. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.
1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or
splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
END OF SECTION 09 29 00
GYPSUM BOARD
09 29 00 - 5
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
SECTION 09 51 13 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. This Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for ceilings.
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A. LR: Light Reflectance coefficient.
B. NRC: Noise Reduction Coefficient.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items
are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved:
1. Ceiling suspension system members.
2. Method of attaching hangers to building structure.
a. Furnish layouts for cast-in-place anchors, clips, and other ceiling attachment devices
whose installation is specified in other Sections.
3. Ceiling-mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers,
access panels, and special moldings.
4. Minimum Drawing Scale: 1/8 inch = 1 foot.
C. Samples for Verification: For each component indicated and for each exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below.
1. Acoustical Panel: Set of 6-inch- square Samples of each type, color, pattern, and texture.
2. Exposed Suspension System Members, Moldings, and Trim: Set of 12-inch- long Samples of each type, finish, and color.
D. Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations:
1. Acoustical Ceiling Panel: Obtain each type through one source from a single manufacturer.
2. Suspension System: Obtain each type through one source from a single manufacturer.
B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of
Substantial Completion.
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
09 51 13 - 1
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements
in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination."
1.6
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver acoustical panels, suspension system components, and accessories to Project site in
original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where
they will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct
sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.
B. Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized
moisture content.
C. Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way.
1.7
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed
and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete,
and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for
Project when occupied for its intended use.
1. Pressurized Plenums: Operate ventilation system for not less than 48 hours before beginning acoustical panel ceiling installation.
1.8
COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical panels and suspension system with other
construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC
equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.
PART 2
2.1
PRODUCTS
ACOUSTICAL PANELS, GENERAL
A. Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard panels of configuration indicated that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types, patterns, acoustical ratings, and light reflectances, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Mounting Method for Measuring NRC: Type E-400; plenum mounting in which face of
test specimen is 15-3/4 inches away from test surface per ASTM E 795.
B. Acoustical Panel Colors and Patterns: Match appearance characteristics indicated for each
product type.
1. Where appearance characteristics of acoustical panels are indicated by referencing pattern designations in ASTM E 1264 and not manufacturers' proprietary product designations, provide products selected by Architect from each manufacturer's full range that
comply with requirements indicated for type, pattern, color, light reflectance, acoustical
performance, edge detail, and size.
C. Broad Spectrum Antimicrobial Fungicide and Bactericide Treatment: Provide acoustical panels treated with manufacturer's standard antimicrobial formulation that inhibits fungus, mold,
mildew, and gram-positive and gram-negative bacteria and showing no mold, mildew, or bacterial growth when tested according to ASTM D 3273 and evaluated according to
ASTM D 3274 or ASTM G 21.
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
09 51 13 - 2
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
2.2
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
ACOUSTICAL PANELS FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING APC-1
A. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Fissured Square Lay-in, 755 or one of the following:
1. USG Interiors, Inc.; Fissured, 562.
2. Certainteed; Directional Fissured, FH-197
B. Classification: Provide panels complying with ASTM E 1264 for type, form, and pattern as
follows:
1. Type and Form: Type III, mineral base with painted finish; Form 2, water felted.
2. Pattern: CD (perforated, small holes and fissured).
C. Color: White.
D. LR: Not less than 0.80.
E. NRC: Not less than 0.55.
F. Edge/Joint Detail: Square.
G. Thickness: 5/8 inch.
H. Modular Size: 24 by 48 inches.
I.
2.3
Antimicrobial Treatment: Broad spectrum fungicide and bactericide based.
METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL
A. Metal Suspension System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard direct-hung metal
suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply
with applicable requirements in ASTM C 635.
B. Finishes and Colors, General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Provide manufacturer's standard factory-applied finish for type of system indicated.
C. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1,
"Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements.
1. Anchors in Concrete: Anchors of type and material indicated below, with holes or loops
for attaching hangers of type indicated and with capability to sustain, without failure, a
load equal to five Insert safety factor times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 or ASTM E 1512 as applicable, conducted by a
qualified testing and inspecting agency.
a. Type: Postinstalled expansion anchors.
b. Corrosion Protection:
Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with
ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5 (0.005 mm) for Class SC 1 service condition.
2. Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application
indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency.
D. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements:
1. Zinc-Coated, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper.
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
09 51 13 - 3
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
2. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at 3 times hanger design load (ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.106inch- diameter wire.
E. Hold-Down Clips: Where indicated, provide manufacturer's standard hold-down clips spaced
24 inches o.c. on all cross tees.
2.4
METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING APC-1
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
2. Chicago Metallic Corporation.
3. USG Interiors, Inc.
4. Certainteed.
B. Wide-Face, Capped, Double-Web, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll
formed from cold-rolled steel sheet, prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 653/A 653M, not less than G30 coating designation, with prefinished 15/16-inch- wide metal caps on flanges.
1. Structural Classification: Intermediate-duty system.
2. End Condition of Cross Runners: Override (stepped) or butt-edge type.
3. Face Design: Flat, flush.
4. Cap Material: Steel cold-rolled sheet.
5. Cap Finish: Painted white.
2.5
METAL EDGE MOLDINGS AND TRIM
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
2. Chicago Metallic Corporation.
3. USG Interiors, Inc.
4. Certainteed.
B. Roll-Formed, Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that comply with seismic
design requirements; formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as that
used for exposed flanges of suspension system runners.
1. Provide manufacturer's standard edge moldings that fit acoustical panel edge details and
suspension systems indicated and that match width and configuration of exposed runners, unless otherwise indicated.
2. For lay-in panels with reveal edge details, provide stepped edge molding that forms reveal of same depth and width as that formed between edge of panel and flange at exposed suspension member.
3. For circular penetrations of ceiling, provide edge moldings fabricated to diameter required
to fit penetration exactly.
2.6
ACOUSTICAL SEALANT
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints:
a. Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant.
b. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
09 51 13 - 4
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
B. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nonsag,
paintable, nonstaining latex sealant, with a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24), complying with ASTM C 834 and effective in reducing airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in
building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to
ASTM E 90.
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing to which acoustical
panel ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical
panel ceilings.
1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
PREPARATION
A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths
at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders, and
comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans.
3.3
INSTALLATION
A. General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636 and seismic design requirements indicated, per manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems
Handbook."
B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows:
1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling
plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system.
2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces
by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.
3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in
form of trapezes or equivalent devices.
4. Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports above with a minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to inserts, eye
screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate and that will not
deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures.
5. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck. Fasten hangers to cast-in-place hanger inserts, postinstalled mechanical or adhesive anchors, or
power-actuated fasteners that extend through forms into concrete.
6. When steel framing does not permit installation of hanger wires at spacing required, install carrying channels or other supplemental support for attachment of hanger wires.
7. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs.
8. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members.
9. Space hangers not more than 48 inches o.c. along each member supported directly from
hangers, unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8 inches from ends
of each member.
10. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards and publications.
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
09 51 13 - 5
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
C. Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a minimum of four
tight turns. Suspend bracing from building's structural members as required for hangers,
without attaching to permanent metal forms, steel deck, or steel deck tabs. Fasten bracing
wires into concrete with cast-in-place or postinstalled anchors.
D. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and
where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels.
1. Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of
moldings before they are installed.
2. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches o.c. and not
more than 3 inches from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of
1/8 inch in 12 feet. Miter corners accurately and connect securely.
3. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim.
E. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members.
F. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension system
runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a
neat, precise fit.
1. Arrange directionally patterned acoustical panels as follows:
a. Install panels with pattern running in one direction parallel to long axis of space.
2. For square-edged panels, install panels with edges fully hidden from view by flanges of
suspension system runners and moldings.
3. For reveal-edged panels on suspension system runners, install panels with bottom of reveal in firm contact with top surface of runner flanges. Rout edges of cut panels to match
manufactured reveal.
4. For reveal-edged panels on suspension system members with box-shaped flanges, install panels with reveal surfaces in firm contact with suspension system surfaces and
panel faces flush with bottom face of runners.
5. Paint cut edges of panel remaining exposed after installation; match color of exposed
panel surfaces using coating recommended in writing for this purpose by acoustical panel
manufacturer.
6. Install hold-down clips in areas indicated, in areas required by authorities having jurisdiction, and for fire-resistance ratings; space as recommended by panel manufacturer's written instructions, unless otherwise indicated.
3.4
CLEANING
A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and
touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be
successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage.
END OF SECTION 09 51 13
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
09 51 13 - 6
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
SECTION 09 65 13 - RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Resilient base.
2. Resilient molding accessories.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product specified.
B. Samples for Verification: In manufacturer's standard sizes, but not less than 12 inches long,
of each product color and pattern specified.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer to perform work of this Section who
has specialized in installing resilient products similar to those required for this Project and
with a record of successful in-service performance.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type and color of product specified from one source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying the Work.
C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide products with the following fire-test-response
characteristics as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by
a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Critical Radiant Flux: 0.45 W/sq. cm or greater when tested per ASTM E 648.
2. Smoke Density: Maximum specific optical density of 450 or less when tested per
ASTM E 662.
1.5
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to Project site in manufacturer's original, unopened cartons and containers,
each bearing names of product and manufacturer, Project identification, and shipping and
handling instructions.
B. Store products in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained between 50 and 90 deg F.
C. Move products into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours before installation,
unless longer conditioning period is recommended in writing by manufacturer.
RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES
09 65 13 - 1
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
1.6
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Maintain a temperature of not less than 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F in spaces to receive
resilient products for at least 48 hours before installation, during installation, and for at least
48 hours after installation, unless manufacturer's written recommendations specify longer
time periods. After postinstallation period, maintain a temperature of not less than 55 deg F
or more than 95 deg F.
B. Do not install products until they are at the same temperature as the space where they are to
be installed.
C. For resilient products installed on traffic surfaces, close spaces to traffic during installation
and for time period after installation recommended in writing by manufacturer.
D. Coordinate resilient product installation with other construction to minimize possibility of damage and soiling during remainder of construction period. Install resilient products after other
finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.
1.7
EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with
protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents.
1. Furnish not less than 10 linear feet for each 500 linear feet or fraction thereof, of each different type, color, pattern, and size of resilient product installed.
2. Deliver extra materials to Owner.
PART 2
2.1
PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Burke Mercer Flooring Products; Division of Burke Industries, Inc.
2. Endura Rubber Flooring; Division of Burke Industries, Inc.
3. Flexco, Inc.
4. Johnsonite.
5. Mondo Rubber International, Inc.
6. Musson, R. C. Rubber Co.
7. Nora Rubber Flooring; Freudenberg Building Systems, Inc.
8. Roppe Corporation, USA.
9. VPI, LLC; Floor Products Division.
2.2
RESILIENT WALL BASE
A. Wall Base:
1. ASTM F 1861, Type TS (rubber, vulcanized thermoset), Group I (solid, homogeneous).
2. Color and Pattern: As indicated.
3. Style: Cove with top-set toe, except straight with no toe at carpet installations.
4. Minimum Thickness: 1/8 inch.
5. Height: 4 inches.
6. Lengths: Cut lengths 48 inches long or coils in manufacturer's standard length.
7. Outside Corners: Job formed or preformed.
8. Inside Corners: Job formed or preformed.
9. Surface: Smooth.
RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES
09 65 13 - 2
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
2.3
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
RESILIENT ACCESSORIES
A. Rubber Accessories:
1. Material Requirement: Type TS (rubber, vulcanized thermoset).
2. Color: To be selected.
3. Profile and Dimensions: As indicated.
2.4
INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES
A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland-cement-based formulation provided or approved by resilient product manufacturer for applications indicated.
B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and
substrate conditions indicated.
1. Use adhesives that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):
a. Cove Base Adhesives: Not more than 50 g/L.
b. Rubber Accessory Adhesives: Not more than 60 g/L.
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum
moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified
in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and
foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
1. Installation of resilient products indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
3.2
PREPARATION
A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products.
B. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.
C. Do not install resilient products until they are the same temperature as the space where they
are to be installed.
1. At least 48 hours in advance of installation, move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed.
D. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products.
3.3
RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base.
B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and
other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.
RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES
09 65 13 - 3
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practical without gaps at seams and with tops of
adjacent pieces aligned.
D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.
E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation.
F. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient
base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material.
G. Preformed Corners: Install preformed corners before installing straight pieces.
H. Job-Formed Corners:
1. Outside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible and form with returns
not less than 3 inches in length.
a. Form without producing discoloration (whitening) at bends.
2. Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible and form with returns
not less than 3 inches in length.
a. Miter or cope corners to minimize open joints.
3.4
RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient accessories.
B. Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates
throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of floor covering that would
otherwise be exposed.
3.5
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting resilient products.
B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient-product installation:
1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces.
2. Sweep and vacuum horizontal surfaces thoroughly.
3. Damp-mop horizontal surfaces to remove marks and soil.
C. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.
D. Cover resilient products subject to wear and foot traffic until Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 09 65 13
RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES
09 65 13 - 4
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
SECTION 09 65 17 - LINOLEUM FLOORING
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Linoleum sheet flooring.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 09 65 13 "Resilient Base and Accessories" for resilient base, reducer strips, and
other accessories installed with linoleum floor covering.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: For each type of floor covering. Include floor covering layouts, locations of
seams, edges, columns, doorways, enclosing partitions, built-in furniture, cabinets, and cutouts.
1. Show details of special patterns.
C. Samples for Verification: In manufacturer's standard size, but not less than 6-by-9-inch sections of each color and pattern of floor covering required.
D. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.
E. Maintenance Data: For each type of floor covering to include in maintenance manuals.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs workers for this Project who are
competent in techniques required by manufacturer for floor covering installation.
1. Engage an installer who employs workers for this Project who are certified by manufacturer for installation techniques required.
B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. Build mockups for floor coverings including resilient base and accessories.
a. Size: Minimum 100 sq. ft. for each type, color, and pattern in locations directed by
Architect.
1.5
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store floor coverings and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with
ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less
than 65 deg F or more than 90 deg F.
1. Sheet Flooring: Store rolls upright.
LINOLEUM FLOORING
09 65 17 - 1
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
1.6
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less
than 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive floor coverings during the following time periods:
1. 72 hours before installation.
2. During installation.
3. 72 hours after installation.
B. Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by
manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F.
C. Close spaces to traffic during floor covering installation.
D. Close spaces to traffic for 72 hours after floor covering installation.
E. Install floor coverings after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.
PART 2
2.1
PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Lenza Harmonium xf Sheet Linoleum by Johnsonite or comparable product by one of the following:
1. Forbo, Inc.
2. Tarkett Inc.
2.2
LINOLEUM FLOOR COVERING
A. Linoleum Sheet Flooring: ASTM F 2034, Type I, linoleum sheet with backing.
B. Seaming Method: Standard.
C. Thickness: 2.5 mm.
D. Colors and Patterns: 317 Landing Pier.
2.3
INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or
blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for applications indicated.
B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit products and substrate conditions indicated.
1. Use adhesives that have a VOC content of not more than 50 g/L when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
C. Floor Polish: Provide protective liquid floor polish products as recommended by manufacturer.
LINOLEUM FLOORING
09 65 17 - 2
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
PART 3
3.1
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
EXECUTION
EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum
moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in
other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign
deposits that might interfere with adhesion of floor coverings.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
PREPARATION
A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of
floor coverings.
B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.
1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners.
2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with floor covering adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents.
3. Slab Porosity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Install material in accordance with adhesive manufacturer’s application instructions for use
on non-porous substrates if applicable.
4. Alkalinity Testing: Perform pH testing according to ASTM F 710. Proceed with installation only if pH readings are not less than 7.0 and not greater than 8.5.
5. Moisture Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer and as follows. Proceed
with installation only after substrates pass testing.
a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation
only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours.
C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.
D. Do not install floor coverings until they are same temperature as space where they are to be
installed.
1. Move floor coverings and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at
least 72 hours in advance of installation.
E. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by floor coverings immediately before installation.
3.3
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor coverings.
B. Scribe and cut floor coverings to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings.
C. Extend floor coverings into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings.
LINOLEUM FLOORING
09 65 17 - 3
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
D. Maintain reference markers, holes, or openings that are in place or marked for future cutting
by repeating on floor coverings as marked on subfloor. Use chalk or other nonpermanent
marking device.
E. Install floor coverings on covers for telephone and electrical ducts and similar items in finished floor areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern between pieces of floor
covering installed on covers and adjoining floor covering. Tightly adhere floor covering edges
to substrates that abut covers and to cover perimeters.
F. Adhere floor coverings to substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to
produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints,
telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.
3.4
LINOLEUM SHEET FLOORING INSTALLATION
A. Unroll linoleum sheet flooring and allow it to stabilize before cutting and fitting.
B. Lay out linoleum sheet flooring as follows:
1. Maintain uniformity of flooring direction.
2. Minimize number of seams; place seams in inconspicuous and low-traffic areas, at least
6 inches away from parallel joints in flooring substrates.
3. Match edges of flooring for color shading at seams.
4. Avoid cross seams.
5. Eliminate deformations that result from hanging method used during drying process
(stove bar marks).
3.5
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of floor coverings.
B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing floor covering installation:
1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces.
2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly.
3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.
C. Protect floor coverings from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction
operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.
D. Floor Polish: Remove soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes from floor coverings before applying liquid floor polish.
1. Apply number of coat(s) as recommended by linoleum manufacturer.
E. After allowing drying room film (yellow film caused by linseed oil oxidation) to disappear,
cover floor coverings until Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 09 65 17
LINOLEUM FLOORING
09 65 17 - 4
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
SECTION 096816 - SHEET CARPETING
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
SUMMARY
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. Section Includes:
1. Surface preparation.
2. Installation of glue down carpeting on floor surfaces.
3. Accessories, including edge strips.
C. Related Sections include the following:
1. Section 09 65 13 "Resilient Base and Accessories" for resilient wall base and accessories
installed with carpet.
D. Alternates: Refer to Section 01 23 00 "Alternates, for alternates affecting the work of this Section.
1.2
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Clearly indicate the location of seams, method of joining seams, direction of carpet, type of
adhesive to be used, and method of integrating edge strips with carpet.
C. Provide product data on specified products, describing physical and performance characteristics,
sizes, patterns, colors available and method of installation.
D. Submit 4 inch long sample of each type of edge stripping to be used.
1.3
STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Receive carpet covered with original mill protective wrapping with register number properly
marked on each package. Store flat in dry protected well ventilated areas. Protect against
damage and soiling.
B. Store materials for 3 days prior to installation in the areas of installation to achieve temperature
stability.
C. Identify location of installation for each roll.
Subcontractor.
1.4
Transport to specific location at direction of
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Do not commence with carpet installation until painting and finishing work is complete and
ceilings and overhead work, tested, approved, and completed.
B. Maintain room temperature at minimum 70 degrees F and relative humidity at approximately that
at which the area is to be maintained for at least 24 hours prior to, during, and for 24 hours after
installation.
C. Provide sufficient lighting.
SHEET CARPETING
09 68 16 - 1
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
1.5
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in carpet manufacturing of type specified with 10 years
minimum experience.
B. Installer: Company with 5 years minimum documented experience in carpeting installations of
similar scope.
1.6
WARRANTY
A. Furnish manufacturer's warranty, agreeing to repair or replace defective materials and
workmanship. Carpet failure includes edge ravel, delamination, wear (in excess of 10% loss of
face fiber), snags, runs, delamination, and water marking.
B. Warranty Period: 5 years.
PART 2
2.1
PRODUCTS
MATERIALS
A. Masland Partition#7268; Color 62813 Cobblestone; Solution Dyed.
1. Primary Backing: BioCel™ Laminate Plus.
a. Thickness: 0.06 inch.
2. Secondary Backing: Fleece; 100% post consumer PET.
B. Environmental Requirements: Provide carpet that complies with testing and product
requirements of Carpet and Rug Institute's "Green Label Plus" program.
2.2
ACCESSORIES
A. Sub Floor Filler: White premixed latex; type recommended by carpet manufacturer.
B. Adhesives: Masland Contract - Time Saver 2950.
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
PREPARATION
A. Clean floors of dust, dirt, solvents, oil, grease, paint, plaster, and other substances detrimental to
proper performance of adhesive and carpet. Allow floors to thoroughly dry.
B. Ensure floors are level, with maximum surface variation of 1/4 inch in 10 feet non-cumulative.
Inspect subflooring for cracks, holes, abrasions, rough spots, ridges, or other conditions which will
adversely affect execution and quality of work.
C. Ensure concrete floors are free from scaling and irregularities and exhibit neutrality relative to
acidity and alkalinity.
D. Use an approved cementitious filler to patch cracks, small holes, and for leveling.
E. Substrate Test: ASTM E1907.
1. Perform in accordance with floor manufacturer’s requirements to determine suitability of
concrete subfloor for receiving resilient flooring with regard to moisture content and curing
SHEET CARPETING
09 68 16 - 2
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
compounds. Ensure concrete is within floor manufacturer’s recommended limits prior to
installation.
2. ASTM E1907 Qualitative Anhydrous Calcium Chloride Test: For subfloors with moisture
vapor permeance is in excess of 3 pounds water vapor per 1000 square feet per 24 hour
period, apply vapor retarder specified in Section 07265 or use floor coating manufacturer’s
suggested remedy.
F. Remove ridges and bumps. Fill depressions, low spots, cracks, joints, holes, indentations, and
other defects with leveling and patching compounds.
G. Clean substrate to remove paint, dirt, oil, grease, sealers, release agents, hardening compounds,
curing compounds, residual adhesives, and substances which could impair performance of
adhesive materials.
H. Broom clean and vacuum surfaces to remove dust and debris.
I.
Notify Contractor in writing of any condition which will prevent satisfactory completion of work. Do
not proceed until such defects are entirely corrected. Application or installation of carpet
constitutes acceptance of subfloors.
J.
Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing substrate and site conditions.
K. Any floors needing repairs or floating after floor covering is installed will be performed at
Subcontractor’s expense. Receive written approval from Subcontractor before performing any
floating or repairs.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A. Lay out rolls of carpet full for Subcontractor approval.
B. Check matching of carpet before cutting and ensure there is no visible variation between dye lots.
C. Cut carpet, where required, in manner to allow proper seam and pattern match. Ensure cuts are
straight, true, and unfrayed.
D. Seams:
1. Install in accordance with approved seam layout using a minimum of seams. Where possible
and practical, locate seams in areas of least amount of traffic.
2. Do not use small carpet fill strips.
3. Do not place seams perpendicular to doors or entries.
4. Cross joints necessary due to layout of areas: Absolute minimum allowed and only as
approved on shop drawings.
5. Place cross joints necessary due to length of rolls received, in the cutting, to avoid
occurrence at conspicuous locations, near doors or at pivot points, and obtain written
approval prior to seaming.
6. Join seams in recommended manner so as not to detract from the appearance of the carpet
installation and decrease its life expectancy. Ensure seams are straight, not overlapped or
peaked, and free of gaps.
E. Vacuum clean substrate. Spread adhesive in quantity recommended by manufacturer after
primer application to ensure proper adhesion over full area of installation. Apply only enough
adhesive to permit proper adhesion of carpet before initial set.
F. Lay carpet on floors with the run of the pile in same direction of anticipated traffic. Lay carpet on
stairs with run of the pile in opposite direction of anticipated traffic to avoid peeking of backing at
nosing.
SHEET CARPETING
09 68 16 - 3
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
G. Do not change run of pile in any one room or from one room to next where continuous through a
wall opening.
H. Cut and fit carpet neatly around projections through floor and to walls and other vertical surfaces.
I.
Fit carpet snugly to walls or other vertical surfaces where no base is scheduled, leaving no gaps.
J.
Do not place heavy objects such as furniture on carpeted surfaces for minimum of 24 hours or
until adhesive is set.
K. Entire carpet installation is to be laid tight and flat to subfloor, well fastened at edges, and present
a uniform pleasing appearance. Ensure monolithic color, pattern, and texture match within any
one area.
L. Install edging strips where carpet terminates at other floor coverings. Use full length pieces only.
Butt tight to vertical surfaces. Where splicing cannot be avoided, butt ends tight and flush.
3.3
CLEANING
A. Remove access adhesive from floor, base, and wall surfaces without damage.
B. Clean and vacuum carpet surfaces.
3.4
PROTECTION
A. Prohibit traffic from carpet areas for 24 hours after installation.
END OF SECTION 09 68 16
SHEET CARPETING
09 68 16 - 4
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
SECTION 09 84 13 - FIXED SOUND-ABSORPTIVE PANELS
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. This Section includes back-mounted acoustical wall panels.
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A. NRC: Noise reduction coefficient.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of panel edge, core material, and mounting indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: For acoustical wall panels. Include mounting devices and details; details at
panel head, base, joints, and corners; and details at ceiling, floor base, and wall intersections.
Include elevations showing panel sizes and direction of fabric weave and pattern matching.
Indicate panel edge and core materials.
C. Samples for Verification: For the following products. Prepare Samples from same material to
be used for the Work.
1. Fabric: Full-width by 36-inch- long Sample from dye lot to be used for the Work.
2. Panel Edge: 12-inch- long Sample showing edge profile, corner, and finish.
3. Core Material: 12-inch- square Sample showing corner.
4. Sample Panels: No larger than 36 by 36 inches. Show joints and mounting methods.
D. Maintenance Data: For acoustical wall panels to include in maintenance manuals. Include
fabric manufacturers' written cleaning and stain-removal recommendations.
E. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate products
similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful inservice performance.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain acoustical wall panels through one source from a single manufacturer.
C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials, fabrication, and installation.
1. Install mockups in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by
Architect.
FIXED SOUND-ABSORPTIVE PANELS
09 84 13 - 1
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
1.6
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Comply with fabric and acoustical wall panel manufacturers' written instructions for minimum
and maximum temperature and humidity requirements for shipment, storage, and handling.
B. Deliver materials and panels in unopened bundles and store in a temperature-controlled dry
place with adequate air circulation.
C. Protect panel edges from crushing and impact.
1.7
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical wall panels until spaces are enclosed
and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete,
and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for
Project when occupied for its intended use.
B. Air-Quality Limitations: Protect acoustical wall panels from exposure to airborne odors, such
as tobacco smoke, and install panels under conditions free from odor contamination of ambient air.
C. Field Measurements: Verify locations of acoustical wall panels by field measurements before
fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
1.8
WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace components of acoustical wall panels that fail in performance, materials, or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Failure in performance includes, but is not limited to, acoustical performance.
2. Failures in materials include, but are not limited to, fabric sagging, distorting, or releasing
from panel edge; or warping of core.
3. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2
2.1
PRODUCTS
SOUND-ABSORBING WALL UNITS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Acoustical Solutions, Inc.
2. Armstrong World Industries.
3. Conwed Designscape; an Owens Corning company.
4. Decoustics Limited; a CertainTeed Ceilings company.
5. Golterman & Sabo.
6. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc.
2.2
CORE MATERIALS
A. Glass-Fiber Board: ASTM C 612, Type IA or Types IA and IB; density as specified, unfaced,
dimensionally stable, molded rigid board, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed
indexes of 25 and 50, respectively.
FIXED SOUND-ABSORPTIVE PANELS
09 84 13 - 2
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
B. Impact-Resistant, Acoustically Transparent, Copolymer Face-Sheet Layer for High-Abuse
Applications: 1/16- to 1/8-inch- thick layer of perforated, noncombustible, copolymer sheet
laminated to face of core.
2.3
BACK-MOUNTED, EDGE-REINFORCED ACOUSTICAL WALL PANELS WITH GLASS-FIBER
BOARD CORE FSAP-1
A. Panel Construction: Manufacturer's standard panel construction consisting of facing material
laminated to front face, edges, and back border of dimensionally stable, rigid glass-fiber
board core; with edges chemically hardened to reinforce panel perimeter against warpage
and damage.
B. Nominal Core Density: 6 to 7 lb/cu. ft..
C. Core-Face Layer: Impact-resistant, acoustically transparent, copolymer face-sheet.
D. Facing Material: Knoll Versitility W432; 5 Cappuccino.
E. Nominal Core Thickness and Overall System NRC: 2 inches and not less than NRC 0.85, for
Type A mounting per ASTM E 795.
F. Panel Width: As indicated on Drawings.
G. Panel Height: Fabricated height as indicated on Drawings; mounting height as indicated on
Drawings.
H. Panel Edge Detail: Square.
I.
2.4
Corner Detail: Square to form continuous profile to match edge detail.
FABRICATION
A. Sound-Absorption Performance: Provide acoustical wall panels with minimum NRCs indicated, as determined by testing per ASTM C 423 for mounting type specified.
B. Acoustical Wall Panels: Panel construction consisting of facing material adhered to edges
and back border of dimensionally stable core; with rigid edges to reinforce panel perimeter
against warpage and damage.
1. Glass-Fiber Board: Resin harden areas of core for attachment of mounting devices.
C. Fabric Facing: Stretched straight, on the grain, tight, square, and free from puckers, ripples,
wrinkles, sags, blisters, seams, adhesive, or other foreign matter. Applied with visible surfaces fully covered.
1. Where square corners are indicated, tailor corners.
D. Core-Face Layer: Evenly stretched over core face and edges and securely attached to core;
free from puckers, ripples, wrinkles, sags.
E. Dimensional Tolerances of Finished Units: Plus or minus 1/16 inch for the following:
1. Thickness.
2. Edge straightness.
3. Overall length and width.
4. Squareness from corner to corner.
5. Chords, radii, and diameters.
FIXED SOUND-ABSORPTIVE PANELS
09 84 13 - 3
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
F. Back-Mounting Devices: Concealed on backside of panel, recommended to support weight
of panel, with base-support bracket system where recommended by manufacturer for additional support of panels, and as follows:
1. Metal "Z" Clips: Two-part panel clips, with one part of each clip mechanically attached to
back of panel and the other part to wall substrate, designed to allow for panel removal.
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
EXAMINATION
A. Examine fabric, substrates, blocking, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance
with requirements, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of
acoustical wall panels.
1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A. Install acoustical wall panels in locations indicated with vertical surfaces and edges plumb,
top edges level and in alignment with other panels, faces flush, and scribed to fit adjoining
work accurately at borders and at penetrations.
B. Comply with acoustical wall panel manufacturer's written instructions for installation of panels
using type of concealed mounting accessories indicated or, if not indicated, as recommended
by manufacturer. Anchor panels securely to supporting substrate.
C. Match and level fabric pattern and grain among adjacent panels.
D. Installation Tolerances: As follows:
1. Variation from Level and Plumb: Plus or minus 1/16 inch.
2. Variation of Panel Joints from Hairline: Not more than 1/32 inch wide.
3.3
CLEANING
A. Clip loose threads; remove pills and extraneous materials.
B. Clean panels with fabric facing, on completion of installation, to remove dust and other foreign materials according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3.4
PROTECTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and
Installer, to ensure that acoustical wall panels are without damage or deterioration at time of
Substantial Completion.
B. Replace acoustical wall panels that cannot be cleaned and repaired, in a manner approved
by Architect, before time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 09 84 13
FIXED SOUND-ABSORPTIVE PANELS
09 84 13 - 4
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
SECTION 09 91 23 - INTERIOR PAINTING
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. This Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following interior substrates:
1. Wood.
2. Gypsum board.
3. Concrete.
4. Plaster.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat indicated.
1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square.
2. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system.
3. Label each coat of each Sample.
4. Label each Sample for location and application area.
C. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following:
1. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules.
2. Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified in
Part 2, with the proposed product highlighted.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. MPI Standards:
1. Products: Complying with MPI standards indicated and listed in "MPI Approved Products
List."
2. Preparation and Workmanship: Comply with requirements in "MPI Architectural Painting
Specification Manual" for products and paint systems indicated.
B. Mockups: Apply benchmark samples of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of
each paint system specified in Part 3.
a. Wall and Ceiling Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft..
b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.
2. Apply benchmark samples after permanent lighting and other environmental services
have been activated.
3. Final approval of color selections will be based on benchmark samples.
INTERIOR PAINTING
09 91 23 - 1
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional benchmark samples
of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner.
1.5
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient
temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F.
1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.
2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.
1.6
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures
are between 50 and 95 deg F.
B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5
deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
1.7
WARRANTY
A. Provide special five year warranty from coatings manufacturers from date of substantial completion, coving the following:
1. Noticeable discoloring, streaking, bloom, bleach, or darkening.
2. Change of sheen with excessive speed or irregularity.
3. Peeling, cracking, blistering, or alligatoring.
4. Release from substrate or intermediate coats.
5. Chalking or dusting excessively.
6. Staying tacking or becoming tacky.
7. Mildewing.
PART 2
2.1
PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Benjamin Moore & Co.
2. Duron.
3. ICI Dulux.
4. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc.
5. Sherwin-Williams Company (The).
6. Master Coating Technologies - Scuffmaster.
2.2
PAINT, GENERAL
A. Material Compatibility:
1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another
and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by
manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.
B. VOC Content of Field-Applied Interior Paints and Coatings: Provide products that comply
with the following limits for VOC content, exclusive of colorants added to a tint base, when
INTERIOR PAINTING
09 91 23 - 2
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24); these requirements do not
apply to paints and coatings that are applied in a fabrication or finishing shop:
1. Flat Paints, Coatings, and Primers: VOC content of not more than 50 g/L.
2. Nonflat Paints, Coatings, and Primers: VOC content of not more than 150 g/L.
3. Anti-Corrosive and Anti-Rust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: VOC not more than 250
g/L.
4. Floor Coatings: VOC not more than 50 g/L.
C. Chemical Components of Field-Applied Interior Paints and Coatings: Provide topcoat paints
and anti-corrosive and anti-rust paints applied to ferrous metals that comply with the following
chemical restrictions; these requirements do not apply to paints and coatings that are applied
in a fabrication or finishing shop:
1. Aromatic Compounds: Paints and coatings shall not contain more than 1.0 percent by
weight of total aromatic compounds (hydrocarbon compounds containing one or more
benzene rings).
2. Restricted Components: Paints and coatings shall not contain any of the following:
a. Acrolein.
b. Acrylonitrile.
c. Antimony.
d. Benzene.
e. Butyl benzyl phthalate.
f. Cadmium.
g. Di (2-ethylhexyl) phthalate.
h. Di-n-butyl phthalate.
i. Di-n-octyl phthalate.
j. 1,2-dichlorobenzene.
k. Diethyl phthalate.
l. Dimethyl phthalate.
m. Ethylbenzene.
n. Formaldehyde.
o. Hexavalent chromium.
p. Isophorone.
q. Lead.
r. Mercury.
s. Methyl ethyl ketone.
t. Methyl isobutyl ketone.
u. Methylene chloride.
v. Naphthalene.
w. Toluene (methylbenzene).
x. 1,1,1-trichloroethane.
y. Vinyl chloride.
D. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2.3
BLOCK FILLERS
A. Interior/Exterior Latex Block Filler: MPI #4.
2.4
PRIMERS/SEALERS
A. Interior Latex Primer/Sealer: MPI #50.
2.5
WOOD PRIMERS
A. Interior Latex-Based Wood Primer: MPI #39.
INTERIOR PAINTING
09 91 23 - 3
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
2.6
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
LATEX PAINTS
A. Interior Latex (Flat): MPI #53 (Gloss Level 1).
B. Interior Latex (Low Sheen): MPI #44 (Gloss Level 2).
C. Interior Latex (Eggshell): MPI #52 (Gloss Level 3).
D. Interior Latex (Satin): MPI #43 (Gloss Level 4).
E. Interior Latex (Semigloss): MPI #54 (Gloss Level 5).
2.7
FLOOR COATINGS
A. Interior/Exterior Clear Concrete Floor Sealer (Water Based): MPI #99.
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of work.
B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows:
1. Concrete: 12 percent.
2. Masonry (Clay and CMU): 12 percent.
3. Wood: 15 percent.
4. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.
5. Plaster: 12 percent.
C. Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that finishing compound is sanded smooth.
D. Plaster Substrates: Verify that plaster is fully cured.
E. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers.
F. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are dry.
1. Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and conditions.
3.2
PREPARATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural
Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated.
B. Remove plates, machined surfaces, and similar items already in place that are not to be
painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide
surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.
1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall
items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.
2. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.
INTERIOR PAINTING
09 91 23 - 4
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dirt, oil, grease,
and incompatible paints and encapsulants.
1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers as required
to produce paint systems indicated.
D. Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk.
Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that
permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.
E. Concrete Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if
moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.
F. Steel Substrates: Remove rust and loose mill scale. Clean using methods recommended in
writing by paint manufacturer.
G. Wood Substrates:
1. Scrape and clean knots, and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer.
2. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off.
3. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood.
4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood
filler. Sand smooth when dried.
H. Gypsum Board Substrates: Do not begin paint application until finishing compound is dry and
sanded smooth.
3.3
APPLICATION
A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated.
2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or
furniture with prime coat only.
3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar
hinged items to match exposed surfaces.
B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of
same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.
C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film
has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.
D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush
marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines
and color breaks.
E. Painting Mechanical and Electrical Work: Paint items exposed in equipment rooms and occupied spaces including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Mechanical Work:
a. Uninsulated metal piping.
b. Uninsulated plastic piping.
c. Pipe hangers and supports.
d. Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes.
INTERIOR PAINTING
09 91 23 - 5
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
e. Visible portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets and
outlets.
f. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering or
other paintable jacket material.
g. Mechanical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field painting.
2. Electrical Work:
a. Switchgear.
b. Panelboards.
c. Electrical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field painting.
3.4
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials
from Project site.
B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by
washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.
C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work
of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect,
and leave in an undamaged condition.
D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces.
3.5
INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE
A. Concrete Substrates, Traffic Surfaces:
1. Water-Based Clear Sealer System: MPI INT 3.2G.
a. First Coat: Interior/exterior clear concrete floor sealer (water based).
B. Dressed Lumber Substrates: Including architectural woodwork and doors scheduled for
opaque finish.
1. Latex System: MPI INT 6.3T.
a. Prime Coat: Interior latex-based wood primer.
b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Interior latex (semigloss).
C. Gypsum Board and Plaster Substrates:
1. Latex System: MPI INT 9.2A.
a. Prime Coat: Interior latex primer/sealer.
b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Interior latex (flat): Ceilings.
d. Topcoat: Interior latex (eggshell): Walls.
END OF SECTION 09 91 23
INTERIOR PAINTING
09 91 23 - 6
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
SECTION 11 52 00 – AUDIO – VISUAL EQUIPMENT
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2
GOVERNING CLAUSE
A. For the sake of brevity, these specifications shall omit phrases such as "Contractor shall
furnish and install", "unless otherwise indicated or specified", etc., but these phrases are
nevertheless implied. Mention of materials and operations requires the Contractor to furnish
and install such materials and perform such operations completely to the satisfaction of the
owner’s representative.
1.3
SCOPE OF WORK
A. Intent: This specification covers the fabrication, furnishing, delivery, and installation of the
audio and video equipment.
B. Complete System: The AV Systems Contractor shall provide all items necessary for a
complete, safe, fully functional system as describes herein and on AV plans, including all
tools, scaffolding, labor and supervision, even though they may not be specifically
enumerated. Any errors, omissions or ambiguities do not relieve the Contractor of this
responsibility, but shall be brought to the attention of the Architect for clarification.
C. Work Included: The work of this section shall include, but not necessarily be limited to the
following:
1. Audio Systems and Accessories
2. Video Systems and Accessories
3. Projection Screen
4. Supplemental steel as required to properly support speaker installation as indicated on
project drawings
5. Professional Structural Engineering including stamping of submittal documents indicating
all rigged components and capacities by an engineer licensed in the State of Maryland
D. Related Work: Related work which is not included in this section:
1. Galleries, Ladders and Catwalks
2. Electrical Connections, Service, Conduit, Boxes and Wiring of any type
3. Stage Dimming Systems
4. Projection Screens
1.4
DEFECTIVE OR NON-APPROVED MATERIALS
A. Should any equipment be found defective, not meeting specifications, or that which has not
been approved in writing by the Architect shall, upon discovery (including any time within the
period of the guarantee), be replaced with the specified equipment or material at no
additional cost.
AUDIO-VISUAL EQUIPMENT
11 52 00 - 1
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
1.5
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
GUARANTEE
A. The Contractor shall guarantee all of the work that is performed under this contract, including
all materials, and workmanship, for a period of three (3) years from the date of Substantial
Completion.
1.6
DISCREPANCIES
A. All equipment shall be sized to fit properly. The exact measurements are the responsibility of
the Contractor. If there are discrepancies in the specifications, the Contractor shall ask for a
clarification from the Architect. If no clarification is requested, the Architect's judgment shall
rule.
1.7
AV SYSTEMS CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS
A. In order to be considered an AV Systems Contractor for this project the Contractor shall meet
or exceed the minimum qualification criteria:
1. Have completed (5) projects of similar size and scope within the last (5) years
2. Employ factory authorized technicians as applicable for the installation of the work of this
contract
3. Provide an onsite job superintendent at all times work is being performed
1.8
DOCUMENTATION
A. SHOP DRAWINGS: Approval of submitted equipment shall be obtained prior to equipment
purchase or fabrication. If shop drawings are rejected, correct and resubmit in the manner
specified. All shop drawing information shall be submitted at the same time; no partial
submittal shall be accepted. Drawings shall indicate complete details, dimensions, product
types and locations of all equipment, clearances required, guides, cables, sets, Contractor
fabricated equipment, and all other details required to completely describe the work to be
performed. Submittals drawings shall be presented at a scale not less than 1/4" for
equipment layouts and ½" = 1'-0" for equipment details, mounting and other details. Each
sheet shall allow space for approval stamps and have the name of the project, the
contractors and/or the supplier's name, address telephone number, and the date submitted.
Submit the following items for Architect's approval, prior to fabrication:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Stage plan view
Stage side section view
Gridiron layout indicating all stage equipment.
Electrical riser diagrams indicating the necessary power and control wiring for all
equipment and systems.
Plan and elevation views indicating all power control hardware locations and layout.
Provide full dimensions for panel layouts with finishes and materials for all custom
panels.
Details of installation and erection, including adjoining conditions and necessary
clearances.
Indication by arrow and boxed caption of each variation from contract drawing and
specifications, except those indicated as acceptable in specifications or on drawings.
B. RECORD DRAWINGS AND DATA: Submit in accordance with General Provisions. Within
30 days of final test and completion of the installation, submit the following to the Architect:
1. Three (3) complete sets of "as built and approved" drawings showing systems and
elements as installed, including field modifications and adjustments.
AUDIO-VISUAL EQUIPMENT
11 52 00 - 2
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
2. Three (3) sets of maintenance data including a list indicating replacement parts lists for
all items of equipment, wiring diagrams, control diagrams, any and all keys for cabinets,
racks, key operated switches etc. and complete operation manuals.
3. Three (3) Certificates of Guarantee
C. INSTRUCTION OF OWNER PERSONNEL: This contractor or his representative, fully
knowledgeable and qualified in systems operation, shall provide sixteen (16) hours of
instruction to the Owner-designated personnel on the use and operation of this System.
Designated instruction times shall be arranged through the Architect.
D. PERMITS: Obtain all permits necessary for the execution of any work pertaining to the
installation, and conform in all trades with all applicable local codes and national codes.
Obtain all permits necessary for operation of any equipment by the Owner.
E. CLEAN UP: It shall be the responsibility of this Contractor to remove all debris from the
building or site caused by his operations to a common trash point or receptacle on the job
site, as determined by the General Contractor.
PART 2
2.1
EQUIPMENT
GENERAL
A. All wall plates shall be labeled with engraved text. Stick on labels are not permitted.
B. Provide wall plate colors matching adjacent wall surface color.
2.2
SPEAKERS
A. Main Left / Right Speakers
1. The loudspeakers shall be the EAW 695z or approved equal.
a. White finish
b. Speakers shall be wall mount
B. Center Cluster Speakers
1. The loudspeakers shall be an array of (7) RCF TTL33-A or approved equal.
a. White finish
b. Speakers shall be flown
C. Bass Speakers
1. The loudspeakers shall be a pair of EAW SB1000zp or approved equal
a. White finish
b. Speakers shall be flown
D. Balcony Fill Speakers
1. The loudspeakers shall be EAW UB82
a. White finish
b. Provide (3) ceiling mount speakers
E. Under Balcony Fill Speakers
1. The loudspeakers shall be EAW UB52i
a. White finish
b. Provide (6) ceiling mount speakers
F. Monitor Speakers
1. The loudspeaker shall be EAW VFM129 Stage Monitor
AUDIO-VISUAL EQUIPMENT
11 52 00 - 3
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
a. Black finish
b. Provide (8) speakers
G. Front Fill Speakers
1. The loudspeaker shall be EAW UB52i
a. Black finish
b. Provide (4) speakers
H. The lobby and box office loudspeaker will be a weather resistant, surface mount speaker
system shall consist of a 200mm (8.00”) mineral loaded mid bass driver with coaxially
mounted 19mm (0.75”) high frequency unit and passive frequency dividing network optimally
tuned vented, injection moulded high impact polystyrene (HIPS) enclosure IP64 to EN60529.
The protective grille shall be constructed from mild steel or aluminium with a weather
resistant coating. Performance of the DVS 8t surface mount speaker shall meet or exceed
the following criteria: The system shall have a conical coverage pattern of 90 degrees (-6dB).
Frequency response measured on axis shall be 75Hz-20kHz (-10dB) from rated sensitivity,
average over stated bandwidth. Measured 1 metre in an anechoic chamber) with no
equalisation. Sensitivity shall be 87dB (1W=2.45V for 6 Ohms). Long term power handling
capacity as defined in EIA-426B test shall be 90W, recommended amplifier power 180W. The
nominal system impedance shall be 6 Ohms (in low impedance setting). The DVS 8t speaker
system shall be equipped with a 60W high performance line transformer for use with 70.7 or
100 Volt distributed audio systems with 60W / 30W / 15W / 7.5W*Watt, OFF and low
impedance settings. A removable Euroblock type locking connector with screw terminals to
secure wire termination with “loop through” facility shall be provided. A yoke mounting bracket
shall be included with the speaker system. The dimensions shall not exceed (H)451.8 x
(W)290.0 x (D)296.0mm (17.78” x 11.42” x 11.65”)
1. The surface mount system shall be the Tannoy DVS 8t *70 Volt only
2.3
PROCESSORS
A. The loudspeaker processor Lake LM 26 is a full-featured, 2-in/6-out stand-alone Digital Audio
Loudspeaker Processor. Based on the highly acclaimed Lake Processing technology, it
provides seamless compatibility with Lab.gruppen’s PLM™ Series Powered Loudspeaker
Management™ systems as well as with all Dolby® Lake Processors and earlier versions of
the technology, including Lake Mesa Quad EQ™ and Lake Contour Pro 26™. The LM 26’s
easily programmable EQ and delay capabilities allow quick reconfiguration for use as
processor and line driver for self-powered loudspeaker applications as well as for systems
using separate power amplifiers. In step with the flexible Lake Processing technology
implemented in the PLM Series, the LM 26 will accept audio signals as analog, AES3 digital,
or via Audinate’s advanced Dante digital audio network at 48kHz and 96 kHz sampling rates.
Automatic input priority switching may be enabled, and the unit can function as both an input
matrix mixer and Dante break-in and break-out box. Exclusive Lake Processing features
incorporated in the LM 26 include Raised Cosine Equalization; linear phase and classic
crossovers; and LimiterMax peak and RMS limiters. The Super Module capability allows
flexible grouping of processor channels across separate hardware frames, including prior
Lake products and PLM Series units. All functions are controlled via wired or wireless
networking by the Windows®-based Lake Controller software application. A universal power
supply with detachable locking mains cable allows worldwide use. The LM 26 can be
controlled or monitored via a 9-pin General Purpose Input Output (GPIO) connection.
External devices such as alarm systems can trigger mute, power control or preset recall
functions; status and fault conditions can also be reported externally. GPIO configuration is
available via the front panel or Lake Controller.
2.4
AMPLIFICATION
A. Type 1 Amplifiers
AUDIO-VISUAL EQUIPMENT
11 52 00 - 4
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
1. Channel Modes and Network
a. The power amplifier shall provide four discrete channels of amplification. Rear panel
switches shall enable bridging of adjacent channels to allow reconfiguration as a twoor three-channel amplifier, with increased power output available through the bridged
channels. Each channel (discrete or bridged) shall be capable of independently
driving either low impedance or high impedance (70 Vrms/100 V peak) loads. The
amplifier shall employ a proprietary tracking Class D output circuit topology. The
amplifier shall be equipped with sensing and communication circuits to allow
comprehensive remote control and monitoring functions via a separate network
bridge. The proprietary control and monitoring network shall employ TCP/IP
protocols, use Cat-5 cable for interconnection, and allow remote control from either
the network bridge front panel or from an external PC using proprietary software.
2. Power Output and Performance
a. Maximum total output of all four channels shall be 8800 watts. In discrete fourchannel mode, each amplifier channel shall deliver maximum continuous output
power as follows: 625 watts into 16 ohms, 1250 watts into 8 ohms; 2100 watts into 4
ohms; 2200 watts into 2 ohms; or 2200 watts into a high impedance (70 Vrms/100 V
peak) load. Maximum output voltage per channel shall be 100 Vrms; maximum
output current per channel shall be 35.5 Arms. In bridged mode, eac bridged channel
shall deliver maximum continuous output power as follows: 2500 watts into 16 ohms;
4200 watts into 8 ohms; or 4600 watts into 4 ohms. Default amplifier gain shall be 35
dB, with rear panel adjustment from 23 to 44 dB in 3 dB increments, selectable for
each channel. For bridged channels, the amplifier shall automatically compensate –6
dB gain internally to maintain operation of all channels at selected gain. The amplifier
shall exhibit the following performance parameters with gain set at 35 dB and VPL
(Voltage Peak Limiter) at 141 V: Frequency response shall be 6.8 Hz to 34 kHz (+0/3 dB) at 1 watt into an 8 ohm load; channel separation shall be greater than 70 dB;
and signal-to-noise ratio shall be 112 dBA. THD at 1 watt, 20 Hz – 20kHz, shall be
less than 0.1%; THD at 1 kHz shall be no more than 0.05% at 1 dB below clipping. A
voltage peak limiter shall limit peak output as determined by rear panel switches. In
discrete four channel mode, peak voltage shall be selectable in eights steps across a
range of 141 V to 42 V. In bridged mode, peak voltage shall be selectable in eight
steps from 282 V to 84 V. The voltage limiter mode shall be selectable for either hard
or soft limiting characteristics.
3. Connectors, Controls, and Indicators
a. The following connectors and controls shall be provided on the REAR PANEL of the
amplifier. The four input connectors shall be electronically balanced, 3-pin Phoenixtype connectors. The four output connectors shall be 2-pole barrier strip screw
connectors. A group of seven DIP-switches shall determine the following: amplifier
gain (23 dB to 44 dB in 3 dB increments); option active; fan masked; and bridged
mode selection for channel pairs. A group of sixteen DIPswitches shall determine
Voltage Peak Limiter values for each channel, selectable in eight steps, and Hard or
Soft limiting characteristic. Two RJ45 connectors shall be provided for input and
output of the control/monitoring network signals. An LED adjacent to the RJ45
connectors shall indicate active or inactive status of the network. The following
indicators and controls shall be provided on the FRONT PANEL of the amplifier. Four
level control potentiometers, one for each channel, shall be provided beneath a front
panel security cover; potentiometers shall be detented and provide attenuation from
0 dB to infinity in 21 steps. Individual switches shall be provided for power on/off and
remote power on/off enabling. Front panel LED indicators shall be provided to show
status of power on/off (green), network connection (blue), Power Average Limiter
(red), and option card active (yellow). Additional LED indicators shall be provided to
show the status of the following for each channel: signal present and high-impedance
warning (green/red), signal present at -10 dB and -4 dB (2x green), voltage peak
limiter clipping (red), current peak limiter (CPL) active (orange), very high frequency
(VHF) warning (yellow), high temperature warning (yellow flashing), and high
AUDIO-VISUAL EQUIPMENT
11 52 00 - 5
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
temperature fault with output muted (yellow constant). Mute shall be indicated by
illumination of both the temperature and VHF LEDs on a channel; fault shall be
indicated by illumination of both the CPL and VHF LEDs on a channel.
4. Power Supply, Protection, and Cooling
a. The power supply shall be a regulated switch mode type. The amplifier shall operate
from AC line sources of either 230 V nominal or 115 V nominal, with operating ranges
of 130 – 265 V and 65 – 135 V at line frequencies of 50 Hz or 60 Hz. Minimum
power-up voltages are 171 V (230 V nominal) and 85 V (115 V nominal). A soft start
circuit shall limit current inrush at power-up to 5 A. The amplifier shall be equipped
with a PAL (Power Average Limiter) circuit to prevent excessive current draw. The
amplifier shall be cooled by two temperature-controlled, variable-speed fans, with air
flow from front to back. Adaptive fan on/off function shall be dependent on presence
of an output signal.
5. Physical
a. The amplifier shall be 483 mm (19 in.) wide, 88 mm (3.5 in / 2 U) high, and 343 mm
(13.5 in.) deep. The weight shall be 12 kg (26.4 lbs). The cabinet shall be black
painted steel with a gray painted steel front panel. The amplifier shall be approved
for use as specified by CE, ANSI/UL, ETL and the FCC.
6. The amplifier shall be the Lab.gruppen C 88:4.
B. Type 2 Amplifiers
1. Channel Modes and Network
a. The power amplifier shall provide four discrete channels of amplification. Rear panel
switches shall enable bridging of adjacent channels to allow reconfiguration as a twoor three-channel amplifier, with increased power output available through the bridged
channels. Each channel (discrete or bridged) shall be capable of independently
driving either low impedance or high impedance (70 Vrms/100 V peak) loads. The
amplifier shall employ a proprietary tracking Class D output circuit topology. The
amplifier shall be equipped with sensing and communication circuits to allow
comprehensive remote control and monitoring functions via a separate network
bridge. The proprietary control and monitoring network shall employ TCP/IP
protocols, use Cat-5 cable for interconnection, and allow remote control from either
the network bridge front panel or from an external PC using proprietary software.
2. Power Output and Performance
a. Maximum total output of all four channels shall be 1600 watts. In discrete fourchannel mode, each amplifier channel shall deliver maximum continuous output
power as follows: 400 watts into 16 ohms, 400 watts into 8 ohms; 300 watts into 4
ohms; or 400 watts into a high impedance (70 Vrms /100 V peak) load. Maximum
output voltage per channel shall be 100 Vrms; maximum output current per channel
shall be 8.5 Arms. In bridged mode, each bridged channel shall deliver maximum
continuous output power as follows: 800 watts into 16 ohms; 600 watts into 8 ohms;
or 800 watts into a high impedance (140 Vrms / 200 V peak) load. Default amplifier
gain shall be 35 dB, with rear-panel adjustment from 23 - 44 dB in 3 dB increments,
selectable for each channel. For bridged channels, the amplifier shall automatically
compensate –6 dB gain internally to maintain operation of all channels at selected
gain. The amplifier shall exhibit the following performance parameters with gain set
at 35 dB and VPL (Voltage Peak Limiter) at 141 V: Frequency response shall be 6.8
Hz to 34 kHz, +0/-3dB at 1 watt into an 8 ohm load; channel separation shall be
greater than 70 dB; and signal-to-noise ratio shall be 112 dBA. THD at 1 watt, 20 Hz
– 20 kHz, shall be less than 0.1%; THD at 1 kHz shall be no more than 0.05% at 1 dB
below clipping. A voltage peak limiter shall limit peak output as determined by rear
panel switches. In discrete four channel mode, peak voltage shall be selectable in
eights steps across a range of 141 V to 42 V. In bridged mode, peak voltage shall be
selectable in eight steps from 282 V to 84 V. The voltage limiter mode shall be
selectable for either hard or soft limiting characteristics.
3. Connectors, Controls, and Indicators
AUDIO-VISUAL EQUIPMENT
11 52 00 - 6
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
a. The following connectors and controls shall be provided on the REAR PANEL of the
amplifier. The four input connectors shall be electronically balanced, 3-pin Phoenixtype connectors. The four output connectors shall be 2-pole barrier strip screw
connectors. A group of seven DIP-switches shall determine the following: amplifier
gain (23 dB to 44 dB in 3 dB increments); option active; fan masked; and bridged
mode selection for channel pairs. A group of sixteen DIPswitches shall determine
Voltage Peak Limiter values for each channel, selectable in eight steps, and Hard or
Soft limiting characteristic. Two RJ45 connectors shall be provided for input and
output of the control/monitoring network signals. An LED adjacent to the RJ45
connectors shall indicate active or inactive status of the network. The following
indicators and controls shall be provided on the FRONT PANEL of the amplifier. Four
level control potentiometers, one for each channel, shall be provided beneath a front
panel security cover; potentiometers shall be detented and provide attenuation from
0 dB to infinity in 21 steps. Individual switches shall be provided for power on/off and
remote power on/off enabling. Front panel LED indicators shall be provided to show
status of power on/off (green), network connection (blue), Power Average Limiter
(red), and option card active (yellow). Additional LED indicators shall be provided to
show the status of the following for each channel: signal present and high-impedance
warning (green/red), signal present at -10 dB and -4 dB (2x green), voltage peak
limiter clipping (red), current peak limiter (CPL) active (orange), very high frequency
(VHF) warning (yellow), high temperature warning (yellow flashing), and high
temperature fault with output muted (yellow constant). Mute shall be indicated by
illumination of both the temperature and VHF LEDs on a channel; fault shall be
indicated by illumination of both the CPL and VHF LEDs on a channel.
4. Power Supply, Protection, and Cooling
a. The power supply shall be a regulated switch mode type. The amplifier shall operate
from AC line sources of either 230 V nominal or 115 V nominal, with operating ranges
of 130 – 265 V and 65 – 135 V at line frequencies of 50 Hz or 60 Hz. Minimum
power-up voltages are 171 V (230 V nominal) and 85 V (115 V nominal). A soft start
circuit shall limit current inrush at power-up to 5 A. The amplifier shall be equipped
with a PAL (Power Average Limiter) circuit to prevent excessive current draw. The
amplifier shall be cooled by two temperature-controlled, variable-speed fans, with air
flow from front to back. Adaptive fan on/off function shall be dependent on presence
of an output signal.
5. Physical
a. The amplifier shall be 483 mm (19 in.) wide, 88 mm (3.5 in. / 2 U) high, and 343 mm
(13.5 in.) deep. The weight shall be 12 kg (26.4lbs). The cabinet shall be black
painted steel with a grey painted steel front-panel. The amplifier shall be approved
for use as specified by CE, ANSI/UL,
b. ETL and the FCC.
6. The amplifier shall be the Lab.gruppen C 16:4.
C. Type 3 Amplifiers
1. Channel Modes and Network
a. The power amplifier shall provide four discrete channels of amplification. Rear panel
switches shall enable bridging of adjacent channels to allow reconfiguration as a twoor three-channel amplifier, with increased power output available through the bridged
channels. Each channel (discrete or bridged) shall be capable of independently
driving either low impedance or high impedance (70 Vrms/100 V peak) loads. The
amplifier shall employ a proprietary tracking Class D output circuit topology. The
amplifier shall be equipped with sensing and communication circuits to allow
comprehensive remote control and monitoring functions via a separate network
bridge. The proprietary control and monitoring network shall employ TCP/IP
protocols, use Cat-5 cable for interconnection, and allow remote control from either
the network bridge front panel or from an external PC using proprietary software.
2. Power Output and Performance
AUDIO-VISUAL EQUIPMENT
11 52 00 - 7
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
a. Maximum total output of all four channels shall be 2800 watts. In discrete fourchannel mode, each amplifier channel shall deliver maximum continuous output
power as follows: 600 watts into 16 ohms, 700 watts into 8 ohms; 700 watts into 4
ohms; 300 watts into 2 ohms; or 700 watts into a high impedance (70 Vrms /100 V
peak) load. Maximum output voltage per channel shall be 100 Vrms; maximum
output current per channel shall be 12 Arms. In bridged mode, each bridged channel
shall deliver maximum continuous output power as follows: 1400 watts into 16 ohms;
1200 watts into 8 ohms; 600 watts into 4 ohms; or 1400 watts into a high impedance
(140 Vrms/ 200 V peak) load. Default amplifier gain shall be 35 dB, with rear-panel
adjustment from 23 - 44 dB in 3 dB increments, selectable for each channel. For
bridged channels, the amplifier shall automatically compensate –6 dB gain internally
to maintain operation of all channels at selected gain. The amplifier shall exhibit the
following performance parameters with gain set at 35 dB and VPL (Voltage Peak
Limiter) at 141 V:Frequency response shall be 6.8 Hz to 34 kHz, +0/-3 dB at 1 watt
into an 8 ohm load; channel separation shall be greater than 70 dB; and signal-tonoise ratio shall be 112 dBA. THD at 1 watt, 20 Hz – 20kHz, shall be less than 0.1%;
THD at 1 kHz shall be no more than 0.05% at 1 dB below clipping. A voltage peak
limiter shall limit peak output as determined by rearpanel switches. In discrete four
channel mode, peak voltage shall be selectable in eights steps across a range of 141
V to 42 V. In bridged mode, peak voltage shall be selectable in eight steps from 282
V to 84 V. The voltage limiter mode shall be selectable for either hard or soft limiting
characteristics.
3. Connectors, Controls, and Indicators
a. The following connectors and controls shall be provided on the REAR PANEL of the
amplifier. The four input connectors shall be electronically balanced, 3-pin Phoenixtype connectors. The four output connectors shall be 2-pole barrier strip screw
connectors. A group of seven DIP-switches shall determine the following: amplifier
gain (23 dB to 44 dB in 3 dB increments); option active; fan masked; and bridged
mode selection for channel pairs. A group of sixteen DIPswitches shall determine
Voltage Peak Limiter values for each channel, selectable in eight steps, and Hard or
Soft limiting characteristic. Two RJ45 connectors shall be provided for input and
output of the control/monitoring network signals. An LED adjacent to the RJ45
connectors shall indicate active or inactive status of the network. The following
indicators and controls shall be provided on the FRONT PANEL of the amplifier. Four
level control potentiometers, one for each channel, shall be provided beneath a front
panel security cover; potentiometers shall be detented and provide attenuation from
0 dB to infinity in 21 steps. Individual switches shall be provided for power on/off and
remote power on/off enabling. Front panel LED indicators shall be provided to show
status of power on/off (green), network connection (blue), Power Average Limiter
(red), and option card active (yellow). Additional LED indicators shall be provided to
show the status of the following for each channel: signal present and high-impedance
warning (green/red), signal present at -10 dB and -4 dB (2x green), voltage peak
limiter clipping (red), current peak limiter (CPL) active (orange), very high frequency
(VHF) warning (yellow), high temperature warning (yellow flashing), and high
temperature fault with output muted (yellow constant). Mute shall be indicated by
illumination of both the temperature and VHF LEDs on a channel; fault shall be
indicated by illumination of both the CPL and VHF LEDs on a channel.
4. Power Supply, Protection, and Cooling
a. The power supply shall be a regulated switch mode type. The amplifier shall operate
from AC line sources of either 230 V nominal or 115 V nominal, with operating ranges
of 130 – 265 V and 65 – 135 V at line frequencies of 50 Hz or 60 Hz. Minimum
power-up voltages are 171 V (230 V nominal) and 85 V (115 V nominal). A soft start
circuit shall limit current inrush at power-up to 5 A. The amplifier shall be equipped
with a PAL (Power Average Limiter) circuit to prevent excessive current draw. The
amplifier shall be cooled by two temperature-controlled, variable-speed fans, with air
AUDIO-VISUAL EQUIPMENT
11 52 00 - 8
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
flow from front to back. Adaptive fan on/off function shall be dependent on presence
of an output signal.
5. Physical
a. The amplifier shall be 483 mm (19 in.) wide, 88 mm (3.5 in. / 2 U) high, and 343 mm
(13.5 in.) deep. The weight shall be 12 kg (26.4 lbs). The cabinet shall be black
painted steel with a grey painted steel front-panel. The amplifier shall be approved for
use as specified by CE, ANSI/UL, ETL and the FCC.
6. The amplifier shall be the Lab.gruppen C 28:4.
D. Type 4 Amplifiers
1. The amplifier shall be the Lab.gruppen C 5:4X.
E. Type 5 Amplifiers
1. Channel Modes and Network
a. The power amplifier shall provide four discrete channels of amplification. Rear panel
switches shall enable bridging of adjacent channels to allow reconfiguration as a twoor three-channel amplifier, with increased power output available through the bridged
channels. Each channel (discrete or bridged) shall be capable of independently
driving either low impedance or high impedance (70 Vrms/100 V peak) loads. The
amplifier shall employ a proprietary tracking Class D output circuit topology. The
amplifier shall be equipped with sensing and communication circuits to allow
comprehensive remote control and monitoring functions via a separate network
bridge. The proprietary control and monitoring network shall employ TCP/IP
protocols, use Cat-5 cable for interconnection, and allow remote control from either
the network bridge front panel or from an external PC using proprietary software.
2. Power Output and Performance
a. Maximum total output of all eight channels shall be 2000 watts. In discrete eightchannel mode, each amplifier channel shall deliver maximum continuous output
power as follows: 250 watts into 16 ohms, 250 watts into 8 ohms; 250 watts into 4
ohms; 125 watts into 2 ohms; or 250 watts into a high impedance (70 Vrms / 100 V
peak) load. Maximum output voltage per channel shall be 71 Vrms; maximum output
current per channel shall be 8 Arms. In bridged mode, each bridged channel shall
deliver maximum continuous output power as follows: 500 watts into 16 ohms; 500
watts into 8 ohms; 250 watts into 4 ohms; or 500 watts into a high impedance (140
Vrms / 200 V peak) load. Default amplifier gain shall be 32 dB, with rear-panel
adjustment from 29 - 38 dB in 3 dB increments, selectable for each channel. For
bridged channels, the amplifier shall automatically compensate -6 dB gain internally
to maintain consistent output to all channels at selected gain. The amplifier shall
exhibit the following performance parameters with gain set at 32 dB and VPL
(Voltage Peak Limiter) at 100 V: Frequency response shall be 2.3 Hz to 56 kHz (+0/3 dB at 1 watt into an 8 ohm load); channel separation shall be greater than 70
dB;and signal-to-noise ratio shall be greater than 112 dBA. THD at 1 watt (20 Hz - 20
kHz) shall be less than 0.1%; THD at 1 kHz shall be no more than 0.05% at 1 dB
below clipping. A Voltage Peak Limiter shall limit peak output as determined by rear
panel switches. In discrete eight-channel mode, peak voltage shall be selectable in
four steps across a range of 100 V to 32 V. In bridged mode, peak voltage shall be
selectable in four steps from 200 V to 64 V. The voltage limiter mode shall be
selectable for either hard or soft limiting characteristics.
3. Connectors, Controls, and Indicators
a. The following connectors and controls shall be provided on the REAR PANEL of the
amplifier. The four input connectors shall be electronically balanced, 3-pin Phoenixtype connectors. The four output connectors shall be 2-pole barrier strip screw
connectors. A group of seven DIP-switches shall determine the following: amplifier
gain (23 dB to 44 dB in 3 dB increments); option active; fan masked; and bridged
mode selection for channel pairs. A group of sixteen DIPswitches shall determine
Voltage Peak Limiter values for each channel, selectable in eight steps, and Hard or
AUDIO-VISUAL EQUIPMENT
11 52 00 - 9
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
Soft limiting characteristic. Two RJ45 connectors shall be provided for input and
output of the control/monitoring network signals. An LED adjacent to the RJ45
connectors shall indicate active or inactive status of the network. The following
indicators and controls shall be provided on the FRONT PANEL of the amplifier. Four
level control potentiometers, one for each channel, shall be provided beneath a front
panel security cover; potentiometers shall be detented and provide attenuation from
0 dB to infinity in 21 steps. Individual switches shall be provided for power on/off and
remote power on/off enabling. Front panel LED indicators shall be provided to show
status of power on/off (green), network connection (blue), Power Average Limiter
(red), and option card active (yellow). Additional LED indicators shall be provided to
show the status of the following for each channel: signal present and high-impedance
warning (green/red), signal present at -10 dB and -4 dB (2x green), voltage peak
limiter clipping (red), current peak limiter (CPL) active (orange), very high frequency
(VHF) warning (yellow), high temperature warning (yellow flashing), and high
temperature fault with output muted (yellow constant). Mute shall be indicated by
illumination of both the temperature and VHF LEDs on a channel; fault shall be
indicated by illumination of both the CPL and VHF LEDs on a channel.
4. Power Supply, Protection, and Cooling
a. The power supply shall be a regulated switch mode type. The amplifier shall operate
from AC line sources of either 230 V nominal or 115 V nominal, with operating ranges
of 130 – 265 V and 65 – 135 V at line frequencies of 50 Hz or 60 Hz. Minimum
power-up voltages are 171 V (230 V nominal) and 85 V (115 V nominal). A soft start
circuit shall limit current inrush at power-up to 5 A. The amplifier shall be equipped
with a PAL (Power Average Limiter) circuit to prevent excessive current draw. The
amplifier shall be cooled by two temperature-controlled, variable-speed fans, with air
flow from front to back. Adaptive fan on/off function shall be dependent on presence
of an output signal.
5. Physical
a. The amplifier shall be 483 mm (19 in.) wide, 88 mm (3.5 in / 2 U) high, and 343 mm
(13.5 in.) deep. The weight shall be 8.5 kg (18.75 lbs). The chassis shall be black
painted steel with a grey painted steel front-panel. The amplifier shall be approved
for use as specified by CE, ANSI/UL, ETL and the FCC.
6. The amplifier shall be the Lab.gruppen C 20:8X
F. Type 6 Amplifiers
1. The amplifier shall be the Lab.gruppen C 68:4
2.5
SYSTEM CONTROLLER
A. Overview and Functions
1. The network bridge and system controller shall provide an interface between multiple
power amplifiers equipped with NomadLink monitoring/control facilities and a host
computer running associated DeviceControl software. Communication between the
network bridge and system controller and the host computer shall be over an Ethernet
LAN using TCP/IP protocols. The IP address for the network bridge and system controller
and system controller shall be entered manually from the front-panel or set remotely by a
DHCP server. Communication between the network bridge and system controller and
thepower amplifiers shall be over a daisy-chained subnet with interconnectionson Cat-5
cable using RJ45 connectors. The subnet shall accommodate as many as 60 amplifiers
and as many as 480 amplifier channels. The distance between the network bridge and
system controller and any amplifier, or between any two amplifiers, shall be up to 300 m
(980 ft.) and total length of the subnet cabling shall be up to 700 m (2300 ft.) when the
network forms a closed loop. When the network is an open daisy-chain, total length shall
be up to 400 m (1300 ft). The network bridge and system controller shall be able to detect
a closed loop network, and report an error if the loop is broken. The network bridge and
system controller shall provide phantom power through the network, thereby maintaining
AUDIO-VISUAL EQUIPMENT
11 52 00 - 10
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
a network connection when amplifiers are powered off or malfunctioning. Mute on/off
function for all channels in the subnet shall be accessible on front-panel buttons. General
faults as well as individual amplifier faults shall be indicated with a red Fault LED on the
front-panel and on the character display. The network bridge and system controller shall
offer three general purpose input (GPI) connections for external control purposes; one
GPI shall sense voltage (above or below +10 VDC) while two GPIs shall sense contact
closure. GPI’s shall be user configurable to operate amplifier subnet power on/off and
mute channels.
B. Connectors, Controls, and Indicators
1. The following connectors shall be provided on the rear-panel: one EtherCon RJ45 for
Ethernet; two EtherCon RJ45 for loop subnet (NomadLink) In and Out; one 2-pole
Phoenix input for voltage sensing GPI; and two 2-pole Phoenix inputs for contact-closure
GPI. The following connector shall be provided on the front-panel: one standard RJ45
Ethernet in parallel with the rear-panel Ethernet connection. The following controls shall
be provided on the front-panel: six navigation and parameter selection keys, and two
momentary switches to activate global power on or off for all power amplifiers connected
to the subnet. The following LED indicators shall be provided on the front-panel: frontpanel operation locked (yellow), fault warning (red), amplifier subnet muted (red);
NomadLink (subnet) connected and active (blue); Ethernet connected (orange), and
Ethernet active (yellow). A 2x16 character display with white text on blue background
shall display network status and parameters.
C. Power Supply
1. The network bridge and system controller shall have a universal power supply with
automatic selection of AC line sources from 100 V to 240 V at 50 Hz or 60 Hz. Power
consumption shall be less than 20 watts.
D. Physical
1. The network bridge and system controller shall be 483 mm (19 in.) wide, 44 mm (1.75” or
1 U) high, and 208 mm (8.2 in.) deep. Weight shall be 2.25 kg (5 lbs.). Housing shall be
plated and painted steel with an anodized aluminum front-panel. The network bridge and
system controller shall be approved for use as specified by CE and CSA.
E. The network bridge and system controller shall be the Lab.gruppen NomadLink Bridge &
System Controller NLB60E.
2.6
CONTROL CONSOLES
A. The T Series surfaces feature the same intuitive layout that has delighted iLive users around
the world. Its instantly accessible analogue-style rotary controls, switches and dials, visuall
informative channel labeling and colour coding, comprehensive metering, graphical colour
touchscreen, and logical layout allows the user to avoid fiddly menus and instinctively find
controls. The jump from analogue to digital has never been so easy. Each bank of faders
has four layers, so even the small T80 provides no fewer than 80 control strips. These can be
freely assigned as mono or stereo inputs, group, aux, main, matrix mix masters, DCA
masters - and even engineers Wedge / IEM monitor - giving total freedom in the design of the
surface layout. The rear of the surface provides a host of connections for local sources,
sends and inserted devices, so there is no need for a second I/O rack at mix position. The T
Surface connects to the iDR MixRack using the ACETM link, which combines control and
remote audio over a single cable. A built-in network switch allows connection of other network
devices such as a laptop running iLive Editor software. MIDI and USB ports are also
available.
1. iLive-T puts the audio and its processing right where it is needed, near to the sources on
stage. The rack houses the mic preamps, sends, DSP and digital snake interface for
AUDIO-VISUAL EQUIPMENT
11 52 00 - 11
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
control and local audio at the mix position. The Mix engine Both MixRacks feature the
same iDR-64 RackExtra DSP engine employed in the flagship iLive Series, providing full
processing and mixing for 64 channels and 32 configurable mix buses as well as 8 stereo
FX engines based on emulations of popular industry classics. Imagine the gear needed
for an equivalent analogue system to provide 64 gates, 96 compressors, 96 limiter/deess, 112 fully parametric EQs, 96 delays, 32 graphic EQs and 8 effects. The MixRacks
differ only in the number of input and output sockets available. The smaller iDR-32
provides 32 mic/line preamps and 16 XLR outputs, while the iDR-48 has 48 preamps and
24 outputs. Built-in patchbays enable the user to split, cross-patch and map channels and
sends, requiring fewer sockets than equivalent fixed architecture consoles. A new high
quality mic preamp with 80dB/1dB resolution gain range, exceptionally low latency and
optimised audio signal path ensure the superb performance and sound quality for which
iLive has become renowned. The iDR rack and T surface are connected over a single
CAT5 cable up to 120m long using Allen& Heath’s proprietary ACETM digital snake - an
affordable, point-to-point multi-channel bi-directional audio and control link. An option slot
allows a plugin card to be added for more audio networking possibilities, such as digital
mic splitting, audio distribution and digital recording. The MixRack can also be controlled
using a networked PC or laptop running iLive Editor software, MIDI, the Allen & Heath PL
Series of remote controllers, and, it is fully compatible with the surfaces from the flagship
iLive range.
2. M-DANTE is one of several plug-in card options available from Allen & Heath that may be
fitted to the iLive Series. It provides a multi-channel digital audio and control network that
can distribute signals between iLive, computers and 3rd party DanteTM enabled
equipment. DanteTM is a high performance, AVB ready industry standard digital media
transport system developed by Audinate that runs over standard IP networks. Its main
benefits for iLive are: 64 channel bi-directional audio plus control over CAT5 Uses
standard off-the-shelf computer networking equipment Easy to add, name, remove and
rearrange devices Wide range of Dante enabled equipment becoming available
Secondary port for redundant connection option. Control port to bridge iLive or other
network over Dante. Sample accurate playback synchronization Very low latency
Gigabit ports Direct connection to computer for multitrack recording Dante Virtual
Soundcard (DVS) software Dante Controller software for setting up the network MDANTE is supplied with one Dante Virtual Soundcard licence to enable a single
computer.
3. The Allen & Heath iDR system is a set of components whose hardware, control and
signal processing flexibility make it well suited to many installed, live sound and special
project applications. The 2U rack or desk mount iDR-8 is the main unit in the iDR system
having all the DSP (digital signal processing) power needed for 16 input and 16 output
channels. It has 8 XLR analogue mic/line inputs and 8 XLR analogue line outputs. You
can add a further 8 inputs and/or 8 outputs bringing it up to a maximum 16x16 matrix by
plugging in the iDR-in and/or iDR-out audio expanders. The signal can be routed at three
key points: the input source patch bay, central matrix, and output source patch bay.
Although the iDR does not work with networked audio, the expanders can be located up
to 250 metres away so providing remote analogue audio inputs and outputs connected
using CAT5 cables. You can also daisy chain multiple iDR-8 units in a distributed system.
The units are linked using an 8 channel wide bus which plugs into the digital expander
ports. Maximum matrix at any unit is 16x16 which includes the interconnecting bus.
Several iDR-8 units can be linked in this way, but you can have only one iDR-in and one
iDR-out expander per system. This is described later. A stereo audio monitor is included.
This has both input and output TRS jacks so that the monitor can ‘ripple through’ chained
iDR units. It also feeds a front panel headphones socket for local monitoring of any point
in the audio signal path. The monitor can access the input and output channels so that
they can be used with the matrix. For example, you can achieve a 10x10 matrix from an
unexpanded iDR-8. A built-in signal/noise generator provides a further source which can
AUDIO-VISUAL EQUIPMENT
11 52 00 - 12
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
be routed to the input channels for test and line up purposes. There are many operator
control possibilities. You can configure the 16 front panel keys and 32 3- colour LEDs,
and use the DR-Link port to add up to 3 iDR-switch units for up to 72 additional switch
closure and 48 open-collector logic outputs. In addition you can choose two of the
following: MIDI, the Sys-Net serial port to interface with third party remote controllers,
RS232 for modem communication, and the PL-Anet serial port for running a network of
Allen & Heath PL wall plates and controllers. The iDR-8 features networked control. It is
configured using the iDR System Manager Software via an Ethernet port either
connected directly to the installer’s PC, or over a TCP/IP network. The PC control can be
password protected for security. Once configured it runs stand-alone using its built-in iDR
Unit software with stored settings. iDR units can also be operated from networked PC
workstations running PL Client software configured as ‘virtual’ wall plates by the installer
using PL Designer software. An RS232 modem port lets the installer remotely interrogate
units. A front panel RS232 port allows easy operating code update. The iDR system
offers tremendous flexibility. The system set up is stored in patches. Up to 99 patches
can be programmed. You can decide which parameters are affected by each. To make
best use of this it is important that you plan your installation carefully before you start.
You can try out, prepare and archive different configurations offline before plugging in.
Virtual panels and controllers are displayed so you can simulate how it will work for real.
You can program the unit name, clock and IP address, and check diagnostic information
and audio signal presence using the front panel menus accessed by removing the face
plate. You can also attach your custom label here so that it is protected when the plate is
refitted
4. The PL-4 wall plate has 2 programmable switches, 4 programmable tri-colour LEDs and
a rotary control with LED ladder. It has a built-in infra-red receiver, allowing it to be
operated at a distance using the PL-5 handheld remote controller – these control options
can be different to those set on the PL-4. PL-4 is ideal for local operator control of iDRbased audio systems. They may be used, for example, for source selection for an output
zone, or for local volume control.
a. Provide (8)
5. PL-8 is a 4 input, 4 output logic control panel mounted on a wall plate which can be
connected to PL-Anet. It is designed to interface external systems such as alarm
systems, juke boxes, room dividers, fader starts and lights at a convenient location.
a. Provide (1)
6. PL-9 is a 1U rack or desk mount hub which provides up to 7 individual connections to
chains of PL devices, offering ‘star wiring’, simplifying wiring and eliminating the need for
complex daisy-chaining. This also provides the benefit of longer cable runs and allows
easier ‘plug and play’ of devices such as the PL-6 and PL-10, and allows a larger number
of PL controllers to be connected to a single iDR unit. As the PL-9 is the ‘end of chain’ on
a PL-Anet branch, it offers greater flexibility by allowing PL wallplates to be plugged in
and out easily – for example, a PL-6 could just be plugged into a PL-9 onstage, allowing
local performer control, then removed after the event.
a. Provide (1)
7. The PL-10 is a compact mixer interface with 8 rotary encoders and LED ladder displays,
making it possible to mix live events within the iDR system. It’s ideal for creating and
controlling an output mix of cross-point groups. The PL-10 can be assigned to read and
adjust different mixes, as the LED bars indicate the levels managed by the iDR unit. The
unit can be hand-held, or flange-mounted into a table or wall. As the PL-10 has encoders
rather than faders, it can respond to changes in levels made from other controllers.
a. Provide (1)
B. Front of House Console
AUDIO-VISUAL EQUIPMENT
11 52 00 - 13
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
1. Provide
a. (1) iLive 144S with flightcase
b. (1) Backup external power supply if compatible
C. Monitor Console
1. Provide
a. (1) iLive T112 with flightcase
b. (1) Backup external power supply if compatible
2.7
CONTROL COMPUTERS
A. Minimum system requirements
1. All-in-1 type frame, similar to Lenovo ThinkCentre M72z
2. Include wired standard keyboard and trackball
3. Ethernet connection to “Control” Network
4. Win8Pro
5. Real VNC
B. Provide
1. Two (2) computers
2.8
MEDIA COMPUTERS
A. Minimum system requirements
1. Similar to RAIN PC ION A2
2. Rackmount
3. Intel i7 Sandy or Ivy Bridge Quad-Core 2.8GHz or better
4. 8 GB 1333 MHz minimum DDR3 Ram, option to add up to 32 GB DDR3 RAM Total
5. 120 GB SSD Main OS and Applications hard drive
6. (2) 1TB in Mirrored RAID for data.
7. Video card similar to NVIDIA Quadro 600
8. Video output available for local control on DisplayPort, DVI-D, or HD-SDI
9. Video Output available for Program input to Video Switcher on HD-SDI
10. CD/DVD Writer
11. Firewire 800 on TI Chipset
12. USB 3.0 available for future use
13. Local control by standard desktop keyboard and trackball from video mix position on Left
side of counter in Upstairs booth.
14. Dual Gigabit Ethernet ports
15. Audio connection via Dante
16. Independent network for “Control”
17. Win7Pro-64
18. Real VNC
B. Provide
1. Two (2) computers
2.9
POWER SEQUENCER
A. The CN2400S incorporates SmartSequencing technology allows large and complex A/V
systems to be safely powered on and off with a simple press of a button or turn of a key, even
by non-technical personnel. Multiple units may be daisy chained at runs of over 1,000’
between units with bi-directional communications between units for sequencing on and off
large and/or complex systems. RS-232 compatibility and command set provide integration
with control systems, optional RS-232- - Ethernet adaptor allows for control, programming, &
AUDIO-VISUAL EQUIPMENT
11 52 00 - 14
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
monitoring from any Web-enabled device via Telnet, direct HTTP connection, or Panamax/
Furman’s BlueBOLT® platform.
Series Multi-Stage Protection (SMP) ensures zero
downtime for mission-critical installations by safely absorbing, clamping and dissipating
transient surges and spikes without damage to internal circuitry or connected equipment.
Extreme Voltage Shutdown (EVS) safeguards from catastrophic under-voltage (under 80V
sustained) or over-voltage (over 145V sustained) conditions. Circuit may be set to auto-reset
when voltage returns to normal or manual reset after an event is detected. Linear Filtering
Technology (LiFT) ensures maximum performance from connected equipment by reducing
AC noise evenly across the audio & video bandwidth. Security covers and sequence on/off
keyswitch prevent unauthorized personnel from running/shutting down system or tampering
with DIP switches. Fire alarm shut off. Available with 15 amp capacity (CN-1800S) or 20 amp
capacity (CN-2400S). 15 Year Limited Product Warranty.
2.10
PLAYBACK CONTROLLERS
A. Provide (2) Denon DN-C640 or approved equal.
2.11
MICROPHONES
A. General purpose microphones
1. Approved models
a. Shure Beta 57a
2. Provide
a. (5) General purpose microphones
B. Vocal microphones
1. Approved models
a. Shure KSM 9
b. Neuman KMS 104
2. Provide
a. (2) Vocal microphones
C. Piano microphones
1. Approved models
a. Earthworks PM40
2. Provide
a. (1) Piano microphone
D. Podium microphones
1. Approved models
a. Earthworks FM360
2. Provide
a. (2) Podium microphones
E. Wireless microphone system
1. Provide
a. (6) Shure ULXD4D digital receiver
b. (4) Shure ULXD2B58Beta 58 transmitter
c. (12) Shure ULXD1 bodypack transmitter
d. (12) Shure SB900 li-ion battery
e. (2) Shure SBC800-US 8 bay charging station
f. (1) Shure antenna extension and combining system per plans
g. (12) Countryman B6 lavalier microphones, color as selected by owner
AUDIO-VISUAL EQUIPMENT
11 52 00 - 15
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
2.12
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
ASSISTIVE LISTENING SYSTEM
A. Furnish and install an FM wireless assistive listening system for use by the hearing-impaired.
The assistive listening system (ALS) shall be capable of broadcasting on 57 channels and be
frequency agile. The ALS system shall have 80dB SNR or greater, end-to-end. Receivers
shall be frequency agile and frequency set with a "seek" button. The receiver will incorporate
a stereo headset jack that allows the user to plug in either a mono or stereo headset and
listen to audio normally. The portable receivers and transmitters shall incorporate automatic
battery charging circuitry for recharging of Ni-MH batteries. Listen Technologies Corporation
products are specified.
B. Furnish and install the following:
1. Listen Technologies LT-800-072 Base Transmitter (Qty: 1 ea.)
2. Listen Technologies LA-326 Rack mount kit (Qty: 1 ea.)
3. Listen Technologies LA-122 Universal antenna. (Qty: 1 ea.) Mount as needed, can be
mounted on ceiling, wall, and remote base or flexible dipole. If antenna is remoted use
RG58 for less than 100ft or RG8 for more than 100ft runs (50 0hm).
4. Listen Technologies LR-400-072 Portable Display receiver (Qty: 2 each or as needed,
see note*)
5. Listen Technologies LA-164 Ear Speaker (Qty: 2 ea.)
6. Listen Technologies LA-166 Neckloop. (Qty: 2 ea.)
7. Listen Technologies LA-321 8 unit charging carrying case. (Qty: 1 ea.)
8. Listen Technologies LA-362 Ni-MH rechargeable batteries (Qty: 4 ea.)
9. Listen Technologies LA-304 ADA Access/Compliance signage kit. (Qty 1 ea.)
Capacity of Seating in
Assembly Area
50 or less
51 to 200
201 to 500
Table 219.3 Receivers for Assistive Listening Systems
Minimum Number of Required Minimum Number of Required
Receivers *contact Listen for
Receivers Required to be
customized quote to
Hearing-aid Compatible (using
accommodate area
Listen LA-166)
sales@listentech.com
www.listentech.com
2
2
2, plus 1 per 25 seats
2
over 50 seats*
2, plus 1 per 25 seats
1 per 4 receivers*
over 50 seats*
501 to 1000
1001 to 2000
2001 and over
20, plus 1 per 33 seats
over 500 seats*
35, plus 1 per 50 seats
over 1000 seats*
55 plus 1 per 100 seats
over 2000 seats*
1 per 4 receivers*
1 per 4 receivers*
1 per 4 receivers*
*
Or fraction thereof
2.13
INTERCOM SYSTEM
A. The 704 series is Clear-Com’s most advanced party-line intercom system. Each station is a
four-channel intercom with superior audio and versatile channel access to provide unmatched
communication exibility. All front-panel controls are intuitive and easy to operate. The
station’s front-panel buttons are programmable and can be customized for a wide variety of
applications that will meet the demands of any stage or studio production. Separate volume
AUDIO-VISUAL EQUIPMENT
11 52 00 - 16
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
controls for every channel ensure the perfect audio mix in the headset or on the integral
speaker.
B. Provide
1. (1) Clear Com SB704 Rack mount 4 channel master station
2. (3) Clear Com RM702 Rack mount 4 channel remote station
3. (8) Clear Com Wall mount 1 channel wall input
4. (9) Clear Com KB-701 Wall mount single channel station
5. (6) Clear Com Single Channel Belt Pack
6. (12) Clear Com CC-95 Single ear headset
7. (12) 15ft 3-pin Intercom Cables
C. Alternate
1. (1) Clear Com CM222 2 channel wireless base station
2. (4) Clear Com CP222 2 channel wireless beltpack
3. (4) Clear Com TLP1 Li-ion battery for beltpacks
4. (1) Clear Com TCB5A Charging tray for beltpacks
5. (1) Clear Com CCTDAKIT1 Remote extension kit for wireless com
2.14
WALL INPUT PANELS
A. Provide
1. Panels as detailed on plans
2.15
CABLE AND ACCESSORIES
A. Provide
1. (1) 100ft Stage Box with all mic inputs and speaker outputs for connection to WP-02
2. (20) 25ft 3-pin XLR cables
3. (10) 50ft 3-pin XLR cables
4. (6) DI boxes
5. (12) Boom mic stands
6. (2) VGA to HD-SDI convertor boxes
7. (2) 50ft HD-SDI video cables
2.16
PROJECTION SCREEN
A. Rear projection screen, 10’6” (H) x 14’ (W), portable type. To have flexible screen surface,
flame retardant and mildew resistant. Screen surface will have reinforced black binding on all
four sides and will attach to front of frame with metal snaps. Frame to consist of lightweight,
folding 11⁄4" square hard alloy aluminum tubing, clear etched and anodized to be brushed
and burr free. Frame sections are joined with snap latch to allow for easy folding. All steel
hardware is plated. Inverted “T” legs support the screen and allow height adjustments up or
down in 6" increments. Includes wheeled polyethylene carrying case. Polyethylene carrying
cases meet or exceed Air Transport Association (ATA) Specification 300 standards. All
surfaces up to 16' high will be seamless.
B. Screen must be capable of mounting with bottom of screen approximately 2’ AFF.
C. Screen fabric shall be Ultra Wide Angle (rear projection) material.
D. Provide (1) Da-Lite Fast-Fold Deluxe Screen or equivalent.
AUDIO-VISUAL EQUIPMENT
11 52 00 - 17
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
2.17
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
VIDEO SYSTEM
A. With its brightness and numerous configuration, performance and warranty options, the F82
series is made for users with extra high requirements and expectations. It fills large screens
in auditoriums, on stages or other applications that require high brightness and the ultimate in
image quality and reliability. Key features : RealColor™ colour management provides
completely unique colour management accuracy, Full 24/7 warranty covers nearly any
operating environment and installation requirement, DynamicBlack™ gives totally unique
dynamic range for a three-chip projector, ACOP optical colour processing enables user
selectable color management without loss of bit depth, 3-chip DLP® technology provides
outstanding colours and dynamics, Comprehensive lens range designed for high resolution,
Choice of WUXGA,1080p or SXGA+ resolution options
B. The F82 series features a wide range of custom designed, precision projection lenses for the
best image quality, and the most reliable setups. Key features include infinitely adjustable
IRIS and aperture settings, and motorized zoom, focus and lens shift with profile memories
for use in multiple settings and installations with programmed calibration and screen
configurations. Most importantly, every single lens uses Low Dispersion (LD) glass and
aspherical lens elements for high quality focusing and sharpness, as well as high optical
interfield contrast, resulting in very high image quality. Unlike many competing projector
ranges, the lenses are designed and made with high resolution in mind, not taking standard,
off the shelf lenses for use in higher performance applications. The range of lenses span from
an an ultra wide angle 0.74 : 1, to a long tele zoom at 6.24 : 1, and comprises five options.
C. Provide
1. (1) Projection Design F82 WUXGA 1920x1200 3chip DLP 10k Projector
a. or (1) Digital Projection Titan 660 WUXGA 1920x1200 3chip DLP 10k Projector
2. (1) Projection Design EN26 long tele zoom lens
a. or (1) Digital Projection long tele zoom lens 4.51-7.93
2.18
CAMERAS (ALTERNATE)
A. Provide (3) Vaddio Clearview HD ptz camera system
2.19
VIDEO CONTROLLERS (ALTERNATE)
A. Provide (1) Black Magic ATEM M/E2 switcher and camera control system w/external touch
screen monitor
PART 3
3.1
INSTALLATION
GENERAL
A. Work shall be performed in accordance with OSHA and local codes.
B. On site welding shall only be performed per AWS D1.1 standards and with advanced
approval from the architect or Owner’s representative.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A. The AV Contractor shall be responsible for storage of stage equipment, tools, and equipment
during the period of the installation.
B. The AV Contractor shall employ an ETCP Certified rigger for installation of flown speakers.
AUDIO-VISUAL EQUIPMENT
11 52 00 - 18
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
C. Extent: All specified equipment shall be installed by fully trained personnel. Equipment shall
be installed per plans and specifications. Equipment shall be aligned, adjusted, and trimmed
for the most efficient operation, the greatest safety and for the best visual appearance.
D. Standards: Installation practices shall be in accordance with OSHA Safety and Health
Standards and all local codes. All welding must be performed in full compliance with the
latest edition of the Structural Welding Code (ANSI/AWS D1.1).
E. Finishes:
1. All welds must be touched up to match disturbed finishes.
2. All finishes which are disturbed during shipping and installation shall be touched up to
match the original.
3.3
CLEAN UP
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for clean up, including removal of packing materials etc.
and the protection of surfaces or equipment provided by other contractors.
3.4
INSPECTION AND TESTING
A. Inspection: During the installation of equipment the AV Contractor shall arrange for access as
necessary for inspection of equipment by the Owner’s representatives.
B. Special Testing: If specifications, the Architect’s instructions, laws, ordinances, or any public
authority require any work to be specially tested or approved, the AV Contractor shall give the
Architect timely notice of its readiness for inspection, and of dates of inspections to be made
by other authorities.
C. Completion Testing: Upon completing the installation of all equipment specified under this
section, the Contractor shall notify the Architect, who will schedule an inspection. At the time
of inspection, the Lighting Contractor shall furnish sufficient workers to operate all equipment
and to perform such adjustments and tests as may be required by the Owner’s
representative. Any equipment, which fails to meet with approval, shall be repaired or
replaced with suitable equipment and the inspection shall be re-scheduled under the same
conditions as previously specified. At the time of these inspections, no other work shall be
performed in the auditorium and stage areas. All temporary bracing, scaffolding, etc. shall be
removed to permit full operation of, and access to, all equipment. Final approval will be
withheld until all systems have been thoroughly tested and found to be in first class operating
condition.
AUDIO-VISUAL EQUIPMENT
11 52 00 - 19
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
b. Pipe Mount
I.
PART 3
3.1
Camera Controller (Alternate)
1. Provide (1) ProductionVIEW Production Camera Contrller #999-5700-000 or equal
NSTALLATION
GENERAL
A. Work shall be performed in accordance with OSHA and local codes.
B. On site welding shall only be performed per AWS D1.1 standards and with advanced
approval from the architect or Owner’s representative.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A. The AV Contractor shall be responsible for storage of stage equipment, tools, and equipment
during the period of the installation.
B. The AV Contractor shall employ an ETCP Certified rigger for installation of flown speakers.
C. Extent: All specified equipment shall be installed by fully trained personnel. Equipment shall
be installed per plans and specifications. Equipment shall be aligned, adjusted, and trimmed
for the most efficient operation, the greatest safety and for the best visual appearance.
D. Standards: Installation practices shall be in accordance with OSHA Safety and Health
Standards and all local codes. All welding must be performed in full compliance with the
latest edition of the Structural Welding Code (ANSI/AWS D1.1).
E. Finishes:
1. All welds must be touched up to match disturbed finishes.
2. All finishes which are disturbed during shipping and installation shall be touched up to
match the original.
3.3
CLEAN UP
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for clean up, including removal of packing materials etc.
and the protection of surfaces or equipment provided by other contractors.
3.4
INSPECTION AND TESTING
A. Inspection: During the installation of equipment the AV Contractor shall arrange for access as
necessary for inspection of equipment by the Owner’s representatives.
B. Special Testing: If specifications, the Architect’s instructions, laws, ordinances, or any public
authority require any work to be specially tested or approved, the AV Contractor shall give the
Architect timely notice of its readiness for inspection, and of dates of inspections to be made
by other authorities.
C. Completion Testing: Upon completing the installation of all equipment specified under this
section, the Contractor shall notify the Architect, who will schedule an inspection. At the time
of inspection, the Lighting Contractor shall furnish sufficient workers to operate all equipment
and to perform such adjustments and tests as may be required by the Owner’s
representative. Any equipment, which fails to meet with approval, shall be repaired or
replaced with suitable equipment and the inspection shall be re scheduled under the same
AUDIO - VISUAL EQUIPMENT
11 52 00 - 20
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
conditions as previously specified. At the time of these inspections, no other work shall be
performed in the auditorium and stage areas. All temporary bracing, scaffolding, etc. shall be
removed to permit full operation of, and access to, all equipment. Final approval will be
withheld until all systems have been thoroughly tested and found to be in first class operating
condition.
END OF SECTION 11 52 00
AUDIO - VISUAL EQUIPMENT
11 52 00 - 21
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
SECTION 116100 – THEATRE AND STAGE EQUIPMENT
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
1.2
GOVERNING CLAUSE
A. For the sake of brevity, these specifications shall omit phrases such as "Contractor shall
furnish and install", "unless otherwise indicated or specified", etc., but these phrases are
nevertheless implied. Mention of materials and operations requires the Contractor to furnish
and install such materials and perform such operations completely to the satisfaction of the
owner’s representative.
1.3
SCOPE OF WORK
A. Intent: This specification covers the fabrication, furnishing, delivery, and installation of the
theatre and stage equipment.
B. Complete System: The Stage Equipment Contractor shall provide all items necessary for a
complete, safe, fully functional system as describes herein, including all tools, scaffolding,
labor and supervision, even though they may not be specifically enumerated. Any errors,
omissions or ambiguities do not relieve the Contractor of this responsibility, but shall be
brought to the attention of the Architect for clarification.
C. Work Included: The work of this section shall include, but not necessarily be limited to the
following:
1. Dimmer Panels
2. Lighting Control Consoles
3. Connector Strips, Gridiron Boxes, and SO Cables
4. Architectural Lighting Controls
5. Lighting Control Network
6. Theatrical Lighting Fixtures and Accessories
7. Low Voltage control wiring.
8. Surface mount back boxes
D. Related Work: Related work which is not included in this section:
1. Gridiron, Head and Loft Block Beams
2. Galleries, Ladders and Catwalks
3. Stage Rigging
4. Stage Flooring
5. Electrical Connections, Service, Conduit, Junction Boxes and High Voltage Wiring
1.4
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:
A. Field Conditions: All bidders shall fully inform themselves of the conditions under which the
work is to be performed. No additional compensation shall be allowed for any labor or item
the bidder could have been fully informed of prior to the bid date.
B. Safety: The systems shall conform to all applicable code requirements and shall be in
conformance with industry standards of operation and practices. All materials, arrangements
and procedures shall comply with applicable code requirements, allowing the users to
THEATER AND STAGE EQUIPMENT
11 61 00 - 1
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
arrange and operate a safe assembly and working environment for audience and user
personnel.
1.5
RELATED SECTIONS
A. 115200 – Audio Visual Equipment
B. 116133 – Rigging Systems and Control
C. 116143 – Stage Curtains
1.6
DEFECTIVE OR NON-APPROVED MATERIALS
A. Should any equipment be found defective, not meeting specifications, or that which has not
been approved in writing by the Architect shall, upon discovery (including any time within the
period of the guarantee), be replaced with the specified equipment or material at no
additional cost.
1.7
DISCREPANCIES
A. All equipment shall be sized to fit properly. The exact measurements are the responsibility of
the Contractor. If there are discrepancies in the specifications, the Contractor shall ask for a
clarification from the Architect. If no clarification is requested, the Architect's judgment shall
rule.
1.8
STAGE EQUIPMENT CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS
A. In order to be considered a Stage Equipment Contractor for this project the Contractor shall
meet or exceed the minimum qualification criteria:
1. Have completed (5) projects of similar size and scope within the last (5) years
2. Employ factory authorized technicians as applicable for the installation of the work of this
contract
3. Provide an onsite job superintendent at all times work is being performed
1.9
ACCEPTABLE EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURERS
A. For the purposes of establishing a standard of quality desired on this project, the dimming
and lighting products of Electronic Theatre Controls of Middleton, Wisconsin are specified.
B. Additional preapproved manufacturers include
1. Lyntec
2. Strong Entertainment Lighting
3. SSRC
4. Lycian Stage Lighting
5. City Theatrical
6. LeaderLight
1.10
DOCUMENTATION
A. SHOP DRAWINGS: Approval of submitted equipment shall be obtained prior to equipment
purchase or fabrication. If shop drawings are rejected, correct and resubmit in the manner
specified. All shop drawing information shall be submitted at the same time; no partial
submittal shall be accepted. Drawings shall indicate complete details, dimensions, product
types and locations of all equipment, clearances required, guides, cables, sets, Contractor
fabricated equipment, and all other details required to completely describe the work to be
performed. Submittals drawings shall be presented at a scale not less than 1/4" for
equipment layouts and ½" = 1'-0" for equipment details, mounting and other details. Each
THEATER AND STAGE EQUIPMENT
11 61 00 - 2
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
sheet shall allow space for approval stamps and have the name of the project, the
contractors and/or the supplier's name, address telephone number, and the date submitted.
Submit the following items for Architect's approval, prior to fabrication:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Stage plan view
Stage side section view
Gridiron layout indicating all stage equipment.
Electrical riser diagrams indicating the necessary power and control wiring for all rigging
equipment and systems.
Plan and elevation views indicating all power, motor and control hardware locations and
layout.
Provide full dimensions for panel layouts with finishes and materials for all custom
panels.
Details of installation and erection, including adjoining conditions and necessary
clearances.
Indication by arrow and boxed caption of each variation from contract drawing and
specifications, except those indicated as acceptable in specifications or on drawings.
B. Submittal shall include a fully dimensioned drawing indicating the location and elevation of all
control consoles and stations as well as coordination drawings showing the interrelationship
of stage rigging, drapery, stage lighting system, and other stage systems. Drawings shall
include, but not be limited to: plan, transverse section and elevation. Drawings should note
overhead obstructions such as MEP systems and should be coordinated with the submittals
of MEP trades. A full set of plans and specifications, including the Stage Equipment
Contractor's approved submittal drawings shall be onsite at all times. On these drawings the
Stage Equipment Contractor shall note all changes and modifications for the purpose of
project coordination and the development of accurate as-built drawings.
C. Catalog Cuts: In lieu of drawings, the Contractor may submit catalog cuts for standard
equipment items. These must contain full information on dimensions, construction,
applications, etc. to permit proper evaluation. In addition, these must be properly identified as
to their intended use. Any options or variations must be clearly noted.
D. Schedule: Prior to the commencement of the installation work, the Stage Equipment
Contractor shall submit an outline of the proposed schedule and requirements for approval.
E. RECORD DRAWINGS AND DATA: Submit in accordance with General Provisions. Within
30 days of final test and completion of the installation, submit the following to the Architect:
1. Three (3) complete sets of "as built and approved" drawings showing systems and
elements as installed, including field modifications and adjustments.
2. Three (3) sets of maintenance data including a list indicating replacement parts lists for
all items of equipment, wiring diagrams, control diagrams, any and all keys for cabinets,
racks, key operated switches etc. and complete operation manuals.
3. Three (3) Certificates of Guarantee
F. INSTRUCTION OF OWNER PERSONNEL: This contractor or his representative, fully
knowledgeable and qualified in systems operation, shall provide four (4) hours of instruction
to the Owner-designated personnel on the use and operation of this System. Designated
instruction times shall be arranged through the Architect.
G. PERMITS: Obtain all permits necessary for the execution of any work pertaining to the
installation, and conform in all trades with all applicable local codes and national codes.
Obtain all permits necessary for operation of any equipment by the Owner.
H. CLEAN UP: It shall be the responsibility of this Contractor to remove all debris from the
building or site caused by his operations to a common trash point or receptacle on the job
site, as determined by the General Contractor.
THEATER AND STAGE EQUIPMENT
11 61 00 - 3
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
1.11
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
WARRANTY
A. With respect to the Theatrical Lighting System, the Stage Equipment Contractor shall provide
a two-year written guarantee, on all materials and labor, against defects in materials or labor
starting from the date of Substantial Completion. The guarantee shall not include: normal
wear and tear, acts of God, or damages due to neglect or improper use of equipment. Any
required maintenance or replacement shall be provided by the Stage Equipment Contractor
within 10 days of notification by the Owner except for safety related items which shall be
corrected with 24 hours of notification.
B. The Stage Equipment Contractor shall maintain a 24-hour service line. Any calls placed to
that number during the warranty period, shall be answered within 30 minutes. The Stage
Equipment Contractor shall maintain replacement parts for each and every aspect of the
stage lighting system and shall present themselves at the job site within a 48-hour period of
notification by the Owner's designated personnel with the appropriate replacement parts.
1.12
GENERAL STANDARDS:
A. Standards: Materials shall conform to the following ASTM and ANSI standard specifications:
1. A-36: Specification for structural steel
2. A-47: Specification for malleable iron casting
3. A-48: Specification for gray iron casting
4. A-120: Specification for black and hot-dipped, zinc-coated (galvanized) steel pipe for
ordinary use
5. B 18.2.1 & 2: Specification for square and hex bolts and nuts
B. In order to establish minimum standard of safety, the following factors shall be used:
1. Cables and fittings: 8: 1 Safety Factor
2. Cable bending ratio: Sheave tread diameter is 30 times cable diameter
3. Tread Pressures: 500 lbs. For cast iron, 900 lbs. for Nylatron, 1000 lbs. for steel
4. Maximum fleet angle: 112 degrees
5. Steel: 15 of yield
6. Bearings: Two times required load at full speed for 2000 hours
7. Bolts: Minimum SAE J429 Grade 5 (ISO R898 Class 8.8), zinc plated
8. Motors: 1.0 Service Factor
9. Gearboxes: 1.25 Mechanical Strength Service Factor
10. Listing and Labeling: Where applicable standard have been established, equipment shall
be "Listed and Labeled" by a "Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory" (NRTL) as
defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7. The terms "Listed and Labeled" shall be defined as
they are in the National Electrical Code, Article 100.
11. NEC Compliance: National Electrical Code (NFPA 70)
12. NEMA Compliance: National Electrical Manufacturers Association
13. ANSI Compliance: Provide electric lamps which comply with ANSI construction and rating
standards.
C. Materials: All materials used in this project shall be new, unused and of the latest design. Refurbished and obsolete materials are not permitted.
D. Fabrication: The mechanical fabrication and workmanship shall incorporate best practices for
good fit and finish. There shall be no burrs or sharp edges to cause a hazard nor shall there
be any sharp comers accessible to personnel All moving parts shall have specified
tolerances. Sheaves shall run plumb and true and shall not scrape housings. All equipment
shall be built and installed to facilitate future maintenance and replacement.
E. Finishes: Paint shall be the manufacturer's standard finish and color except as noted. All
turnbuckles, clips, tracks, chains and other items of incidental hardware shall be furnished
plated or painted.
THEATER AND STAGE EQUIPMENT
11 61 00 - 4
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
F. Recommended Working Load: this specification calls for minimum recommended working
loads for many hardware items. The manufacturer's recommended working load is the
maximum load which the manufacturer recommends be applied to properly installed,
maintained, and operated new equipment. Manufacturer's recommended working loads shall
be determined by calculations by a Licensed Professional Engineer and destructive testing by
an independent testing laboratory. These calculations and reports shall be available for
review.
PART 2
2.1
THEATRICAL LIGHTING EQUIPMENT
POWER CONTROL SYSTEM
A. General
1. The installation rack shall be the Sensor3 120V as manufactured by Electronic Theatre
Controls, Inc., or equal. The Power Control System enclosure shall consist of up to 48
module spaces.
B. Electrical
1. Sensor3 racks shall operate at 120V, three phase, four wire + ground, 47-53 or to 57-63
Hz at 800 amps max. Other voltage and phase options are available upon request.
Sensor racks shall automatically compensate for frequency variations during operation.
Provisions shall be made for optional amp trap devices for fault current protection.
Standard SCCR fault current protection shall be 100,000A.
2
2. All load and neutral terminals shall accept up to #4 AWG (25mm ) wire. Systems
providing smaller terminals do not allow contractor wire sizing flexibility and shall be
deemed unacceptable.
3. Load terminals shall be located at the front of the wiring cavity. Front access racks having
terminals located at the back of the rack or on the side near the back of the rack such
that adjacent load cabling may block terminal access shall not be acceptable.
C. Electronics
1. Power control electronics (CEM3) shall be contained in a single module that can be plugin capable without use of tools. Power control and dimming systems that require tools for
removal of control electronics shall not be acceptable.
2. All data and power input for CEM3 control electronics shall be located on a separately
removable/pluggable termination connector on the backplane such that backplane can be
replaced without removal and discrete secondary conductor terminations. Systems that
require discrete termination of DMX, Ethernet, power input, and dimmer control output
directly on terminals on the control module or pluggable backplane shall not be permitted.
3. The power controller shall directly support the following network protocols:
a. Net3 protocol suite including ANSI E1.31 Streaming ACN (sACN)
b. ANSI E1.17 Architecture for Control Networks (ACN)
Systems that do not support the above listed industry standard ACN protocols for
Ethernet setup, control and feedback integrated directly between the power
system and control system shall not be deemed acceptable.
4. The power controller shall directly support 2 ports of control input using ANSI E1.11
USITT DMX512-A
5. Control signals shall be sent between control module and dimmer/power modules using
flat ribbon cables. Systems using cat5 cable and rj45 connections or discrete hand wired
conductors as sole physical communication media between control module and
dimmer/power modules shall be considered long term unreliable and shall be not be
acceptable.
6. System shall provide an optional low voltage connection to maintain power of control
electronics through brown out, instantaneous, and sustained power outages. Systems
that do not provide optional low voltage backup power connection to the power controller
shall not be acceptable.
THEATER AND STAGE EQUIPMENT
11 61 00 - 5
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
7. Control electronics shall be housed in a formed steel body with cast-aluminum face
panel.
D. Physical
1. The Sensor3 rack shall be a free-standing, dead-front switchboard, substantially framed
and enclosed with 16 gauge, formed steel panels. All rack components shall be properly
treated, primed and finished. Exterior surfaces shall be finished in fine-texture, scratchresistant, epoxy paint. Removable top and bottom panels shall facilitate conduit
termination on the 48 module rack. Knockouts shall serve the same purpose on 12 and
24 module racks.
2. Sensor3 racks shall be available in three sizes, with the following dimensions.
a. SR3-12 (12 module)
25.8”H x 14.8”W x 13.3”D
b. SR3-24 (24 module)
45.8”H x 14.8”W x 16.8”D
c. SR3-48 (48 module)
83.1”H x 14.8”W x 22.8”D
3. Racks shall be designed for front access to allow back-to-back or side-by-side
installation.
4. Racks shall be designed to allow easy insertion and removal of all modules without the
use of tools. Supports shall be provided for precise alignment of modules into power and
signal connector blocks. With modules removed, racks shall provide clear front access to
all load, neutral and control terminations. Racks that require removable panels to access
load, neutral or control terminations shall not be acceptable.
5. An optional bus bar kit shall be available from the factory to allow adjacent racks to be
powered by a single line feed. No soft buss rack-to-rack wiring shall be required. Racks
that require discrete cabling to connect adjacent racks shall not be acceptable.
6. Module spaces shall be mechanically keyed to accept only the 20A or below, 50A, or
100A module specified for that space. Racks that allow modules of varying wattages to
plug into the same space shall not be acceptable. The rack shall be configurable to
accept mixed dimmer types and sizes throughout the rack.
7. Each rack shall provide a lockable full-height door containing an integral electrostatic air
filter that shall be removable for easy cleaning. A single low-noise fan shall be located at
the top of each rack. Design of the rack and modules shall draw all cool air intake air
through the integral electrostatic air filter at the front of the rack, discretely through each
module housing and directly out the top of the rack such that exhausted hot air from
adjacent modules does not heat the module(s) above, below, or to the side of each other.
System designs that draw the same heated air through multiple modules shall not be
acceptable.
8. The fan shall maintain the temperature of all components at proper operating levels with
dimmers under full load, provided the ambient temperature of the dimmer room does not
exceed 40°C/104°F. Racks that do not employ both locking doors and electrostatic air
filters shall not be acceptable.
9. The fan shall turn on whenever any circuit in the system is activated. In the event of an
over-temperature condition, only the affected dimmer module(s) shall shut down and a
message shall appear on the control module LCD. The fan shall remain on during
thermal shutdown of individual dimmer modules. Systems that do not include overtemperature sensing and preventative thermal shutdown shall not be acceptable.
10. A fan sensor shall be provided. In the event of momentary fan failure, error message will
be displayed and sent remotely over Ethernet to optional logging systems. Systems that
do not provide optional system event logging shall not be deemed acceptable.
11. If the ambient room temperature drops below 0°C/32°F or rises above 40°C/104°F, a
warning shall appear on the dimmer rack LCD. If the temperature rises above
46°C/115°F, the rack shall shut down until the condition is corrected.
12. A 3 x .5-inch LED status indicator (beacon) shall be mounted in the rack door. The
beacon shall be visible throughout a wide viewing angle. In normal operating conditions,
this LED is illuminated. If the rack’s control module senses an error condition, the beacon
shall flash until the error is corrected. An optional indicator shall be available for remote
locations. Racks have no external means of visually showing that an error is present shall
not be acceptable.
THEATER AND STAGE EQUIPMENT
11 61 00 - 6
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
2.2
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
POWER CONTROL ELECTRONICS
A. General
1. The Power Control electronics shall be contained in one plug-in Power Controller. Each
power controller shall plug into a dimming cabinet with no need for tools or discrete wire
connections. A simple user interface shall be provided for group configuration, testing
and diagnostics. The Power Control System shall be Sensor 3 as manufactured by
Electronic Theatre Controls, Inc.
2. Power control shall be UL/cUL Listed and CE Marked. Power and dimming control that
require tools for removal of control electronics shall not be acceptable.
B. Physical (Control Interface)
1. The control electronics shall be contained in one plug-in module, housed in a formed
steel body with cast-aluminum face panel, and self-retaining ejection handles to ease
removal from the rack.
2. A backlit eight-line by 20-character graphical LCD shall be provided for system
configuration, live control and status display.
3. The following features shall be available in power control to reduce setup and tech times:
a. Full number pad shall be provided for quick access to dimmers. Power Control that
does not provide 0-9 number pad and logic keys for AND, THRU, and AT for fast
access, selection, and control of circuit/dimmer numbers shall not be acceptable.
b. Power control shall provide NEXT and LAST buttons to progress through individual
circuits/dimmers during pre-show lighting checks for lamp burnouts.
c. Shortcut buttons for Setup, About and live control shall be provided. These functions
shall be separated in such a way that user intending to check status or settings does
not accidentally render their system unusable. These buttons shall also serve to
reduce maximum time to access any feature or setting on a single dimmer, range of
dimmers or an entire rack.
Power control that does not include the above features shall not be
acceptable.
4. The front panel shall have five status LED indicators: power, network activity, DMX A,
DMX B, and panic state.
C. Control Signals and Physical Communications Media ports
1. The power control shall be provided with an Ethernet control signal input. This input shall
be fully configurable with a range of patching and priority programming capabilities. The
Ethernet signal shall supply seamless integration between the dimmer racks and both the
entertainment and architectural lighting control systems. The Ethernet signal shall also
enable remote configuration, playback, file storage and monitoring features on a personal
computer on the network. Dimming systems that require Ethernet to DMX translation
devices for control of critical show lighting introduce a potential failure point and shall not
be acceptable.
2. All data and power input for control electronics shall be located on a separately
removable/pluggable termination connector on the backplane such that backplane can be
replaced without removal and discrete secondary conductor terminations. Systems that
do not support tool-less replacement or that require removal of wires connected directly
to the control electronics shall not be acceptable.
3. Dimming systems that require discrete termination of DMX, Ethernet, power input, and
dimmer control output directly on terminals on the power control or pluggable backplane
shall not be acceptable.
4. DMX connections shall be available with option for pluggable screw or punch-down type
terminal. Systems that do not allow this option do not support both DMX over CAT5 and
mutli-strand conductors shall not be acceptable.
5. Ethernet connection shall be available via standard Cat5 RJ45 connection. System
requiring punch down direct to rack or controller cannot be Cat5 system certified and
shall not be acceptable.
THEATER AND STAGE EQUIPMENT
11 61 00 - 7
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
6. Power Control shall provide a convenience Ethernet uplink to the lighting network at the
rd
front face of the control module. Network capable 3 party control and monitoring devices
shall be provided full access to control, editing and real time feedback.
7. The following options shall be available to backup all controller setup UL924 Panic
configuration, and recorded presets:
a. Automatic backup in non-volatile backplane memory
b. Automatic backup in non-volatile Controller memory
rd
c. 3 party FTP server
d. USB storage device pluggable on the controller face panel
e. Data shall also be transferable to and from library storage on a personal computer on
a per-rack basis
8. The power controller shall directly support the following network protocols:
a. Net3 protocol suite including ANSI E1.31 Streaming ACN (sACN)
b. ANSI E1.17 Architecture for Control Networks (ACN)
c. Systems that do not support the above listed industry standard ACN protocols for
Ethernet setup, control, and feedback integrated directly between the power system
and control system shall not be deemed acceptable.
9. The power control shall directly support 2 optically isolated ports of ANSI E1.11 USITT
DMX512-A for control input. Minimum 2,500V of optical isolation shall be provided
between the DMX512 inputs and the electronics. Systems that do not have optical
isolation on a prewired factory plug-in device shall not be acceptable.
D. Power Control Features
1. The power control shall automatically compensate for frequency variations during
operation.
2. Dimmer outputs shall exhibit no oscillating or hunting for levels. Dimmers with the same
choke type set to the same level shall output within ±1V of each other, regardless of
phase or input voltage.
3. Power control shall maintain proper dimming performance for all line feed frequencies
from 47-53Hz and 57-63Hz without flicker or misfire. Shifts in frequencies up to 3 hz
shall not result in flicker or loss of dimming timing. Systems that cannot perform to these
frequency tolerances and shifts shall not be acceptable.
4. Dimmer output levels shall be regulated for incoming line voltages. The regulation shall
adjust for both RMS voltage changes and deformations in the incoming AC waveform.
The power control shall monitor and adjust each dimmer's output to maintain a constant
power to the load. Regulation shall maintain the desired output voltage ±1V for the entire
operating range (91-139V and 181-259 VAC) with the exception that the maximum output
will be no greater than the line voltage minus dimmer insulation loss. The regulation shall
compensate for dips and anomalies in the AC waveform on a dimmer-by-dimmer basis.
There shall be no interaction between dimmers in the system or any other equipment.
The output shall be nominally regulated to 115V/230V appropriate for the market, but
shall be field adjustable on a dimmer-by-dimmer basis to allow for varying cable length.
Systems that cannot maintain perform to the above stated voltage regulation shall not be
acceptable.
5. Power control shall support a rack filled with different types and sizes of dimmer modules.
The properties of each dimmer shall be configurable, including dimmer name, output
curve, dimmer firing mode, and scale voltage values.
a. The output curve selections shall include IES Modified Square, Square, Linear,
Modified Linear and a Sensor v2.0 output curve. The power control shall also have
the capability of storing up to three custom curves as well as an adjustable preheat
level, assignable on a per-dimmer basis.
b. Circuit control modes shall include: Always on, Dimmable, Dimmer Doubled,
Switched (unregulated on/off with adjustable on-at level), Fluorescent with adjustable
threshold and Off.
c. Power Control shall support forward or reverse phase firing of appropriate modules.
d. Dimmers set as Dimmer Doubled shall allow a single dimmer to set two different
levels on one dimmer circuit by splitting the AC power into positive and negative half
cycles with no resultant DC line current.
THEATER AND STAGE EQUIPMENT
11 61 00 - 8
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
Power Control that does not support all above listed adjustments to dimmers on
a per circuit basis shall not be acceptable.
User programmable parameters shall support onsite setup via the local interface in the
rack. These parameters shall include, but not be limited to, defining module type, scale
voltage for each dimmer, firing mode, curve, dimmer numbering, and DMX512/sACN
network port assignments. Systems requiring factory programming shall not be
acceptable.
Hardware settings for rack type, available module types, availability of AF features, and
operating voltage shall be configurable at the factory or in the field, and shall not require
secondary setup after system commissioning even in the event of power controller
replacement.
Controller shall support two methods of automatic configuration during controller
replacement in a rack.
a. Use backplane configuration: The backplane shall retain full setup and preset data
in. In this recovery mode, when a new power control is inserted, the controller shall
automatically come on-line fully functional without any manual intervention.
b. Use controller configuration: Override backplane configuration such that replacement
modules automatically use the configuration resident in nonvolatile memory of the
power control.
Controller shall be capable of changing rack setup for multiple shows for an entire system
with a single update command from a remote PC.
In the event of data loss each rack shall maintain the last level for a user-programmable
time (zero to five minutes or indefinitely) or may be programmed to fade out or to play a
specific preset. Systems that do not offer this feature shall not be acceptable.
The power control shall contain diagnostic routines to allow the user to test and
troubleshoot the system. The power control shall also contain a Test/Bypass switch to
turn all dimmers on to full for testing. This switch shall bypass all electronics and shall
force the fan on. Systems that do not include local control, “all on” control bypass, and
diagnostic routines shall not be deemed acceptable.
The power control shall be able to record up to 64 presets in a rack. Presets shall be user
programmable by recording a snapshot of current dimmer levels (as set by the all control
sources), by entering dimmer levels on the power control directly or by a combination of
both methods. The system shall have the ability to program and activate group-wide
presets from the power control, remote station, console, networked computer or handheld
device. Presets shall be activated in the default fade time of 2 seconds, but shall be have
a user-programmable fade time between 0 and 60 minutes.
A system-wide panic (emergency UL924) activation circuit shall be provided. Any dimmer
in any rack may be assigned to the panic circuit. The panic closure shall be maintained.
Upon activation the system shall:
a. Force all circuits selected to be included in panic to a master level between 80-100%
b. Optionally force all non-panic dimmers to zero
c. Provide configurable fade time to and from “emergency” state
d. Provide configurable delay to and from “emergency” state
DMX A and B as well as the Ethernet DMX (EDMX) data may be patched using a rack
start address - assigned sequentially from a starting control channel or patched
individually on a per-dimmer basis. Priority may be set per universe for the DMX inputs,
and set per universe by the control source for Ethernet input. Each dimmer may have up
to six network control inputs with either a highest takes precedence or priority patch.
Each dimmer may also then be assigned to one of 16 spaces for additional specific
preset control. Each preset shall have a separate priority for maximum flexibility of
prioritization. Systems that do not support prioritization of multiple Ethernet sources
beyond HTP shall not be acceptable. Systems that do not support the above listed
flexibility in control source prioritization shall not be acceptable.
Power control shall provide the ability to set a single circuit, all circuits or a range of
circuits to a level at the control interface in the rack. Systems that cannot locally control
dimmers through local control override shall not be acceptable.
THEATER AND STAGE EQUIPMENT
11 61 00 - 9
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
16. The power control shall be capable of monitoring and displaying incoming line voltage for
all three phases on the LCD. With installed current sensors, the same display shall show
amperage on each phase.
17. The power control shall support security protected access. The user shall to able to
program passwords that restrict access, preventing unauthorized use of higher-level
functions by unauthorized personnel. Systems that do not provide security protected
access to features that can render the system unusable shall not be acceptable.
18. Advanced Features (AF) option shall add an additional sensor in the individual dimmer
modules. This option shall allow monitoring of current and output voltage on a
dimmer-by-dimmer basis and provide information on lamp burnouts, dimmer status and
input voltages.
19. Power control shall allow the user to record the loads of all AF dimmers in the system.
The power control shall, during operation, test each AF dimmer, determine its load and
compare it to the recorded load. Any change from recorded loads of configured tolerance
shall display an error on the power control and any monitoring device on the network. If a
dimmer is driven on with no load, an optional message shall be available to notify the
console operator and electrician that there is no load.
E. Connect to Console Communications
1. The Ethernet network shall provide an integral link to connect all racks in the system for
remote rack-to-console and rack-to-network device communication of the below listed
features of real-time control, configuration, and status/feedback using industry standard
ANSI E1.17 ACN lighting protocol. Power control and dimming systems that do not use
this protocol shall not be permitted. Reported system errors shall be given ACN access to
be cleared remotely at the console with exception of system critical errors that require a
person to go directly to the rack to manually clear the exiting fault.
2. Control
a. E1.31 sACN control
b. Activate/Deactivate rack presets
c. Set/Unset circuit levels as overrides to Preset, DMX, and sACN control
d. Lock relays into On/Off/Remote switching states without patching to a console.
e. Lock dimmers into non-dim mode with On/Off/Remote switching states without
patching to a console.
3. Remote console configuration shall include, but not be limited to, real time reporting and
editing the following:
a. Circuit’s control mode
(1) Dimmable
(2) Switched
(3) Latch-lock
(4) Always on
(5) Off
(6) Fluorescent
b. Curves
c. Control threshold
d. Min Scale Voltage
e. Max Scale Voltage
f. Preheat
g. Scale load
4. Standard rack feedback - Rack status messages shall include, but not be limited to, real
time reporting of the following:
a. Identification
(1) Rack type
(2) Rack name
(3) Rack number
b. State of UL924 panic closure
c. DMX port A or B has an error or has failed
d. Network has an error or has failed
e. Phase A, B or C is below 90 volts
THEATER AND STAGE EQUIPMENT
11 61 00 - 10
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
f. Phase A, B or C is above 139 volts
g. Phase A, B or C did not start because it was outside of allowable voltage ranges at
power up
h. Phase A, B or C voltage headroom warning
i. Frequency is not 50 or 60 Hz
j. Ambient temperature is below 0°C/32°F
k. Ambient temperature is above 40°C/104°F
l. System Critical-Ambient temperature exceeds 46°C/115°F
m. Configuration memory error
n. Run hours remaining before rack filter needs to be cleaned
o. IP address of the controller in the rack
p. Software version of the controller in the rack
5. Standard branch circuit feedback - Ethernet console access of the following circuit status
shall be provided:
a. Module type
b. Circuit location
c. Patched circuit addresses
d. Output level
e. Control Source
f. Overtemp
6. Advanced branch circuit feedback - Dimmer Specific status messages shall include, but
not be limited to, the following:
a. Load has dropped below recorded value
b. Load has raised above recorded value
c. DC detected on dimmer output
d. One SCR has failed on/off
e. Dimmer has failed off or circuit breaker has tripped
f. Dimmer has been removed
g. Dimmer load has failed
h. Dimmer has shut down due to over temperature
2.3
DIMMER MODULES
A. General
1. The dimmer modules shall be the Sensor dimmer modules as manufactured by
Electronic Theatre Controls, Inc., or equal. Sensor dimmer modules shall be designed for
dependable, economical service in theatrical and video applications.
B. Electrical
1. Each dimmer module shall contain two single-pole circuit breakers, a solid-state
switching module, associated toroidal filters, and power and control connectors.
2. Modules shall not have any protruding pins subject to physical damage when the module
is not installed.
3. Modules shall be keyed so that dimmer modules of different capacity shall not be
interchangeable.
4. Circuit breakers shall be fully magnetic so the trip current is not affected by ambient
temperature. Circuit breakers shall be rated for tungsten loads having an inrush rating of
no less than 20 times normal current. Circuit breakers shall be rated for 100 percent
switching duty applications. Dimmers that do not operate continuously at 100% load shall
not be acceptable.
C. SCR Assembly
1. Each dimmer module shall use a solid state module (SSM) consisting of two siliconcontrolled rectifiers (SCRs) in an inverse parallel configuration, and all required gating
circuitry on the high voltage side of an integral, opto-coupled control voltage isolator.
Rectifiers, copper leads and a ceramic substrate shall be reflow soldered to an integral
heat sink for maximum heat dissipation. The SSM shall also contain a control LED, a
thermistor for temperature sensing, and silver-plated control and load contacts. The
THEATER AND STAGE EQUIPMENT
11 61 00 - 11
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
entire SSM shall be sealed in a plastic housing requiring only a screwdriver to replace.
Dimmers employing triac power devices, pulse transformers, or other isolating devices
not providing at least 2,500V RMS isolation, shall not be acceptable. Dimmer modules
requiring disassembly, heat sink grease or additional tools for repair shall not be
acceptable.
2. All electronic components (current/voltage sensors and indicators) shall be contained in a
single, field-replaceable housing. Modules requiring discrete wiring of electronic
components shall not be acceptable.
3. SCR power switching devices shall have the following minimum ratings:
Module Size:
Single cycle:
Peak surge
current
Half cycle:
12T
Transient
over voltage
Die size (in)
15 A
625A
20A
625A
1,620
1,620
600V
600V
.257
.257
D. Filtering
1. Dimmer modules shall include toroidal filters to reduce the rate of current rise time
resulting from switching the SCRs. The filter shall limit objectionable harmonics, reduce
lamp filament sing and limit radio frequency interference on line and load conductors.
Modules shall offer 350 or 500 uS. filter rise times. Rise time shall be measured at the
worst case slew rate (about 50 percent) from 10 to 90 percent of the output wave form
with the dimmer operating at full load.
2. All dimmers shall maintain their published rise time and/or fall time regardless of duty
cycle or rack temperatures. Dimmers that derate due to increased dimmer temperature
caused by full load operation or high phase angles shall not be acceptable.
E. Performance
1. Power efficiency for standard dimmers shall be at least 97 percent at full load with a noload loss of 3V RMS. The dimmer shall accept hot patching of a cold incandescent load
up to the full rated capacity of the dimmer.
F. Physical
1. Dimmer modules shall be fully plug-in and factory wired. Dimmer modules shall consist of
a heavy duty, die-cast aluminum chassis with integral face panel. No tools shall be
required for module removal and insertion. All parts shall be properly treated, primed and
finished in fine-texture, scratch resistant, gray epoxy powder coat. With the exception of
the circuit breaker, the module shall contain no moving parts. Each module shall be
labeled with the manufacturer's name, catalog number and rating. Modules constructed
of molded plastic for structural support are not equivalent and are not acceptable.
Dimmer modules shall be UL Recognized.
G. Provide modules in quantities as indicated on drawings and schedules.
2.4
THRUPOWER MODULES
A. General
1. The modules shall be Sensor3 ThruPower modules as manufactured by Electronic
Theatre Controls, Inc., or equal. Sensor modules shall be designed for complete flexibility
of choice for dimmed, non-dim, or hot power on each 20A branch circuit. A single
ThruPower module shall provide:
a. Two dimmed outputs with choice of 500 or 350 us rise times, controlled by DMX, or
b. Two air gap relay switched outputs controlled by DMX, or
THEATER AND STAGE EQUIPMENT
11 61 00 - 12
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
c. Two manual bypass constant power circuits controlled manually
2. The module may be configured to operate as two dimmers, two relays, or any
combination of relay and dimmer from the CEM3 Power Control Module or from an ETC
control console connected to a CEM3 system. Any single circuit may be set to bypass the
dimmer using a switch on the front of the module.
B. Status Reporting
1. The power control system shall report circuit specific errors via the rack control
electronics and/or via a lighting control console.
2. Modules shall provide the following status reporting functions:
a. Load dropped below recorded value
b. Load increased over recorded value
c. DC on dimmer output
d. SCR failed on/off
e. Circuit breaker tripped
f. Dimmer error
g. ThruPower module removed
h. Load absent
C. Electrical
1. Each ThruPower module shall contain
a. two circuit breakers
b. SCR solid-state dimming
c. toroid filters
d. power and control connectors
e. 120VAC remotely controllable mechanically latching air gap relay
f. Low voltage dc manual bypass override switch
g. 1 fuse per branch circuit for sufficient short circuit rating
2. Modules that use Triac dimming shall not be acceptable. Modules which utilize an SCR
or triac solid state switch as a dimmer bypass may void warranty of products they are
powering and shall not be an acceptable means of bypass.
3. Modules shall not have any protruding pins subject to physical damage when the module
is not installed.
4. Modules shall be keyed so that modules of different capacity shall not be
interchangeable.
5. Circuit breakers shall be fully magnetic so the trip current is not affected by ambient
temperature. Circuit breakers shall be rated for tungsten loads having an inrush rating of
no less than 20 times normal current. Circuit breakers shall be rated for 100 percent
switching duty applications. Dimmers that do not operate continuously at 100% load shall
not be acceptable.
D. SCR Assembly
1. Each module shall use a solid state module (SSM) consisting of two silicon-controlled
rectifiers (SCRs) in an inverse parallel configuration, and all required gating circuitry on
the high voltage side of an integral, opto-coupled control voltage isolator. Rectifiers,
copper leads and a ceramic substrate shall be reflow soldered to an integral heat sink for
maximum heat dissipation. The SSM shall also contain a control LED, a thermistor for
temperature sensing, and silver-plated control and load contacts. The SSM shall include
an integral output LED, output voltage sensors and current sensors for feedback to the
control module. The SSM shall provide a parallel output connection which completely
bypasses all SCR dimming including toroid filters and shall intercept the output prior to
connection of the load sensing circuit such that the advanced features are still active
during bypass. The entire SSM shall be sealed in a plastic housing requiring only a
screwdriver to replace. Dimmers employing triac power devices, pulse transformers, or
other isolating devices not providing at least 2,500V RMS isolation, shall not be
acceptable. Modules requiring disassembly, heat sink grease or additional tools for repair
shall not be acceptable.
THEATER AND STAGE EQUIPMENT
11 61 00 - 13
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
2. All electronic components (current/voltage sensors and indicators) shall be contained in a
single, field-replaceable housing. Modules requiring discrete wiring of electronic
components shall not be acceptable.
3. SCR power switching devices shall have the following minimum ratings:
Module Size:
Single cycle:
Peak surge
current
Half cycle:
12T
Transient
over voltage
Die size (in)
20A
625A
50A
1,200A
100A
2,300A
1,620
4,150
22,000
600V
600V
600V
.257
.394
.570
E. Filtering
1. Modules shall include toroid filters to reduce the rate of current rise time resulting from
switching the SCRs. The filter shall limit objectionable harmonics, reduce lamp filament
sing and limit radio frequency interference on line and load conductors. Modules shall
offer 350 or 500uS filter rise times. Rise time shall be measured at the worst case slew
rate (approximately 50 percent) from 10 to 90 percent of the output wave form with the
dimmer operating at full load.
2. All dimmers shall maintain their published rise time and/or fall time regardless of duty
cycle or rack temperatures. Dimmers that de-rate due to increased dimmer temperature
caused by full load operation or high phase angles shall not be acceptable.
F. Performance
1. Power efficiency for standard dimmers shall be at least 97 percent at full load with a noload loss of 3V RMS. The dimmer shall accept hot patching of a cold incandescent load
up to the full rated capacity of the dimmer.
G. Physical
1. Modules shall be fully plug-in and factory wired. Modules shall consist of a heavy duty,
die-cast aluminum chassis with integral face panel. No tools shall be required for module
removal and insertion. All parts shall be properly treated, primed and finished in finetexture, scratch resistant, gray epoxy powder coat. With the exception of the circuit
breaker, the module shall contain no moving parts. Each module shall be labeled with the
manufacturer's name, catalog number and rating. Modules constructed of molded plastic
for structural support are not equivalent and are not acceptable. Modules shall be UL
Recognized.
H. Provide modules in quantities as indicated on drawings and schedules.
2.5
CONTROL PROCESSOR MODULES
A. The Architectural Control Processor shall be the Unison Paradigm P-ACP Series Control
Processor as manufactured by Electronic Theatre Controls, Inc., or equal.
B. The Architectural Control Processor (ACP) assembly shall be designed for use in DRd Series
Dimming Enclosures and ERn Series Control Enclosures.
C. The processor shall utilize microprocessor based, solid state technology to provide multiscene lighting and building control.
1. ACP shall support functions such as station programming, macro sequencing, electronic
lockout, room combine and astronomical time clock events. ACP station processor shall
allow configuration of the control system via the menus. See software section for
additional system details.
THEATER AND STAGE EQUIPMENT
11 61 00 - 14
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
2. When used in a dimming enclosure, the ACP shall allow access to dimming control
menus including the status screen, dimming configuration screen, backup menu, test
menu and configuration menu.
D. One ACP shall be rated to drive 1024 channels of control, 1024 zones, 64 rooms, 512
presets, 62 button or button/fader stations and 6 Touchscreen Stations
E. ACP module electronics shall be convection cooled.
F. The ACP shall provide front-panel RJ45 jack, Secure Digital (SD) card slot, and Universal
Serial Bus (USB) Port for configuration and data exchange.
G. The Architectural Control Processor shall be the Unison Paradigm P-ACP Series Control
Processor as manufactured by Electronic Theatre Controls, Inc., or equal.
H. The Architectural Control Processor (ACP) assembly shall be designed for use in DRd Series
Dimming Enclosures and ERn Series Control Enclosures.
I.
The processor shall utilize microprocessor based, solid state technology to provide multiscene lighting and building control.
J.
One ACP shall be rated to drive 1024 channels of control, 1024 zones, 64 rooms, 512
presets, 62 button or button/fader stations and 6 Touchscreen Stations
K. ACP module electronics shall be convection cooled.
L. The ACP shall provide front-panel RJ45 jack, Secure Digital (SD) card slot, and Universal
Serial Bus (USB) Port for configuration and data exchange.
M. Architectural Lighting System configuration and program information shall be stored in flash
memory, which does not require battery backup.
N. The ACP shall be contained in a plug-in assembly and require no discrete wiring connections;
all wiring shall be terminated into Dimming or Control Enclosure.
1. The ACP shall support the following communications:
a. Echelon LinkPower
b. 10/100BaseTX, auto MDI/MDIX, 802.3af compliant Ethernet networking with TCP/IP,
ESTA BSR E1.17 Advanced Control Networks (ACN) and ESTA BSR E1.31 (sACN)
Protocols
c. EIA-232 serial protocol
d. ESTA DMX512A, configurable as input or output ports
e. Dry contact closure inputs
f. Dry contact closure outputs, rated at 1A@30VDC
2.6
STATION POWER MODULES
A. The Station Power Module shall be the Unison Paradigm P-SPM Series Station Power
Module as manufactured by Electronic Theatre Controls, Inc., or equal.
B. Mechanical
C. The Station Power Module (SPM) assembly shall be designed for use in DRd Series or ERn
Rack Enclosures.
D. The SPM shall convert input power into low-voltage (Class II) power with data line and a
secondary auxiliary low-voltage line to energize button, button/fader, touchscreen, and
interface devices for multi-scene lighting and building control.
THEATER AND STAGE EQUIPMENT
11 61 00 - 15
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
E. SPM module shall be contained in a plug-in assembly.
1. The module shall be housed in a formed steel body and contain no discrete wire
connections.
a. No tools shall be required for module removal or insertion.
F. The SPM shall be convection cooled.
G. User Interface
1. The SPM shall utilize light emitting diodes (LED’s) to indication function, status and fault.
H.
The SPM shall be secured behind the locking door.
I.
Wall-mounted, direct wire and 19” rack-mount, connectorized repeater and dual-repeater
variants shall be available from the same manufacturer where required on the project.
J.
Electrical
1. The SPM shall require no discrete wiring connections; all wiring shall be terminated into
the dimming enclosure, unless required by a variant.
2. The SPM shall require line-voltage power supplied by the contractor, terminated inside
the dimming or control enclosure.
3. The SPM shall be hot-swap capable.
4. The SPM, in conjunction with a matching Architectural Control Processor (ACP), shall
support Echelon LinkPower communications with remote devices, including button,
button/fader, touchscreen and interface stations, and shall interoperate with LonMARKapproved third-party devices.
a. The LinkPower network shall utilize polarity-independent, low-voltage Class II twisted
pair wiring, type Belden 8471 (unshielded) or Belden 8719 (shielded) or equivalent.
One # 14 AWG drain wire will be required for system not using grounded metal
conduit.
b. The LinkPower network shall be topology free. Network wiring may be bus, loop,
home run, star or any combination of these.
c. Link power wiring shall permit a total wire run of 1640 ft. (500m)
(1) Repeaters allow an additional wire run of 1640 ft. (500m)
(2) Dual-repeaters allow two additional wire runs of 1640 ft. (500m)
d. Link power wiring between stations shall not exceed 1313 ft. (400m).
5. The SPM shall support auxiliary power for certain remote devices, including touchscreen
and interface stations, as required by the device.
a. The auxiliary power network shall utilize polarity-dependent, low-voltage Class II
wiring, consisting of two # 16 AWG wires.
b. Auxiliary wiring shall permit a total wire run of 1640 ft. (500m)
(1) Repeaters allow an additional wire run of 1640 ft. (500m)
(2) Dual-repeaters allow two additional wire runs of 1640 ft. (500m)
c. The SPM shall supply 1.25 amps at 24v DC continuously.
K. Functional
1. Capacity
a. Each SPM shall:
(1)
Supply power for up to 32 button and button/fader stations.
a) Repeaters and dual-repeaters allow 30 additional stations, 62 total
(2) Supply auxiliary power for a similar number of interface stations.
(3) Shall supply auxiliary power for up to four Touchscreen stations, when a like
number of other stations are deducted from the total.
a) Repeaters and dual-repeaters allow two additional Touchscreens (six total)
when a like number of other stations are deducted from the total.
2. Operation
a. The SPM shall not require configuration or programming.
b. The SPM shall automatically detect faults in the wiring, indicate the fault, including
the fault polarity, and shut down the output power.
THEATER AND STAGE EQUIPMENT
11 61 00 - 16
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
(1)
2.7
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
The SPM shall automatically reset when the fault is clear, and can be manually
reset by removing and re-inserting the module.
STATION PROCESSOR MODULES
A. The Station Power Module shall be the Unison Paradigm P-SPM Series Station Power
Module as manufactured by Electronic Theatre Controls, Inc., or equal.
1. The Station Power Module (SPM) assembly shall be designed for use in DRd Series or
ERn Rack Enclosures.
B. The SPM shall convert input power into low-voltage (Class II) power with data line and a
secondary auxiliary low-voltage line to energize button, button/fader, touchscreen, and
interface devices for multi-scene lighting and building control.
C. The SPM, in conjunction with a matching Architectural Control Processor (ACP), shall
support Echelon LinkPower communications with remote devices, including button,
button/fader, touchscreen and interface stations, and shall interoperate with LonMARKapproved third-party devices.
1. The LinkPower network shall utilize polarity-independent, low-voltage Class II twisted pair
wiring, type Belden 8471 (unshielded) or Belden 8719 (shielded) or equivalent. One # 14
AWG drain wire will be required for system not using grounded metal conduit.
2. The LinkPower network shall be topology free. Network wiring may be bus, loop, home
run, star or any combination of these.
3. Link power wiring shall permit a total wire run of 1640 ft. (500m)
4. Repeaters allow an additional wire run of 1640 ft. (500m)
5. Dual-repeaters allow two additional wire runs of 1640 ft. (500m)
6. Link power wiring between stations shall not exceed 1313 ft. (400m).
7. The SPM shall support auxiliary power for certain remote devices, including touchscreen
and interface stations, as required by the device.
a. The auxiliary power network shall utilize polarity-dependent, low-voltage Class II
wiring, consisting of two # 16 AWG wires.
b. Auxiliary wiring shall permit a total wire run of 1640 ft. (500m)
(1) Repeaters allow an additional wire run of 1640 ft. (500m)
(2) Dual-repeaters allow two additional wire runs of 1640 ft. (500m)
c. The SPM shall supply 1.25 amps at 24v DC continuously.
D. ACP module electronics shall be convection cooled.
E. Each SPM shall:
1. Supply power for up to 32 button and button/fader stations.
a. Repeaters and dual-repeaters allow 30 additional stations, 62 total
2. Supply auxiliary power for a similar number of interface stations.
3. Shall supply auxiliary power for up to four Touchscreen stations, when a like number of
other stations are deducted from the total.
a. Repeaters and dual-repeaters allow two additional Touchscreens (six total) when a
like number of other stations are deducted from the total
2.8
TOUCHSCREEN CONTROL STATIONS
A. The Touchscreen Control Stations shall be the Unison Paradigm Touchscreen P-LCD Series
Control Stations as manufactured by Electronic Theatre Controls, Inc., or equal.
B. General
1. Touchscreen stations shall support default and fully graphical control pages.
2. The Touchscreen station shall operate using graphic buttons, faders and other images on
at least 30 separate programmable control pages.
3. Touchscreen stations shall also allow programming of page pass-code, lock out and
visibility levels.
THEATER AND STAGE EQUIPMENT
11 61 00 - 17
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
C. Mechanical
1. Touchscreen stations shall consist of a seven inch, backlit liquid crystal display (LCD)
with a minimum resolution of 800 by 400 pixels and 12-bit color depth with a touch
interface.
2. Touchscreen bezels shall be constructed of aluminum and shall have no visible means of
attachment.
a. The bezel shall install and remove without the use of tools.
b. The bezel shall provide two working positions for the Touchscreen: service and
operating.
3. The Touchscreen shall have a protective overlay over the display.
a. The overlay shall reduce wear
b. The overlay shall reduce glare
4. The manufacturer shall provide backboxes for all LCD stations.
a. Flush back box dimensions shall be 7.94” wide x 5.33” high x 3.25” deep
b. Surface back box dimensions shall be 8.3” wide x 5.6” high x 2.55” deep
D. Electrical
1. Touchscreens shall be powered entirely by the System network.
2. Touchscreens shall connect to the System using an Ethernet network with Power over
Ethernet (PoE) or the Unison control station Echelon® Link power network.
a. Ethernet Network
(1) Ethernet network shall be 10/100BaseTX, auto MDI/MDIX, 802.3af compliant.
(2) Network shall utilize Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) Category 5 wiring.
b. Echelon® Link power network.
(1) Link power shall utilize low-voltage Class II unshielded twisted pair, type Belden
8471 or equivalent, and one #14 ESD drain wire (when not installed in
grounded metal conduit).
(2) Touchscreen stations shall also require (2) #16 AWG stranded wires for 24Vdc
operating power. 24Vdc wiring shall be topology free.
(3) Network wiring may be bus, loop, home run, star or any combination of these.
(4) Network insulation displacement connectors shall be provided with all stations.
E. Functional
1. System
a. The Touchscreen shall support configuration firmware upload from a Paradigm
Processor as proxy
b. The Touchscreen shall support configuration or firmware upload from local
removable media
2. Setup Mode
a. There shall be a setup display that is separate from any user-defined configuration
b. It shall be possible to view and modify connectivity settings
c. It shall be possible to view status information
d. It shall be possible to view and modify LCD screen settings
e. It shall be possible to perform Touchscreen calibration
f. It shall be possible to view and modify audio settings
g. The appearance of the setup display shall be standard and not editable
h. The setup display may be invoked from within the user-defined configuration and/or
physical button on the Touchscreen
i. There shall be a default protected method to invoke the setup display
3. Configurations
a. It shall be possible to have multiple configurations stored within an LCD Station
b. Only one configuration may be active on the LCD Station
c. It shall be possible for Touchscreen Stations connected via the Echelon® Link power
network to select a configuration automatically based on the configuration of the
physical connection.
d. Where multiple configurations are stored there shall be a boot menu to allow
selection of a configuration
e. Each configuration shall be identified as a different Station within the System
THEATER AND STAGE EQUIPMENT
11 61 00 - 18
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
4. Operation
a. The Unison Paradigm Control System shall be designed to allow control of lighting
and associated systems via Touchscreen controls. System shall allow the control of
presets, sequences, macros and time clock events.
(1) System presets shall be programmable via Button, Button/Fader, Touchscreen,
or LightDesigner software.
a) Presets shall have a discrete fade time, programmable from zero to 84,600
seconds with a resolution of one hundred milliseconds.
b) Presets shall be selectable via Touchscreen stations.
(2) System macros and sequences shall be programmable via LightDesigner
system software.
a) Macro and sequence steps shall provide user selectable steps, and allow
the application of conditional logic.
b) Macro and sequences shall be activated by button, time clock event or
LightDesigner software.
(3) System time clock events shall be programmable via the Touchscreen,
LightDesigner system software, the processor user interface, or the internal
web server.
a) Time clock events shall be assigned to system day types. Standard day
types include: anyway, weekday, weekend, Sunday, Monday, Tuesday,
Wednesday, Thursday, Friday and Saturday.
System shall support
programming of additional custom or special day types.
b) Time clock events shall be activated based on sunrise, sunset, time of day
or periodic event. System shall automatically compensate for regions using
a fully configurable daylight saving time.
(4) A Color picker, supporting Hue, Saturation and Brightness (HSB) color
selection shall be available for color selection of color changing fixtures and
provide visual feedback of the current color produced by the associated fixture.
a) The color picker shall be provided with a default layout that requires no
user configuration
b) The Color Picker shall provide RGB faders in addition to the default HSB
color wheel for color selection
c) Color picker values shall allow for numerical value input in addition to color
wheel and fader control
d) The color picker shall be compatible with color mixing systems that use up
to seven discrete color control channels
b. Touchscreen stations shall be designed to operate standard default or custom
system functions. Components shall operate default functions unless re-assigned via
LightDesigner, the Windows-based configuration program.
(1) Optional button functions include: preset selection, manual mode activation,
record mode activation, station lockout, raise, lower, macro activation, and cue
light, or room join/separate.
(2) Optional fader functions include master control, individual channel control, fade
rate control or preset master control.
c. Touchscreen stations shall allow programming of station and component electronic
lockout levels via LightDesigner.
d. It shall be possible to adjust LCD contrast and brightness.
e. It shall be possible to program the station to dim during periods of inactivity.
F. Programming
1. Allow and additional 8 hours programming for touch screen interface.
2.9
PORTABLE TOUCHSCREEN CONTROL STATIONS
A. The Portable Touchscreen Control Stations shall be the Unison Paradigm Portable
Touchscreen P-LCD Series Control Stations as manufactured by Electronic Theatre Controls,
Inc., or equal.
B. General
THEATER AND STAGE EQUIPMENT
11 61 00 - 19
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
1. Portable Touchscreen stations shall support default and fully graphical control pages.
2. Portable Touchscreen stations shall operate using graphic buttons, faders and other
images on at least 30 separate programmable control pages.
3. Portable Touchscreen stations shall also allow programming of page pass-code, lock out
and visibility levels.
4. Portable Touchscreen stations shall support location awareness to automatically load the
configuration required dependant on the connection point to the system
C. Mechanical
1. Portable Touchscreen stations shall consist of a seven inch, backlit liquid crystal display
(LCD) with a minimum resolution of 800 by 400 pixels and 24-bit color depth with a touch
interface.
2. The Portable Touchscreen enclosure and cover shall be constructed of aluminum and
finished in a fine-texture powder coat paint
3. The enclosure shall provide a hinged cover with two positions for the Touchscreen:
closed and operating.
4. The Portable Touchscreen shall have a protective cover for removable media ports.
a. The protective cover shall be hinged
b. The Touchscreen cover shall be operational with the media cover in the open or
closed position
5. The Portable Touchscreen shall include an attached cable with 6-pin Amphenol
connector and strain relief to interface with Portable Connector Stations
a. Attached Cable shall be 15’ in length constructed of ultra-flexible material
b. Extension cables up to 100’ in length shall be available to extend the cable length to
a maximum of 115’ total length
D. Electrical
1. Portable Touchscreens shall be powered entirely by the System network.
2. Portable Touchscreens shall connect to the System using the Unison control station
Echelon® Link power network over the attached cable.
a. Echelon® Link power network.
(1) Link power shall utilize low-voltage Class II unshielded twisted pair, type Belden
8471 or equivalent, and one #14 ESD drain wire (when not installed in
grounded metal conduit).
(2) Touchscreen stations shall also require (2) #16 AWG stranded wires for 24Vdc
operating power. 24Vdc wiring shall be topology free.
(3) Network wiring may be bus, loop, home run, star or any combination of these.
E. Functional
1. System
a. The Portable Touchscreen shall support configuration upload from a Paradigm
Processor as proxy
b. The Touchscreen shall support configuration or firmware upload from local
removable media
c. It shall be possible to connect multiple Portable Touchscreen station to the system at
one time
2. Setup Mode
a. There shall be a setup display that is separate from any user-defined configuration
b. It shall be possible to view and modify connectivity settings
c. It shall be possible to view status information
d. It shall be possible to view and modify LCD screen settings
e. It shall be possible to perform Touchscreen calibration
f. It shall be possible to view and modify audio settings
g. The appearance of the setup display shall be standard and not editable
h. The setup display may be invoked from within the user-defined configuration and/or
physical button on the Portable Touchscreen
i. There shall be a default protected method to invoke the setup display
3. Configurations
THEATER AND STAGE EQUIPMENT
11 61 00 - 20
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
a. It shall be possible to have multiple configurations stored within an LCD Station
b. The Portable Touchscreen shall automatically load the required configuration based
on connection point to the system
c. Only one configuration may be active on the LCD Station
d. It shall be possible for Portable Touchscreen Stations connected via the Echelon®
Link power network to select a configuration automatically based on the configuration
of the physical connection.
e. Where multiple configurations are stored there shall be a setup menu to allow
selection of a configuration
f. Each configuration shall be identified as a different Station within the System
4. Operation
a. The Unison Paradigm Control System shall be designed to allow control of lighting
and associated systems via Touchscreen controls. System shall allow the control of
presets, sequences, macros and time clock events.
(1) System presets shall be programmable via Button, Button/Fader or
Touchscreen stations, or LightDesigner software.
a) Presets shall have a discrete fade time, programmable from zero to 84,600
seconds with a resolution of one hundred milliseconds.
b) Presets shall be selectable via Touchscreen stations.
(2) System macros and sequences shall be programmable via LightDesigner
system software.
a) Macro and sequence steps shall provide user selectable steps, and allow
the application of conditional logic.
b) Macro and sequences shall be activated by button, time clock event or
LightDesigner software.
(3) System time clock events shall be programmable via the Touchscreen,
LightDesigner system software, the processor user interface, or the internal
web server.
a) Time clock events shall be assigned to system day types. Standard day
types include: anyway, weekday, weekend, Sunday, Monday, Tuesday,
Wednesday, Thursday, Friday and Saturday.
System shall support
programming of additional custom or special day types.
b) Time clock events shall be activated based on sunrise, sunset, time of day
or periodic event. System shall automatically compensate for regions using
a fully configurable daylight saving time.
(4) A Color picker, supporting Hue, Saturation and Brightness (HSB) color
selection shall be available for color selection of color changing fixtures and
provide visual feedback of the current color produced by the associated fixture.
a) The color picker shall be provided with a default layout that requires no
user configuration
b) The Color Picker shall provide RGB faders in addition to the default HSB
color wheel for color selection
c) Color picker values shall allow for numerical value input in addition to color
wheel and fader control
d) The color picker shall be compatible with color mixing systems that use up
to seven discrete color control channels
b. Portable Touchscreen stations shall be designed to operate standard default or
custom system functions. Components shall operate default functions unless reassigned via LightDesigner, the Windows-based configuration program.
(1) Optional button functions include: preset selection, manual mode activation,
record mode activation, station lockout, raise, lower, macro activation, and cue
light, or room join/separate.
(2) Optional fader functions include master control, individual channel control, fade
rate control or preset master control.
c. Portable Touchscreen stations shall allow programming of station and component
electronic lockout levels via LightDesigner.
d. It shall be possible to adjust LCD contrast and brightness.
e. It shall be possible to program the station to dim during periods of inactivity.
THEATER AND STAGE EQUIPMENT
11 61 00 - 21
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
2.10
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
STATIONS
A. The Lighting Control Stations shall be the Unison Heritage UH Series Control Stations as
manufactured by Electronic Theatre Controls, Inc., or equal.
B. Mechanical
1. Unison Heritage Button and Button/Fader Stations shall operate using up to sixteen
programmable faders and twelve programmable buttons.
2. All button/fader stations shall be available with white, cream, ivory, gray or black
faceplates, fader knobs, and buttons.
a. Manufacturer's standard colors shall conform to the RAL CLASSIC Standard.
3. Stations shall have indicators lights at each button or fader.
a. Indicators shall be comprised of red, green and blue LED's
b. Indicator color and state (steady On, Blink, Off) shall be configured in software, and
shall operate relative to the button or fader it is associated with.
4. All faceplates shall be designed for flush or surface mounting.
5. Station faceplates shall be constructed of ABS plastic and shall use no visible means of
attachment.
6. Station faceplates shall be indelibly marked for each button or fader function.
7. The manufacturer shall supply back boxes for flush mounted half gang stations and for all
surface mounted stations.
C. Functional
1. The Unison Paradigm Control System shall be designed to allow control of lighting and
associated systems via Button, Button/Fader, and Interface or Astronomical time clock
controls. System shall allow the programming of presets, sequences, macros and time
clock events.
2. Station Button, Button/Fader, and Interface) control components shall be designed to
operate standard default or custom system functions. Components shall operate default
functions unless re-assigned via LightDesigner, the Windows-based configuration
program.
3. Stations (Button and Button/Fader) shall allow programming of station and component
electronic lockout levels via LightDesigner.
D. Electrical
1. Unison control station wiring shall be an Echelon® Link power network.
a. Link power shall utilize low-voltage Class II unshielded twisted pair, type Belden 8471
or equivalent, and one #14 ESD drain wire (when not installed in grounded metal
conduit).
b. Touchscreen and Interface stations shall also require (2) #16 AWG stranded wires for
24Vdc operating power. 24Vdc wiring shall be topology free.
c. Network wiring may be bus, loop, home run, star or any combination of these.
d. Network insulation displacement connectors shall be provided with all stations.
2.11
DMX CONTROLLED A.C. PANELBOARD
A. All courtesy 208v A.C. power for the lighting system shall be supplied from a DMX controlled
source capable of being remote controlled via a DMX 512 bus.
B. Controlled circuits shall be controlled by a branch circuit breaker with an integral motor
control.
C. The DMX Breaker Control system shall have brownout protection; monitoring the line voltage
and disabling DMX command execution if the line voltage drops below 95 volts for more than
2 seconds.
THEATER AND STAGE EQUIPMENT
11 61 00 - 22
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
D. The DMX Breaker Control system shall have EDO (Emergency DMX Override) capability
triggered by external contacts. An external EDO contract closure shall override all DMX
commands and recall a stored Emergency on/off scene.
E. Un-controlled circuits, as required, shall be supplied from the same A.C. source so that a
single lever main circuit breaker may control all.
F. Three phase panel boards shall have 200% neutrals. (400A shall have 100% neutrals)
G. All branch circuit breakers shall be bolt-on.
H. The model shall be the LynTec LCP 341-30 series DMX Controlled Panelboard.
2.12
LIGHTING CONSOLE AND ACCESSORIES
A. General
1. The lighting control console shall be a microprocessor-based system specifically
designed to provide complete control of stage, studio, and entertainment lighting
systems. The console shall be the Gio as manufactured by Electronic Theatre Controls,
Inc., or equal.
2. The control system shall be Net3 and ETCNet 2 native, with both protocols output
simultaneously over the network. The system shall also be able to control third party
ANSI e1.31 sACN/ACN devices directly. Artnet and Avab UPD protocols shall also be
available. The system shall provide control of (2048, 4096, 6144 or 8192) parameters on
a maximum of 10,000 control channels.
3. A maximum of 10,000 cues, 1000 groups, 1000 presets, 4 x 1000 palettes (Intensity,
Focus, Color and Beam), 1000 macros, 1000 effects, 100 curves and 1000 snapshots
may be contained in non-volatile electronic memory and stored to an onboard solid-state
hard drive or to any USB storage device.
4. Recorded cue lists may be played back simultaneously on a maximum of 200 faders.
Channels shall respond to cue information by last instruction with discrete rate control
provided for all cues. The console may be placed in Tracking or Cue Only mode by the
user as a system default and overridden on individual record actions as required.
HTP/LTP intensity flags, assert, proportional, intensity master or manual master fade
control and independent status may be placed on each cue list. It shall also be possible
for a cue list to contribute to playback background states or to withhold such
contributions.
5. A Master Playback fader pair shall be provided. The 100 mm motorized fader pair may
execute crossfades or allfades, with IFCB cue level timing,
6. Ten 100mm motorized faders shall be user configurable across 30 pages and provide
additional playback faders (up to 200), additive, inhibitive or effect submasters (up to
300), and one grand master. Virtual fader control is also provided.
7. The system shall have two integral articulating multi-touch displays. Content posted to
these displays shall be user definable. Displays shall support multiple interpreted
simultaneous touches.
8. A high-resolution level wheel shall be provided to control intensity for selected channels
and scrolling within selected displays. Four pageable high-resolution encoders shall be
provided for control of other non-intensity parameters. Non-intensity encoders toggle
between coarse and fine control, with tactile feedback for full frame (color or image)
settings. The expand function for frame table devices shall provide a graphic
representation of all images and colors in the associated device for instant selection. The
display shall also provide an indication of the current value for the associated parameter,
based on channel selection. A high-resolution rate wheel, which may also be used for
fader paging shall be provided.
9. Control surface buttons shall be backlit. This backlighting provides indication of
functional states. Backlight intensity shall be user controllable, and shall automatically
dim after a defined period of inactivity.
THEATER AND STAGE EQUIPMENT
11 61 00 - 23
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
10. Control and programming features for automated fixtures shall also include: a standard
library of fixture profiles, the ability to copy and edit existing profiles and create new
profiles, patch displays including channel and output addressing, 16-bit fade resolution,
color characterization allowing color mixing and storing in Hue and Saturation or native
device values.
11. System information, including playback status, live output and blind values for all record
targets shall be displayed on a maximum of three external high resolution DVI/SVGA
monitors, which may also be multi-touch touch-screens. All displays may also be routed
to two of the integral touch screens.
12. A context sensitive on-line Help feature shall explain and provide an example of the
operation of each feature of the system.
13. A fully integrated Virtual Media Server feature shall allow user to map images and
animations to a rig array. 40 such maps may be created, each with 12 layers. Systems
that rely on external hardware or software for this functionality shall not be acceptable.
14. An optional, fully-functioning, detachable alphanumeric keyboard shall be supported. The
keyboard shall allow labeling of channels, cues, presets, groups, palettes, effects,
macros, curves, snapshots and the show. The central touch screen shall also repaint to
access an integrated alphanumeric keyboard.
15. Console software upgrades shall be made by the user via flash drive; changing internal
components shall not be required. It shall be possible to install software updates in all
consoles, processor units and remotes from one device over the network.
16. The console operating software shall be loaded into program execution memory from the
internal hard drive when the console is powered. In the event of an uncontrolled
shutdown, the console shall return to its last output state when power is restored.
17. Integrated dimmer monitoring features shall be provided to allow indication of dimming
system status, error states and dimmer load monitoring. Adjustment of dimmer
configuration shall also be supported. Communications with the dimming system shall
utilize ANSI E1.17 2006 - Entertainment Technology - Architecture for Control Networks.
18. Integrated RDM device features shall be provided. The console shall discover and patch
RDM devices. The console shall monitor RDM devices to allow indication of RDM device
online/offline status error states. The console shall be capable of changing settings of
RDM devices such as the DMX start address. Communications with the RDM devices
shall utilize ANSI E1.20 2006 – Remote Device Management.
19. Network configuration tools shall be provided from within the desk.
20. Show data may be created and modified on a personal computer, using either Windows
XP or Windows7, or a Macintosh platform running OS X, via a free offline editing
application.
21. A PC, using either Windows XP or Windows 7, or a Macintosh (Intel only) running OS X
using the offline software application shall be able to connect to a control system via the
network and view or modify current show data in an independent display environment,
using an Eos Client Dongle. When connected without the dongle, the computer shall
operate in Mirror Mode, with the device to be mirrored selectable by the user.
22. Synchronized backup shall be provided via another full console on the network or by use
of a remote processor unit. The backup console/RPU shall maintain synchronized
playback with the master and shall take over control of the lighting system upon loss of
communication with the master. Use of two RPUs to service and backup system output is
also supported.
23. A maximum of twelve users may access and interact with show data simultaneously.
Each user shall have an individual workspace. User identification may be assigned to
more than one control device, allowing users to work in tandem, or allowing a
designer/ALD to mirror the current display format, mode and command line of the
associated programmer. Partitioned control allows discrete control of channel/parameter
groupings by user. Partitioned control may be easily enabled and disabled with no need
to merge show data from multiple users.
24. The system shall support up to 32 individual simultaneous Time Code inputs or Event
lists.
25. Systems that do not provide the above capabilities shall not be acceptable.
THEATER AND STAGE EQUIPMENT
11 61 00 - 24
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
B. Controls and Playback
1. Manual Control and Programming Section
a. The console keyboard shall be grouped by function. Major groupings shall be record
target functions, numeric keys, level assignment functions, display navigation
functions and controls, as well as non-intensity parameter controls.
b. The command keypad shall be fully interactive with direct selects, which provide “one
touch” selection of channels, groups, palettes, presets, effects, snapshots and
macros.
c. Non-intensity parameters may be set numerically via an extensible keypad on the
central LCD. This control shall be fully interactive with the moving light encoders
controls and the virtual controls. The LCD touch screen associated with the encoders
shall display the current encoder function. The touch screen shall also access
available modes for each parameter type, min and max values for each parameter as
applicable, as well as home position on a parameter basis. Each encoder shall
support push button control for coarse and fine. Tactile feedback shall indicate full
and half frame positioning of certain controls.
d. Only those parameters available for control in the active lighting system shall be
displayed for control. Displays shall condense or lowlight parameters not available to
selected channels. Alternatively, the encoders may be placed in a state allowing
parameters not applicable to the current selection to be suppressed.
e. Lamp controls provide direct access to luminaire functions such as striking and
dousing arc lamps and calibrating entire fixtures or individual mechanisms of fixtures,
as provided by the luminaire manufacturer. User access to these features is
normalized across all manufacturers for ease of use. Use of a “control channel” for
accessing these functions shall not be required and systems requiring use of control
channels for these functions shall not be acceptable. Lamp control commands may
be staged, and channels which have been sent lamp on commands so indicated in
live.
f. Fan functions shall be provided both via command line operation and through
encoder controls.
g. Highlight shall be supported, with user definable highlight values. Lowlight conditions
may be defined for selected, but not specified channels. Rem Dim commands, at
specific levels by channel, may be optionally and automatically called with the
highlight command.
h. Fixtures with CMY or RBG color mixing may be set with direct CMY or RBG encoder
controls or the command line, as well as the Hue and Saturation encoders and/or
color picker. Color may also be set directly to a gel match, via a graphic selection tool
or from the command line.
i. The Virtual Media Server function shall allow the user to create layouts of devices,
identified as pixel maps. Media content (images, movies, text and procedurally
generated effects) may then be applied, manipulated and stored. Stock content is
provided and the user may import his own imagery and animations.
j. Macros may be set to run as default. Default macros called manually shall post to the
command line, but executed via cue lists shall run in the background. The user may
override this behavior by defining the macro to always execute in the foreground or
background, regardless of the recall method.
2. Playback Section
a. The playback faders shall consist of a motorized 100mm Master Fader pair with
associated Load, Go and Stop/Back buttons and a 10 x 30 page fader array.
b. Up to 200 playback faders may be defined on the 10 fader x 30 page fader array.
Each playback shall have an associated 100mm motorized potentiometer, Load, Go
and Stop/Back button.
c. It shall be possible to instantaneously halt an active cue, back to the previous cue,
manually override the intensity fade or manually override the entire fade.
d. It shall be possible for a cue list to contribute to the background state or for the
contents of each cue list to be withheld from such.
e. Playback faders shall have the following associated controls:
(1) Freeze, which halts the output of the fader
THEATER AND STAGE EQUIPMENT
11 61 00 - 25
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Stop Effect, which stops the action of an effect
Filter, to assign filter states to a fader
Go To Cue 0, to reset a cue list
Off, to turn off the contents of a playback, releasing control to the background
state or to set to null.
(6) Assert, to replay an active cue
(7) Release, to release control to the background and reset the cue list
(8) Spread, to access virtual controls for multipart cues
(9) Timing Disable, channel filters and independent status may also be defined.
(10) The potentiometer shall be configurable as a proportional master, an intensity
master, or manual master.
(11) Rate override and fader paging are supported with a wheel encoder and
associated controls.
3. Submasters
a. Up to 300 proportional, fully overlapping additive, effect or inhibitive submasters may
be defined. Submasters shall have colored LEDs to indicate submaster status. Each
submaster may have fade up, dwell and down fade times. Each has a bump and
assert/channel select button. Submasters may be set to independent.
b. Submasters may be set to HTP or LTP intensity. Non-intensity parameters on
submasters shall be LPT only.
c. Exclusive mode for a submaster shall prohibit the live contribution of that submaster
from storing to cues or other submasters. Shield mode prohibits access of
associated channels from any other playback or manual control operations.
d. A submaster potentiometer may be defined as proportional or intensity master. When
set as an intensity master, mark and unmark features are supplied.
e. Motorized faders shall set submasters to required positions as fader pages are
changed.
f. The submaster blind buffer shall be linked directly to live playback.
g. It shall be possible to set submaster values directly from the command line.
h. LTP submasters may be set to fade to background or to minimum value when the
fader is returned toward zero.
i. Submaster values may contribute to the background state or withheld from such.
4. Grand Master Faders
a. The location of the Grand Master shall be user definable. The grand master shall
have associated blackout and blackout enable buttons.
b. Blackout shall send all associated intensity outputs to zero. Non-intensity outputs
shall not be affected.
c. Motorized faders shall set grand masters to required positions as fader pages are
changed.
5. Display Controls
a. Format shall change the view of selected displays.
b. It shall be possible for the user to choose which parameter categories or parameters
(s)he wishes to display.
c. Flexichannel shall change which channels are viewed in selected displays, as
follows:
(1) All channels
(2) Patched channels
(3) Show channels
(4) Active/Moved channels
(5) Selected channels
(6) Manual Channels
(7) View channels (user identified list)
(8) Channels with discrete timing
d. Expand shall extend the selected view sequentially across connected displays,
vertically or horizontally.
e. [Time] depressed shall display discrete timing data. [Data] suppressed shall display
absolute values of referenced data. These functions may be latched.
THEATER AND STAGE EQUIPMENT
11 61 00 - 26
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
f.
Displays may also be toggled to show stored data currently manually overridden, the
source of the current parameter data and referenced marking data.
g. Playback status displays are provided with a variety of different formats. Indications
are provided per cue for live moves (lights fading from zero and also moving nonintensity parameters) and dark moves (inactive lights which have stored non-intensity
parameter moves).
C. Operating Modes
1. Live Mode
a. Channel lists may be constructed using the +, -, and Thru keys as well as the direct
selects. Channel selection and deselection is fully interactive, regardless of the
method used.
b. Levels may also be set with the keypad, level wheel and non-intensity encoders.
“Selected” channels shall be those last addressed and under keypad control.
Controls are provided for single button access to the last selected channel list, all
channels with manual levels and all active channels.
c. Channels may be set at a user defined default level using the Level key. +% and -%
keys adjust channels quickly by user definable values.
d. Channels and/or channel parameters may be captured. Capture mode shall allow the
user to selectively capture channel data at specific levels. Captured data shall be
indicated on the Live display.
e. Sneak shall be used to restore specified channels to background states, default
values, or to send them to specified values, in user specified times.
f. Selected channels may be set at a level or held to current values while all other
channels are set to zero using Rem Dim. Toggling Rem Dim shall restore all
unselected channels to original levels. The Rem Dim level shall be user definable via
the command line or with a default setup value.
g. Channels may be recorded into groups for fast recall of commonly used channels.
1000 groups shall be available. Groups shall store selection order. The Offset
function supports rapid creation of ordered groups, including reverse and random
order.
h. Parameter settings may be stored to Intensity, Focus, Color and Beam Palettes and
to Presets. All referenced data may be stored to whole numbers or to up to 99
decimal places between each whole number.
i. The following conditions may be placed on a channel or channel parameter to be
included with a cue record action.
(1) Discrete fade time and/or delay
(2) Block flag
(3) Assert flag
(4) IFCB Filters, which may be set at a parameter level.
j. 999 cue lists may be stored. Cues may be recorded in any order. Up to 99 decimal
cues may be inserted between any two whole number cues. Each cue may contain a
maximum of twenty parts. Parameters may be automatically assigned to specific
parts or assigned when the part is created.
k. It shall be possible to record cues and cue parts with the following information:
(1) Any collection of channel data, as determined by the use of “Record”, “Record
Only” or selective store commands, combined with parameter filters.
(2) Cue Level timing and delays for Intensity Up, Intensity Down, Focus, Color and
Beam.
(3) Follow or hang time
(4) Link instruction
(5) Loop value
(6) Block, Assert, Preheat, and/or Mark Flag
(7) Curve
(8) Allfade
(9) Label and note
(10) Execute list to trigger other activity
THEATER AND STAGE EQUIPMENT
11 61 00 - 27
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
l.
Non-intensity channel parameters may be marked (preset), in two ways. Automark
presets any parameters transitions in the cue just prior to intensity becoming active.
Automark may be disabled on a cue or cue part basis, enabling a “live” move.
Alternatively, non-intensity parameters may be marked to a specific cue with a single
command instruction. It shall not be necessary to store these parameters directly into
the cue in which the movement is to occur.
m. Any channel parameter may be stored with an effect instruction. These effects may
contain relative offsets from current value, or absolute instructions. Effects may be
progressive action or on/off states. Entry and exit behaviors shall modify the channel
parameters activity when beginning and ending the effect.
n. Update may be used to selectively add modified parameter data quickly to that
parameter’s current source. Update may be specified to modify referenced data
content or break the link to that content. An interstice dialogue informs the user of
the content that will be Trace may be used to modify the data to the original source of
its move instruction. It shall be possible to update inactive record targets.
o. Recall From quickly pulls specified data from record targets or other channels into the
current view.
p. Copy To quickly copies selected data to specified channels or other record targets.
q. Address and channel check functions shall be provided.
r. Channel parameters may be “parked” at levels. Those levels are not added to any
live record operations, nor may they be changed until the parked element is
“unparked”. Scaled park provides real time proportional adjustment of stored intensity
values. Address Park shall also be provided.
s. About shall provide detailed status of selected channels or specified record targets.
This shall include current source, current value, discrete timing, parked value,
marked to and for indications. Background levels and current DMX output are also
displayed. Channel usage indicates submaster and cue information and also
provides a "dark moves" report on a per channel basis.
t. 1000 snapshots may be stored which instantly recall specified front panel and display
configurations.
u. Live data may be displayed in a summary view or detailed table orientation.
v. Query shall allow selection of channels by their current or possible state. Keywords
and fixture types shall allow quick access to fixtures.
w. User definable home positions, on a per channel basis, may be defined.
x. Undo shall be used to sequentially step back through manual operations or to undo
record and delete actions. It shall be possible to undo multiple commands in one
action.
2. Blind.
a. The Blind display allows viewing and modification of all record targets without
affecting stage levels.
b. Record target data may be displayed in a summary view, a detailed table orientation
or a spreadsheet view, which allows quick data comparisons, move and replace
functions.
c. Changes to blind data shall be automatically stored. Range selection of both record
targets and channels shall be supported.
3. Fader Displays
a. Fader displays isolate the stage view to the contributions of the specified playback.
Live modifications to channel levels may be made and re-recorded in this mode.
4. Patch Display
a. Patch shall be used to display and modify the system control channels with their
associated library data.
b. Each channel may be provided with a proportional patch level, curve, label, swap and
invert functions, as well as keywords to service Query.
c. Accessing library data to patch multiple parameter fixtures may be accomplished
entirely from the command line. Use of a pointing device to patch to moving lights
shall not be required.
d. Offset functions in patch shall allow selection of channel ranges and shall allow the
user to establish a “custom” footprint for any device output.
THEATER AND STAGE EQUIPMENT
11 61 00 - 28
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
e. Custom color wheels, color scrolls and gobo wheels shall be defined in patch. These
devices shall be created with a simple table and graphical user interface supported
by images of major manufacturers.
f. RDM discovery and device monitoring shall be supported.
g. Copy to and Move functions shall be supported in patch.
5. Setup/Browser
a. Setup shall access system, show and desk configurations.
b. It shall be possible to partially import Eos/Ion show files. Users shall be able to select
as much or as little of the show file as required, with renumber tools.
c. It shall be possible to import ASCII and Lightwright data files. It shall be possible to
export as ASCII or .csv.
d. Setup shall also access show data storage, import, export, print to .pdf and clear
functions, as well as show data utilities.
D. Interface Options
1. The console shall support a variety of local interfaces.
a. AC input
b. USB (seven ports for items such as alpha-numeric keyboard, mouse, touch screens,
USB Flash drive…)
c. Ethernet (two ports): 802.3af compliant power over Ethernet port. Each port can
power one Gateway.
d. Three DVI video output connectors, supporting DVI/SVGA monitors as 1280x1024
resolution minimum. Touchscreen support of any/all of these monitors is provided.
e. Phone Remote
f. Contact Closure
g. 2 DMX/RDM ports
E. Optional Accessories
1. Net3 Radio Focus Remote
2. iRFR and iRFR Preview (applications for iPhone, iPod Touch and iPad units)
3. aRFR (application for Android devices)
4. Net3 Remote Video Interface
5. 2x20 and 2x10 universal fader wings
6. Gateways
a. Net3/ETCNet 2 to DMX/RDM Gateways (one to four ports)
b. MIDI/SMPTE Gateway
c. I/O Gateway with 12 analog inputs, 12 SPDT contact outputs, RD232 interface
7. Eos Client Software Kit
F. Synchronized Backup
1. An optional Backup system shall consist of one of the following combinations of devices:
a. Two networked Consoles.
b. One (or more) Console with one Remote Processor Unit (RPU)
c. One (or more) Consoles with two Remote Processor Units (RPUs)
G. Physical
1. All operator controls and console electronics for a standard system shall be housed in a
single desktop console, not to exceed 30.5” wide, 23.2” deep, 10.9" high, weighing 60
pounds. Console power shall be 90 – 240V AC at 50 or 60Hz, supplied via a detachable
power cord.
H. Provide console and accessories in quantities as indicated on drawings and schedules
2.13
GENERAL NETWORK
A. General
THEATER AND STAGE EQUIPMENT
11 61 00 - 29
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
1. The Electronic Theatre Controls Net3 network shall provide data distribution over TCP/IP
Ethernet networks. Data shall be layer 3 routable. Systems using proprietary formats or
formats other than 10/100/100Mbit wired Ethernet or non-layer 3 routable networks shall
not be accepted.
2. Connections shall be made between consoles, face panels, architectural processors,
dimmers, Net3 Gateways, and computers over standard Ethernet distribution systems
using 100BaseT, 100BaseFL, or greater wiring. All installations shall conform to
established Ethernet wiring practice, and installation shall be performed by contractors
qualified to do this type of work. All wiring shall be tested at Category 5e or higher for full
bandwidth operation to the appropriate IEEE standard.
3. The Lighting Control system must be supplied by a single manufacturer and must have
seamless integration over Ethernet between the Entertainment and Architectural lighting
control.
B. Capacities
1. The network shall support DMX routing, patching, and prioritization for up to 63,399
universes (32,767,488 DMX addresses). Each address may be input or output from any
port on any DMX gateway in the system. DMX input, routing and output shall be
specifically supported on the system from multiple sources and locations up to the
maximum number of gateways supported by the Ethernet topology.
2. The network shall support multiple network hosts including consoles, gateways, dimming
racks, computers, file servers, printers, and architectural control processors with discrete
command lines and control. The lighting network shall support multiple venues within a
system and discrete systems on the same network.
C. System Configuration and Monitoring
1. Network device configuration shall be via Net3 Gateway Configuration Editor (GCE)
software and/or ANSI E1.17 Architecture for Control Networks (ACN).
2. Patch addresses shall support viewing and manipulation via ANSI E1.17 ACN.
a. The system shall permit complete user flexibility allowing the system operator to
patch each DMX input address to any ANSI E1.31 streaming ACN address, and DMX
output to span streaming ACN universes.
b. The lighting system shall support assignment of DMX offsets, truncation of DMX
universes, and provide choice of DMX port prioritization.
c. The lighting system shall support the DD start code extension to ANSI E1.31 which
provides priority per address such that multiple control sources can share universes
with discrete control per address.
d. Lighting systems that do not support the above mentioned address patching
capabilities shall not be suitable.
3. The system shall allow assignable labels for all network devices to allow easy
identification by system users.
4. Each network device shall have a discrete and unique IP address provided automatically
by the software. The user may edit this IP address. Systems that do not support
automated IP allocation with IP collision avoidance, and systems that do not allow
complete reconfiguration of the above mentioned features over ANSI E1.17 ACN shall
not be acceptable.
5. All configuration data for each network device shall be held at the device and system
operation shall not require continuous on-line operation of the network configuration
software.
6. Lighting console operators shall be able to backup the network configurations in the
lighting control console. In the event of a network device failure, the operator shall be
able to apply the configuration of the failed device to a replacement device of the same
type without manually reentering settings. Systems that do not support configuration
backup as described above shall not be accepted.
7. Architectural and Entertainment systems connected to the same network shall be
capable of arbitrating control over E1.31 Streaming ACN (sACN) level data. The system
shall be capable of alternating control of individual address data between architectural
and entertainment systems without intervention by the user. The user shall dictate the
THEATER AND STAGE EQUIPMENT
11 61 00 - 30
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
conditions under which system shall automatically take control. The network shall allow
user override of the selected defaults. Systems which require direct user intervention to
allocate control of dimmers between architectural and entertainment lighting systems
shall not be accepted.
8. The Net3 network shall allow multiple DMX input sources to be prioritized on the same
universe as network native sources using E1.31 Streaming ACN prioritization. Multiple
DMX inputs may be assigned to the same streaming ACN address (this provides multisource control for a particular address). Likewise, the system shall support E1.31
prioritization of multiple simultaneous network sources. Systems that cannot prioritize
multiple DMX inputs and multiple native network sources on a network shall not be
deemed suitable.
9. The lighting network shall allow each DMX input address to be assigned a priority on the
network allowing each DMX control level coming into the system to participate in full
arbitration. Addresses with the highest priority shall have control, with lower priority
addresses being ignored. Addresses assigned the same numeric priority, between 1 and
200, shall respond in highest level takes precedence (HTP) manor. The network shall
require a valid DMX signal present at the input to initiate prioritization. Systems that do
not allow for prioritized HTP for DMX inputs to the network shall not be allowed.
D. Operational Features
1. Each DMX gateway shall control up to 512 DMX addresses per port, within the confines
of up to 63,999 DMX universes (32,747,488 address). The specific DMX data input or
output by the gateway shall be configurable by the user.
2. Duplicate outputs of DMX data (DMX splitter) and discrete outputs shall be fully
supported.
3. Merging of multiple DMX input sources on a single gateway without gateway with DMX
output on the same gateway shall be supported without connection to the network. The
gateway shall support assignment of priority to each input source independently
4. File transmission, synchronization and access to software shall be supported.
2.14
DMX GATEWAY – TWO PORT
A. General
1. The lighting control gateway shall be a microprocessor-based unit specifically designed
to provide DMX-512 control of lighting systems and transport of RDM configuration and
status messages. The gateway shall permit DMX-512 data to be encoded, routed over an
Ethernet network and decoded back to DMX-512. The unit shall be a Net3 DMX 2-port
Gateway as provided by ETC, Inc.
2. Gateways shall communicate over Ethernet directly with at least ETC, Inc.’s
entertainment and architectural lighting control products and other Ethernet interfaces.
3. Connections shall be made between gateways, consoles, architectural systems, and PCs
over standard Ethernet distribution systems using 10/100BaseT.
4. The gateway shall support multiple protocols including:
a. ANSI E1.17 Architecture for Control Networks (ACN)
b. ANSI E1.11 USITT DMX512-A
c. ANSI E1.20 Remote Device Management (RDM)
d. Net3 protocol suite including ANSI E1.31 Streaming ACN (sACN).
5. The gateway shall be tested to UL standards and labeled ETL Listed.
6. The gateway shall be RoHS Compliant (lead-free).
7. The gateway shall be CE compliant.
8. The gateway shall have a backlit graphic LCD display for identification (soft-labeling) and
status reporting. Labeling shall be user configurable using ANSI E1.17 Architecture for
Control Network (ACN), Gateway Configuration Editor (GCE) software. The LCD display
shall show DMX port configuration indication as well as indicate the presence of valid
THEATER AND STAGE EQUIPMENT
11 61 00 - 31
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
signal. Gateways that do not indicate port configuration (input/output) and valid data shall
not be acceptable.
9. Each gateway shall have power and network activity LEDs on both the front and rear of
the gateway
B. DMX Ports
1. DMX Ports shall comply with the requirements of ANSI E1.11 USITT DMX512-A
standards.
2. Each DMX port shall be software-configurable for either input or output functionality.
3. Hardware configuration override setting shall be provided on the gateway.
4. DMX input shall be optically-isolated from the gateway electronics.
5. DMX output shall be earth-ground referenced.
6. DMX Port shall be capable of withstanding fault voltages of up to 250vAC without
damage.
7. Each port shall incorporate one DMX512-A Connection
a. Each DMX port location shall support a single 5-pin male XLR or 5-pin female XLR
8. Network gateways that do not indicate input/ output port configuration or presence of
valid data shall not be accepted
C. Processor
1. Each gateway shall have sufficient processing power to manage up to 63,999 universes
(32,767,488 addresses).
2. Maximum delay time from input to output shall not be greater than one packet time
(approximately 22 mSec.).
3. A minimum DMX update rate of 40Hz shall be sustained under all conditions unless
rd
specifically configured for a slower rate for the sake of compatibility with 3 party DMX
devices.
D. Mechanical
1. The Gateway shall be fabricated of 16-gauge steel, finished in fine-texture, scratchresistant, black powder coat.
2. The Gateway shall be available in two versions
a. Wall mount gateway
(1) The wall mount gateway shall support flush or surface mount applications using
a standard RACO 2-gang Backbox.
(2) Dimensions shall not be more than 4.88” wide x 1.91” deep x 4.85” High (Flush
Mount) and 4.88” wide x 5.41” deep x 5.0” high (surface mount)
b. Portable gateway
(1) The portable gateway shall include a complete enclosure with connectors for
wiring terminations
(2) Dimensions shall not be more than 4.88” wide x 5.41” deep x 5.0” high (not
including mounting hardware)
3. The weight of the gateway shall be 2.5 lbs (1.1 kg).
E. Power
1. Power for the gateway shall be provided either over the Category 5 (or better) cable,
utilizing IEEE 802.3af compliant Power over Ethernet distribution equipment, or via
conventional switches together with isolated in-line power supplies capable of an
operating range of 8-28vDC provided by the gateway manufacturer. Power consumption
shall not be greater than 5 watts.
2. The gateway electronics shall be electrically isolated from the power supplied over the
Catagory5 (or better) cable.
3. Power may be provided from any IEEE 802.3af compliant power-over Ethernet
distribution equipment, or by using conventional switches together with isolated in-line
power supplies as provided by gateway manufacturer.
F. Configuration
1. Each gateway on the network shall be individually configurable using:
THEATER AND STAGE EQUIPMENT
11 61 00 - 32
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
2.
3.
4.
5.
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
a. Any devices utilizing ANSI E1.17 ACN communications
b. Gateway Configuration Editor (GCE), running on a network connected PC. The PC
shall only be required for configuration, labeling and signal routing, and shall not be
required for normal operation of the system.
c. .
Each DMX gateway shall control up to 512 DMX addresses, within the confines of 63,999
universes. The specific DMX data input or output by the gateway shall be freely
configurable by the user. Duplicate outputs of DMX lines (DMX splitter) and discrete
outputs shall be fully supported.
Any number of DMX universes may be configured with any length up to 512 addresses.
Any range of DMX input addresses shall support selection and routing to the specified
sACN output.
Multiple sources may be combined and a priority may be assigned to each source. Each
DMX port may have its own universe and start address.
All relevant routing information shall be stored in non-volatile memory at each gateway.
The system shall recover from a power outage without requiring the PC to be online.
Gateways that do not support non-volatile storage of data routing shall not be accepted.
G. Network
1. Communications physical layer shall comply with IEEE 802.3i for 10BASE-T, 802.3u for
100BASE-TX and 802.3af for Power over Ethernet specifications.
2. All network cabling shall be Category 5 (or better), conforming to TIA-568A/B, and shall
be installed by a qualified network installer.
3. Data transport shall utilize the TCP/IP suite of protocols to transfer the DMX data.
4. ANSI E1.17 Architecture for Control Networks (ACN) and streaming ACN (sACN) shall be
supported. Gateways that do not support ANSI E1.17 shall not be acceptable.
5. Switches shall comply with power-over-Ethernet IEEE802.3af, unless a separate in-line
power supply is provided.
6. Multiple DMX signal routing patches and multiple facilities shall be supported and limited
only by the file storage capacity of the computer with ETC Gateway Configuration Editor
(GCE) Software installed.
7. Each DMX gateway shall control up to 512 DMX addresses, per DMX port within the
confines of up to 63,399 universes (32,767,488 addresses) using Streaming ACN
(sACN).
a. Any range of DMX addresses may be selected for each universe.
b. Multiple sources shall be supported by prioritized Highest Takes Precedence (HTP
with priority). Each source shall support assignment of priority to allow override of
default HTP behavior.
c. Each DMX port shall support its own universe and start address.
8. Gateways shall have built in DMX merger capability on a universe or channel-by-channel
basis.
9. Gateways shall support have built in priority on a per-universe or channel-by-channel
basis. Gateways that do not support prioritized merging of multiple network sources at
independent priorities shall not be accepted.
H. Environmental
1. The ambient operating temperature shall be 0° to 40°C (32° to 104°F).
2. The storage temperature shall be -40° to 70°C (-40° to 158°F).
3. The operating humidity shall be 5% - 95% non-condensing.
I.
Accessories
1. Hanging bracket kit shall allow gateway to be mounted using C-Clamp to U-bolt
Hardware.
2. A Universal Power Supply with international plug-set shall be available. Multiple power
supplies shall be able to fit in a vertically stacked power strip.
3. ETC Gateway Configuration Editor Software (GCE)
J. System Requirements
THEATER AND STAGE EQUIPMENT
11 61 00 - 33
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
1. Provide the quantity and type of gateways required, as scheduled. Gateways and
software shall be as manufactured by Electronic Theatre Controls Inc. of Middleton, WI.
2. Provide Ethernet switches and power supplies as scheduled and as shown on drawings.
3. Provide a current generation PC with Windows XP operating system equipped with a
10/100 Ethernet card.
4. Systems that do not provide the above capabilities shall not be acceptable
2.15
POWER DISTRIBUTION – JUNCTION BOXES
A. General
1. Gridiron junction boxes shall be fabricated from 16-gauge cold rolled steel with 14 gauge
end panels.
2. Junction boxes shall be finished with fine-textured, scratch-resistant, black powder coat.
a. Boxes for 30 circuits or less shall be 14”H x 14”W x 4”D
b. Boxes for 31 to 60 circuits shall be 14”H x 28”W x 4”D.
3. Junction boxes shall include mounting brackets and hardware
4. Cover(s) shall be 16-gauge cold rolled steel and hinge to allow installer to orient the
hinged door to open in any horizontal direction.
5. Cover(s) shall be attached with machine screws and Tinnerman retainer nuts.
B. Electrical
1. Wiring terminations shall be made using feed through terminals individually labeled with
corresponding circuit numbers.
a. 20 amp circuits shall use screwless tension clamp terminals listed for 20 – 8 gauge
wire.
b. 50 amp circuits shall use compression terminals listed for 10 – 1 gauge wire.
c. 100 amp circuits shall use compression terminals listed for 8 – 2/0 gauge wire.
d. Terminals that place a screw directly on the wire are not acceptable.
2. Gridiron junction boxes shall be Underwriter Laboratories (UL) and Canadian Underwriter
Laboratories (cUL) LISTED.
3. A low voltage distribution system shall be available to incorporate DMX, Ethernet or other
protocols as specified with the gridiron junction box.
a. Low voltage junction boxes shall attach to gridiron junction boxes to simplify wiring to
a discrete device
b. Low voltage signals shall enter the junction box via a strain relief or connector
mounted in a separate low voltage terminal box on the top or bottom of the gridiron
junction box.
c. Up to four low voltage cables shall be supported for each junction box location.
2.16
POWER DISTRIBUTION – CONNECTOR STRIPS
A. General
1. Connectors shall be available as 20A, 50A and 100A grounded stage pin, 20A twist lock
and 20A “U” ground (dual rated “T-slot”); other connectors shall be available as specified.
2. Internal wiring shall be sized to circuit ampacity and shall be rated at 125°C.
3. Pigtails shall be three-wire type “SOW” rubber jacketed cable sized for the maximum
circuit ampacity.
4. Pigtails with 20 amp stage pin connectors shall be terminated using 12 gauge 4 way
indent crimp (with inspection window) type where the wire is inserted and crimped directly
in the socket.
5. Terminations shall be at one end using feed-through terminals individually labeled with
corresponding circuit numbers.
a. 20 amp circuits shall use screwless tension clamp terminals listed for 20 – 8 gauge
wire.
b. 50 amp circuits shall use compression terminals listed for 10 – 1 gauge wire.
c. 100 amp circuits shall use compression terminals listed for 8 – 2/0 gauge wire.
d. Terminals that place a screw directly on the wire are not acceptable.
THEATER AND STAGE EQUIPMENT
11 61 00 - 34
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
6. Connector strips shall be supplied with appropriate brackets and hardware for mounting
as shown on the drawings
a. Connector strips shall have junction brackets on 5’ centers.
b. Brackets shall be 1½” x .188” ASTM A 36 steel
c. Hardware shall be ASTM A307 grade 5.
7. A low voltage distribution system shall be available to incorporate DMX, Ethernet or other
protocols as specified in the connector strip. Connector strips shall utilize a voltage
barrier to accommodate these systems. Low Voltage signals shall enter the connector
strip via a strain relief or connector mounted in a separate low voltage terminal box at the
specified end of the connector strip. Up to four low voltage cables shall be supported for
each connector strip.
a. Connector strips with multiple DMX outputs from the same source shall use DMX
pass through assemblies consisting of a 6” panel with the one DMX output connector,
one DMX input (Pass Through) connector, one DMX pass through (Bypass) switch,
and a label detailing the use of the pass through assembly.
b. The bypass switch shall be used when no DMX devices are present at that location.
When activated, the DMX pass through switch shall pass DMX directly through to the
next DMX panel on the strip. The pass through switch shall have a mechanical
indicator to show the operator that it has or has not been engaged
8. Connector Strips shall be Underwriter Laboratories (UL) and Canadian Underwriter
Laboratories (cUL) LISTED.
B. Physical
1. Connector strips shall be 6.25” H x 3.3” D and fabricated from 18-gauge galvanized steel
and finished in black fine-texture powder coat paint.
2. Covers shall be fabricated from 16-gauge galvanized steel
3. Connector strips shall be available in any length specified in increments of 6” and
shipped fully wired with all splicing hardware.
4. Pigtails and outlets shall be spaced on 18” centers, or as otherwise specified.
5. Outlets shall be mounted on individual 3” panels and there shall be
6. No external terminal boxes shall be required for connector strips with 28 or fewer circuits
unless otherwise specified.
7. Circuits shall be labeled on the connector strip with 2” lettering.
a. Circuit labeling options shall include:
(1) Circuits shall be labeled on the front side of the connector strip with white
lettering on black background labels.
(2) Circuits shall be labeled on front and back sides of the connector strip with
white lettering on black background labels.
(3) Circuits shall be labeled on the front side of the connector strip with engraved
lamicoid labels utilizing white lettering on black background labels.
(4) Circuits shall be labeled on the front and rear sides of the connector strip with
engraved lamicoid labels utilizing white lettering on black background labels.
(5) Circuits shall be labeled on one side of the connector strip using individual
circuit cover plates with lettering engraved in the cover and filled with the
specified color.
(6) Circuits shall be labeled using specified labeling per plans and drawings
8. Connector strips shall support optional LED indicators to indicate the presence of power
at each local circuit. The indicator shall be red in color and mounted in the connector strip
a. The LED indicator shall be mounted in the lower right corner of the outlet panel
b. The LED indicator shall be mounted in the connector strip trough directly below the
outlet panel.
c. The LED indicator shall be mounted in the center of the 3” plate directly below the
circuit label for pigtail circuits
C. Junction Boxes
1. Gridiron junction boxes shall be available to accommodate SO or SOW cable wiring into
connector strips mounted to non-fixed locations
THEATER AND STAGE EQUIPMENT
11 61 00 - 35
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
2. Junction Boxes shall be fabricated from 16-gauge cold rolled steel with 14 gauge end
panels. They shall be finished with fine-textured, scratch-resistant, black powder coat
paint. Cover(s) shall be 16-gauge cold rolled steel and hinged to allow mounting in any
direction.
2.17
POWER DISTRIBUTION – OUTLET AND PIGTAIL BOXES
A. General
1. Connectors shall be available as 20A, 50A and 100A grounded stage pin, 20A twist lock
and 20A “U” ground (dual rated “T-slot”); other connectors shall be available as specified.
2. Pigtails shall be three-wire type “SOW” rubber jacketed cable sized for the maximum
circuit ampacity.
3. Pigtails with 20 amp stage pin connectors shall be terminated using 12 gauge 4 way
indent crimp (with inspection window) type where the wire is inserted and crimped directly
in the socket.
4. Terminations for pigtail connectors shall utilize feed- through terminals individually
labeled with corresponding circuit numbers.
a. 20 amp circuits shall use screwless tension clamp terminals listed for 20 – 8 gauge
wire.
b. 50 amp circuits shall use compression terminals listed for 10 – 1 gauge wire.
c. 100 amp circuits shall use compression terminals listed for 8 – 2/0 gauge wire.
d. Terminals that place a screw directly on the wire are not acceptable.
5. Outlet and pigtail boxes shall be supplied with appropriate brackets and hardware for
mounting as shown on the drawings
a. Standard mounting options shall include pipe or wall mounting
b. Brackets shall be made from ASTM A 36 steel
c. Hardware shall be ASTM A307 grade 5.
6. A low voltage distribution system shall be available to incorporate DMX, Ethernet or other
protocols as specified in the power distribution box.
a. A voltage barrier shall be used to separate the low voltage wiring for the electrical
circuits.
7. Power distribution equipment shall be Underwriter Laboratories (UL) and Canadian
Underwriter Laboratories (cUL) LISTED.
B. Physical
1. Outlet and pigtail boxes shall be 6.25” H x 3.3” D and fabricated from 18 gauge
galvanized steel and finished in black fine-texture powder coat paint.
a. Covers shall be fabricated from 16-gauge galvanized steel
2. Outlet and pigtail boxes shall be available in any length specified in increments of 3inches with a maximum length of up to 3-feet.
3. Pigtails and outlets shall be spaced on 18” centers, or as otherwise specified.
4. Outlets shall be mounted on individual 3” panels.
5. Circuits shall be labeled with 1.25” lettering.
a. Circuit labeling options shall include:
(1) Circuits shall be labeled on the front side of the connector strip with white
lettering on black background labels.
(2) Circuits shall be labeled on front and back sides of the connector strip with
white lettering on black background labels.
(3) Circuits shall be labeled on the front side of the connector strip with engraved
lamicoid labels utilizing white lettering on black background labels.
(4) Circuits shall be labeled on the front and rear sides of the connector strip with
engraved lamicoid labels utilizing white lettering on black background labels.
(5) Circuits shall be labeled on one side of the connector strip using individual
circuit cover plates with lettering engraved in the cover and filled with the
specified color.
(6) Circuits shall be labeled using specified labeling per plans and drawings
THEATER AND STAGE EQUIPMENT
11 61 00 - 36
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
6. Outlet and pigtail boxes shall support optional LED indicators to indicate the presence of
power at each local circuit. The indicator shall be red in color and mounted in outlet or
pigtail box.
a. The LED indicator shall be mounted in the lower right corner of the outlet panel
b. The LED indicator shall be mounted in the bottom of the outlet or pigtail box directly
below the outlet panel.
c. The LED indicator shall be mounted in the cover plate directly below the circuit label
for pigtail circuits
2.18
COMPANY SWITCH
A. General
1. Unit shall be UL listed and labeled.
2. Enclosure to be fabricated using 12-gauge steel.
3. Enclosure to have four (4) welded mounting tabs.
4. Unit shall contain one (1) 3-pole main breaker with 65K AIC rating.
5. Breaker shall be installed with a shunt trip mechanism that activates when the access
door is opened.
6. Access door shall contain a keyed locking “T” handle.
7. Breaker shall be equipped with a padlock attachment to lock the handle in the off position
when not in use.
8. Fused indicator lights shall be provided for each phase and ground continuity.
9. Pull handles shall be installed on each side of the breaker to protect the switch.
10. All internal power connections shall be to UL listed insulated power distribution blocks
with up to 500 MCM wire capacity.
11. Output connections shall be provided by UL listed insulated power distribution blocks with
up to 500 MCM wire capacity.
12. Cable entry opening shall contain five (5) or six (6) 1.25 x 3” slots.
13. Cable connection shall be through hinged door that can only be accessed from inside
connection chamber.
14. Bare cable connection to distribution blocks shall be secured with spring loaded strain
relief.
15. UL listed output receptacles shall be mounted inside connection chamber.
16. Connection chamber is protected by a locking access door and an interlock
switch wired to the breaker shunt trip.
B. Provide:
1. (1) 400amp company switch SSRC #DS-400A-6W-C
2. (1) 200amp company switch SSRC #DS-200A-5W-C
2.19
STAGE POWER DISTRIBUTION PANEL
A. Custom stage distribution panel as manufactured by SSRC
B. Provide:
1. (1) 100 amp Distribution Panel consisting of the following:
a. (1) 16 ga. Steel enclosure with mounting tabs
b. (1) 100A Main Feed Circuit Breaker
c. (2) L21-20 Female Twistlock Receptables
d. (2) 3-phase circuit breakers
e. (6) Edison Duplex Receptacles
f. (6) L5-20 Twistlock Receptacles
g. (2) 3-phase circuit breakers
h. (12) single pole circuit breakers
2. Unit factory wired to distribution blocks
2.20
ELLIPSOIDAL SPOTLIGHTS
THEATER AND STAGE EQUIPMENT
11 61 00 - 37
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
A. General
1. The instrument shall be a Source Four ellipsoidal spotlight as manufactured by Electronic
Theatre Controls, Inc., or approved equal.
B. Physical
1. The unit shall be constructed of rugged, die cast aluminum, free of burrs and pits,
finished in black, high temperature epoxy paint. Tools shall not be required for either
lamp alignment or cleaning the reflector or lens
2. The following shall be provided:
a. Integral cable clamp for power leads
b. Positive locking of lamp focus and independent lamp alignment controls
c. High impact, thermally insulated knobs and shutter handles
d. Reflector secured with shock mounts
e. Lens secured with silicone shock mounts
f. Shutter assembly shall allow for +/-25° rotation
g. 20 gauge stainless steel shutters
h. Insulated rear handle
i. Interchangeable lens tubes for different field angles with Teflon guides for smooth
tube movement
j. Sturdy integral die cast gel frame holders with two accessory slots, and a top
mounted, quick release gel frame retainer
k. Rugged 3/16” x 1-1/4” steel yoke with two mounting positions allowing 300°+ rotation
of the fixture within the yoke
l. Positive locking, hand operated yoke clutch
m. Slot with sliding cover for motorized pattern devices or optional iris
C. Optical
1. The optical train shall combine a compact filament lamp with a precision molded
borosilicate, ellipsoidal reflector and aspheric lens to produce an optimum cosine field.
2. The unit shall provide, but not be limited to:
a. Molded borosilicate reflector with multiple dichroic layers
b. 95% of visible light shall be reflected while 90% of infrared light as heat shall be
transmitted through the reflector
c. Low gate and beam temperature
d. Sharp imaging through a three plane shutter design
e. Projector-quality, high contrast aspheric lens, with an anti-reflective coating to
increase transmission
D. Performance
1. The unit shall be precision engineered to use an HPL lamp to deliver an even, intense
field with cosine distribution.
2. The unit shall provide, but not be limited to:
a. 5, 10, 14, 19, 26, 36, 50, 70 and 90 degree field angles
b. High-quality pattern imaging
c. Sharp shutter cuts without halation
d. Shutter warping and burnout in normal use shall be unacceptable
e. Adjustable hard and soft beam edges
3. The unit shall be capable of utilizing ETC Dimmer Doubling technology
4. The unit shall be UL and cUL listed and so labeled.
5. 19, 26, 36, and 50 degree units shall have optional lens tubes available for precision,
high-contrast imaging.
E. Lamp
1. The high efficiency lamp shall be an HPL lamp, which shall consist of a compact tungsten
filament contained in a krypton-filled quartz envelope. The lamp shall mount axially within
the reflector. The lamp base shall have an integral die cast aluminum heat sink that
reduces seal temperature and ensures proper lamp alignment. The lamp socket shall be
ATP 220 nickel gold plated.
THEATER AND STAGE EQUIPMENT
11 61 00 - 38
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
F. Provide the following
1. (2) Source4 10degree
2. (2) Source4 14degree
3. (16) Source4 19degree
4. (28) Source4 26degree
5. (24) Source4 36degree
6. (16) Source4 36degree
7. (16) Source4 50degree
8. (2) Source4 70degree
9. (2) Source4 90degree
10. (120) 750watt HPL long life lamps
2.21
FRESNEL SPOTLIGHT
A. General
1. The luminaire shall be a Source Four Fresnel spotlight as manufactured by Electronic
Theatre Controls, Inc., or approved equal
B. Lamp
1. The luminaire shall utilize only the HPL lamp, which shall consist of a compact tungsten
filament contained in a krypton-filled quartz envelope
2. The lamp base shall have an integral die cast aluminum heat sink that reduces seal
temperature and ensures proper lamp alignment
3. Luminaires that use lamps other than the HPL lamp shall not be acceptable
4. The lamp socket shall be ATP 220 nickel gold plated
5. The lamp shall be prefocused in relation to the reflector
6. The lamp shall be removable from the bottom of the fixture for re-lamping
C. Optical
1. Luminaire shall use a Fresnel lens and provide soft-edged, but well-defined beam
shaping with a barn door attachment
2. Luminaire shall provide a field angle zoom range of 20 degrees to 65 degrees
3. The optical train shall utilize a compact filament lamp with a modified spherical reflector
4. The luminaire shall output no less than 10,000 field lumens in full flood setting when fitted
with 750W, 115V high out-put HPL lamp
5. Luminaires producing less than 10,000 field lumens in full flood setting with a 750W lamp
shall not be acceptable
6. Reflector shall be molded borosilicate glass with multiple dichroic layers
7. Reflector efficiency shall be a minimum of 93%
8. Reflectors of pressed aluminum or other sheet metal construction shall not be acceptable
D. Physical
1. The luminaire shall be constructed of rugged, die cast aluminum, free of burrs and pits,
finished in black, high temperature paint
2. The luminaire shall provide, but not be limited to:
3. 36” power lead with bare-ends
4. Integral cable clamp for power leads
5. Sealed housing with no light leaks
6. Zoom adjustment by means of a large, side-mounted knob with integral locking lever
7. Bottom-access lamp removal
8. Lamp socket access door shall use a tool-free ¼-turn closure device
9. Two accessory slots and a top mounted locking door for gel frames and beam control
accessories
10. Accessory slots shall be completely surrounded by a rugged metal housing for
elimination of light leaks around gel frames and other beam control accessories
THEATER AND STAGE EQUIPMENT
11 61 00 - 39
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
11. Accessory slots shall be compatible with 7.5” beam control accessories, i.e. barn doors,
gel frames, top hats, etc, such as used by Source Four PAR luminaires and other
similarly-sized fixtures
12. Rugged steel yoke
13. Adjustable yoke mounting position for variable fixture balance point
14. Positive locking, hand operated yoke clutch
15. Large, rugged handle on rear of fixture
16. Integrated safety cable mounting ring
17. Color frame
18. Unit shall be nominally 12.5”long by 9.5” wide
19. Weight without “C” clamp shall be 13.25 lbs.
20. The luminaire shall be capable of utilizing ETC Dimmer Doubling technology
21. The luminaire shall be ETL and cETL listed to UL 1573 – the standard for stage and
studio use and so labeled
E. Provide.
1. (28) Source4 Fresnels.
2. (28) Source4 Fresnel Barn Doors
3. (32) 750watt HPL long life lamps
2.22
COLOR MIXING LIGHT EMITTING DIODE WASH FIXTURE
A. General
1. The fixture shall be a color-mixing high-intensity LED illuminator with DMX control of
intensity and color. The fixture shall be a Desire D40 or D40 Studio as manufactured by
Electronics Theatre Controls, Inc. or approved equal.
2. All LED fixtures shall be provided by a single manufacturer to ensure compatibility
3. The fixture shall be UL 1573 listed for stage and studio use
4. The fixture shall comply with the USITT DMX-512 A standard.
B. Physical
1. The fixture shall be contained in a rugged all-metal die-cast housing, free of burrs and
pits.
2. The housing shall have a rugged black powdercoat finish
3. White or silver/gray powdercoat finishes shall be available as color options
4. Other powdercoat color options shall be available on request
5. Power supply, cooling and electronics shall be integral to each unit.
6. Fixture housing shall provide two easy-access slots for secondary lenses and other
accessories
7. Slots shall be equipped with locking retaining clip
8. The unit shall ship with:
9. Theatrical-style hanging yoke as standard
10. 5’ power lead with Edison connector as standard
11. 25 deg. secondary lens as standard
12. Available options shall include but not be limited to:
13. Yoke with floor stand conversion feature
14. Bare-end, Stage-Pin or Twist-lock type-equipped power leads
15. PowerCon to PowerCon cables for fixture power linking
16. Multiple secondary lens options to include multiple angles in the following patterns:
17. Linear
18. Round
19. Oblong
20. Light output shall be via a round aperture
21. Aperture and accessory slots shall accommodate standard 7.5” accessories such as
used in other similar-sized fixtures
22. Accessories available as options shall include but not be limited to:
23. Gel/diffusion frames
24. Top hats
THEATER AND STAGE EQUIPMENT
11 61 00 - 40
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
25.
26.
27.
28.
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
Barndoors
Egg crate louvers
Concentric ring louvers
Multiple secondary lensing options
C. ENVIRONMENTAL AND AGENCY COMPLIANCE
1. The fixture shall be UL and cUL LISTED and/or CE rated, and shall be so labeled when
delivered to the job site.
2. The fixture shall be UL LISTED to the UL1573 standard for stage and studio use
3. The fixture shall be rated for IP-20 dry location use.
D. THERMAL
1. Fixture shall be totally convection cooled, requiring no cooling fan. Fixtures which require
an on-board cooling fan shall not be acceptable unless pre-approved
2. The fixture shall utilize advanced thermal management systems to maintain LED life to
an average of 70% intensity after 50,000 hours of use
3. Thermal management shall include multiple temperature sensors within the housing to
include:
4. LED array circuit board temperatures
5. Temperature sensors placed on each individual LED color circuit
6. Fixture ambient
7. CPU
8. Fixture user shall permit monitoring of temperature sensors via a legible LCD multi-line
backlit display
9. Fixtures that do not provide active thermal monitoring of LED circuits and other
temperature readings shall not be acceptable
10. The fixture shall operate in an ambient temperature range of -20°C (-4°F) minimum, to
40° C (104°F) maximum ambient temperature.
E. ELECTRICAL
1. The fixture shall be equipped with 100V to 240V 50/60 Hz internal power supply
2. The fixture shall support power in and thru operation
®
3. Power in shall be via Neutrik PowerCon™ input connector
4. Power thru shall be via Neutrik ® PowerCon ™ output connector
5. Fixture power wiring and accessory power cables shall be rated to support linking of
multiple fixtures up to the capacity of a 15A breaker
6. The fixture requires power from non-dim source
7. Power supply outputs shall have self-resetting current limiting protection
8. Power supply shall have power factor correction
F. LED Emitters
1. The fixture shall contain a minimum of 5 different LED colors to provide color
characteristics as described in Section G below.
2. All LEDs used in the fixture shall be high brightness and proven quality from established
and reputable LED manufacturers.
3. Fixture shall utilize Luxeon® Rebel™ LED emitters
4. Manufacturer of LED emitters shall utilize an advanced production LED binning process
to maintain color consistency.
5. LED emitters should be rated for nominal 50,000 hour LED life to 70% intensity
6. All LED fixtures (100% of each lot) shall undergo a minimum eight-hour burn-in test
during manufacturing.
7. LED system shall comply with all relevant patents
G. CALIBRATION
1. Fixture shall be calibrated at factory for achieve consistent color and intensity output
between fixtures built at different times and/or from different LED lots or bins
2. Calibration data shall be stored on the LED array as a permanent part of on-board
operating system
THEATER AND STAGE EQUIPMENT
11 61 00 - 41
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
3. All arrays, including replacement arrays shall be calibrated to the same standard to
insure consistency
4. Fixtures not offering LED calibration shall not be acceptable
H. COLOR
1. The fixture shall utilize an minimum of 40 LED emitters
2. The fixture shall be available in specialized LED arrays as outlined below:
a. Desire D40
(1) Red, Amber, Green, Cyan, Blue, Indigo and White LEDs in an array designed
for broad spectrum color, light tints, and variable whites. This array shall be the
Lustr+ array as manufactured by Electronic Theatre Controls, or approved
equal
a) Measured brightness of the Lustr+ array shall be greater than 2900 field
lumens
(2) Red, Orange, Amber, Green, Cyan, Blue and Indigo LEDs in an array designed
for broad spectrum deep colors. This array shall be the Vivid array as
manufactured by Electronic Theatre Controls, or approved equal
a) Measured brightness of the Vivid array shall be greater than 2500 field
lumens
(3) Red, Orange, Amber, Green and Indigo LEDs in an array designed for extrahigh brightness output in red/warm end of the spectrum. This shall be the Fire
array as manufactured by Electronic Theatre Controls, or approved equal
a) Measured brightness of the Fire array shall be greater than 2500 field
lumens
(4) Red, Orange, Green, Cyan, Blue and Indigo LEDs in an array designed for
extra-high brightness output in the blue/cool end of the spectrum. This shall be
the Ice array as manufactured by Electronic Theatre Controls, or approved
equal
a) Measured brightness of the Ice array shall be greater than 1800 field
lumens
b. Desire D40 Studio
(1) Warm White, Cool White, Red, Green, Blue and Indigo LEDs in an array
designed for high-brightness variable color temperature white light output. This
shall be the Studio HD array as manufactured by Electronic Theatre Controls,
or approved equal
a) Measure brightness of the Studio HD array shall be greater than 3100 field
lumens
(2) All Warm White LEDs in an array designed for non-variable single color highoutput, warm white light. This shall be the Studio Tungsten array as
manufactured by Electronic Theatre Controls, or approved equal
a) Measure brightness of the Studio tungsten array shall be greater than
(TBD) field lumens
(3) All Cool White LEDs in an array designed for non-variable single color highoutput, cool white light. This shall be the Studio Daylight array as manufactured
by Electronic Theatre Controls, or approved equal
a) Measure brightness of the Studio Daylight array shall be greater than (TBD)
field lumens
I.
DIMMING
1. The LED system shall use 15-bit nonlinear scaling techniques for high-resolution
dimming.
2. At least four different dimming curve options shall be accessible at the fixture’s User
Interface
3. Incandescent
4. Standard
5. Linear
6. Quick
7. Dimming curves shall be optimized for smooth dimming over longer timed fades.
THEATER AND STAGE EQUIPMENT
11 61 00 - 42
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
8. The LED system shall be digitally driven using high-speed pulse width modulation (PWM)
9. LED control shall be compatible with broadcast equipment in the following ways:
10. PWM control of LED levels shall be imperceptible to video cameras and related
equipment
11. PWM rates shall be adjustable by the user at the fixture if necessary to avoid any visible
interference to video cameras and related equipment
J.
CONTROL AND USER INTERFACE
1. The fixture shall be USITT DMX 512A-compatible via In and Thru 5-pin XLR connectors
2. The fixture shall be compatible with the ANSI RDM E1.20 standard
a. All fixture functions shall accessible via RDM protocol for modification from suitably
equipped control console
b. Temperature sensors within the luminaire shall be viewable in real time via RDM
c. Fixtures not offering RDM compatibility, feature set access or temperature monitoring
via RDM shall not be compatible
3. The fixture shall be equipped with multi-line LCD display for easy-to-read status reports
and configuration changes
4. The fixture shall be equipped with a six-button user-interface
5. The fixture shall offer multiple DMX input profile options to include:
a. RGB - control of all individual LED colors via a three-channel profile
(1) Red, Green, Blue
b. HSI – control of all individual LED colors via a three-channel profile
(1) Hue, Saturation, Intensity
c. HSIC – control of all LED colors via a four-channel profile
(1) Hue, Saturation, Intensity and Color Point
a) Color point provides variable color temperature settings
d. Direct – control of each individual color channel via an independent channel
e. A variable-rate strobe channel shall be provided
6. The fixture shall offer three output settings
a. Boost mode - powers LEDs at maximum intensity and provides no compensation
against LED ‘droop’ or intensity loss
b. Regulated mode – slightly restricts maximum LED intensity levels to compensate
against LED droop
c. Protected mode – further restricts maximum LED intensity levels to compensate
against LED droop and offer color consistency at highest permissible ambient
temperatures (40C)
d. Fixtures that do not provide regulated and protected operation modes are not
acceptable
7. The fixture shall offer additional user-definable options to including but not limited to:
a. Display time out options
b. Loss of data behavior options
c. White point settings
d. Red-shift option for tungsten dimming emulation
8. The fixture shall offer five Quick Set-Ups to allow user to rapidly select different
combinations of the numerous user options based on the desired usage situation, to
include:
a. General – for most situations
b. Stage – when emulating incandescent fixtures is desired
c. High Impact – when maximum output and effect is desired
d. XT Arch – when color consistency and architectural characteristics are desired.
e. Studio - when DMX or stand-alone of white light output is required with intensity,
color temperature and color tint control parameters
9. The fixture shall offer stand-alone functionality eliminating the need for a console
a. Fixture shall ship with 24 preset colors accessible as a stand-alone feature
b. Fixture shall ship with 12 Sequences accessible as a stand-alone feature
c. Each color and sequence can be modified by the end user
d. Fixtures can be linked together with standard DMX cables and controlled from
designated master fixture
THEATER AND STAGE EQUIPMENT
11 61 00 - 43
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
e. Up to 32 fixtures may be linked
f. Fixtures in a stand-alone state shall restore to the settings present prior to power
cycling, eliminating the need for reprogramming
g. Fixtures without stand-alone operation features described in a, b, c, d, and e shall not
be acceptable.
K. Provide the following
1. (28) D40 Vivid-R
2. (28) D40 35-Deg Round Field Lens
3. (24) 10 foot PowerCon to PowerCon extension cables
2.23
2.5 WATT COLOR MIXING LIGHT EMITTING DIODE FIXTURE
A. General
1. The fixture shall be a broad-spectrum color-mixing LED illuminator with DMX control of
intensity as well as color changing. The fixture shall be a Vivid-R as manufactured by
Electronics Theatre Controls, Inc. or approved equal.
2. All LED fixtures shall be provided by a single manufacturer to ensure compatibility.
3. The fixture shall comply with USITT DMX-512 A.
B. Physical
1. The unit shall be black in color and contained in a rugged all-metal extruded and formedmetal housing, free of burrs and pits.
2. Power supply, cooling and electronics shall be integral to each unit.
3. The unit shall provide, but not be limited to:
4. 1/2” Mounting bolts on each end
5. 5’ power lead with Edison connector
6. Easy-access slots for secondary lenses for varied beam spreads
7. Optional yoke (11” and 21” only), trunnion, and hanging bracket mounting kits.
8. Bare-end, Stage-Pin or Twist-Loc power leads shall be available
9. Four sizes shall be available:
10. 11in (280mm) long by 7.1in (180mm) high by 7.1in (180mm) deep, with a weight of 11.5
lbs (5.2 kg) not including mounting hardware
11. 21.5in (547mm) long by 7.1in (180mm) high by 7.1in (180mm) deepwith a weight of 20
lbs (9.1 kg) not including mounting hardware
12. 42.5in (1080mm) long by 7.1in (180mm) high by 7.1in (180mm) deepwith a weight of 35
lbs (15.9 kg) not including mounting hardware
13. 63.5in (1613mm) long by 7.1in (180mm) high by 7.1in (180mm) deepwith a weight of 53
lbs (24.1 kg) not including mounting hardware
C. Environmental and Agency Compliance
1. The fixture shall operate in an ambient temperature range of 0°C minimum, to 40° C
(104°F) maximum ambient temperature. The fixture shall be rated for IP-20 dry location
use.
2. The fixture shall utilize advanced thermal management systems for long LED life
3. The fixture shall provide on-board fan speed control
4. LED fixture housing shall be designed to transfer heat from the LED board to the outside
environment.
5. The fixture shall be ETL and cETL LISTED, and shall be so labeled when delivered to the
job site. The fixture shall be ETL LISTED to UL1573.
D. ELECTRICAL
1. The fixture shall be equipped with 100V to 240V 50/60 Hz internal power supply
®
2. The fixture shall receive power via Neutrik PowerCon™ input connector
3. The fixture requires power from non-dim source
4. Power/data supply outputs shall have current limiting protection.
5. Power/data supply shall provide miswiring protection.
6. Power/data supply shall have power factor correction.
THEATER AND STAGE EQUIPMENT
11 61 00 - 44
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
7. Power/data supply shall be UL listed for Class 1 or Class 2 wiring
8. Power/data supply shall come with a housing that meets a minimum IP20 rating for dry
location installation
E. LED Emitters
1. The fixture shall utilize red, red-orange, amber, green, cyan, blue, and indigo emitters for
maximum spectral output.
2. All LEDs used in the LED fixture shall be high brightness and proven quality from
established and reputable LED manufacturers.
3. Manufacturer of LED systems shall utilize an advanced production LED binning process
to maintain color consistency.
4. LED emitters should be rated for nominal 50,000 hour LED life
5. The fixture shall utilize Luxeon® Rebel™ 2.5W LED emitters
6. All LED fixtures (100% of each lot) shall undergo a minimum eight-hour burn-in test
during manufacturing.
7. LED system shall comply with all relevant patents.
F. COLOR
1. The fixture shall utilize the exclusive x7 Color System™ 7-color LED array
2. Each 11” cell shall contain 40 LEDs
3. Each 11” cell shall contain seven different colors of LED emitters for maximum spectral
output
4. The fixture shall optimized for excellent pastel and saturated colors
5. The LED system shall be capable of at least 15-bit control of each color level in each cell
for greater than 1 billion possible color combinations.
6. The fixture shall interact seamlessly with conventional sources
7. The fixture shall render light tints and skin tones similar to tungsten-sourced fixtures.
G. CONTROL
1. Each 11” cell of every fixture shall have the capability to be set to a unique and individual
address.
2. 21” fixture provides 2 independently controlled cells
3. 42” fixture provides 4 independently controlled cells
4. 63” fixture provides 6 independently controlled cells
5. The fixture shall be DMX 512 compatible via In and Thru 5-pin XLR connectors
6. The LED system shall be digitally driven using high-speed pulse width modulation
(PWM).
7. LED control shall be compatible to broadcast equipment
8. PWM control of LED levels shall be imperceptible to video cameras and related
equipment
9. Each 11” cell of every fixture shall provide 8 channel control (7 color plus intensity)
10. An intensity channel shall be utilized for each cell to minimize color shift during dimming.
11. The LED system shall use 15-bit nonlinear scaling techniques for high-resolution
dimming.
12. Dimming curves shall be optimized for smooth dimming at low intensities and over longer
timed fades.
H. Provide
1. (9) Selador Vivid-R 63” LED Fixtures
2. (27) Selador 30-Deg Horizontal 21” Lens
3. (8) 5 foot PowerCon to PowerCon extension cables
2.24
FOLLOWSPOTS
A. General
1. This equipment is designed to provide high quality lighting capabilities, with maximum
ease of use and reliability for the wide variety of functions housed in these facilities.
THEATER AND STAGE EQUIPMENT
11 61 00 - 45
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
2. This Contractor shall provide all labor and materials and make all necessary
arrangements, except as specifically noted herein, so that when the Contractor is
finished, a fully working Followspot system will be turned over to the Owner. Any errors,
omissions, or ambiguities are not to condition this requirement, but shall be brought to the
attention of the Owner in their possible effect on the intent of this specification.
3. The equipment specified is the result of efforts to select equipment for reliability, ease of
maintenance, and suitability for the Owner's purposes. Strict adherence to these
specifications shall be required.
B. Products
1. The basis of this design shall be the Radiance follow spotlight, as manufactured by
Strong Entertainment Lighting of Omaha, Nebraska.
C. Physical
1. The unit frame and enclosure shall be constructed of formed and sturdy aluminum
extrusions, free of burrs and protected by a gray and black powder coat finish.
2. The unit shall be mounted on a stable, folding three-point floor stand and low profile yoke.
3. Mounting shall incorporate the following design features:
4. Unobstructed access;
5. Easy height adjustments;
6. Horizontal Pan and Vertical Tilt Control Levers.
7. In order to provide extra smooth Pan and Tilt operation, mounting shall incorporate an
improved yoke sleeve in the stand, and Teflon bearings for the tilt axis bolt.
8. The Power Supply shall be mounted underneath the lamp house, and shall be accessible
with the removal of no more than four (4) screws.
9. The entire lens train and lamp house shall be accessible with the removal of two access
panels, each secured with four (4) captive quarter turn screws.
10. Weight of Head unit shall not exceed 96 pounds.
11. Length of head unit with color changing boomerang shall not exceed 54”.
12. Controls
13. The Lamphouse shall, as a minimum incorporate the following:
14. Very Quiet forced-air cooling by internally wired blower
15. ON/OFF ignition control
16. Lamp field focus controls and centering joystick to adjust the lamp’s focal position relative
to the reflector in three dimensions without the use of tools
17. The body of the unit shall, as minimum incorporate the following:
a. Control Levers on top:
b. Optical dimmer iris mechanism for smooth manual dimming;
c. Horizontal and Vertical masking shutters
(1) Internal adjustment of the shutters shall be provided to eliminate any
keystoning caused by the relative position of the followspot to the stage.
d. Drop-in nichrome steel Iris and Gobo holder slot
e. Trombone style one handed zoom focus, which maintains sharp edge throughout
zoom range from flood to spot. The relationship between front and rear lenses shall
be maintained with a grooved spiral cam.
f. Spot edge focus adjusting knob, which shall be incorporated into the Trombone
handle.
g. The front of the unit shall house a six color, self-canceling boomerang with color
filters
h. Boomerang shall be rigidly mounted to the body of the followspot
i. The boomerang shall include a folding door, which completely encapsulates the color
frames when in storage and folds flat to the body of the followspot when in use.
D. Optical
1. The unit’s optical train shall consist of
a. 850 watt double ended Metal-Halidelamp, with hot restrike capability.
b. Precision deep ellipse electroformed nickel reflector
c. Variable focus lens system utilizing Optical-quality glass
THEATER AND STAGE EQUIPMENT
11 61 00 - 46
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
d. Iris, Choppers and dowser for beam shaping control
e. Six color boomerang.
f. The zoom focus shall increase light intensity as it decreases the spot diameter.
E. Electrical
1. Lamp system input shall be115 V.AC, 50/60 Hertz, single phase, 10 ampere operation.
2. Plug shall be NEMA 5-15P standard parallel blade, U-Ground.
3. Lamp shall 850 watt Metal halide as manufactured by Ushio.
F. Performance
1. Adjusted for flat field (approximately 70%) the unit shall produce a continuous range of
illumination from 500,000 beam candlepower in Flood focus to 4,300,000 beam
candlepower in Spot focus.
2. The Field diameter at a 70 foot throw shall be continuously adjustable from 18.2 feet in
Flood focus to 7.8 feet in Spot focus. With full iris the Field diameter in spot focus shall be
11.2”.
G. Provide the following
1. Furnish (1) #7201111 Radiance followspots, complete with all necessary accessories.
a. Additional pre-approved models include:
(1) Lycian M2 Medium Throw #2040-12
2. Four (4) Followspot fixture lamps
2.25
AUTOMATED LIGHTING
A. Lamp Source
1. RGBW LED module
B. Optical System
1. Beam angle: 10° – 45°
2. RGBW or CMY (8 or 16bit) colour mixing option + variable CTO
C. Electrical
1. Supply input: 100–240 V, 50–60 Hz auto-ranging
2. Power consumption: 550 W max. (Typical 160–215 W - one colour full)
D. Mechanical
1. Height: 678 mm (26.7") – head in vertical position
2. Width: 388 mm (15.3")
3. Depth: 480 mm (18.9") – head in horizontal position
4. Weight: 22 kg (48.5 lbs)
E. Thermal
1. Maximum ambient temperature: 45 °C (104 °F)
2. Maximum surface temperature: 90 °C (194 °F)
F. Rotating Gobos
1. Outside diameter: 26.8 mm, image diameter: 22.0 mm, thickness: 1.1 mm, max.
thickness: 4 mm, high temperature borofloat or better glass.
G. Effect wheel
1. Aluminium Animation wheel
2. Can be used alone or in combination with rotating gobos
3. Rotating in both directions, variable speed
H. Framing shutters system
1. 4 Blades, each with separate movement and rotation control
THEATER AND STAGE EQUIPMENT
11 61 00 - 47
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
2.
3.
4.
5.
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
Smooth blade movements, variable speed
Ultra fast blade movement for creating mid-air effects
Pre-programmed shape and blade sequences
+-45° rotation of the complete Framing system
I.
Control and Programming
1. User Interface: Colour Touch Screen - ROBE Navigation System 2 (RNS2), battery
backup
2. Protocols: DMX-512, RDM, ArtNet, MA Net, MA Net2
3. DMX modes (channels): 47, 38, 36
4. (Wireless DMX version (Lumen CRMX™) available)
5. 3 user defined programs, each up to 100 steps
6. Stand-alone operation
7. Pan/Tilt resolution: 8 or 16bit
8. Movement control: Tracking and vector
9. Rotating gobo wheel positioning: 8bit
10. Gobo indexing & rotation: 8 or 16bit
11. Virtual colour wheel with pre-programmed 237 colours plus whites (2.700 K, 3.200 K,
4.200 K, 5.600 K and 8.000 K)
12. Tungsten lamp emulation at whites 2700 K and 3200 K
13. Variable CTO filter
14. Colour rainbow effect, variable speed
15. Framing shutters system: 8 bit
16. Animation wheel : 8 bit
17. Iris: 8 or 16bit
18. Frost: 8 bit
19. Zoom: 8 or 16bit
20. Focus: 8 or 16bit
21. Dimmer: 8 or 16bit
22. Strobe effect, variable speed (20 flashes per second max.)
23. Data in/out: Locking 3-pin & 5-pin XLR, RJ45
24. Power connection: Neutrik PowerCon (cable supplied)
25. Built-in analyser for easy fault finding
J.
Electromechanical Effects
1. Rotating Gobo wheel: 7 rotating, indexable, replaceable "SLOT&LOCK" glass gobos +
open
2. Framing shutters: 4 individually positionable blades plus rotation of the complete frame
system +-45°
3. Glass Animation wheel
4. Iris: Motorized, stepless, pulse effects up to 3 Hz
5. Prism: 3-facet 11° prism rotating in both directions at different speeds
6. Frost filter: Separate, variable
7. Motorized zoom: 10° (gobo position) - 45° (free hole)
8. Motorized focus
9. Pan: 540°
10. Tilt: 280°
K. Rigging
1. Mounting points: 2 pairs of ¼-turn locks
2. 2x Omega brackets with ¼-turn quick locks
3. Pan and Tilt transport locks
L. Provide
1. Two (2) Robe Robin DLS Profile w/clamps
nd
a. Install on 2 electric
M. Alternate:
THEATER AND STAGE EQUIPMENT
11 61 00 - 48
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
1. Provide additional four (4) Robe Robin DLS Profile w/clamps
2.26
STAGE WORKLIGHTS
A. Lamp type
1. 230mm: 22 LED
B. Lifetime
1. 50,000 hrs, 70% degradation
C. Optic
1. 60 degree
D. Control data input
1. DMX 512 In/Out
E. Input Power
1. 230mm: max 34W
F. Power Connection
1. 100-260V AC 50-60Hz In
G. Net Weight
1. 230mm: 3kg
H. Dimensions
1. 230mm x 130mm x 107.5mm without bracket
I.
Ambient Temp
1. Maximum 40º C
J.
Cooling
1. Conventional
K. Finish
1. Black Powder Coat
L. Installation
1. Pipe Mount
2. Install to stage worklight circuits
M. Provide
1. Provide (6) 230mm custom white/blue LED fixtures as manufactured by LEADER LIGHT
2.27
STAGE LIGHTING ACCESSORIES
A. Provide
1. Eight (8) City Theatrical Beam Benders, #1400
2. Eight (8) 50 pound Boom Bases
a. As manufactured by SSRC
3. Eight (8) 16ft 1.5” ID Schedule 40 Lighting Booms
4. Eight (8) City Theatrical Boom Tie Off, #1310
5. Sixteen (16) 50 pound black sandbags
6. Twelve (12) A-Size Sandwich Template Holders
7. Twelve (12) B-Size Sandwich Template Holders
8. Six (6) Donuts, City Theatrical #2250
9. Six (6) Donuts, City Theatrical #2260
10. Twelve (12), City Theatrical Stackers Top Hats, #2840
THEATER AND STAGE EQUIPMENT
11 61 00 - 49
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
11.
12.
13.
14.
1.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
PART 2
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
Six (6) Drop-in Iris, City Theatrical #2180
Thirty-two (32) 24 inch Side Arms w/ 1 Tee
Two (2) DMX Iris, City Theatrical #2192
One (1) Projector Dowser, City Theatrical #4160
Two (2) Power Supply, City Theatrical #2199
36 inch black safety cable for each fixture and barndoor
Ten (10) 5 foot L5-20 to L5-20 12-3 SO extension cables
Ten (10) 10 foot L5-20 to L5-20 12-3 SO extension cables
Ten (10) 15 foot L5-20 to L5-20 12-3 SO extension cables
Six (6) 25 foot L5-20 to L5-20 12-3 SO extension cables
Four (4) 50 foot L5-20 to L5-20 12-3 SO extension cables
Six (6) 3 foot L5-20 male to Edison female adapter cables
Twenty four (24) 3 foot molded L5-20 2-fer cables
Ten (10) 5 foot 5-pin DMX cables
Thirty (30) 10 foot 5-pin DMX cables
Ten (10) 25 foot 5-pin DMX cables
INSTALLATION
3.1
GENERAL
1. Work shall be performed in accordance with OSHA and local codes.
2. On site welding shall only be performed per AWS D1.1 standards and with advanced
approval from the architect or Owner’s representative.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A. The Lighting Contractor shall install and test all lighting fixtures in locations as specified by
owner provided lighting plot.
B. The Lighting Contractor shall be responsible for storage of stage equipment, tools, and
equipment during the period of the installation.
C. Extent: All specified equipment shall be installed by fully trained personnel. Equipment shall
be installed per plans and specifications. Equipment shall be aligned, adjusted, and trimmed
for the most efficient operation, the greatest safety and for the best visual appearance.
D. Standards: Installation practices shall be in accordance with OSHA Safety and Health
Standards and all local codes. All welding must be performed in full compliance with the
latest edition of the Structural Welding Code (ANSI/AWS D1.1).
E. Finishes:
1. All welds must be touched up to match disturbed finishes.
2. All finishes which are disturbed during shipping and installation shall be touched up to
match the original.
3.3
CLEAN UP
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for clean up, including removal of packing materials etc.
and the protection of surfaces or equipment provided by other contractors.
3.4
INSPECTION AND TESTING
A. Inspection: During the installation of equipment the Lighting Contractor shall arrange for
access as necessary for inspection of equipment by the Owner’s representatives.
THEATER AND STAGE EQUIPMENT
11 61 00 - 50
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
B. Special Testing: If specifications, the Architect’s instructions, laws, ordinances, or any public
authority require any work to be specially tested or approved, the Lighting Contractor shall
give the Architect timely notice of its readiness for inspection, and of dates of inspections to
be made by other authorities.
C. Completion Testing: Upon completing the installation of all equipment specified under this
section, the Contractor shall notify the Architect, who will schedule an inspection. At the time
of inspection, the Lighting Contractor shall furnish sufficient workers to operate all equipment
and to perform such adjustments and tests as may be required by the Owner’s
representative. Any equipment, which fails to meet with approval, shall be repaired or
replaced with suitable equipment and the inspection shall be re-scheduled under the same
conditions as previously specified. At the time of these inspections, no other work shall be
performed in the auditorium and stage areas. All temporary bracing, scaffolding, etc. shall be
removed to permit full operation of, and access to, all equipment. Final approval will be
withheld until all systems have been thoroughly tested and found to be in first class operating
condition.
3.5
DEMONSTRATION
A. Demonstrate the system to prove compliance with requirements.
B. Direct Training: Arrange and Pay for the services of a factory-authorized service
representative to demonstrate lighting control and motorized winch batten systems and train
owner's personnel. Conduct a minimum of Sixteen (16) hours of training over two (2) days in
Operation and Maintenance as specified under "Instructions to Owners Employees" in
Division I Section "Project Closeout". Training is to include systems operation and
maintenance procedures.
C. Schedule training with at least (14) days advance notice.
THEATER AND STAGE EQUIPMENT
11 61 00 - 51
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
1. DMX 512 In/Out.
E. Input Power:
1. 230mm: max 34W.
F. Power Connection:
1. 100-260V AC 50-60Hz In.
G. Net Weight:
1. 230mm: 3kg.
H. Dimensions:
1. 230mm x 130mm x 107.5mm without bracket.
I.
Ambient Temp:
1. Maximum 40º C.
J.
Cooling:
1. Conventional.
K. Finish:
1. Black Powder Coat.
L. Installation:
1. Pipe Mount.
2. Install to stage worklight circuits.
M. Provide:
1. Provide (6) 230mm custom white/blue LED fixtures as manufactured by LEADER LIGHT,
or equal.
2.26
STAGE LIGHTING ACCESSORIES
A. Provide:
1. Eight (8) City Theatrical Beam Benders, #1400
2. Eight (8) 50 pound Boom Bases
a. As manufactured by SSRC
3. Eight (8) 16ft 1.5” ID Schedule 40 Lighting Booms
4. Eight (8) City Theatrical Boom Tie Off, #1310
5. Sixteen (16) 50 pound black sandbags
6. Twelve (12) A-Size Sandwich Template Holders
7. Twelve (12) B-Size Sandwich Template Holders
8. Six (6) Donuts, City Theatrical #2250
9. Six (6) Donuts, City Theatrical #2260
10. Twelve (12), City Theatrical Stackers Top Hats, #2840
11. Six (6) Drop-in Iris, City Theatrical #2180
12. Thirty-two (32) 24 inch Side Arms w/ 1 Tee
13. Two (2) DMX Iris, City Theatrical #2192
14. One (1) Projector Dowser, City Theatrical #4160
15. Two (2) Power Supply, City Theatrical #2199
16. 36 inch black safety cable for each fixture and barndoor
17. Ten (10) 5 foot L5-20 to L5-20 12-3 SO extension cables
18. Ten (10) 10 foot L5-20 to L5-20 12-3 SO extension cables
19. Ten (10) 15 foot L5-20 to L5-20 12-3 SO extension cables
20. Six (6) 25 foot L5-20 to L5-20 12-3 SO extension cables
THEATRE AND STAGE EQUIPMENT
11 61 00 - 52
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
PART 3
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
Four (4) 50 foot L5-20 to L5-20 12-3 SO extension cables
Six (6) 3 foot L5-20 male to Edison female adapter cables
Twenty four (24) 3 foot molded L5-20 2-fer cables
Ten (10) 5 foot 5-pin DMX cables
Thirty (30) 10 foot 5-pin DMX cables
Ten (10) 25 foot 5-pin DMX cables
EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL
1. Work shall be performed in accordance with OSHA and local codes.
2. On site welding shall only be performed per AWS D1.1 standards and with advanced
approval from the architect or Owner’s representative.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A. The Lighting Contractor shall install and test all lighting fixtures in locations as specified by
owner provided lighting plot.
B. The Lighting Contractor shall be responsible for storage of stage equipment, tools, and
equipment during the period of the installation.
C. Extent: All specified equipment shall be installed by fully trained personnel. Equipment shall
be installed per plans and specifications. Equipment shall be aligned, adjusted, and trimmed
for the most efficient operation, the greatest safety and for the best visual appearance.
D. Standards: Installation practices shall be in accordance with OSHA Safety and Health
Standards and all local codes. All welding must be performed in full compliance with the
latest edition of the Structural Welding Code (ANSI/AWS D1.1).
E. Finishes:
1. All welds must be touched up to match disturbed finishes.
2. All finishes which are disturbed during shipping and installation shall be touched up to
match the original.
3.3
CLEAN UP
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for clean up, including removal of packing materials etc.
and the protection of surfaces or equipment provided by other contractors.
3.4
INSPECTION AND TESTING
A. Inspection: During the installation of equipment the Lighting Contractor shall arrange for
access as necessary for inspection of equipment by the Owner’s representatives.
B. Special Testing: If specifications, the Architect’s instructions, laws, ordinances, or any public
authority require any work to be specially tested or approved, the Lighting Contractor shall
give the Architect timely notice of its readiness for inspection, and of dates of inspections to
be made by other authorities.
C. Completion Testing: Upon completing the installation of all equipment specified under this
section, the Contractor shall notify the Architect, who will schedule an inspection. At the time
of inspection, the Lighting Contractor shall furnish sufficient workers to operate all equipment
and to perform such adjustments and tests as may be required by the Owner’s
representative. Any equipment, which fails to meet with approval, shall be repaired or
THEATRE AND STAGE EQUIPMENT
11 61 00 - 53
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
replaced with suitable equipment and the inspection shall be re scheduled under the same
conditions as previously specified. At the time of these inspections, no other work shall be
performed in the auditorium and stage areas. All temporary bracing, scaffolding, etc. shall be
removed to permit full operation of, and access to, all equipment. Final approval will be
withheld until all systems have been thoroughly tested and found to be in first class operating
condition.
3.5
DEMONSTRATION
A. Demonstrate the system to prove compliance with requirements.
B. Direct Training: Arrange and Pay for the services of a factory-authorized service
representative to demonstrate lighting control and motorized winch batten systems and train
owner's personnel. Conduct a minimum of Sixteen (16) hours of training over two (2) days in
Operation and Maintenance as specified under "Instructions to Owners Employees" in
Division I Section "Project Closeout". Training is to include systems operation and
maintenance procedures.
C. Schedule training with at least (14) days advance notice.
END OF SECTION 11 61 00
THEATRE AND STAGE EQUIPMENT
11 61 00 - 54
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
SECTION 11 61 13 - ACOUSTICAL SHELLS
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Full stage acoustical shell system consisting of mobile acoustical shell towers and adjustable
acoustical shell ceiling.
1.2
REFERENCES
A. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE):
1. ASCE 7 – Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures.
B. Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI):
th
1. Quality Manual, 8 Edition.
C. ASTM International (ASTM):
1. ASTM C 423 – Standard Test Method for Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption
Coefficients by the Reverberation Room Method.
2. ASTM E 413 – Classification for Determination of Sound Transmission Class.
D. National Electrical Manufacturers Association
1. NEMA LD 3-2000 – High Pressure Decorative Laminates.
E. US Green Building Council (USGBC):
1. Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design (LEED).
1.3
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Acoustical Panel Sound Transmission: Provide acoustical shell system comprised of
acoustical shell panels having the following sound transmission requirements:
1. Sound Transmission Class (STC): 22 per ASTM E 413.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s data sheets for acoustical shell system.
1. Provide test results by certified independent testing laboratory indicating compliance with
requirements of Performance Requirements article.
B. Shop Drawings: Prepared by manufacturer. Include dimensioned plans and sections, and
elevations showing acoustical shell system component sizes, arrangements, and details of
each condition of installation. Show fabrication and installation details.
1. Indicate coordination of with related overhead components, including structural elements,
rigging, catwalks, lighting, ductwork, piping, and sprinklers.
C. Samples: For each color and finish for acoustical shell panels.
D. Maintenance Data: Include manufacturer's cleaning instructions.
E. Warranty: Submit sample meeting warranty requirements of this Section.
ACOUSTICAL SHEELS
11 61 13 - 1
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
1.5
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Approved manufacturer listed in this section, with minimum [5]
years experience in manufacture of acoustical shell components.
1. Manufacturers seeking approval must submit the following:
a. Product data, including third-party certified acoustical data and proposed layout for
this project.
b. Samples: Submit samples of finished acoustical shell panels and hinge.
c. Sample warranty.
2. Submit substitution request not less than 15 days prior to bid date.
3. Approval will be indicated by issuance of written Addendum.
4. Approved manufacturers must meet separate requirements of Submittals Article.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain acoustical shell system through one source from a single
approved manufacturer.
C. Coordination Conference: Prior to fabrication of acoustical shells, conduct conference at
project site to verify coordination requirements with work of related trades. Review acoustical
shell shop drawings in reference to rigging and to adjacent or integral fire protection,
plumbing, HVAC, electrical power, lighting, communication, and structural and architectural
features.
1. Coordinate requirements for structural supports or pipe battens furnished under other
sections and used to support acoustical shell system.
1.6
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, and handle acoustical shell components in accordance with component
manufacturers' recommendations. Ship to jobsite only after roughing-in, painting work, and
other related finish work has been completed and installation areas are ready to accept units
and recommended temperature and humidity levels will be maintained during the remainder
of construction.
1.7
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify layout and the dimensions of other construction by field
measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
1.8
WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's written warranty indicating manufacturer’s intent to repair
or replace acoustical shell system components that fail in materials or workmanship within [5]
years from date of Substantial Completion. Failures are defined to include, but are not limited
to, the following:
1. Fracturing or breaking of unit components which results from normal wear and tear and
normal use other than vandalism.
2. Delamination or other failures of glue bond of components.
3. Warping of components not resulting from leaks, flooding, or other uncontrolled moisture
or humidity.
4. Failure of unit to perform acoustically in accordance with manufacturer's published data.
ACOUSTICAL SHEELS
11 61 13 - 2
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
PART 2
2.1
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis of Design: Acoustical shell system design is based upon product of the manufacturer
below. Provide basis of design product.
1. Wenger Corporation, Owatonna, MN; Telephone: (800)4WENGER (800-493-6437);
Email: info@wengercorp.com; Website: www.wengercorp.com. Basis of design product:
Forte Acoustical Shell.
2.2
MATERIALS
A. Steel Tube: ASTM A 501, hot formed steel tubing.
B. Aluminum Extruded Bars, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221, 6063T alloy.
C. Hardboard: AHA A135.4, Class 1 Tempered, urea formaldehyde free.
D. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, Grade VGP, with urea formaldehyde-free
adhesive.
2.3
ACOUSTICAL SHELL PANELS
A. Acoustical Shell Panels, General: Manufacturer's standard stressed-skin composite
acoustical shell panels, with STC meeting performance requirements, designed to mix and
blend sound and reflect a maximum range of audible frequencies to both audience and
performers.
1. Core: 3/4" (19 mm) thick honeycomb, resin impregnated, bonded to frame and faces with
permanent urethane adhesive. Contact cement adhesion does not meet the requirements
of this specification.
2. Face, Painted Panel: 3/16 inch (5 mm) thick hardboard stressed skin, material and finish
as indicated, with no exposed fasteners.
3. Back: 3/16-inch (5 mm) thick hardboard stressed skin, painted black.
4. Panel Edge Frame: Extruded aluminum edge angle, along straight edges.
2.4
STAGE ACOUSTICAL SHELL SYSTEM
A. Mobile Acoustical Towers: Free-standing, self-supporting, movable towers for stage back
and side walls. Towers consist of acoustical shell panels in rigid, diagonally-braced vertical
steel frame with formed steel connection components, in nesting configuration minimizing
required storage space. Tower is equipped with latching hardware and stage access door
where indicated. Counterweighted tower base with adjustable front leveling casters
concealed by removable access panel.
1. Tower Size: 8 foot (2438 mm) wide.
2. Tower Height: 17 feet high
3. Tower Panel Radius: 10 foot (3.05 m).
4. Tower Panel Face Finish:
a. Painted hardboard: Color as selected by Owner.
b. Plastic laminate: Selected from manufacturer’s available woodgrain patterns.
c. Trim strips between Towers: Painted black.
5. Door Panel Hardware:
a. Hinges: Continuous steel hinge.
b. Slide-lock mechanism and pull handle.
6. Stage Tower Transport: Removable steel handle inserted into base of tower.
ACOUSTICAL SHEELS
11 61 13 - 3
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
2.5
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
FINISHES
A. Steel Framing: Powder coat painted finish, black.
B. Opaque Painted Finish for Acoustical Shell Panel: 100 percent acrylic latex, 2-coat, matte
finish.
C. Woodgrain Laminate: Selection of Wilson Art decorative laminates.
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
EXAMINATION
A. Examine jobsite conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances,
including required overhead clearances, and other existing conditions affecting installation
and performance of acoustical shells. Proceed with unit installation upon correction of
unsatisfactory conditions.
3.2
ACOUSTICAL SHELL TOWER INSTALLATION
A. Erect acoustical shell towers in location indicated in coordination with Owner's personnel to
verify components are complete and operational.
B. Move tower units to their storage location after approval of assembled Acoustical Shell.
3.3
CLEANING
A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical shells. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions
for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage.
B. Repair or replace defective work as directed by Architect upon inspection.
3.4
TRAINING AND DEMONSTRATION
A. Train Owner's personnel to assemble, adjust, operate, and maintain acoustical shell towers
and acoustical shell ceiling units.
END OF SECTION 11 61 13
ACOUSTICAL SHEELS
11 61 13 - 4
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
SECTION 116133 – RIGGING SYSTEMS AND CONTROLS
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
1.2
GOVERNING CLAUSE
A. For the sake of brevity, these specifications shall omit phrases such as "Contractor shall
furnish and install", "unless otherwise indicated or specified", etc., but these phrases are
nevertheless implied. Mention of materials and operations requires the Contractor to furnish
and install such materials and perform such operations completely to the satisfaction of the
owner’s representative.
1.3
SCOPE OF WORK
A. Intent: This specification covers the fabrication, furnishing, delivery, and installation of the
theatrical rigging equipment.
B. Complete System: The Rigging Systems Contractor shall provide all items necessary for a
complete, safe, fully functional system as describes herein, including all tools, scaffolding,
labor and supervision, even though they may not be specifically enumerated. Any errors,
omissions or ambiguities do not relieve the Contractor of this responsibility, but shall be
brought to the attention of the Architect for clarification.
C. Work Included: The work of this section shall include, but not necessarily be limited to the
following:
1. Motorized Rigging and Controls
2. Dead Hung Rigging
3. Motorized Projection Screen
4. Supplemental steel as required to properly support rigging installation as indicated on
project drawings
5. Professional Engineering including stamping of submittal documents indicating all
installed components and capacities by an engineer licensed in the State of Maryland
D. Related Work: Related work which is not included in this section:
1. Galleries, Ladders and Catwalks
2. Stage Flooring
3. Electrical Connections, Service, Conduit, Boxes and Wiring of any type
4. Stage Dimming Systems
5. Theatrical Circuit Distribution
6. Stage Curtains
7. Stage Curtain Tracks
8. Motorized Curtain Machines and Controls
9. Supplemental steel as required for acoustical track support
1.4
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:
A. Field Conditions: All bidders shall fully inform themselves of the conditions under which the
work is to be performed. No additional compensation shall be allowed for any labor or item
the bidder could have been fully informed of prior to the bid date.
RIGGING SYSTEMS AND CONTROLS
11 61 33 - 1
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
B. Safety: The systems shall conform to all applicable code requirements and shall be in
conformance with industry standards of operation and practices. All materials, arrangements
and procedures shall comply with applicable code requirements, allowing the users to
arrange and operate a safe assembly and working environment for audience and user
personnel.
1.5
RELATED SECTIONS
A. 115200 – Audio Visual Equipment
B. 116100 – Theatre and Stage Equipment
C. 116143 – Stage Curtains
1.6
SUBSTITUTIONS:
1.7
DEFECTIVE OR NON-APPROVED MATERIALS
A. Should any equipment be found defective, not meeting specifications, or that which has not
been approved in writing by the Architect shall, upon discovery (including any time within the
period of the guarantee), be replaced with the specified equipment or material at no
additional cost.
1.8
DISCREPANCIES
A. All equipment shall be sized to fit properly. The exact measurements are the responsibility of
the Contractor. If there are discrepancies in the specifications, the Contractor shall ask for a
clarification from the Architect. If no clarification is requested, the Architect's judgment shall
rule.
1.9
STAGE RIGGING CONTRACTOR
A. In order to be considered a Stage Rigging Contractor for this project the Contractor shall
meet or exceed the minimum qualification criteria:
1. Have completed (5) projects of similar size and scope within the last (5) years
2. Employ factory authorized technicians as applicable for the installation of the work of this
contract
3. Shall employ only fully trained stage riggers and mechanics, for the erection of the stage
equipment. The stage riggers shall be completely familiar with the type of equipment to
be installed. A competent job superintendent shall be on the job at all times when work is
in progress. The job superintendent must be ETCP certified in theatre rigging. A copy of
the certification must be furnished to the General Contractor prior to the start of the
installation.
1.10
ACCEPTABLE EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURERS
A. For the purposes of establishing a standard of quality desired on this project, the rigging
hardware products of Electronic Theatre Controls of Middleton, Wisconsin are the basis of
design.
B. Standard acceptable equipment as manufactured by additional preapproved rigging
manufacturers shall include
1. DeSisti Rigging
2. J.R. Clancy, Inc.
RIGGING SYSTEMS AND CONTROLS
11 61 33 - 2
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
1.11
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
DOCUMENTATION
A. SHOP DRAWINGS: All shop drawing information shall be submitted at the same time; no
partial submittal shall be accepted. Drawings shall indicate complete details, dimensions,
product types and locations of all equipment, clearances required, guides, cables, sets,
Contractor fabricated equipment, and all other details required to completely describe the
work to be performed. Submittals drawings shall be presented at a scale not less than 1/4" for
equipment layouts and ½" = 1'-0" for equipment details, mounting and other details. Each
sheet shall allow space for approval stamps and have the name of the project, the
contractors and/or the supplier's name, address telephone number, and the date submitted.
Submit the following items for Architect's approval, prior to fabrication:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Stage plan view
Stage side section view
Gridiron layout indicating all stage equipment.
Electrical riser diagrams indicating the necessary power and control wiring for all rigging
equipment and systems.
Plan and elevation views indicating all power, motor and control hardware locations and
layout.
Provide full dimensions for panel layouts with finishes and materials for all custom
panels.
Details of installation and erection, including adjoining conditions and necessary
clearances.
Indication by arrow and boxed caption of each variation from contract drawing and
specifications, except those indicated as acceptable in specifications or on drawings.
B. Submittal shall include a fully dimensioned drawing indicating the location and elevation of all
control consoles and stations as well as coordination drawings showing the interrelationship
of stage rigging, drapery, stage lighting system, and other stage systems. Drawings shall
include, but not be limited to: plan, transverse section and elevation. Drawings should note
overhead obstructions such as MEP systems and should be coordinated with the submittals
of MEP trades. A full set of plans and specifications, including the Stage Equipment
Contractor's approved submittal drawings shall be onsite at all times. On these drawings the
Stage Equipment Contractor shall note all changes and modifications for the purpose of
project coordination and the development of accurate as-built drawings.
C. Catalog Cuts: In lieu of drawings, the Contractor may submit catalog cuts for standard
equipment items. These must contain full information on dimensions, construction,
applications, etc. to permit proper evaluation. In addition, these must be properly identified as
to their intended use. Any options or variations must be clearly noted.
D. Schedule: Prior to the commencement of the installation work, the Stage Equipment
Contractor shall submit an outline of the proposed schedule and requirements for approval.
E. RECORD DRAWINGS AND DATA: Submit in accordance with General Provisions. Within
30 days of final test and completion of the installation, submit the following to the Architect:
1. Three (3) complete sets of "as built and approved" drawings showing systems and
elements as installed, including field modifications and adjustments.
2. Three (3) sets of maintenance data including a list indicating replacement parts lists for
all items of equipment, wiring diagrams, control diagrams, any and all keys for cabinets,
racks, key operated switches etc. and complete operation manuals.
3. Three (3) Certificates of Guarantee
F. INSTRUCTION OF OWNER PERSONNEL: This contractor or his representative, fully
knowledgeable and qualified in systems operation, shall provide four (4) hours of instruction
to the Owner-designated personnel on the use and operation of this System. Designated
instruction times shall be arranged through the Architect.
RIGGING SYSTEMS AND CONTROLS
11 61 33 - 3
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
G. PERMITS: Obtain all permits necessary for the execution of any work pertaining to the
installation, and conform in all trades with all applicable local codes and national codes.
Obtain all permits necessary for operation of any equipment by the Owner.
H. CLEAN UP: It shall be the responsibility of this Contractor to remove all debris from the
building or site caused by his operations to a common trash point or receptacle on the job
site, as determined by the General Contractor.
1.12
WARRANTY
A. With respect to the Stage Rigging System, the Stage Rigging Contractor shall provide a twoyear written guarantee, on all materials and labor, against defects in materials or labor
starting from the date of Substantial Completion. The guarantee shall not include: normal
wear and tear, acts of God, or damages due to neglect or improper use of equipment. Any
required maintenance or replacement shall be provided by the Rigging Equipment Contractor
within 10 days of notification by the Owner except for safety related items which shall be
corrected with 24 hours of notification.
B. The Rigging Equipment Contractor shall maintain a 24-hour service line. Any calls placed to
that number during the warranty period, shall be answered within 30 minutes. The Rigging
Equipment Contractor shall maintain replacement parts for each and every aspect of the
stage rigging system and shall present themselves at the job site within a 48-hour period of
notification by the Owner's designated personnel with the appropriate replacement parts.
1.13
GENERAL STANDARDS:
A. Standards: Materials shall conform to the following ASTM and ANSI standard specifications:
1. A-36: Specification for structural steel
2. A-47: Specification for malleable iron casting
3. A-48: Specification for gray iron casting
4. A-120: Specification for black and hot-dipped, zinc-coated (galvanized) steel pipe for
ordinary use
5. B 18.2.1 & 2: Specification for square and hex bolts and nuts
B. In order to establish minimum standard of safety, the following factors shall be used:
1. Cables and fittings: 8: 1 Safety Factor
2. Cable bending ratio: Sheave tread diameter is 30 times cable diameter
3. Tread Pressures: 500 lbs. For cast iron, 900 lbs. for Nylatron, 1000 lbs. for steel
4. Maximum fleet angle: 112 degrees
5. Steel: 15 of yield
6. Bearings: Two times required load at full speed for 2000 hours
7. Bolts: Minimum SAE J429 Grade 5 (ISO R898 Class 8.8), zinc plated
8. Motors: 1.0 Service Factor
9. Gearboxes: 1.25 Mechanical Strength Service Factor
10. Listing and Labeling: Where applicable standard have been established, equipment shall
be "Listed and Labeled" by a "Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory" (NRTL) as
defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7. The terms "Listed and Labeled" shall be defined as
they are in the National Electrical Code, Article 100.
11. NEC Compliance: National Electrical Code (NFPA 70)
12. NEMA Compliance: National Electrical Manufacturers Association
13. ANSI Compliance: Provide electric lamps which comply with ANSI construction and rating
standards.
C. Materials: All materials used in this project shall be new, unused and of the latest design. Refurbished and obsolete materials are not permitted.
D. Fabrication: The mechanical fabrication and workmanship shall incorporate best practices for
good fit and finish. There shall be no burrs or sharp edges to cause a hazard nor shall there
RIGGING SYSTEMS AND CONTROLS
11 61 33 - 4
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
be any sharp comers accessible to personnel All moving parts shall have specified
tolerances. Sheaves shall run plumb and true and shall not scrape housings. All equipment
shall be built and installed to facilitate future maintenance and replacement.
E. Finishes: Paint shall be the manufacturer's standard finish and color except as noted. All
turnbuckles, clips, tracks, chains and other items of incidental hardware shall be furnished
plated or painted.
F. Recommended Working Load: this specification calls for minimum recommended working
loads for many hardware items. The manufacturer's recommended working load is the
maximum load which the manufacturer recommends be applied to properly installed,
maintained, and operated new equipment. Manufacturer's recommended working loads shall
be determined by calculations by a Licensed Professional Engineer and destructive testing by
an independent testing laboratory. These calculations and reports shall be available for
review.
PART 2
2.1
THEATRICAL RIGGING EQUIPMENT
GENERAL STANDARDS
A. Each hoist shall be fully tested under full rated load throughout its full travel distance with all
its liftlines terminated to the hoist before the hoist is shipped from the manufacturer. Testing
shall include:
1. Hoist operation
2. Hoist/motor speed
3. Liftline terminations under load
4. Braking and stopping under load
5. Load cell functions
6. Slack line detection
7. Position sensing
8. Hoist noise
B. Only hoists that successfully pass pre-shipment testing shall be sent to any job site. A record
of testing and its results shall be available for review at the manufacturers facility for at least
one year after testing.
C. Paint as required under this section shall be the manufacturer's standard finish and color
except as noted.
D. All equipment items shall be new and conform to applicable provisions of Underwriters'
Laboratories (UL), American Standards Association (ASA), American National Standards
Institute (ANSI), National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Life Safety Code 01, National
Electric Code (NEC) and PLASA.
1. Where acceptable equipment items are specified by catalog number only, device shall
meet all published manufacturer's specifications. Where quantities or sizes are not given,
refer to drawings. Where two or more products are listed, contractor may use either, at
his discretion. Equipment shall not be substituted without specific written approval by the
Architect under the substitution paragraphs of these specifications.
2. All pipe battens shall be fabricated from 1.5" Schedule 40 pipe.
3. All turnbuckles and cable clips shall be drop forged.
4. All turnbuckles and clips, tracks, chains and other items of incidental hardware shall be
furnished plated or painted. Wire rope shall be galvanized. Fasteners, chain, and other
miscellaneous hardware shall be either cadmium or zinc plated.
5. All materials used in this project shall be new, unused and of the latest design.
Refurbished materials are not permitted.
RIGGING SYSTEMS AND CONTROLS
11 61 33 - 5
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
6. In order to establish minimum standards of safety, a minimum factor of 8 shall be
required for all equipment and hardware used on this project. In addition, the following
factors shall be used:
a. Cables and fittings 10 Design Factor
b. Cable bending ratio 26 times diameter
c. Max. fleet angle
2 degrees
d. Steel
1/5 of yield
e. Bearings Two times required load at full for 2000 hours
2.2
STAGE HOISTS
A. General
1. Hoists shall be purpose-designed and fabricated for overhead lifting of theatre lights,
equipment, curtains and scenic elements, whether used on stage, in the auditorium or
other places of public assembly where people shall move beneath the suspended or
moving load. The systems shall incorporate mechanical, electrical and safety features
that shall be inherent to this equipment; they shall provide an engineered, efficient device
for overhead lifting. The mechanical, electrical and safety features of this hoisting and
control system shall establish the standard of quality, performance and safety by which
hoisting systems of other manufacture shall be evaluated.
2. Each wire rope liftline shall adhere to a design factor of 10:1 with an ultimate strength of
4200 pounds. All load path components between the building structure and the batten
shall exceed the breaking strength of the wire rope. The motor brake shall be rated at
least at 125% of the motor torque.
3. Standard configured hoists shall be capable of supporting a live load suspended from the
batten as follows:
a. General purpose Variable Speed 0-180 fpm, 1000 pound capacity in standard
configuration. Powerhead shall measure no more than 16” high x 16” w x 55 ¼” long
and weigh 495 pounds
b. General purpose 30 fpm 800 pound capacity in standard configuration. Powerhead
shall measure 16” high x 16” w x 47 1/2” long and weigh 395 pounds
c. General purpose 30 fpm 1300 pound capacity in standard configuration. Powerhead
shall measure 16” high x 16” w x 47 1/2” long and weigh 395 pounds
d. General purpose 30 fpm 1900 pound capacit in standard configuration. Powerhead
shall measure 16” high x 18” w x 53 1/2” long and weigh 580 pounds
e. Stage Electric 30 fpm 650 pound capacity in standard configuration. Powerhead shall
measure 16” high x 16” w x 47 1/2” long and weigh 395 pounds
f. Stage Electric 30 fpm 1000 pound capacity in standard configuration. Powerhead
shall measure 16” high x 16” w x 47 1/2” long and weigh 395 pounds
g. Stage Electric 30 fpm 1500 pound capacity in standard configuration. Powerhead
shall measure 16” high x 18” w x 53 1/2” long and weigh 580 pounds
4. The standard general purpose hoist shall consist of the following major components: 1)
Powerhead, 2) compression tube with beam clamps, loft blocks, liftline and liftline
terminations, Right Angle Cable Adjuster (RACA) and 3) pipe batten.
5. The standard stage electric hoist shall consist of the following major components: 1)
Powerhead, 2) Compression Tube with beam clamps, cable management system, loft
blocks, liftline and liftline terminations Right Angle Cable Adjuster (RACA), 3) pipe batten
and power/control distribution strip
6. The hoist shall include the following features:
h. A Powerhead containing the following elements: the gearmotor, motor brake, load
brake, limit switches operating electronics, load sensor, slack line detector, absolute
position sensors, cable drum assembly, and wire rope.
i. A Compression Tube that prevents hoist system lateral forces from transferring to the
building. Hoists or hoisting systems that impose a lateral load on the building shall
not be acceptable.
j. The hoist shall incorporate a built-in load cell.
k. The hoist shall incorporate a built-in slack line sensor.
l. The hoist shall include the emergency contactor built into the hoist.
RIGGING SYSTEMS AND CONTROLS
11 61 33 - 6
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
7. The hoist shall be manufactured from UL Listed components and shall be UL Listed and
tested as a complete system (not just UL listed parts).
B. POWERHEAD
1. The Powerhead shall be a fully enclosed, powder coated sheet metal housing that shall
prevent contact with moving and electrical parts and shall provide protection against dirt,
dust and debris.
2. For setup and maintenance, the following functions shall be available from the
Powerhead: power and operating switches, address setting knobs, limit switch setting
knobs, limit switch override button, indicators for power, status and communication. Each
of these functions shall be clearly labeled.
C. GEARMOTOR AND MOTOR BRAKE
1. The gearmotor and motor brake shall be an integral unit from a single manufacturer. It
shall operate on 208 Volt or 480 Volt 60 Hz, 3 phase current for fixed speed units and
480 Volt, 60 Hz, 3 phase current for variable speed hoists.
2.
The motor brake shall be integral to the gearmotor and shall be capable of holding
125% of the motor full load torque.
3. The motor brake shall be spring actuated to apply and hold braking force.
4. The motor brake shall be magnetically released and held open upon actuation.
D. LOAD BRAKE
1. Fixed Speed Hoists
a. The rotary disk load brake shall bring the moving load to a complete stop and shall
hold the load in position in the event of a mechanical failure of the motor, motor brake
or gearbox.
b. Noise from the load brake shall be minimally audible at any time in the operational
cycle.
c. Normal hoist operation shall not be limited by heat or noise caused by the load brake.
d. The load brake shall be mechanically released when the load is moving in the up
direction. The load brake shall be close when the hoist has stopped. The load brake
shall always be engaged when the load has stopped moving either up or down.
When lowering the load the load brake shall partially disengage to allow and control
descent of the batten. The load brake shall remain closed in the absence of rotational
torque on the gearbox.
E. WIRE ROPE DRUM.
1. Shall wrap up to eight 3/16” diameter 7 x 19 galvanized aircraft (utility) wire rope liftlines
up to 50’ long in a compact manner on the cable drum. They shall be managed by a wire
rope (cable) keeper integral to the Powerhead. The drum design shall prevent wire rope
from tangling or crossing over itself.
F. LIMIT SWITCH
1. A limit switch assembly shall be mounted within the Powerhead for hard “normal” and
“ultimate” end of travel limits. Hard end of travel limits shall be set/adjusted at the time of
installation aided by an indicator light visible on the bottom panel of the Powerhead
cover. Any system that indicates that the limit has been set by audible or tactile means
only shall not be acceptable.
G. LOAD SENSOR/LOAD PROFILING.
1. A load sensor shall be built into the Powerhead to create a profile of the actual load on
the hoist as it travels through its normal cycle. The profile may be changed by “retraining” the profiling system whenever the suspended load is changed on the batten by
activating a key-switch operated training cycle on the hoist controller. The load sensor
shall continuously monitor the load when load sensing is turned on.
H. POSITION SENSOR
RIGGING SYSTEMS AND CONTROLS
11 61 33 - 7
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
1.
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
A position sensing system shall be built into the Powerhead to provide accurate position
information. The system shall consist of two absolute sensor types that provide accurate
position information for each batten at power-up of the system. Hoisting systems that
require re-homing shall not be acceptable. Incremental encoders shall not be acceptable
for position readout purposes.
I.
SLACK LINE DETECTOR
1. The slack line detector shall be built into the Powerhead. When a slack line condition in
excess of 15” develops in a liftline, the slack line detector shall remove power from the
hoist. The batten shall be allowed to move only in the upward direction to allow removal
of the cause of the slack line fault.
J.
LOCAL USER INTERFACE AT POWERHEAD
1. User interface at the Powerhead control panel at the rear of the hoist shall include:
a. Hoist Up/Down Control
b. Limit Switch override buttons (tool accessible)
c. Address switches
d. Status LED’s
K. INFORMATION STORAGE WITHIN POWERHEAD
1. Record of severe fault conditions with date and time stamp
2. Record of E-stops, overloads, moves and power cycles
3. Record of travel distance and peak loads since installation/inspection
L. COMPRESSION TUBE AND BEAM CLAMPS
1. The Compression Tube shall be a continuous channel of extruded aluminum engineered
in conjunction with the beam clamps to neutralize rigging-generated lateral forces on the
building.
2. The Compression Tube shall support the system loft blocks.
3. Compression Tube sections shall be joined into a continuous assembly by a pair of
dedicated splicing plates at each tube joint.
4. The Compression Tube shall be installed only by means of dedicated beam clamps that
allow the Compression Tube to snap into place and to fractionally move horizontally
under load.
5. Beam clamps shall be capable of attaching to horizontal beams, joists, truss flanges or
flat steel plates measuring from 1/4” thick up to 1” thick and from 4” wide up to 14” wide
placed no more than 14’-0” apart. P650E, P800G, P1000E and P1300G Powerheads
may be mounted on ¼” thick x 4” wide or larger steel structures if deemed sufficient by a
structural engineer. P1500E, P1900G and V1000S hoists must be mounted on 3/8” x 6”
wide or larger steel if deemed sufficient by a structural engineer. Support structures must
be deemed sufficient by a structural engineer to support any forces imposed by the
hoisting systems. Beam clamps shall accommodate up to ½” vertical misalignment.
6. Hoist systems that do not neutralize hoist generated lateral forces on the building shall
not be accepted for this project.
M. LOFT BLOCKS
1. Each loft block shall be an assembly of steel side plates, a wire rope idler, sheave,
bearings, shaft locked against rotation and support hardware. Each loft block shall be
inserted into the slot on the bottom of the Compression Tube. The blocks shall be
positioned no closer than 4’-0” from each other, unless muled.
2. Loft block sheaves shall measure 5” in diameter and contain a pair of press fit sealed ball
bearings. Liftlines shall travel in a groove shaped and sized for 3/16” diameter wire rope
per the latest edition of the Wire Rope Users’ Manual as published by the Wire Rope
Technical Board. The loft block sheave shall be concentric about the hub and shall be
evenly balanced for ease of rotation.
3. An idler shall be incorporated into the top assembly of the loft block to guide and support
liftlines as they pass the block.
RIGGING SYSTEMS AND CONTROLS
11 61 33 - 8
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
4. Hoisting systems requiring the loft blocks to be mounted directly to the facility structure
shall not be accepted for this project.
N. LIFTLINE TERMINATIONS
1. Each liftline shall be terminated in the Powerhead via a standard copper oval
compression sleeve installed/crimped at the factory.
2. Liftlines shall be terminated at the load hanger with a low profile Right Angle Cable
Adjuster (RACA)™, thimble and copper oval compression sleeve. The RACA and cable
terminations at the batten shall be installed at the time of hoist installation.
3. Batten trim shall be adjustable up to 6” via the RACA.
4. Systems utilizing turnbuckles or chain to trim the batten shall not be accepted for this
installation.
O. HANGERS
1. Raceway hangers shall be specially shaped flat bar that shall support the wire rope
termination hardware and secure the raceway and the pipe batten.
P. CABLE MANAGEMENT FOR ELECTRICS
1. PRODIGY CABLE MANAGEMENT for ELECTRICS.
a. The load circuits and control wiring shall be fed to the distribution trough by a built-in
cable management system that allows flat feeder cable to fold and store along the
top of the connector strip.
b. At high trim, the entire system shall be stored in 30” of vertical space from the bottom
of the mounting steel to the horizontal centerline of the batten. Cable management
systems requiring greater vertical storage space shall not be acceptable for this
project.
c. The cable management system shall be integral to the hoist system.
d. The cable management system shall be UL LISTED.
e. The flat cable shall meet the physical as well as thermal requirements of UL for 20
amp loads. Up to four flat cables may be fed from each end of the distribution
system to provide power for 24 circuits from each end of the system for a maximum
of 48 circuits total.
f. Each flat cable shall include one ground wire and one data cable plus an individually
insulated hot and an individually insulated neutral conductor for each of six 120 Volt
20 Amp circuits.
g. The connector strip shall be built to the length specified with outlets or pigtails located
as specified or as shown on the construction drawings. Outlets or plugs shall be 15
amp grounded pin connectors, 15 amp twistlock connectors, or 15 amp Edison plugs.
The distro trough may also contain connectors for Ethernet and/or DMX connections.
h. Flat cable shall pass through a strain relief before entering a termination box at the
designated end of the raceway. Within the raceway all wiring shall be attached at the
factory to a terminal block. The flat cable, internal wiring and all components shall
meet UL requirements and appropriate National Electrical Codes (NEC).
i. Cable management systems that utilize cable cradles, cable reels or locate feeder or
data cables outside the off stage edges of the electrics batten shall not be acceptable
for this project.
j. Hoisting systems utilizing cable management systems from third-party vendors shall
be fully integrated into the hoisting system without additional structural changes or
changes to the QuickTouch controller. Electrics lineset hoisting systems that do not
fully integrate cable management in the hoisting system and controller shall not be
acceptable for this installation. Cable management systems that are not UL LISTED
shall not be accepted for this installation.
2. PANTOGRAPH CABLE MANAGEMENT FOR ELECTRICS
k. The load circuits and data wiring shall be fed to the distribution trough by one or more
UL Listed Pantograph cable management systems that are specifically designed to
interface with traditional stage distribution raceways. The pantograph shall allow the
cable trays, feeder cable and data wiring to fold and store along the top of the
connector strip without imposing a direct physical load on the connector strip.
RIGGING SYSTEMS AND CONTROLS
11 61 33 - 9
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
l.
The pantograph shall consist of a series of 18 ga. ventilated steel trays hinged to
each other to allow the entire distance of travel required by the batten, up to 50’. The
hinges and hinge attachment points shall be stiffened to prevent distortion of the
pantograph.
m. The trays shall be connected to a moving trolley at the compression tube that allows
relief as the system moves slightly from side to side during ascent/descent of the
batten. At the bottom, the pantograph shall be attached to a hinge point above the
houselight or distribution trough in a manner that imposes no additional physical load
on those assemblies. The flat cable in the trays shall exit the pantograph and enter a
termination box on the distro strip where all electrical connections shall be made.
n. The flat cable shall be UL LISTED.
o. The pantograph shall support a double-high/double wide stack of flat cable and shall
allow the flat cable to bend at each joint within required NEC bending radii.
p. The trays shall hinge open/closed as the batten is lowered/raised and shall not
impede the movement of the lineset
q. The trays shall be sufficiently stiff to support themselves and the flat cable they carry.
At no time shall the trays bow, warp, sag or twist whether or not under load of the flat
cable.
r. Flat cable in the pantograph tray shall never heat in excess of the rated temperature
maximum of the flat cable when all circuits within the tray are loaded at maximum
electrical capacity.
s. It shall be possible to provide power for up to sixteen 20 amp circuits plus ground and
data via each pantograph.
t. These cable management systems shall interface with the circuit distribution trough
with standard mechanical and electrical hardware purpose designed for this
assembly.
u. Hoisting systems utilizing cable management systems from third-party vendors shall
be fully integrated into the hoisting system without additional custom hardware,
changes to any part of the pantograph or changes to the QuickTouch controller.
v. Hoisting systems that do not fully integrate cable management in the hoisting system
and controller shall not be acceptable for this installation.
3. TRADITIONAL CABLE MANAGEMENT FOR ELECTRICS
w. Traditional cable management is not approved for this project.
Q. PIPE BATTEN
1. The pipe batten shall be 1½” schedule 40 grade A, seamless pipe fabricated in the
largest possible lengths without splices. Battens of greater length shall be spliced by
means of .120 x 1 9/16 dia DOM tube 18” long with 9” of tube inserted into each half of
the splice. The tight fitting splice tube shall be held in place by a pair of 3/8 x 2 ½” grade
5 hex bolts on each side of the joint. The bolts shall pass through the pipe at an angle of
90° to each other. There shall be two bolts on each side of the joint spaced 1” and 8”
from the joint. Alternatively, one pair of bolts on one side of the joint may be replaced with
either plug welds or tight fitting steel rivets. Pipes shall be straight and painted flat black.
2. A safety-yellow batten cap shall be installed at each end of each pipe batten.
3. The manufacturer shall provide up to four self-adhesive labels for each batten on which
the rated batten load shall be written by the installer.
R. POWER AND CONTROL DISTRIBUTION (PCD)
1. Each hoist shall receive power and control via a pair of 8’-0” long jumper cables
extending from the Powerhead to the source outlets. Receptacles shall be installed in a
sheet metal junction box or trough with outlets. Each outlet shall be located no more than
6’-0” away from the rear face of each hoist.
2. Each Powerhead shall include a power cord hardwired to the hoist with a an
appropriately sized twistlock connector at the PCD end and a removable control cable
with a circular 9 pin connector at each end. Inclusion of a 20 amp 3 phase breaker in the
PCD is optional. The wiring and connectors shall be barriered between high and low
voltage.
3. The power/distribution channel shall be UL LISTED for this application.
RIGGING SYSTEMS AND CONTROLS
11 61 33 - 10
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
2.3
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
QUICKTOUCH FIXED SPEED CONTROL SYSTEM
A. GENERAL
1. The entire hoisting system shall be operated by a QuickTouch fixed speed controller. It
shall be purpose-designed and fabricated to manage and operate hoists specifically
designed for overhead lifting. Each system shall incorporate mechanical, electrical and
safety features that shall be inherent to this equipment and shall provide an engineered,
efficient device to control the equipment. The mechanical, electrical and safety features
of this control system shall establish the standard of quality, performance and safety by
which hoisting systems of other manufacture shall be evaluated.
2. The Quicktouch Control System shall consist of a surface, flush or rack mounted primary
control panel and up to three remote E-stop stations.
3. The hoisting system shall also include one Quicktouch Fixed Speed Remote control
device with 30’ of flexible cable that may be attached to the system at the QuickTouch
control panel.
4. The controller shall include the following features:
a. Key operated power switch
b. LCD display for feedback/operating information
c. Key operated hoist load profile training/enable switch
d. Latching hoist selection buttons with rear illuminated naming tabs
e. Rear illuminated hold-to-operate (deadman) up and down operation buttons
f. Dedicated E-stop button
g. Outlet for wired remote
h. Optional door
i. Optional rack mount kit
5. The control system shall only employ the QuickTouch controller, a power and control
distribution infrastructure and the hoists. A System that requires separate drive cabinets
or motor-starters shall not be acceptable.
6. The controller shall be UL LISTED and shall be fabricated from UL LISTED components.
B. ENCLOSURE
1. The back box and face panel shall be fabricated from 16ga powder coated sheet steel
specially formed to provide support for installation as well as support for all components
installed within the housing.
2. The Quicktouch face panel shall be printed with complete labeling information to identify
the function of each of the buttons in the control station.
3. The face panel shall identify the system as a Quicktouch controller for stage rigging.
4. The face panel shall be shades of grey. The ring surrounding the E-stop button shall be
safety yellow and shall be rear illuminated
5. The steel panel to which all switches are mounted shall be removable via screws in the
surface located underneath the face panel film.
C. LCD SCREEN
1. The liquid crystal display shall be purpose designed to communicate all information in
human readable text.
2. The screen shall be rear illuminated and shall be dimmable.
3. During system start up the screen shall show the progress of the hoists diagnostics self
tests. Upon completion of the startup sequence the screen shall indicate that the system
is “OK” or shall provide specific information should a fault be detected. Fault conditions
shall be reported in human readable text. Systems that report fault conditions in a series
of blinking lights shall not be acceptable for this installation.
4. When a hoist is selected the LCD screen shall readout the hoist name or number, its
current position above the floor, the amount of weight suspended from the batten, the
preset position that is recorded, as well as a bar graph scale that shows the current
position of the hoist, top and bottom limits and the current weight suspended from the
hoist.
D. HOIST SELECTION/OPERATION BUTTONS
RIGGING SYSTEMS AND CONTROLS
11 61 33 - 11
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
1. There shall be rear illuminated hoist selection buttons. Buttons shall remain illuminated
until de-selected.
2. Up to four hoists may be selected to move at one time. When the up or down button is
pushed and held, each hoist shall move to its next stop location. If the stop location is the
adjustable preset, the hoist can be made to continue to travel in the selected direction by
releasing and re-pressing the up or down hold-to-operate button until the next stop for the
hoist(s) is reached.
3. A maximum of four hoists may move at one time and only in one direction at a time.
4. Although four hoists moving at one time is the factory default, it shall be possible to
increase to eight or reduce to one the quantity of simultaneously moving hoists.
5. As a backup, there shall be dedicated hardware to detect and disable the system when
the user attempts to move more than the configured maximum quantity of hoists.
6. All buttons shall fit neatly within each of the cover panel cutouts on the controller.
E. KEY SWITCHES
1. A key switch shall control power to the control system. The key must be in the lock and
the key turned to the on position for the hoisting system to operate.
2. A separate key is required to turn on the load profiling system. That key must be in the
lock and turned to the “ON” position for load profiling to function.
3. When load profiling is turned on the hoist shall know the amount of weight that is
supposed to be supported by the batten at any location in the path of travel. Should the
weight exceed or be reduced below the profiled weight by a preset value, the hoist shall
stop operation until the fault is cleared.
F. SLACK LINE DETECTOR
1. The slack line detector is located in the Powerhead. When a slack line condition occurs, it
shall cease hoist movement and result in a fault message on the LCD screen on the
controller. Movement in the upward direction shall be possible to clear the fault.
G. E-STOP
1. The E-stop button on the Quicktouch controller shall be a mushroom button with a rear
illuminated ring surrounding the button. During normal operation the E-stop button shall
be in the out position. An E-stop can be activated via this button by firmly pressing the
button in. The button shall latch and immediately cause a class zero stop of all hoists in
the system. The LCD screen shall report this as an E-stop fault. To continue system
operation the E-stop button must be cleared by twisting the button to release the latch.
Power to the control station must be cycled off/on to re-initiate the system. This action
shall also initiate a self-test of the entire control system and contactors.
2. The illuminated ring around each E-stop button shall be dimmable. The status of the
lighted ring shall provide additional information about the state of the system as follows:
a. Ring at low intensity: no hoist moving
b. Ring at high intensity: hoist(s) moving
c. Ring blinking: system in E-stop condition
3. Up to three remote E-stop stations may be connected to the system. Each additional Estop station shall operate in the same way as the primary E-stop at the Quicktouch
control panel.
H. SYSTEM DIAGNOSTICS
1. Upon energization the control system shall perform an automatic series of diagnostic
tests that assure that all system safety functions are working. Should an error in the
safety functions be determined, the controller shall report back a fault condition in the
LCD display window and shall identify the nature of the fault.
2. Monthly, the system automatically shall perform an additional series of diagnostic tests to
determine if there are any problems with any portion of the hoist control system safety
features. In the event of a problem, the controller shall report back a fault condition in the
LCD display window and shall identify the nature of the fault.
3. Eleven months after a system inspection has been performed, the system shall remind
the user to schedule full system maintenance/inspection. The reminder shall remain in
RIGGING SYSTEMS AND CONTROLS
11 61 33 - 12
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
the system with a count-down calendar until it is turned off by the factory authorized and
trained inspector.
4. The installing contractor shall be able to leave contact information within the system.
This information shall be displayed at power up and in the event of severe fault
conditions.
2.4
I.
REMOTE CONTROL PENDANT
1. An optional remote control pendant with 30’ long attached cable and plug shall be
provided for the system. The remote control must be plugged to the Quicktouch control
panel. When the remote control is plugged in the E-stop on the remote is active.
Systems requiring “shunt plugs” to bypass an unplugged remote control connector shall
not be acceptable.
2. The remote control provides up/down control for those hoists that have been preselected
at the QuickTouch controller.
J.
SYSTEM COMMISSIONING
1. It shall be possible to commission basic functionality of the system without a laptop
computer or additional software.
2. A trained installer shall commission the full system via a laptop computer connected via
the built-in USB port in the controller. USB connectivity shall not require special USB
drivers.
3. Commissioning software shall feature an inspection report generator that allows a step by
step inspection of the control system. Upon completion, the system shall generate an
inspection report in PDF format.
FRONT OF HOUSE HOIST & CONTROL SYSTEM
A. Front of house hoists shall be fixed speed.
B. Front of house hoist controls shall be push button operated from a stage panel with key
lockout.
C. Chain hoists shall be C1 hoists with 2 independent brakes, 4 channel gear limit switches,
incremental encoders, and load cells.
D. Chain hoists capacities shall include a 10:1 safety factor and be rated for movement over
people.
E. Front of house hoists and electrical distribution shall be mounted to 20.5inch x 20.5inch
triangular truss powder coated white.
1. Truss shall have architectural panels mounted on side facing audience
2. Truss shall be customized as required to locate rigging hoists and components within
truss as shown on drawings and to hide rigging components from view of audience.
F. Additional approved front of house hoists
1. Self climber hoist as manufactured by J.R. Clancy or PDO.
G. Accessories
1. Provide ten (10) chain or cable runners per FOH Truss for electrical and signal cable
management.
2.5
CHANDELIER HOIST
A. Manufacturers
RIGGING SYSTEMS AND CONTROLS
11 61 33 - 13
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
1. Due to the highly specialized nature of theatrical rigging equipment, and the safety
requirements of the equipment, all drum hoists must be built by the following approved
manufacturer:
a. J.R. Clancy, Inc
Phone: 1-800-836-1885
B. Drum Hoist
1. General: Each hoist unit shall have the capacity to raise and lower the specified load at
the specified speed
2. Characteristics: The hoist shall have the following characteristics:
a. Speed
20 fpm
b. Lifting Capacity:
700 Lbs
c. Travel:
30 ft
d. # of Lift Lines
1
e. Lift Line Diameter ¼”
3. Construction
a. All hoists shall be supported by a sturdy steel base, holding the elements of the hoist
in proper alignment.
b. A helical drum shall be directly connected to the output of the integrated motor –
brake – gear reducer unit. The outboard end of the drum shall be supported by a self
aligning flange bearing.
C. Control Stations
1. Control stations shall be wall mounted NEMA 1 enclosures, containing hold-to-run Up
and Down pushbuttons for each hoist. A key operated On / Off switch with green LED
indicating "Power On" shall be provided.
2. A red, mushroom head emergency stop pushbutton shall be provided, which will
disconnect power to the hoist through a circuit meeting NFPA-79 (Electrical Standards for
Industrial Machinery) requirements.
3. A "Service" indicator shall be provided to alert the user when regular system service is
required.
4. Panel components including pushbuttons, key switches, switches, E-stop switches, and
the like shall be industrial grade, heavy-duty components with 7/8" (22 mm) operators.
Indicators shall be 5/16" (8 mm) minimum diameter.
5. Panel components shall be Telemecanique / Square D ZB series or Allen Bradley Bulletin
800MR.
2.6
PROJECTION SCREEN
A. Projection screen, 18’(H) x 24’(W), electrically operated 120 volt A.C. (60 Hz). Screen will
have not more than 2.4 amp. motor. Shall have specially designed motor mounted inside the
roller, to be three wire with ground, quick reversal type, oiled for life, with automatic thermal
overload cutout, integral gears, capacitor and an electric brake to prevent coasting. To have
preset but adjustable limit switches to automatically stop screen fabric in the “up” and “down“
positions. Rigid metal roller, to be at least 3" in diameter (on screens 12' wide), 5-3⁄4" in
diameter (on screens 14' to 18' wide) or 7" in diameter (on screens where either height or
width equal or exceed 20'). Roller to be mounted in one heavy duty bracket equipped with
self-aligning bearing. Motor to be secured to the case with a steel motor mount bracket.
Screen surface to be flame retardant and mildew resistant fiberglass with black masking
borders standard. Case to be of wood, with double top for extra rigidity and strength. Case to
be finished with a black primer coat, ready to accept final finish by others, heavy metal
brackets shall be supplied for mounting screen to ceiling or wall. To be complete with 3
position control switch with cover plate. Screen to be listed by Underwriter's Laboratories.
B. Fabric to be Matt White with Black borders
1. Format of white portion to be 16:9
2. Seams permissible on black portion of screen only
C. Screen shall be Da-Lite Professional Electrol or approved equal.
RIGGING SYSTEMS AND CONTROLS
11 61 33 - 14
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
2.7
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
DEAD HUNG RIGGING
A. Components
1. Pipe Batten
a. The pipe batten shall be 1½” schedule 40 grade A, seamless pipe fabricated in the
largest possible lengths without splices. Battens of greater length shall be spliced by
means of .120 x 1 9/16 dia DOM tube 18” long with 9” of tube inserted into each half
of the splice. The tight fitting splice tube shall be held in place by a pair of 3/8 x 2 ½”
grade 5 hex bolts on each side of the joint. The bolts shall pass through the pipe at
an angle of 90° to each other. There shall be two bolts on each side of the joint
spaced 1” and 8” from the joint. Alternatively, one pair of bolts on one side of the joint
may be replaced with either plug welds or tight fitting steel rivets. Pipes shall be
straight and painted flat black.
2. Wire Rope Clips: Whenever possible, avoid the use of wire rope clips. When needed,
use forged wire rope clips from a domestic manufacturer appropriately sized for the cable
with which they are used. Follow the manufacturers recommendations for proper
installation.
3. Compression Sleeves: Size compression sleeves appropriately for the cable with which
they are used. Use copper sleeves only. Follow the manufacturers recommendations for
proper installation.
4. Eyebolts: Size eyebolts properly for the application. Use only load-rated, forged steel
shouldered eyebolts.
5. Shackles: Size shackles appropriately for the intended application. All shackles should
be load-rated screw pin anchor type. Mouse all shackle pins with cable ties.
6. Thimbles - Wire Rope: Use only heavy duty, tear-shaped, galvanized wire rope thimbles
appropriately sized for the cable with which they are used.
7. Thimbles - Fiber Rope: Size thimbles appropriately for the rope with which they are used.
a. Protect rope from thimble rotating, opening, and cutting into rope.
8. Turnbuckles: Size turnbuckles appropriately for the cable with which they are used.
Whenever possible terminate cables with a thimble directly into turnbuckle eyes.
Otherwise use jaw turnbuckles with safety bolt and clevis pin. Safety mouse all
turnbuckles.
9. Signage:
a. Signage shall be legible both in construction and grammar.
b. Do not use self adhesive labels for any signage. Provide only signage and labels
that comply with the following techniques:
(1) Lamacoid engraved signage.
(2) Silk-screened or similar fabrication techniques after approval of sample.
(3) Professionally stenciled paint; fully opaque.
c. Provide an engraved black lamacoid plaque, with white minimum 3/8” high characters
at the stage and both loading gallery elevations.
(1) List on the plaque the standard size of counterweight provided and their
respective weights.
(2) Engrave a warning on the plaque cautioning against unauthorized and
untrained personnel operating the rigging system.
(3) Provide contact information for the equipment manufacturer, installer, and the
date of installation.
PART 3
3.1
INSTALLATION
GENERAL
A. Installation of this equipment shall only be performed by factory approved and factory trained
theatrical rigging installers. Installation shall be performed in a workmanlike manner and
shall strictly adhere to the standards of these specifications and factory’s installation
requirements. Where necessary, the installer may make adjustments to accommodate
RIGGING SYSTEMS AND CONTROLS
11 61 33 - 15
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
unforeseen impediments to installation. The completed work must achieve all electrical,
safety and appearance requirements as established in these specifications.
B. Work shall be performed in accordance with OSHA and local codes.
C. On site welding shall only be performed per AWS D1.1 standards and with advanced
approval from the architect or Owner’s representative.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A. The Rigging Contractor shall be responsible for storage of stage equipment, tools, and
equipment during the period of the installation.
B. Extent: All specified equipment shall be installed by fully trained personnel. Equipment shall
be installed per plans and specifications. Equipment shall be aligned, adjusted, and trimmed
for the most efficient operation, the greatest safety and for the best visual appearance.
C. Standards: Installation practices shall be in accordance with OSHA Safety and Health
Standards and all local codes. All welding must be performed in full compliance with the
latest edition of the Structural Welding Code (ANSI/AWS D1.1).
D. Alignment: Mule blocks, cable rollers and guides shall be installed, as required, to provide
proper alignment, to maintain specified fleet angles, and to prevent contact with other
surfaces.
E. Attachments: All equipment shall be securely attached to the building structure. Rigging
blocks shall be bolted and not welded in place.
F. Finishes:
1. All welds must be touched up to match disturbed finishes.
2. All finishes which are disturbed during shipping and installation shall be touched up to
match the original.
3.3
CLEAN UP
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for clean up, including removal of packing materials etc.
and the protection of surfaces or equipment provided by other contractors.
3.4
INSPECTION AND TESTING
A. Inspection: During the installation of equipment the Rigging Contractor shall arrange for
access as necessary for inspection of equipment by the Owner’s representatives.
B. Special Testing: If specifications, the Architect’s instructions, laws, ordinances, or any public
authority require any work to be specially tested or approved, the Rigging Contractor shall
give the Architect timely notice of its readiness for inspection, and of dates of inspections to
be made by other authorities.
C. Completion Testing: Upon completing the installation of all equipment specified under this
section, the Contractor shall notify the Architect, who will schedule an inspection. At the time
of inspection, the Rigging Contractor shall furnish sufficient workers to operate all equipment
and to perform such adjustments and tests as may be required by the Owner’s
representative. Any equipment, which fails to meet with approval, shall be repaired or
replaced with suitable equipment and the inspection shall be re-scheduled under the same
conditions as previously specified. At the time of these inspections, no other work shall be
performed in the auditorium and stage areas. All temporary bracing, scaffolding, etc. shall be
removed to permit full operation of, and access to, all equipment. Final approval will be
RIGGING SYSTEMS AND CONTROLS
11 61 33 - 16
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
withheld until all systems have been thoroughly tested and found to be in first class operating
condition.
3.5
DEMONSTRATION
A. Demonstrate the system to prove compliance with requirements.
B. Direct Training: Arrange and Pay for the services of a factory-authorized service
representative to demonstrate lighting control and motorized winch batten systems and train
owner's personnel. Conduct a minimum of Sixteen (16) hours of training over two (2) days in
Operation and Maintenance as specified under "Instructions to Owners Employees" in
Division I Section "Project Closeout". Training is to include systems operation and
maintenance procedures.
C. Schedule training with at least (14) days advance notice.
RIGGING SYSTEMS AND CONTROLS
11 61 33 - 17
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
SECTION 116143 - STAGE CURTAINS AND TRACKS
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2
SCOPE OF WORK
A. Intent: This specification covers the fabrication, furnishing, delivery, and installation of the
theatrical rigging equipment.
B. Complete System: The Rigging Systems Contractor shall provide all items necessary for a
complete, safe, fully functional system as describes herein, including all tools, scaffolding,
labor and supervision, even though they may not be specifically enumerated. Any errors,
omissions or ambiguities do not relieve the Contractor of this responsibility, but shall be
brought to the attention of the Architect for clarification.
C. Work Included: The work of this section shall include, but not necessarily be limited to the
following:
1. Stage Curtains
2. Acoustical Curtains
3. Curtain Tracks
4. Manual and Motorized Curtain Controls
5. Supplemental steel as required to properly support track installation as indicated on
project drawings
D. Related Work: Related work which is not included in this section:
1. Galleries, Ladders and Catwalks
2. Stage Flooring
3. Electrical Connections, Service, Conduit, Boxes and Wiring of any type
4. Stage Dimming Systems
5. Theatrical Circuit Distribution
6. Motorized and Dead Hung Stage Rigging including battens for tracks
1.3
RELATED SECTIONS
A. 116100 – Theatre and Stage Equipment
1.4
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Delegated Design:
indicated.
Design rigging using performance requirements and design criteria
B. Structural Performance: Rigging shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following
loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:
1. Design Loads: Weight of curtains, tracks, and weight of support components.
C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide stage curtains with the fire-test-response
characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method
indicated below by UL or a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
1. Flame-Resistance Ratings: Passes NFPA 701.
STAGE CURTAINS AND TRACKS
11 61 43 - 1
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
a. Permanently attach label to each fabric of curtain assembly in a location accessible
from the floor, indicating whether fabric is inherently and permanently flame resistant
or treated with flame-retardant chemicals, and whether it requires retreatment after
designated time period or cleaning.
b. Permanently attach a 1-square foot piece of fabric from the same dye lot to the back
of the curtain to be used as an FR test strip.
D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
1.5
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. For draw-curtain machines, include rated
capacities, operating characteristics, and electrical characteristics.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for stage curtains. Include plans,
elevations, sections, details, attachments to other work, and the following:
1. Operating clearances.
2. Requirements for supporting curtains, track, and equipment. Verify capacity of each
track and rigging component to support loads.
3. Locations of equipment components, switches, and controls. Differentiate between
manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
4. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of stage curtain indicated. Include color charts
showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available, together with a 12 squareinch Sample of each specified color and type of fabric as indicated on curtain schedules.
1.6
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product Certificates: For the following, from manufacturer:
1. Fabric: Provide name of flame-retardant chemical used, identification of applicator,
treatment method, application date, allowable life span for treatment, and details of any
restrictions and limitations.
2. Rigging: Compliance of suspended battens and tracks with requirements.
B. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.
1.7
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For stage curtains and rigging to include in operation and
maintenance manuals.
1.8
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. In order to be considered a Stage Rigging Contractor for this project the Contractor shall
meet or exceed the minimum qualification criteria:
1. Have completed (5) projects of similar size and scope within the last (5) years
2. Employ factory authorized technicians as applicable for the installation of the work of this
contract
3. Shall employ only fully trained stage riggers and mechanics, for the erection of the stage
equipment. The stage riggers shall be completely familiar with the type of equipment to
be installed. A competent job superintendent shall be on the job at all times when work is
STAGE CURTAINS AND TRACKS
11 61 43 - 2
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
in progress. The job superintendent must be ETCP certified in theatre rigging. A copy of
the certification must be furnished to the General Contractor prior to the start of the
installation.
1.9
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings and construction contiguous with
stage curtains and rigging by field measurements before fabrication.
1.10
WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace components of rigging equipment that fail in materials or workmanship within
specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, faulty installation of rigging equipment.
2. Warranty Period: Three 3 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2
2.1
PRODUCTS
CURTAIN FABRICS
A. General: Provide fabrics inherently and permanently flame resistant. Provide fabrics of each
type and color from same dye lot.
B. Medium weight Polyester Velour Legs, Borders, and Panels: Napped fabric of 100 percent
polyester weighing not less than 20 oz./linear yd., with pile height approximately 75 mils;
inherently and permanently flame resistant; minimum of 54-inch minimum width.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
a. KM Fabrics, Inc.; Crescent 20 oz.
2. Color: Black.
C. Heavyweight Polyester Velour Acoustical Panels: Napped fabric of 100 percent polyester
weighing not less than 32 oz./linear yd., with pile height approximately 75 mils; inherently and
permanently flame resistant; 54-inch minimum width.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
a. RoseBrand.; Royale 32 oz.
2. Color: Black.
D. Lining: None .
E. Polyester Cyc: 100 percent polyester yarn woven fabric weighing not less than 13 oz./linear
yd.; inherently and permanently or durably flame resistant; 72-inch minimum width.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following.
a. Gerriets International
b. Dazian LLC; Poly Muslin.
2. Color: White
F. Sharkstooth Scrim: Open-weave, seamless, lightweight gauze fabric.
1. Fabric: 100 percent polyester weighing not less than 37 oz./linear yd.; inherently and
permanently flame resistant; 35-foot minimum width.
2. Color: Black.
2.2
CURTAIN FABRICATION
A. General: Affix permanent label, stating compliance with requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction, in accessible location on curtain not visible to audience. Provide vertical seams
STAGE CURTAINS AND TRACKS
11 61 43 - 3
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
unless otherwise indicated. Arrange vertical seams so they do not fall on faces of pleats. Do
not use fabric cuts less than one-half width.
1. Vertical Hems: Provide vertical hems not less than 2 inches wide, and not less than 4
inches wide at borders, valance, teasers, and tormentors, with not less than a 1-inch
tuck, and machine sew , trim all selvage, serge and overcast all seams. Sew open ends
of hems closed.
a. Provide minimum 2” wide Velcro on vertical hems of 32oz acoustical panels
2. Leading and Trailing Edge Turnbacks: Provide turnbacks formed by folding back not less
than 12 inches of face fabric, with not less than a 1-inch tuck.
3. Top Hems: Reinforce top hems by double-stitching 3-1/2-inch- wide, inherently flame
retardant synthetic webbing to top edge on back side of curtain with not less than 2
inches of face fabric turned under.
4. Flat: Provide zero percent fullness in curtains.
5. Pleats: Provide 50 percent fullness in curtains, exclusive of turnbacks and hems, by
grommetting, not sewed. Six inches of material shall be gathered into a pleat every 12
inches and secured with a 2 1/8” S-hook or a tie line, whichever is appropriate, to make a
round pleat.
6. Grommets: Brass, No. 3 or No. 4.
a. Black Curtains: Provide brass or aluminum grommets with black finish.
b. Flat Curtains: Place 12 inches o.c. and 1 inch from corner of curtain; for ties, snap
hooks, or S-hooks.
c. Pleated Curtains: with two grommets spaced 6” apart every 12” and 1 inch from
corner of curtain; for snap hooks or S-hooks.
7. Bottom Hems: For flat curtains without fullness.
a. Provide a 4-inch lined hem with a pocket that allows the sliding of a pipe or conduit
stiffener into the bottom of the curtain
8. Bottom Hems: For curtains with fullness.
a. For curtains that do not hang to the floor, provide hems not less than 3 inches deep.
Sew open ends of hems closed.
b. For floor-length curtains, provide hems not less than 6 inches deep with
manufacturer's standard series of individual weights in individual closed pockets
sewn above the finished bottom edge of curtain. Sew open ends of hems closed.
9. Velour Curtains: Fabricate with the fabric nap down.
B. Scrim: Fabricate from scrim curtain fabric, sewn flat. Provide a continuous 6-inch pipe
pocket at bottom with a 6-inch flap of same fabric in front of pocket. Provide double-stitched,
3-1/2-inch inherently flame retardant synthetic webbing at top with not less than No. 2 brass
grommets spaced at 12 inches o.c. and 1 inch from corner of curtain. Provide not less than a
2-inch side hem and a 4-inch bottom hem.
C. S-Hooks: Track Manufacturer's standard heavy-duty plated-wire hooks, not less than 2
inches long.
D. Tie Lines: No. 4 or No. 4-1/2 cord or braided soft cotton tape, black or white to best match
curtain; not less than 5/8 inch wide by 36 inches long, threaded through grommets.
2.3
STEEL-CURTAIN TRACK
A. Steel Track: Fabricate of roll-formed, galvanized, commercial-quality, zinc-coated steel
sheet; complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M; G60 coating designation with continuous bottom
slot and with each half of track in one continuous piece.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following.
a. Automatic Devices Company; Besteel 170 series, Silent Steel 280 series.
b. H & H Specialties Inc.; 200 series, 400 series.
c. Hall Stage equivalent
2. Thickness: 0.064 inch / 0.079 inch.
STAGE CURTAINS AND TRACKS
11 61 43 - 4
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
B. Suspended Track: NPS 1-1/2 steel pipe stiffener for supporting both sections of suspended
curved tracks.
C. Clamp and Bracket Hangers: Manufacturer's steel clamps and brackets of sufficient strength
required to support loads for attaching track to overhead support.
D. Track Lap Clamp:
center overlap.
Metal to match track channel for attaching double-sectioned track at
E. Fold Guide: Equip carriers with rear-fold or backpack guide and rubber spacers to permit
offstage curtain folding; sized for use with operating line if any.
F. Heavy-Duty Track System: Equip track with heavy-duty components. Provide end stops for
track.
1. Curtain Carriers: Standard carriers of molded nylon with a pair of neoprene-tired ballbearing wheels riveted parallel to body. Equip carriers with rubber or neoprene bumpers
to reduce noise, and heavy-duty, plated-steel swivel eye and manufacturer's standard
trim chain for attaching curtain snap or S-hook. Provide quantity of curtain carriers
sufficient for track length, to suit curtain fabrication.
a. Master Curtain Carriers: One master carrier, for each leading curtain edge, of plated
steel with two pairs of neoprene-tired ball-bearing wheels and with two line guides
per carrier.
2. End Pulleys and Floor Block: One dead-end, single-wheel pulley; one live-end, doublewheel pulley; and one adjustable, floor block; each with not less than 5-inch moldednylon- or glass-filled-nylon-tired ball-bearing sheaves enclosed in steel housings.
Provide pulleys with steel housing finished to match track and with bracket for securing
off-stage curtain end. Provide an adjustable floor block to maintain proper tension on
operating line with steel housing painted black.
3. Provide Heavy Duty Tracks for mid stage and stage rear traveler curtains.
G. Medium-Duty Track System: Provide end stops for track.
1. Curtain Carriers: Standard carriers of plated steel with a pair of neoprene wheels riveted
parallel to body. Equip carriers with plated-steel swivel eye for attaching curtain snap or
S-hook. Provide quantity of curtain carriers sufficient for track length, to suit curtain
fabrication.
a. Master Curtain Carriers: One master carrier, for each leading curtain edge, of plated
steel with two pairs of neoprene wheels and with two line clamps per carrier.
2. End Pulleys and Floor Block: One dead-end, single-wheel pulley; one live-end, doublewheel pulley; and one adjustable, floor block containing not less than 3-inch guarded ballbearing sheaves enclosed in steel housings. Provide pulleys with steel housing finished
to match track and with bracket for securing off stage curtain end. Provide an adjustable
floor block to maintain proper tension on operating line with steel housing painted black.
3. Provide Medium Duty Tracks for leg and screen masking curtains.
a. Leg curtains shall be walkalong and contain walkalong carriers
b. Masking curtains shall be cord operated
H. Manual Operation: Provide with cord operating line consisting of manufacturer's standard
3/8-inch diameter, stretch-resistant operating cord consisting of braided synthetic-fiber jacket
over solid, synthetic-fiber, linear filaments.
1. Walkalong curtains shall be provided with black pull cords attached to each side of
curtain
I.
Motorized Operation: Provide with cable operating line consisting of manufacturer's standard
3/16-inch diameter, stretch-resistant operating cable consisting of braided synthetic-fiber
jacket over galvanized wire cable.
1. Front, Mid, and Rear Traveler A curtains shall be motorized with track mounted
curtain machines.
STAGE CURTAINS AND TRACKS
11 61 43 - 5
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
2.4
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
DRAW-CURTAIN MACHINE
A. General: Provide track mounted operating machine of size and capacity recommended and
provided by track manufacturer for curtain specified, with electric motor and factory-prewired
motor controls, starter, gear-reduction unit, and remote controls.
Coordinate wiring
requirements and electrical characteristics with building electrical system.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide the following] [provide one
of the following] [available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but
are not limited to, the following]:
a. Automatic Devices Company;
b. H & H Specialties Inc.; Atlas Silk Model
c. Tru-Roll, Inc.; Tru-Roll Traction Drive.
B. Operator Type: Cable drum with grooved drum and cable tension device to automatically
take up cable slack and retain cable in grooves.
C. Operator Type: Traction drive.
D. Motor Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads at
designated speeds within installed environment and with indicated operating sequence, and
without exceeding nameplate rating or considering service factor. Comply with NEMA MG 1
and the following:
1. Voltage: 208-220 V NEMA standard voltage selected to operate on nominal circuit
voltage to which motor is connected.
2. Horsepower: 1/3.
3. Enclosure: Drip proof.
4. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 105 deg F and at altitude of 3300 feet
above sea level.
5. Service Factor: 1.15 for open drip proof motors; 1.0 for totally enclosed motors.
6. Phase: One
E. Remote-Control Station: Provide momentary-contact, three-button control station with pushbutton controls labeled "Open," "Close," and "Stop."
1. Provide key-accessed control enclosures, keyed alike, with one key per switch plus one
extra key.
F. Limit Switches: Fully closed and fully opened preset stops.
2.5
CURTAIN RIGGING
A. Curtain Battens: Fabricate battens from steel pipe with a minimum number of joints. As
necessary for required lengths, connect pipe with a drive-fit pipe sleeve not less than 24
inches long, and secure with plug welds, grade 5 rated bolts, or another equally secure
method. Shop-paint completed pipe battens with black paint.
1. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Grade A, standard weight (Schedule 40), black, NPS 11/2 nominal diameter unless otherwise indicated.
B. Supports, Clamps, and Anchors: Sheet steel in manufacturer's standard thicknesses,
galvanized after fabrication according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B.
C. Trim and Support Cable: 1/4-inch- diameter, 7x19 galvanized-steel cable with a breaking
strength of 7000 lb.
Provide fittings complying with cable manufacturer's written
recommendations for size, number, and method of installation, including a drop-forged
galvanized turnbuckle to allow for leveling.
D. Trim and Support Chain: Grade 30 Proof coil chain
STAGE CURTAINS AND TRACKS
11 61 43 - 6
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
E. Inserts, Bolts, Rivets, and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant units.
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions, with installer present, for compliance with requirements for
supporting members, blocking, installation tolerances, clearances, and other conditions
affecting performance of stage-curtain work. Examine inserts, clips, blocking, or other
supports required to be installed by others to support tracks and battens.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Install stage-curtain system according to track manufacturer's and curtain fabricator's written
instructions.
3.3
BATTEN INSTALLATION
A. Install battens by suspending at heights indicated with trim and support spaced to support
load, but do not exceed 10 feet o.c.
1. Cable Trim and Support: Secure cables either directly to structures or to inserts, eye
screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate to substrate and that are not
subject to deterioration or failure with age or elevated temperatures. Attach other cable
end to pipe clamps with turnbuckles, housed or fixed with nuts after adjustment, to
prevent loosening.
2. Chain Trim and Support: Secure chain with load-rated terminations.
3.4
TRACK INSTALLATION .
A. Batten-Hung Tracks: Install track by suspending from pipe batten with manufacturer's track
clamp hangers attached to batten pipe clamps at spacing, according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
B. Spacing: Do not exceed the following dimensions between supports:
1. Heavy-Duty Track: 84 inches.
2. Medium-Duty Track: 72 inches.
3. Curved Walk-Along Track: 48 inches. Provide additional supports at curves and splices.
C. Install track for center-parting curtains with not less than 36-inch overlap of track sections at
center, supported by special lap clamps.
3.5
CURTAIN INSTALLATION
A. Track Hung: Secure curtains to track carriers with S-hooks or snap hooks.
B. Batten Hung: Secure curtains to pipe battens with ties.
3.6
DRAW-CURTAIN-MACHINE INSTALLATION
A. Install draw-curtain machines by securely mounting to track, according to manufacturer's
written instructions.
STAGE CURTAINS AND TRACKS
11 61 43 - 7
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
3.7
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel
to adjust, operate, and maintain stage curtains, draw-curtain machines, and tracks.
STAGE CURTAINS AND TRACKS
11 61 43 - 8
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
SECTION 12 61 00 - FIXED AUDIENCE SEATING
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. Section includes fixed audience seating with the following:
1. Beam mounting.
2. Upholstered chairs.
B. Owner-Furnished Material: Upholstery fabric.
C. Alternates: Refer to Section 01 23 00 "Alternates, for alternates affecting the work of this
Section.
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A. Pan: An exposed, supporting seat bottom made of steel.
B. Shell: An exposed, supporting seat bottom or back made of materials other than steel.
1.4
COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of electrical wiring and devices with seating layout to ensure that floor junction boxes for electrical devices are accurately located to allow connection
without exposed conduit.
1.5
PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.6
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of components, and finishes for fixed audience seating.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
1. Seating Layout: Show seating layout, aisle widths, aisle-end alignment or stepping, rowlettering and chair-numbering scheme, chair widths, and chair spacing in each row.
2. Accessories: Show locations and features of accessories, and accessibility provisions.
C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of
size indicated below:
1. Chair Unit: Full-size unit of each type.
2. Baked-on Coating Finishes: Manufacturer's standard-size unit, not less than 3 inches
square.
3. Wood and Plywood Materials and Finishes: Manufacturer's standard-size unit, not less
than 3 inches square.
FIXED AUDIENCE SEATING
12 61 00 - 1
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
4. Aisle Lighting: Full-size unit.
5. Row-Letter and Chair-Number Plates: Full-size units with letters and numbers marked.
6. Exposed Fasteners: Full-size units of each type.
1.7
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.
1.8
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fixed audience seating to include in operation and
maintenance manuals.
1. In addition to items specified in Section 01 78 23 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:
a. Methods for maintaining upholstery fabric.
b. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to seating
finishes and performance.
1.9
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials from the same production run that match products installed and that
are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Chair Seats and Backs: 5 of each type and size of chair seat and back.
2. Upholstered, Slip-on Cushions: 5 of each type and size of cushion.
3. Armrests: 5 of each type of armrest.
4. Chair Seat Hinges: 5.
5. Aisle-Lighting Fixture Bulbs: 5 percent of quantity installed.
1.10
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, demonstrate
aesthetic effects, and set quality standards for fabrication and installation.
1. Build mockups of two typical seats or a typical two-seat unit, including finishes and accessories:
2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in
writing.
3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the
completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
1.11
WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of fixed audience
seating that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Structural failures including standards, beams, and pedestals.
b. Wear and deterioration of fabric and stitching beyond normal use.
c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering and use.
2. Warranty Periods: As follows, from date of Substantial Completion.
a. Structural: Five years.
b. Operating Mechanisms: Three years.
c. Plastic, Wood, and Paint Components: Three years.
FIXED AUDIENCE SEATING
12 61 00 - 2
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
PART 2
2.1
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
PRODUCTS
MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of seating required, including accessories and mounting components, from single source from single manufacturer.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
2.2
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics of Upholstered Chairs:
1. Fabric: Class 1 according to DOC CS 191-1953 or 16 CFR 1610, tested according to
California Technical Bulletin 117.
2. Padding: Comply with California Technical Bulletin 117.
3. Full-Scale Fire Test: Comply with California Technical Bulletin 133.
B. Strength and Durability Performance: Chairs and components shall pass testing according to
BIFMA X5.4.
2.3
FIXED AUDIENCE SEATING
A. Fixed Audience Seating: Assembly-space seating in permanent arrangement as shown on
Drawings.
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Stellar Model
35-216 by American Seating Company or comparable product by one of the following:
a. Irwin Seating Company.
b. KI, Inc.
B. Chair Mounting Standards: Floor attached of the following material:
1. Cast Iron: One-piece castings with integral mounting points and attachment anchoring
points for seat pivots, backs, and armrests.
C. Chair Mounting Beam (Alternate): Steel horizontal beam mounted on floor-attached steel
support pedestals spaced at intervals of 2 to 2-1/2 chair widths.
D. End Panels:
1. Material:
a. Solid hardwood.
2. Style: Rectangular with rounded corners; American Seating Company Model 350.
E. Fabric Upholstered Chairs:
1. Back:
a. Padding Thickness: 2 inches.
b. Outer Back Surface: Hardwood-veneer plywood, with concealed fasteners.
c. Top Corners: Square.
2. Seat: Spring arch type, composed of two parts, the upholstered spring frame and the
seat foundation and as follows:
a. Five 8 gauge serpentine springs attached to and suspended from a die formed 18
gauge steel frame with proper lateral bracing to resist spring tension.
b. Spring Attachment: Open and well lubricated to permit quiet, free spring rotation.
c. Padding: Integrally molded polyurethane foam pad, molded to 100% bonded polyester netting and contoured to interlock with the spring frame.
d. Top Padding Thickness: 3 inch thick at the front and 1-1/2 inch thick at the rear with
an overall thickness of 2 inches over the center portion.
FIXED AUDIENCE SEATING
12 61 00 - 3
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
e. Upholstery Cover: Panel side construction without welts and fastened to the frame
without the use of nails, tacks, or screws.
f. Capable of being removed from seat bottom without removing entire seat from chair.
3. Seat Bottom: One piece deep drawn die formed steel foundation, not less than 20 gauge
thickness with edges rolled inward around perimeter.
a. Free from screws and bolts on bottom, front and sides.
b. Enclose seat rising mechanism.
c. Minimum 11 gage reinforcing at hinge attachment.
d. Center front recessed area for number plate.
F. Chair Width: Vary chair widths to optimize sightlines and row lengths, with minimum chair
width of 20 inches from center to center of armrests.
G. Back Pitch: Fixed.
1. Back Angle: Angle for optimum viewing comfort.
H. Chair Seat Hinges: Completely enclosed, self-lubricating, with noiseless self-rising seat
mechanism passing ASTM F 851, positive internal stops cushioned with rubber or neoprene,
and requiring no maintenance.
1. Self-Rising Seat Mechanism: Spring actuated, three-quarter fold capable of adjustment
to allow full fold.
I.
Armrests: Solid hardwood with rounded edges and concealed mounting.
J.
Aisle-Lighting Fixtures: Manufacturer's standard rectangular-louvered fixtures.
1. Bulb: LED.
2. Power: 120 V.
3. Match American Seating "Type E".
K. Accessible Seating:
1. Provide removable chair for each wheelchair space unless otherwise indicated.
2. Provide chairs with folding armrest on aisle side in locations indicated, but not less than
five percent of aisle seats, dispersed through the audience seating area. Identify these
seats with a sign or marker.
L. Row-Letter and Chair-Number Plates: Manufacturer's standard.
1. Material: Aluminum with black embossed characters.
2. Location: Row letter on top of aisle armrest and chair number on front edge of seat.
3. Attachment: Manufacturer's standard method.
M. Accessibility-Logo Plates: Manufacturer's standard.
1. Material: Aluminum with black embossed characters.
2. Location: Top of armrest.
3. Attachment: Manufacturer's standard method.
2.4
MATERIALS AND FINISHES
A. Hardwood Lumber and Veneer Faces: Maple selected to be free of visible defects.
1. Stain and Finish: Custom stain and finish.
B. Upholstery Padding: Flexible, cellular, molded or slab polyurethane foam.
C. Metal Finish: Finish exposed metal parts with manufacturer's standard minimum 1.5-milthick, polyester baked-on powder coating.
1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
FIXED AUDIENCE SEATING
12 61 00 - 4
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
2.5
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
FABRICATION
A. Floor Attachments: Fabricate to conform to floor slope so that standards and pedestals are
plumb and chairs are maintained at same angular relationship to vertical throughout Project.
B. Upholstery: Fabricate fabric-covered cushions with molded padding beneath fabric and with
fabric covering free of welts, creases, stretch lines, and wrinkles. For each upholstered component, install pile and pattern run in a consistent direction.
C. Upholstered Chairs: Fabricate as follows:
1. Two-Part Upholstered Back: Padded cushion glued to a curved steel, plywood, or
molded-plastic inner panel and covered with easily replaceable fabric; with curved outer
back shell that fully encloses upholstery edges.
2. Two-Part, Steel-Pan Seats: Upper part, an upholstered cushion with molded padding
over no fewer than five serpentine springs attached to reinforced steel frame, with weightdistributing and abrasion-resistant sheeting separating padding from springs, and removable for reupholstering without removing steel pan from chair. Lower part, a steel pan,
reinforced at stress points and completely enclosing hinges and self-rising mechanism.
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
EXAMINATION
A. Examine floors, risers, and other adjacent work and conditions, with Installer present, for
compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Verify that electrical connections are properly located.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A. Install seating in locations indicated and fasten securely to substrates according to manufacturer's written installation instructions.
1. Install fixed audience seating with each chair capable of complying with performance requirements without failure or other conditions that might impair the chair's usefulness.
2. Install standards and pedestals plumb.
3. Install seating so moving components operate smoothly and quietly.
B. Install seating with end standards aligned or stepped as indicated from first to last row and
with backs and seats varied in spacing to optimize sightlines.
C. Install wiring conductors and cables concealed in components of seating and accessible for
servicing.
3.3
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative:
1. Inspect components, assemblies, and equipment, including connections, to verify proper,
complete, and sturdy installation according to manufacturer's written instructions and
product specifications.
2. Verify that seats return to correct and uniform at-rest position.
B. Fixed audience seating will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
FIXED AUDIENCE SEATING
12 61 00 - 5
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
C. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.4
ADJUSTING
A. Adjust chair backs so that they are at proper angles and aligned with each other in uniform
rows.
B. Adjust hardware and moving parts to function smoothly so they operate easily. Lubricate
bearings and sliding parts as recommended in writing by manufacturer.
C. Adjust self-rising seat mechanisms so seats in each row are aligned when in upright position.
D. Repair minor abrasions and imperfections in finishes with coating that matches factoryapplied finish.
E. Replace damaged and malfunctioning components that cannot be acceptably repaired.
F. Replace upholstery fabric damaged during installation or work of other trades.
END OF SECTION 12 61 00
FIXED AUDIENCE SEATING
12 61 00 - 6
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
SECTION 14 42 00 - WHEELCHAIR LIFTS
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Unenclosed vertical wheelchair lift.
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A. Definitions in ASME A18.1 apply to Work of this Section.
1.4
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components,
and finishes for lifts.
2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, safety features, controls, finishes, and accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: For each lift.
1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, attachments to other work, and required
clearances.
2. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, and points of load to building structure.
3. Include details of equipment assemblies, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.
4. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of
sizes indicated below:
1. Metal Finish: Manufacturer's standard-size unit, not less than 3 inches square.
2. Tubular Products and Running Trim: Manufacturer's standard-size unit, 6 inches long.
3. Hardware: Manufacturer's standard, exposed, door-operating device.
1.5
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of lift to include in operation and maintenance manuals.
1. In addition to items specified in Section 01 78 23 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:
a. Parts list with sources indicated.
b. Recommended parts inventory list.
B. Inspection and Acceptance Certificates and Operating Permits: As required by authorities
having jurisdiction for normal, unrestricted use of lifts.
C. Continuing Maintenance Proposal: Submit a continuing maintenance proposal from Installer
to Owner, in the form of a standard two-year maintenance agreement, starting on date initial
WHEELCHAIR LIFTS
14 42 00 - 1
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
maintenance service is concluded. State services, obligations, conditions, and terms for
agreement period and for future renewal options.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative who is trained and approved by manufacturer.
1. Maintenance Proximity: Not more than two hours' normal travel time from Installer's
place of business to Project site.
1.7
WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of lifts that fail in
materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2
2.1
PRODUCTS
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Accessibility Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural &
Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and
ICC A117.1.
B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with ASME A18.1, "Safety Standard for Platform Lifts and
Stairway Chairlifts."
2.2
UNENCLOSED VERTICAL WHEELCHAIR LIFT
A. Vertical Platform Lift, General: Preengineered lift system.
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Garaventa
Accessibility Genesis Opal with custom finishes or comparable product by one of the following:
a. Inclinator Company of America.
b. Liftavator, Inc.
c. Savaria Corporation.
B. Capacity: 750 lbs (340 kg) rated capacity.
C. Mast Height:
1. Model GVL-OP-60; 63 inches (1600 mm) maximum lifting height.
2. Number of Stops: Two.
D. Platform Size and Nominal Clear Platform Dimensions:
1. Mid-Size: 36 inches (914 mm) by 54-7/8 inches (1394 mm) clear platform dimensions.
E. Platform Configuration:
1. Straight Through: Front and rear openings.
F. Landing Openings: Gates shall be self closing type.
1. Gate Height: 42-1/8 inches.
2. Gate Width: 41-3/4 inches.
3. Platform Gate: Travels with platform and opens at lower landing.
4. Upper Landing Gate: Detached, freestanding type.
WHEELCHAIR LIFTS
14 42 00 - 2
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
G. Power Gate Operators:
1. Location:
a. Platform Gate: Travels with platform and opens lower landing.
b. Upper Landing Gate.
2. Automatically opens the gate when platform arrives at a landing. Will also open at landing
by pressing call button or gently pulling the gate.
3. ADA Compliant and obstruction sensitive.
4. Low voltage, 24 VDC with all wiring concealed.
H. Lift Components:
1. Machine Tower: Custom aluminum extrusion.
2. Base Frame: Structural steel.
3. Platform Side Wall Panels: 16 gauge galvanized steel sheet.
4. Side Guard Panels: 42-1/8 inches (1070 mm) high mounted on platform.
I.
Ramp: Retractable ramp matching platform to provide transition from lower floor to lift platform. Ramp lowers to floor automatically when lifts reach lower landing and door opens.
Ramp rises automatically when lift control is activated for lift to leave lower landing.
1. Ramp Size: End ramps a minimum of 32 inches wide; length as required for slope.
2. Ramp Slope: Maximum 1:12.
3. Ramp Finish: Finish ramps to match lift platform.
J.
Base Mounting at Lower Landing:
1. Floor Mount: Base of lift shall be mounted on the floor surface of the lower landing. For
access onto the platform provide a ramp of 16 gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized steel sheet
with a slip resistant surface.
K. Leadscrew Drive:
1. Drive Type: Self-lubricating acme screw drive.
2. Emergency Operation: Manual handwheel device to raise or lower platform.
3. Safety Devices:
a. Integral safety nut assembly with safety switch.
4. Travel Speed: 10 fpm.
5. Motor: 2.0 hp.
6. Power Supply:
a. 120 VAC single phase; 60 Hz on a dedicated 20 amp circuit.
L. Platform Controls: 24 VDC control circuit with the following features.
1. Direction Control: Constant pressure rocker switch.
2. Illuminated and audible emergency stop switch shuts off power to lift and activates audio
alarm with battery backup.
3. Keyless operation.
M. Call Station Controls: 24 VDC control circuit with the following features.
1. Direction Control:
a. Elevator style with illuminated and tactile buttons.
2. Keyless operation.
3. Call Station Mounting:
a. Lower:
(1) Wall mounted surface.
b. Upper:
(1) Frame mounted.
N. Safety Devices and Features:
1. Grounded electrical system with upper, lower, and final limit switches.
WHEELCHAIR LIFTS
14 42 00 - 3
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
2. Tamper resistant interlock to electrically monitor that the gate is in the closed position and
the lock is engaged before lift can move from landing.
3. Electrical disconnect shall shut off power to the lift.
4. Under platform safety pan with five waterproof safety switches to detect obstruction under
platform.
2.3
MATERIALS
A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
B. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500/A 500M.
C. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M; standard weight (Schedule 40) unless otherwise indicated or
required by loads.
D. Steel Sheet:
ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, cold-rolled commercial steel (CS)
ASTM A 1011/A 1011M hot-rolled, commercial steel (CS); as required for each use.
or
E. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of
use, corrosion resistance, and finish indicated; manufacturer's standard strengths and thicknesses for type of use.
1. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221.
2. Aluminum Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209.
F. Door Glazing:
1. Ultraclear Float Glass: Fully tempered, ASTM C 1036, Type I, Quality-Q3, Class I, complying with other requirements specified and with visible light transmission not less than
91 percent.
a. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion
parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed unless otherwise indicated.
b. For uncoated glass, comply with requirements for Condition A.
c. Thickness: 6 mm.
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. AFG Industries, Inc.; Krystal Klear.
b. Guardian Industries Corp.; Ultrawhite.
c. Pilkington North America; Optiwhite.
d. PPG Industries, Inc.; Starphire.
G. Inserts: Furnish required concrete and masonry inserts and similar anchorage devices for installing structural members, guide rails, machines, and other lift components where installation of devices is specified in another Section.
H. Expansion Anchors: Anchor-bolt-and-sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability to sustain a load equal to 10 times the load imposed as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.
1. Material:
Carbon-steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633,
Class Fe/Zn 5.
I.
2.4
Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous
grout complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M.
GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS
A. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,
temporary protective covering before shipping.
WHEELCHAIR LIFTS
14 42 00 - 4
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.
Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range
of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
2.5
FINISHES
A. Steel Factory Finish:
1. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: After cleaning and pretreating, apply manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat to a minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils.
2. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full RAL range.
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, critical dimensions, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Minimum Headroom Clearance: Verify that installed lift will have a minimum headroom of 80
inches above any point on platform floor at any point of travel.
C. Minimum Headroom Clearance: Verify that installed lift will have a minimum headroom of 79
inches at any point during travel.
D. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance.
E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with ASME A18.1 and manufacturer's written instructions for installation of
lifts unless otherwise indicated.
B. Wiring Method: Conceal conductors and cables within housings of units or building construction. Do not install conduit exposed to view in finished spaces. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess and without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on
bending radii.
C. Coordinate runway doors with platform travel and positioning, for accurate alignment and
minimum clearance between platforms, runway doors, sills, and door frames.
D. Position sills accurately and fill space under sills solidly with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout.
E. Coordinate platform doors with platform travel and positioning.
F. Adjust stops for accurate stopping and leveling at each landing, within required tolerances.
1. Leveling Tolerance: 1/4 inch up or down, regardless of load and direction of travel.
G. Adjust retractable ramps to meet maximum allowable slope and change-in-elevation requirements, and to lie fully against landing surfaces.
H. Lubricate operating parts of lift, including drive mechanism, guide rails, hinges, safety devices, and hardware.
WHEELCHAIR LIFTS
14 42 00 - 5
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
I.
3.3
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
Test safety devices and verify smoothness of required protective enclosures and other surfaces.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Acceptance Testing: On completion of lift installation and before permitting use of lifts, perform acceptance tests as required and recommended by ASME A18.1 and authorities having
jurisdiction.
B. Operating Test: In addition to acceptance testing, load lifts to rated capacity and operate
continuously for 30 minutes between lowest and highest landings served. Readjust stops,
signal equipment, and other devices for accurate stopping and operation of system.
C. Advise Owner, Architect, and authorities having jurisdiction in advance of dates and times
tests are to be performed on lifts.
3.4
MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, maintenance service shall
include 12 months' full maintenance by skilled employees of lift Installer. Include quarterly
preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication,
cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper lift operation. Parts and supplies shall be
manufacturer's authorized replacement parts and supplies.
3.5
DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel
to adjust, operate, and maintain lifts. Include a review of emergency systems and emergency
procedures to be followed at time of operational failure and other building emergencies.
B. Check operation of lifts with Owner's personnel present and before date of Substantial Completion. Determine that operating systems and devices are functioning properly.
C. Check operation of lifts with Owner's personnel present not more than one month before end
of warranty period. Determine that operating systems and devices are functioning properly.
END OF SECTION 14 42 00
WHEELCHAIR LIFTS
14 42 00 - 6
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
SECTION 21 13 13 - FIRE-SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following new and existing fire-suppression piping inside the building:
1.
Wet-pipe sprinkler systems.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
Refer to Division 23 Section “Hangers and Supports for Mechanical Piping and
Equipment” for hangers and supports requirements.
2.
Refer to Division 23 Section “Identification for Mechanical” for identification requirements.
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4
Wet-Pipe Sprinkler System: Automatic sprinklers are attached to piping containing water and
that is connected to water supply. Water discharges immediately from sprinklers when they are
opened. Sprinklers open when heat melts fusible link or destroys frangible device.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
1.5
Standard Piping System Component Working Pressure: Listed for at least 175 psig.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For the following:
1.
Piping materials, including dielectric fittings and sprinkler specialty fittings.
2.
Pipe hangers and supports.
3.
Sprinklers, escutcheons, and guards. Include sprinkler flow characteristics, mounting,
finish, and other pertinent data.
B.
Approved Sprinkler Piping Drawings: Working plans shall be prepared according to NFPA 13,
that have been approved by the State of Maryland Fire Marshal’s office, the authority having
jurisdiction (AHJ).
C.
Sprinklers shall be referred to on drawings, submittals, and other documentation by the sprinkler
identification or model number as specifically published in the appropriate agency listing or
approval. Trade names or other abbreviated designation shall not be allowed.
D.
Field Test Reports and Certificates: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with
performance requirements and as described in NFPA 13. Include "Contractor's Material and
Test Certificate for Aboveground Piping."
E.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For sprinkler specialties to include in emergency, operation,
and maintenance manuals.
FIRE-SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
21 13 13 - 1
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
1.6
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications:
1.
Installer shall have been engaged in the sprinkler industry for a minimum of five (5)
consecutive years and be licensed by the Maryland State Fire Marshall’s Office.
2.
Installer's responsibilities include designing, fabricating, and installing fire-suppression
systems and providing professional engineering services needed to assume engineering
responsibility.
a.
Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of working plans and field test reports by
a qualified professional engineer or minimum Level III NICET certified designer.
B.
Manufacturer Qualifications:
1.
Each item of equipment shall be capable of performing its function over an extended
period of time with a minimum of attention and maintenance. All equipment and material
shall be constructed using new materials designed and built in accordance with the best
practices of the industry. Each item of equipment shall be listed in the Underwriters
Laboratories Fire Protection Equipment List or Factory Mutual Approval Guide. Each
major item of equipment shall bear the manufacturer's name or trademark; serial number;
U.L. or F.M. label; operating instructions and hydraulic characteristic conditions, etc.,
where applicable.
2.
The equipment and material manufacturers shall have been engaged in the sprinkler
industry for a minimum of five (5) consecutive years. Equipment shall comply with the
year edition of NFPA 13 which is applicable at the time within the State of Maryland at the
time of contract execution..
C.
Installation shall comply with the year edition of NFPA 13 which is applicable at the time within
the State of Maryland at the time of contract execution.
D.
NFPA Standards: Fire-suppression-system equipment, specialties, accessories, installation,
and testing shall comply with the following:
1.
NFPA 13, "Installation of Sprinkler Systems."
1.7
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate layout and installation of sprinklers with other construction that penetrates ceilings,
including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, and partition assemblies.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.2
In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
manufacturers specified.
STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS
A.
Threaded-End, Standard-Weight Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, ASTM A 135, or ASTM A 795
with factory- or field-formed threaded ends.
1.
Cast-Iron Threaded Flanges: ASME B16.1.
2.
Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3.
3.
Gray-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4.
FIRE-SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
21 13 13 - 2
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
4.
5.
2.3
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
Steel Threaded Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of ASTM A 53/A 53M or ASTM A 106,
Schedule 40, seamless steel pipe. Include ends matching joining method.
Steel Threaded Couplings: ASTM A 865.
SPRINKLERS
A.
Sprinklers shall be UL listed or FMG approved, with 175-psig minimum pressure rating.
B.
Manufacturers:
1.
Victaulic Co. of America.
2.
Tyco Fire Suppression & Building Products
3.
Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc.
4.
Viking Corp.
C.
Automatic Sprinklers: With heat-responsive element complying with the following:
1.
UL 199, for nonresidential applications.
2.
UL 1767, for early-suppression, fast-response applications.
D.
Sprinkler Types and Categories: Match existing sprinkler heads for orifice and temperature
classification rating.
E.
Sprinkler types, features, and options as follows (all sprinklers to be quick response type):
1.
Recessed sprinklers, including escutcheon.
F.
Sprinkler Finishes: Chrome.
G.
Sprinkler Escutcheons: Ceiling mounting for recessed sprinklers, chrome, 2 piece.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PIPING APPLICATIONS, GENERAL
A.
3.2
Flanges, flanged fittings, unions, nipples, and transition and special fittings with finish and
pressure ratings same as or higher than system's pressure rating may be used in aboveground
applications, unless otherwise indicated.
SPRINKLER SYSTEM PIPING APPLICATIONS
A.
Standard-Pressure, Wet-Pipe Sprinkler System, 175-psig Maximum Working Pressure:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Sprinkler-Piping Fitting Option: Specialty sprinkler fittings, NPS 2and smaller, including
mechanical-T and -cross fittings.
NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: Threaded-end, black, standard-weight steel pipe; cast- or
malleable-iron threaded fittings; and threaded joints.
NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller (Contractor’s Option): Plain-end, black, standard-weight steel
pipe; steel welding fittings; and welded joints.
NPS 2 and Larger: Threaded-end, black, standard-weight steel pipe; cast- or malleableiron threaded fittings; and threaded joints.
NPS 2 and Larger (Contractor’s Option): Plain-end, black, standard-weight steel pipe;
steel welding fittings; and welded joints.
NPS 2 and Larger, Not Exposed in Finished Spaces (Contractor’s Option): Grooved-end,
black, standard-weight steel pipe; grooved-end fittings; grooved-end-pipe couplings; and
grooved joints.
FIRE-SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
21 13 13 - 3
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
7.
3.3
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
NPS 2 and Larger, Not Exposed in Finished Spaces (Contractor’s Option): Grooved-end,
Schedule 10 steel pipe; grooved-end fittings; grooved-end-pipe couplings; and grooved
joints.
JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A.
Refer to Division 23 Section "Common Work Results for Mechanical" for basic piping joint
construction.
B.
Threaded Joints: Comply with NFPA 13 for pipe thickness and threads. Do not thread pipe
smaller than NPS 8 (DN 200) with wall thickness less than Schedule 40 unless approved by
authorities having jurisdiction and threads are checked by a ring gage and comply with
ASME B1.20.1.
3.4
PIPING INSTALLATION
A.
Refer to Division 23 Section "Common Work Results for Mechanical" for basic piping
installation.
B.
Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general
location and arrangement of piping. Install piping as indicated, as far as practical.
1.
Deviations from approved working plans for piping require written approval from
authorities having jurisdiction. File written approval with Architect before deviating from
approved working plans.
C.
Use approved fittings to make changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains, and reductions
in pipe sizes.
D.
Install sprinkler piping with drains for complete system drainage.
E.
Hangers and Supports: Comply with NFPA 13 for hanger materials.
1.
Install sprinkler system piping according to NFPA 13.
F.
Fill wet-pipe sprinkler system piping with water.
3.5
SPRINKLER INSTALLATION
A.
3.6
The sprinkler bulb protector must remain in place until the sprinkler is completely installed and
before the system is placed in service. Remove bulb protectors carefully by hand after
installation. Do not use any tools to remove bulb protectors.
CONNECTIONS
A.
3.7
Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.
LABELING AND IDENTIFICATION
A.
3.8
Install labeling and pipe markers on equipment and piping according to requirements in
NFPA 13 and in Division 23 Section "Identification for Mechanical."
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1.
Flush, test, and inspect sprinkler systems according to NFPA 13, "Systems Acceptance"
Chapter.
FIRE-SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
21 13 13 - 4
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
B.
3.9
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
Report test results promptly and in writing to Architect and authorities having jurisdiction.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
Clean dirt and debris from sprinklers.
B.
Remove and replace sprinklers with paint other than factory finish.
C.
Protect sprinklers from damage until Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 21 13 13
FIRE-SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
21 13 13 - 5
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
SECTION 23 05 00 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR MECHANICAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems.
2.
Mechanical sleeve seals.
3.
Sleeves.
4.
Escutcheons.
5.
Drives for machinery.
6.
Motor starting equipment.
7.
Grout.
8.
Packing material for penetrations.
9.
Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections.
10.
Painting and finishing.
11.
Supports and anchorages.
12.
Accessibility.
13.
Rigging of equipment.
14.
Demonstration.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
Division 01 Section “Construction Waste Management and Disposal” for waste
management requirements.
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A.
Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred
spaces, pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings,
unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.
B.
Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied
spaces, mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, air handling unit service corridors, and
accessible shafts.
C.
Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient
temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations and at grade
locations.
D.
Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by
building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in duct shafts.
E.
Conditioned Space: Finished spaces and exposed interior spaces that are air conditioned.
Examples include offices, corridors, etc., that are served by air conditioning equipment. Returnair plenums are not conditioned space.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR MECHANICAL
23 05 00 - 1
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
F.
K-Factor: Number of British thermal units of heat transmitted per square foot per degree
Fahrenheit temperature difference through a material with flat, parallel sides one inch apart.
G.
The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials:
1.
ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic.
2.
CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride plastic.
3.
PE: Polyethylene plastic.
4.
PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.
H.
The following are industry abbreviations for rubber materials:
1.
EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.
2.
NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For the following:
1.
Mechanical sleeve seals.
B.
Within 15 days after award of the Contract, submit to the Architect for approval, a list of
manufacturer's names of material and equipment he proposes to provide. In the event any item
of material or equipment contained in the list fails to comply with the specification requirements,
such item will be rejected. If, prior to the expiration of the fifteen (15) day period or any duly
authorized extension thereof, the Contractor fails to submit a schedule of acceptable material or
equipment covering the items, the Architect will select the items; such selection shall be final
and binding upon the Contractor as a condition of the contract. Rejected items shall be
resubmitted within 15 days or the Architect will select such materials and equipment.
C.
After receiving approval of equipment manufacturers and prior to delivery of material to the job
site, submit for approval drawings or cuts showing construction size, arrangement, operating
clearances, performance characteristics and capacity of materials and equipment. Each item of
equipment proposed shall be a standard catalog product of the approved manufacturer.
D.
Drawings, specifications, catalogs, etc., submitted for approval shall be properly labeled
indicating specific service for which material or equipment is to be used.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Electrical Characteristics for mechanical Equipment:
Equipment of higher electrical
characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and
connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If
minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with requirements.
B.
Give necessary notices and obtain required permits. Pay fees and other costs, including utility
connections or extensions in connection with the work. File necessary plans, prepare
documents and obtain necessary approvals of governmental agencies having jurisdiction.
Obtain required certificates of inspection and deliver same to the Architect before request for
acceptance and final payment for the work.
C.
Materials furnished and work installed shall comply with the latest issue of the codes, rules,
regulations, and recommendations.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR MECHANICAL
23 05 00 - 2
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
D.
1.6
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
Subcontractor Qualifications:
1.
A mechanical contractor bidding as prime contractor shall be a Maryland-licensed
HVACR Master or Master Restricted contractor who is qualified in the areas of work
included in the Project.
2.
The successful contractor shall agree to employ only individuals who hold valid licenses
issued by the State HVACR Board of the Department of Labor, Licensing and Regulation
to provide, or assist in providing, heating ventilating, air conditioning, or refrigerating
system installation or service required for the project.
3.
If the successful contractor subcontracts any or all of the heating, ventilating, air
conditioning, or refrigerating system installation or service required for a project, the
subcontractor must possess the appropriate license required and issued by the State
HVACR Board.
4.
All heating, ventilating, air conditioning, and refrigerating system subcontractors shall
consistently use only individuals who hold the appropriate licenses issued by the State
HVACR Board to provide or assist in providing heating, ventilating, air conditioning, and
refrigerating system installation or service required for a project.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping,
storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and
moisture.
B.
Proper and suitable tools, equipment and appliances for the safe and convenient handling and
placing of materials and equipment shall be used. During loading, unloading, and placing, care
shall be taken in handling the equipment and materials so that no equipment or materials,
including Owner furnished, are damaged.
C.
Mechanical equipment delivered to the job site shall be stored under roof or other approved
covering, on pedestals above the ground. Enclosures for equipment shall be weatherproof. Any
motors involved in the work that are not totally enclosed and electrical/electronic components
shall be stored in a heated area with a minimum temperature of 50 deg. F. Valves shall be
stored under roof on wood pedestals above ground. Pipe for project use shall be stored above
grade and in such a manner to prevent entrance of foreign materials. Pipe shall be fitted with
end caps or seals to prevent moisture and debris from entering pipe. Insulation shall be stored
under roof or in trailers, adequately protected from the weather. Follow written instructions and
recommendations of the manufacturer and requirements of the Architect in lubrication,
protection and maintenance of equipment during storage.
D.
If materials or equipment are found to be in poor condition at the time of being installed, the
Architect may, at his discretion, order the Contractor to furnish and install new equipment or
materials at no cost to the Owner.
1.7
COORDINATION
A.
Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of
construction, to allow for mechanical installations.
B.
Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and structural components as they are
constructed.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR MECHANICAL
23 05 00 - 3
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
1.8
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
EQUIPMENT START-UP AND INITIAL OPERATION
A.
No equipment shall be operated for testing or trial use until there has been full compliance with
the equipment manufacturers' specifications and instructions for lubrication, alignment, direction
of rotation, balance, and other applicable considerations.
B.
Particular care shall be taken to verify that equipment is completely assembled and properly
lubricated, and grease and oil cases and reservoirs have been filled to the correct level with the
recommended lubricant.
C.
Where specified, provide services of the manufacturer or his authorized representative to
witness, supervise, or assist in the installation and start-up of equipment provided under this
Division.
1.9
WARRANTY
A.
See Division 01 section “Product Requirements” for general requirements.
B.
Provide service of the equipment manufacturer or his authorized representative, if required to
achieve specified performance of equipment provided.
C.
During the warranty period, service equipment provided except filter replacement and belt
replacement.
Provide labor and materials in accordance with manufacturer's written
instructions for service and maintenance. Prior to the start of warranty period, provide to the
Architect for approval, a schedule of required maintenance operations to be performed during
the warranty period and required periodically thereafter for each system and item of equipment.
Thereafter, monthly reports shall be submitted to the Owner for describing actual service
performed. Forty-eight (48) hours advance notice shall be given to Owner prior to work
required.
1.10
DRAWINGS
A.
The contract drawings are diagrammatic and indicate the general arrangements of systems and
work included in the Contract. Do not scale the drawings. Consult the architectural and
structural drawings and details for exact location of structure and equipment; where same are
not precisely located, obtain this information prior to start of work.
B.
Layout of equipment indicated on drawings shall be checked and compared against drawings of
trades, and exact locations and clearances for servicing determined using approved shop
drawings of such equipment. Where the equipment furnished differs in physical character from
that specified or indicated or where physical interference occurs, consult with Architect as to
proper location of equipment. Prepare and submit for approval dated and dimensioned
drawings correcting such interference’s.
C.
Although the location of materials and equipment may be shown on the drawings in a certain
place, the construction may develop conditions that render this location inaccessible or
impractical. In such cases, before fabricating and installing the work, the Contractor shall call
the condition to the attention of the Architect for direction. When requested by the Architect a
detailed drawing of the proposed departure due to field conditions, or their causes, shall be
submitted by the Contractor for approval. The Architect shall make final written decisions as to
the conditions, which require the changing of work.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR MECHANICAL
23 05 00 - 4
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
1.11
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
RECORD DRAWINGS
A.
See Division 01, Section “Project Record Documents” and “Closeout Procedures” for general
requirements.
B.
Carefully record the actual locations of each piece of concealed equipment, control devices,
pipe, valves, ducts, etc., and work when different from the contract drawings.
1.12
OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
A.
See Division 01, Section “Closeout Procedures” and “Operation and Maintenance Data” for
general requirements of demonstration and training.
B.
Upon completion of work and of tests, furnish the necessary skilled labor and helpers for
operating and demonstrating the systems and equipment.
C.
The instructor shall be thoroughly familiar with parts of the installation on which he is to give
instruction and shall be trained in operating theory as well as practical operation and
maintenance work. Employ factory trained instructors wherever necessary and as specified.
D.
Instructions shall include a general description of each system together with specific instructions
describing routine and emergency procedures required of the building personnel for operating
and maintaining each system. The instructions shall include the name or label, location, and
function of operating equipment and controls. Operating modes and the procedures for
indexing each mode shall be clearly described. Include lubrication charts and schedules of
frequency of lubrication for equipment, designating each point of lubrication and type of
lubricant to be used. Listings of names, addresses, and phone numbers of the service
organizations for each item of equipment and a typewritten maintenance schedule for same
shall be included.
Provide operation and maintenance manuals and record product data as specified in
Division 01, Section “Project Record Documents.”
1.13
FIRE PROTECTION
A.
See Division 01 Section “Temporary Facilities and Controls” for general requirements.
B.
As minimum, one five-pound CO2 extinguisher shall be provided with each work crew.
1.14
A.
1.15
SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
See Division 01 Section “Summary” for general requirements.
SINGULAR NUMBER
A.
See Division 01 for general requirements.
B.
Where any device or part of equipment is herein referred to in the singular number, such as
"valve", such reference applies to as many such devices as are required to complete the
installation, shown, implied or otherwise, as indicated on the drawings.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR MECHANICAL
23 05 00 - 5
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.2
In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following
requirements apply for product selection:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the
manufacturers specified.
PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS
A.
2.3
Refer to individual Division 23 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining
methods.
JOINING MATERIALS
A.
Refer to individual Division 23 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below.
B.
Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, silver alloy for refrigerant piping.
2.4
MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS
A.
2.5
Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space
between pipe and sleeve.
1.
Manufacturers:
a.
Advance Products & Systems, Inc.
b.
Calpico, Inc.
c.
Metraflex Co.
d.
Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.
e.
Thunderline Linkseal.
2.
Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type
and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.
3.
Pressure Plates: Plastic. Include two for each sealing element.
4.
Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating of length
required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing
element.
SLEEVES
A.
Galvanized-Steel Sheet:
longitudinal joint.
B.
Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.
C.
Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends
and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.
2.6
0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded
ESCUTCHEONS
A.
Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to closely
fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers
opening.
B.
One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with polished chrome-plated
finish.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR MECHANICAL
23 05 00 - 6
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
C.
One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With set screw and chrome-plated finish.
D.
One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Type: With set screw and chrome-plated finish.
E.
Split-Plate, Stamped-Steel Type:
chrome-plated finish.
2.7
With concealed or exposed-rivet hinge, set screw, and
MOTOR STARTING EQUIPMENT
A.
Unless otherwise specified, motor control centers, starters, disconnect switches, combination
starters and disconnect switches and variable frequency controllers shall be provided by the
Division 26 Contractor, except for packaged equipment as specified under this Division.
B.
Magnetic motor starters and combination starters, which are integral part of the equipment, shall
be furnished by the Division 23 Contractor.
2.8
GROUT
A.
2.9
Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, non-shrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-cement grout.
1.
Characteristics:
Post-hardening,
volume-adjusting,
non-staining,
noncorrosive,
nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications.
2.
Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.
3.
Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
PACKING MATERIAL FOR PENETRATIONS
A.
Mineral fiber; non-combustible; resistant to water, mildew, and vermin. Expanding resilient
foams manufactured for this purpose are an acceptable alternative only if the material density is
at least 3.0 pounds per cubic foot.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A.
Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 23 Sections specifying piping
systems.
B.
Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping
systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction
loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated
unless deviations to layout are approved by the Architect.
C.
Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms
and service areas.
D.
Install piping at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless
specifically indicated otherwise.
E.
Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.
F.
Install piping to permit valve servicing.
G.
Install piping at indicated slopes.
H.
Install piping free of sags and bends.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR MECHANICAL
23 05 00 - 7
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
I.
Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
J.
Install piping to allow application of insulation.
K.
Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating
pressure.
L.
Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors according to the following:
1.
Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep-pattern type.
2.
Chrome-Plated Piping: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated finish.
3.
Insulated Piping: One-piece, stamped-steel type with set screws.
4.
Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, stampedsteel type.
5.
Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel type
or split-plate, stamped-steel type with concealed hinge and set screw.
M.
Unless indicated otherwise, sleeves are not required for core-drilled penetrations in solid
concrete construction, except when located in floors of mechanical equipment areas or other
potential wet areas. Seal annular space between pipe or pipe insulation and concrete as
specified for sleeves.
N.
Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board partitions.
1.
Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.
2.
Install sleeves in new walls and slabs as new walls and slabs are constructed.
3.
Unless indicated or specified otherwise, install sleeves that are large enough to provide
1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. Use the
following sleeve materials:
a.
Steel Pipe Sleeves: For pipes penetrating concrete and masonry construction.
b.
Steel Sheet Sleeves: For pipes penetrating gypsum-board or similar construction
partitions and ceilings.
4.
Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry and
with approved joint sealant for gypsum board assemblies.
5.
Seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation, using joint sealants
appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint.
O.
Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations:
Seal penetrations using sleeves and
mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between
pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
1.
Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches in diameter.
2.
Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements
required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble
mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten
bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight
seal.
P.
Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.
Q.
Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in
requirements.
R.
Refer to installation details on drawings for additional requirements.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR MECHANICAL
23 05 00 - 8
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
3.2
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A.
Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 23 Sections
specifying piping systems.
B.
Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs.
C.
Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before
assembly.
D.
Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube"
Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8.
3.3
PIPING CONNECTIONS
A.
3.4
Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:
1.
Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, at final connection to each piece of
equipment.
EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS4
A.
Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are
not indicated.
B.
Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and
components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Install mechanical equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of
components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other
installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations. In no case shall equipment be
installed with service clearance less than manufacturer’s recommendations.
D.
Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope.
E.
Refer to installation details on drawings for additional requirements.
3.5
PAINTING
A.
Painting of mechanical systems, equipment, and components is specified in Division 09 Section
"Interior Painting."
B.
Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with materials and
procedures to match original factory finish. Provide complete new finish if, in the opinion of the
Architect or Owner, the factory finishes are severely damaged.
1.
Touch up threads of zinc coated screwed pipe with Rustoleum primer and one coat of
enamel conforming to painting specification.
2.
Prepare piping and ductwork and associated hangers specified to be painted to accept
field paint.
3.6
ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES
A.
Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation
to support and anchor mechanical materials and equipment.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR MECHANICAL
23 05 00 - 9
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
3.7
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
GROUTING
A.
Mix and install grout for mechanical equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other
equipment base plates, and anchors.
B.
Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.
C.
Provide forms as required for placement of grout.
D.
Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout.
E.
Place grout, completely filling equipment bases.
F.
Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment.
G.
Place grout around anchors.
H.
Cure placed grout.
3.8
WORKMANSHIP
A.
Furnish the services of an experienced full time field superintendent who shall be constantly in
charge of the installation of the work provided under this Division. Superintendent shall have
demonstrated experience with projects of comparable size and complexity and shall be
approved by the Architect.
B.
The quality of workmanship required in the execution of the work shall be the finest and highest
obtainable, working with the materials specified. Workmanship shall be satisfactory to the
Architect and his decision as to acceptable quality is final.
3.9
EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS
A.
Equipment shall be installed and connected in accordance with the best engineering practice
and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Auxiliary piping,
valves, and electric connections recommended by the manufacturer or required for proper
operation shall be provided.
B.
See Division 26 for electrical power wiring and final connections to motors and equipment
requiring electric service. Temperature control wiring between starters and controlling devices
and interlock wiring are specified in Division 23, Section “HVAC Instrumentation and Controls”.
Verify that the proper power wiring services are installed prior to starting the equipment
specified in Division 23.
3.10
CUTTING AND PATCHING
A.
See Division 01 for general requirements.
B.
Cutting and patching of building materials shall be performed in a neat and workmanlike
manner. Surfaces, which are damaged by the Contractor, shall be repaired or provided with
new materials. Patching and materials shall be done with materials and methods similar to
adjacent work, subject to approval of the Architect. Structural members shall not be cut or
penetrated unless indicated on the drawings and verified in the field with the Contractor. Holes
cut through concrete and/or masonry to accommodate work under this Division shall be cut by
reciprocating or rotary non-percussive methods.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR MECHANICAL
23 05 00 - 10
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
3.11
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
SURVEYS AND MEASUREMENTS
A.
Base measurements, both horizontal and vertical, from established benchmarks. Work shall
agree with these established lines and levels. Verify measurements at site and check
correctness of same as related to the work.
B.
Should the Contractor discover any discrepancy between actual measurements or conditions,
and those indicated which prevent following good practice or the intent of the drawings and
specifications, he shall not proceed with his work until he has received instruction from the
Architect.
3.12
RIGGING OF EQUIPMENT
A.
Verify that rigging path for equipment prior to start of work or ordering of materials. Verify
accessways and weight carrying capacity of building features, including elevators, floors, walls,
ceilings, roofs, and related features. When equipment or sections of equipment are larger than
available accessways, equipment shall be ordered in a knocked-down configuration for
re-assembly at the site. Submit in writing to Architect where problems are encountered that
may prohibit rigging of equipment into space with the proposed solutions.
B.
Use planking or cribbing as required to protect adjoining construction from damage. Protect
equipment from damage until construction is completed.
3.13
HANDLING AND STORAGE OF MATERIALS
A.
See Division 01 Section “Product Requirements” for general requirements.
B.
Proper and suitable tools, equipment and appliances for the safe and convenient handling and
placing of materials and equipment shall be used. During loading, unloading, and placing, care
shall be taken in handling the equipment and materials so that no equipment or materials,
including Owner furnished, are damaged.
C.
Mechanical equipment delivered to the job site shall be stored under roof or other approved
covering, on pedestals above the ground. Enclosures for equipment shall be weatherproof. Any
motors involved in the work that are not totally enclosed shall be stored in a heated area with a
minimum temperature of 50°F. Valves shall be stored under roof on wood pedestals above
ground. Pipe for project use shall be stored above grade and in such a manner to prevent
entrance of foreign materials. Pipe shall be fitted with end caps or seals to prevent moisture
and debris from entering pipe. Insulation shall be stored under roof or in trailers, adequately
protected from the weather.
Follow written instructions and recommendations of the
manufacturer and requirements of the Architect in lubrication, protection and maintenance of
equipment during storage.
D.
If materials or equipment are found to be in poor condition at the time of being installed, the
Architect may, at his discretion, order the Contractor to furnish and install new equipment or
materials at no cost to the Owner.
3.14
CLEANING
A.
See Division 01, Section “Closeout Procedures.”
B.
Thoroughly clean exposed surfaces of equipment and material and leave in a neat, clean
condition ready for painting. Finished painting will be as specified in Division 09 Section
“Interior Painting”.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR MECHANICAL
23 05 00 - 11
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
3.15
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
ACCESSIBILITY
A.
Locate equipment that must be serviced, operated or maintained, in fully accessible positions.
Equipment shall include, but not be limited to, terminal units, coils, valves, motors, controllers,
ATC dampers, drain points, cleanouts, etc. Provide adequate means to access equipment for
repair and maintenance including capabilities for platforms, fall protection systems, and
anchorage points.
B.
The Contractor at no expense to the Owner shall rework equipment deemed inaccessible by the
Architect.
END OF SECTION 23 05 00
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR MECHANICAL
23 05 00 - 12
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
SECTION 23 05 13 - COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
Section includes general requirements for single-phase and polyphase, general-purpose,
horizontal, small and medium, squirrel-cage induction motors for use on ac power systems up to
600 V and installed at equipment manufacturer's factory or shipped separately by equipment
manufacturer for field installation.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4
Factory-Installed Motor:
component of equipment.
A motor installed by motorized-equipment manufacturer as a
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
1.5
Product Data: For each type and size of motor, provide nameplate data and ratings and
enclosure type.
For each factory-installed motor or motor-driven equipment including at least the following:
1.
Unit or motor data defining efficiency and power factor at incremental loads (10% or
smaller increments) from full load to no load without power factor correction.
2.
Data to enable calculation of motor load at design duty.
3.
Value of Full Load Amperes (FLA).
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
B.
Comply with NFPA 70.
1.6
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices and features that comply
with the following:
1.
Compatible with the following:
a.
Magnetic controllers.
2.
Matched to torque and horsepower requirements of the load.
3.
Matched to ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence.
COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT
23 05 13 - 1
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MOTOR REQUIREMENTS
A.
2.2
Motor requirements apply to factory-installed motors except as follows:
1.
Different ratings, performance, or characteristics for motor are specified in another
Section.
2.
Motorized-equipment manufacturer requires ratings, performance, or characteristics,
other than those specified in this Section, to meet performance specified.
MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS
A.
Motors 1/2 HP and Larger: Three phase.
B.
Motors Smaller Than 1/2 HP: Single phase.
C.
Frequency Rating: 60 Hz.
D.
Voltage Rating: NEMA standard voltage selected to operate on nominal circuit voltage to which
motor is connected.
E.
Service Factor: 1.15 for open drip proof motors; 1.0 for totally enclosed motors.
F.
Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 105 deg F and at altitude of 3300 feet above
sea level.
G.
Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected
loads at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating
sequence, and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor.
H.
Enclosure: Open drip proof, unless indicated otherwise.
I.
Speed: 1750 RPM, unless indicated otherwise.
2.3
POLYPHASE MOTORS
A.
Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor.
B.
Efficiency: Premium, as defined in NEMA MG 1.
C.
Stator: Copper windings, unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Rotor: Squirrel cage, unless otherwise indicated.
E.
Bearings: Double-shielded, prelubricated ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.
F.
Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating, unless otherwise indicated.
G.
Insulation: Class F, unless otherwise indicated.
H.
Code Letter Designation:
1.
Motors Smaller Than 15 HP: Manufacturer's standard starting characteristic.
I.
Enclosure: Cast iron or rolled steel.
1.
Finish: Enamel.
COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT
23 05 13 - 2
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
2.4
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS
A.
Type: One of the following, to suit starting torque and requirements of specific motor
application:
1.
Permanent-split capacitor.
2.
Split-phase start, capacitor run.
3.
Capacitor start, capacitor run.
B.
Shaded-Pole Motors: For motors 1/20 hp and smaller only.
C.
Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to motor
when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor
insulation. Thermal-protection device shall automatically reset when motor temperature returns
to normal range.
D.
Bearings: Ball type for belt-connected motors and other motors with high radial forces on motor
shaft; sealed, prelubricated-sleeve type for other single-phase motors.
PART 3 - EXECUTION – Not used
END OF SECTION 23 05 13
COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT
23 05 13 - 3
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
SECTION 23 05 29 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR MECHANICAL PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following hangers and supports for mechanical system piping and
equipment:
1.
Steel pipe hangers and supports.
2.
Trapeze pipe hangers.
3.
Metal framing systems.
4.
Thermal-hanger shield inserts.
5.
Fastener systems.
6.
Equipment supports.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
Division 21 Section "Wet-Pipe Sprinkler Systems" for pipe hangers for fire-protection
piping.
2.
Division 23 Section "Mechanical Vibration Control" for vibration isolation devices and
additional hanger and support requirements.
3.
Division 23 Section "Metal Ducts" for duct hangers and supports.
4.
Division 23 Section “Refrigerant Piping” for additional hanger information concerning
refrigerant piping.
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A.
MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society for The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.
B.
Terminology: As defined in MSS SP-90, "Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers and
Supports."
1.4
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Design supports for multiple pipes, including pipe stands, capable of supporting combined
weight of supported systems, and system contents.
B.
Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported
equipment and connected systems and components.
1.5
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For the following:
1.
Steel pipe hangers and supports.
2.
Thermal-hanger shield inserts.
3.
Powder-actuated fastener systems.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR MECHANICAL PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
23 05 29 - 1
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
B.
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the
following:
1.
Trapeze pipe hangers. Include Product Data for components.
2.
Metal framing systems. Include Product Data for components.
3.
Pipe stands. Include Product Data for components.
4.
Equipment supports.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.2
In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
manufacturers specified.
STEEL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A.
Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components. Refer to Part 3
"Hanger and Support Applications" Article for where to use specific hanger and support types.
B.
Manufacturers:
1.
B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.
2.
Grinnell Corp.
3.
National Pipe Hanger Corporation.
4.
Piping Technology & Products, Inc.
C.
Galvanized, Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped.
D.
Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner.
2.3
TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS
A.
2.4
Description: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made from
structural-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U-bolts.
METAL FRAMING SYSTEMS
A.
Description: MFMA-3, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made of steel channels
and other components.
B.
Manufacturers:
1.
B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.
2.
Power-Strut Div.; Tyco International, Ltd.
3.
Thomas & Betts Corporation.
4.
Unistrut Corp.; Tyco International, Ltd.
C.
Coatings: Manufacturer's standard finish, unless bare metal surfaces are indicated.
D.
Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR MECHANICAL PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
23 05 29 - 2
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
2.5
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
THERMAL-HANGER SHIELD INSERTS
A.
Description: 100-psig- minimum, compressive-strength insulation insert encased in sheet metal
shield.
B.
Manufacturers:
1.
Carpenter & Paterson, Inc.
2.
Erico/Michigan Hanger Co.
3.
PHS Industries, Inc.
4.
Pipe Shields, Inc.
5.
Rilco Manufacturing Company, Inc.
6.
Value Engineered Products, Inc.
C.
Insulation-Insert Material for Cold Piping: Water-repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium
silicate or ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with vapor barrier.
D.
Insulation-Insert Material for Hot Piping: Water-repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium
silicate or ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass.
E.
For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe.
F.
For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.
G.
Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient
air temperature.
2.6
FASTENER SYSTEMS
A.
Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened Portland cement
concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and
building materials where used.
1.
Manufacturers:
a.
Hilti, Inc.
b.
ITW Ramset/Red Head.
c.
Masterset Fastening Systems, Inc.
B.
Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type zinc-coated steel, for use in hardened
Portland cement concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported
loads and building materials where used.
1.
Manufacturers:
a.
B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.
b.
Hilti, Inc.
c.
ITW Ramset/Red Head.
2.7
EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A.
2.8
Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural-steel
shapes.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.
B.
Grout: Refer to Division 23 Section “Common Work Results for Mechanical.”
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR MECHANICAL PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
23 05 29 - 3
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS
A.
Specific hanger and support requirements are specified in Sections specifying piping systems
and equipment.
B.
Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in
piping system Sections.
C.
Use hangers and supports with galvanized, metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will
not have field-applied finish.
D.
Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in
direct contact with copper tubing.
E.
Size hangers and supports to match OD of pipe insulation.
F.
Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in
piping system Sections, install the following types:
1.
Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or
insulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.
2.
Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of
pipes, NPS 3/4 to NPS 24, requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches of insulation.
3.
Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 4): For suspension of cold and hot pipes, NPS 1/2 to
NPS 24, if little or no insulation is required.
4.
Pipe Hangers (MSS Type 5): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 4, to allow offcenter closure for hanger installation before pipe erection.
5.
Adjustable Swivel Split- or Solid-Ring Hangers (MSS Type 6): For suspension of
noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/4 to NPS 8.
6.
Adjustable, Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulated
stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.
7.
Adjustable Band Hangers (MSS Type 9): For suspension of noninsulated stationary
pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.
8.
Adjustable Swivel-Ring Band Hangers (MSS Type 10): For suspension of noninsulated
stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 2.
9.
Split Pipe-Ring with or without Turnbuckle-Adjustment Hangers (MSS Type 11): For
suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/8 to NPS 8.
10.
Extension Hinged or 2-Bolt Split Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 12): For suspension of
noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/8 to NPS 3.
11.
U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.
12.
Clips (MSS Type 26): For support of insulated pipes not subject to expansion or
contraction.
13.
Single Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1 to NPS 30, from 2
rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur.
G.
Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Sections, install the following types:
1.
Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads.
2.
Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.
3.
Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11, split pipe rings.
4.
Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various types of
building attachments.
5.
Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR MECHANICAL PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
23 05 29 - 4
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
H.
Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Sections, install the following types:
1.
Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend
pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.
2.
Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required.
I.
Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Sections, install the following types:
1.
Steel Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): Fill interior voids with insulation
that matches adjoining insulation.
2.
Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.
J.
Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping
system Sections, install the following types:
1.
Restraint-Control Devices (MSS Type 47): Where indicated to control piping movement.
2.
Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not exceed
1-1/4 inches.
3.
Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41 roll hanger with
springs.
K.
Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe hanger selections and applications that are not
specified in piping system Sections.
L.
Comply with MFMA-102 for metal framing system selections and applications that are not
specified in piping system Sections.
M.
Use powder-actuated fasteners or mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building
attachments where required in concrete construction.
3.2
HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A.
Trapeze Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Arrange for
grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping and support together on field-fabricated trapeze
pipe hangers.
1.
Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or
install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified above for individual
pipe hangers.
2.
Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel shapes selected for loads being supported.
B.
Metal Framing System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping and support
together on field-assembled metal framing systems.
C.
Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger and provide sheet metal shield for
insulated piping.
D.
Fastener System Installation:
1.
Install powder-actuated fasteners for use in lightweight concrete or concrete slabs less
than 4 inches thick in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use
operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners
according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual.
2.
Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely
cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR MECHANICAL PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
23 05 29 - 5
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
E.
Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and
other accessories.
F.
Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal movement of piping systems
G.
Install building attachments within concrete slabs.
H.
Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so piping live and dead loads and stresses from
movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.
I.
Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so maximum
pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.1 (for power piping) and ASME B31.9 (for building
services piping) are not exceeded.
J.
Insulated Piping: Comply with the following:
1.
Attach clamps and spacers to piping.
a.
Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through
insulation.
b.
Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield
insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.
c.
Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to ASME B31.1 for power piping and
ASME B31.9 for building services piping.
2.
Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is
indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
a.
Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include sheet metal shield
on exterior of insulation jacket.
3.
Install thermal-hanger shield inserts on cold piping with vapor barrier. Include sheet
metal shield on exterior of insulation jacket.
4.
Sheet Metal Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:
a.
NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long.
b.
NPS 4: 12 inches long.
5.
Insert Material for Type 39 Saddles: Length at least as long as protective shield.
6.
Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.
3.3
EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A.
3.4
Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make smooth bearing surface.
METAL FABRICATIONS
A.
Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and equipment
supports.
B.
Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.
3.5
ADJUSTING
A.
Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve
indicated slope of pipe.
B.
Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR MECHANICAL PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
23 05 29 - 6
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
3.6
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
PAINTING
A.
Touch Up: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded
areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in Division 9 painting sections.
B.
Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply
galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION 23 05 29
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR MECHANICAL PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
23 05 29 - 7
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
SECTION 23 05 48 - MECHANICAL VIBRATION CONTROL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
Isolation mounts.
2.
Elastomeric hangers.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
Division 23 Section “Refrigerant Piping” for piping flexible connectors.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For the following:
1.
Include rated load, rated deflection, and overload capacity for each vibration isolation
device.
B.
Welding certificates.
C.
Field quality-control test reports.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding
Code - Steel."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
VIBRATION ISOLATORS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
Amber/Booth Company, Inc.
2.
Kinetics Noise Control.
3.
Mason Industries.
4.
Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc.
B.
Mounts: Double-deflection type, with molded, oil-resistant neoprene isolator elements with
factory-drilled, encapsulated top plate for bolting to equipment and with baseplate for bolting to
structure. Color-code or otherwise identify to indicate capacity range.
1.
Materials: Cast-ductile-iron or welded steel housing containing two separate and
opposing, oil-resistant neoprene elements that prevent central threaded element and
attachment hardware from contacting the housing during normal operation.
MECHANICAL VIBRATION CONTROL
23 05 48 - 1
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
2.
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
Neoprene: Shock-absorbing materials compounded according to the standard for bridgebearing neoprene as defined by AASHTO.
a.
Maximum Durometer: 70.
C.
Elastomeric Hangers: Double-deflection type, fitted with molded, oil-resistant elastomeric
isolator elements bonded to steel housings with threaded connections for hanger rods. Colorcode or otherwise identify to indicate capacity range.
1.
Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for a
maximum of 30 degrees of angular hanger-rod misalignment without binding or reducing
isolation efficiency.
2.
Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene. Steel-washer-reinforced
cup to support spring and bushing projecting through bottom of frame.
3.
Maximum Durometer: 70.
D.
Resilient Washer-Bushings: Molded, oil resistant bridge bearing neoprene.
2.2
FACTORY FINISHES
A.
Finish (where field painting of mechanical items is specified in Division 09): Manufacturer's
standard prime-coat finish ready for field painting.
B.
Finish (where field painting of mechanical items is not specified in Division 09): Manufacturer's
standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested equipment before shipping.
1.
Powder coating on springs.
2.
All hardware shall be galvanized.
3.
Hot-dip galvanize metal components on isolators (except springs) for exterior use.
4.
Baked enamel or powder coat for metal components on isolators for interior use.
5.
Color-code or otherwise mark vibration isolation and wind-control devices to indicate
capacity range.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation and wind-control devices for
compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting
performance.
B.
Examine roughing-in of reinforcement and cast-in-place anchors to verify actual locations before
installation.
C.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
VIBRATION-CONTROL DEVICE INSTALLATION
A.
Install resilient washer-bushing assemblies for anchor bolts for floor-mounted equipment,
arranged to provide resilient media between anchor bolt and mounting hole in concrete floor.
B.
Drilled-in Anchors:
1.
Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling holes for
anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcing or embedded items during coring or drilling.
Notify the structural engineer if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are
encountered during drilling. Locate and avoid prestressed tendons, electrical and
telecommunications conduit, and gas lines.
MECHANICAL VIBRATION CONTROL
23 05 48 - 2
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, or grout has achieved full
design strength.
Wedge Anchors: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation. Heavy-duty
sleeve anchors shall be installed with sleeve fully engaged in the structural element to
which anchor is to be fastened.
Adhesive Anchors: Clean holes to remove loose material and drilling dust prior to
installation of adhesive. Place adhesive in holes proceeding from the bottom of the hole
and progressing toward the surface in such a manner as to avoid introduction of air
pockets in the adhesive.
Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque, using a torque wrench.
Install zinc-coated steel anchors for interior and stainless-steel anchors for exterior
applications.
C.
Align vibration isolators squarely above or below mounting points of the supported equipment.
D.
For equipment with bases, locate isolators on the sides of the base that are parallel to the
equipment shaft.
E.
Position vibration isolation hangers as high as possible in the hanger rod assembly but not in
contact with the building structure. Provide 1-inch minimum clearance between hanger housing
and structure above. Provide side clearance for hanger housings to allow a full 360-degree
rotation about the rod axis without contacting any object.
F.
Parallel pipes may be hung together on a trapeze that is isolated from the structure. Isolator
deflections must equal the greatest deflection for those pipes if isolated individually. Do not mix
isolated and non-isolated pipes on the same trapeze.
G.
Do not hang or support piping, conduit or mechanical equipment on other equipment, pipes or
ductwork installed on vibration isolators. Maintain 2-inch clearance between isolated equipment
and walls, ceilings and other equipment. Do not allow drain piping connected to vibrationisolated equipment to contact the building structure or other non-isolated systems unless it is
resiliently mounted.
H.
Flexible Piping Connectors: Provide flexible piping connectors in piping where it is connected to
vibration-isolated equipment. Install these connectors between the equipment and the first
associated pipe support or hanger, except where supports connect to an inertia base common
to the equipment.
I.
The installation or use of vibration isolators shall not cause any change of position of piping
which will result in stresses in piping connections or misalignment of shafts or bearings. In
order to meet this objective, maintain equipment and piping in a rigid position during installation.
Do not transfer the load to the isolators until the installation is complete and under full
operational load.
3.3
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing Agency: Engage the isolator manufacturer or their authorized representative to perform
tests and inspections.
B.
Tests and Inspections:
1.
Provide evidence of recent calibration of test equipment by a testing agency acceptable
to authorities having jurisdiction.
2.
Schedule test with Owner, through Architect, and with at least seven days' advance
notice.
MECHANICAL VIBRATION CONTROL
23 05 48 - 3
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
3.
4.
5.
6.
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
Test equipment isolators and first four associated vibration isolation hangers from each
equipment connection.
Measure isolator restraint clearance.
Measure isolator deflection.
Inspect vibration control devices and remove paint splatters, spots, dirt, and debris.
C.
Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
D.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.4
3.5
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust isolators after piping system is at operating weight.
B.
Adjust restraints to permit free movement of equipment within normal mode of operation.
MECHANICAL VIBRATION-CONTROL DEVICE SCHEDULE
ITEM DESCRIPTION
ISOLATOR AND BASE TYPE
MIN. STATIC
DEFLECTION
(INCHES)
Slab On Floor
Grade
Span
Elastomeric Hangers
(suspended); Isolation Mounts
(floor mounted)
0.35
0.35
Isolation Mounts
0.35
0.35
PIPING
Generally, after first three supports,
within 50 feet of isolated equipment, or
within mechanical room (whichever is
greater)
FLOOR MOUNTED SPLIT-SYSTEM
INDOOR UNIT
END OF SECTION 23 05 48
MECHANICAL VIBRATION CONTROL
23 05 48 - 4
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
SECTION 23 05 53 - IDENTIFICATION FOR MECHANICAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
This Section includes the following mechanical identification materials and their installation:
1.
Equipment nameplates.
2.
Equipment markers.
3.
Pipe markers.
4.
Duct markers.
5.
Stencils.
6.
Warning tags.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Valve numbering scheme.
C.
Valve Schedules: For each piping system. Furnish extra copies (in addition to mounted copies)
to include in maintenance manuals.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.5
ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME A13.1, "Scheme for the Identification of Piping
Systems," for letter size, length of color field, colors, and viewing angles of identification devices
for piping.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of
surfaces where devices are to be applied.
B.
Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors.
C.
Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
Brady Corporation.
2.
Marking Services, Inc.
3.
Seton Identification Products.
IDENTIFICATION FOR MECHANICAL
23 05 53 - 1
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
2.2
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION DEVICES
A.
Equipment Nameplates: Metal, with data engraved or stamped, factory installed on equipment.
1.
Data:
a.
Manufacturer, product name, model number, and serial number.
b.
Capacity, operating and power characteristics, and essential data.
c.
Labels of tested compliances.
2.
Location: Accessible and visible.
3.
Fasteners: As required to mount on equipment.
B.
Equipment Markers: Engraved, color-coded laminated plastic. Include contact-type, permanent
adhesive, or self-tapping stainless steel screws.
1.
Terminology: Match schedules as closely as possible.
2.
Data:
a.
Name and plan number.
b.
Equipment service.
c.
Design capacity.
d.
Other design parameters such as pressure drop, entering and leaving conditions,
and speed.
3.
Size: 2-1/2 by 4 inches for control devices, dampers, and valves; 4-1/2 by 6 inches for
equipment.
2.3
PIPING IDENTIFICATION DEVICES
A.
Manufactured Pipe Markers, General: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering indicating service,
and showing direction of flow.
1.
Colors: Comply with ASME A13.1, unless otherwise indicated.
2.
Lettering: Use piping system terms indicated and abbreviate only as necessary for each
application length.
3.
Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 Inches: Full-band pipe markers
extending 360 degrees around pipe at each location.
4.
Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate both directions; or
as separate unit on each pipe marker to indicate direction of flow.
B.
Pretensioned Pipe Markers: Precoiled semirigid plastic formed to cover full circumference of
pipe and to attach to pipe without adhesive.
C.
Shaped Pipe Markers: Preformed semirigid plastic formed to partially cover circumference of
pipe and to attach to pipe with mechanical fasteners that do not penetrate insulation vapor
barrier.
D.
Self-Adhesive Pipe Markers:
back.
E.
Plastic Tape: Continuously printed, vinyl tape at least 3 mils thick with pressure-sensitive,
permanent-type, self-adhesive back.
1.
Width for Markers on Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 Inches: 3/4 inch
minimum.
2.4
Plastic with pressure-sensitive, permanent-type, self-adhesive
STENCILS
A.
Stencils: Prepared with letter sizes according to ASME A13.1 for piping; minimum letter height
of 1-1/4 inches for ducts; and minimum letter height of 3/4 inch for access panel and door
markers, and similar operational instructions.
1.
Stencil Material: Metal or fiberboard.
IDENTIFICATION FOR MECHANICAL
23 05 53 - 2
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
2.
3.
B.
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
Stencil Paint: Exterior, gloss, acrylic enamel black, unless otherwise indicated. Paint
may be in pressurized spray-can form.
Identification Paint: Exterior, acrylic enamel in colors according to ASME A13.1, unless
otherwise indicated.
Warning Tags: Preprinted or partially preprinted, accident-prevention tags; of plasticized card
stock with matte finish suitable for writing.
1.
Size: 3 by 5-1/4 inches minimum.
2.
Fasteners: Brass grommet and wire.
3.
Nomenclature: Large-size primary caption such as DANGER, CAUTION, or DO NOT
OPERATE.
4.
Color: Yellow background with black lettering.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
APPLICATIONS, GENERAL
A.
3.2
Products specified are for applications referenced in other Division 23 Sections. If more than
single-type material, device, or label is specified for listed applications, selection is Installer's
option.
EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
A.
Install and permanently fasten equipment nameplates on each major item of mechanical
equipment that does not have nameplate or has nameplate that is damaged or located where
not easily visible. Locate nameplates where accessible and visible. Include nameplates for the
following general categories of equipment:
1.
Fans.
2.
Split-systems (outdoor and indoor Unit).
B.
Install equipment markers with permanent adhesive on or near each major item of mechanical
equipment.
1.
Letter Size: Minimum 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24
inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering
for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the
size of principal lettering.
2.
Data: Distinguish among multiple units, indicate operational requirements, indicate safety
and emergency precautions, warn of hazards and improper operations, and identify units.
3.
Locate markers where accessible and visible. Include markers for the following general
categories of equipment:
a.
Fans.
b.
Split-systems (outdoor and indoor unit).
3.3
PIPING IDENTIFICATION
A.
Install manufactured pipe markers indicating service on each piping system. Install with flow
indication arrows showing direction of flow.
1.
Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 Inches: Pretensioned pipe markers.
Use size to ensure a tight fit.
2.
Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 Inches (Contractor’s Option): Selfadhesive pipe markers. Use color-coded, self-adhesive plastic tape, at least 3/4 inch
wide, lapped at least 1-1/2 inches at both ends of pipe marker, and covering full
circumference of pipe.
IDENTIFICATION FOR MECHANICAL
23 05 53 - 3
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
B.
3.4
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
Locate pipe markers and color bands where piping is exposed in finished spaces as follows:
1.
Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and nonaccessible enclosures.
2.
Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.
3.
Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet in
areas of congested piping and equipment.
DUCT IDENTIFICATION
A.
Install stenciled markers on ductwork:
1.
Stenciled Duct Marker: Stenciled markers, showing designation of equipment serving
ducts (AHU-1, etc.), service (supply-air, etc.) and direction of flow.
B.
Locate markers near points where ducts enter into concealed spaces.
3.5
WARNING-TAG INSTALLATION
A.
3.6
Write required message on, and attach warning tags to, equipment and other items where
required.
ADJUSTING
A.
3.7
Relocate mechanical identification materials and devices that have become visually blocked by
other work.
CLEANING
A.
Clean faces of mechanical identification devices.
END OF SECTION 23 05 53
IDENTIFICATION FOR MECHANICAL
23 05 53 - 4
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
SECTION 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
This Section includes TAB to produce design objectives for the following:
1.
Air Systems:
a.
Constant-volume air systems.
2.
HVAC equipment quantitative-performance settings.
3.
Reporting results of activities and procedures specified in this Section.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Adjust: To regulate fluid flow rate and air patterns at the terminal equipment, such as to reduce
fan speed or adjust a damper.
B.
Balance: To proportion flows within the distribution system, including submains, branches, and
terminals, according to indicated quantities.
C.
Barrier or Boundary: Construction, either vertical or horizontal, such as walls, floors, and
ceilings that are designed and constructed to restrict the movement of airflow, smoke, odors,
and other pollutants.
D.
Draft: A current of air, when referring to localized effect caused by one or more factors of high
air velocity, low ambient temperature, or direction of airflow, whereby more heat is withdrawn
from a person's skin than is normally dissipated.
E.
NC: Noise criteria.
F.
Procedure: An approach to and execution of a sequence of work operations to yield repeatable
results.
G.
RC: Room criteria.
H.
Report Forms: Test data sheets for recording test data in logical order.
I.
Static Head: The pressure due to the weight of the fluid above the point of measurement. In a
closed system, static head is equal on both sides of the pump.
J.
Suction Head: The height of fluid surface above the centerline of the pump on the suction side.
K.
System Effect: A phenomenon that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause
reduced capacities in all or part of a system.
L.
System Effect Factors: Allowances used to calculate a reduction of the performance ratings of
a fan when installed under conditions different from those presented when the fan was
performance tested.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
23 05 93 - 1
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
M.
TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.
N.
Terminal: A point where the controlled medium, such as fluid or energy, enters or leaves the
distribution system.
O.
Test: A procedure to determine quantitative performance of systems or equipment.
P.
Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing (TAB) Firm:
reporting TAB procedures.
1.4
The entity responsible for performing and
SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: Within 45 days from the commencement of the construction phase, submit 6
copies of evidence that TAB firm and this Project's TAB team members meet the qualifications
specified in "Quality Assurance" Article. Submittal shall be directed to Construction Manager.
B.
Contract Documents Examination Report: Within 45 days from the commencement of the
construction phase, submit 6 copies of the Contract Documents review report as specified in
Part 3. Submittal shall be directed to Construction Manager.
C.
Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 90 days from the commencement of the construction
phase, submit 6 copies of TAB strategies and step-by-step procedures as specified in Part 3
"Preparation" Article. Include a complete set of report forms intended for use on this Project.
Submittal shall be directed to Construction Manager.
D.
Certified TAB Reports: Submit two copies of reports prepared, as specified in this Section, on
approved forms certified by TAB firm. Submit final report prior to final acoustical checkout.
E.
Certified duct pressure test reports.
F.
Warranties specified in this Section.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
TAB Firm Qualifications: Engage a TAB firm certified by either AABC or NEBB.
B.
TAB Conference: Meet with Owner's and Architect's representatives on approval of TAB
strategies and procedures plan to develop a mutual understanding of the details. Ensure the
participation of TAB team members, equipment manufacturers' authorized service
representatives, HVAC controls installers, and other support personnel. Provide seven days'
advance notice of scheduled meeting time and location.
1.
Agenda Items: Include at least the following:
a.
Submittal distribution requirements.
b.
The Contract Documents examination report.
c.
TAB plan.
d.
Work schedule and Project-site access requirements.
e.
Coordination and cooperation of trades and subcontractors.
f.
Coordination of documentation and communication flow.
C.
Certification of TAB Reports: Certify TAB field data reports. This certification includes the
following:
1.
Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified TAB
reports.
2.
Certify that TAB team complied with approved TAB plan and the procedures specified
and referenced in this Specification.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
23 05 93 - 2
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
3.
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
Certify that duct pressure testing has been completed in accordance with requirements of
Division 23 Section “Metal Ducts.”
D.
TAB Report Forms: Use standard forms from AABC's "National Standards for Testing and
Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems", NEBB's "Procedural Standards
for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems", or SMACNA's "HVAC
Systems - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing."
E.
Instrumentation Type, Quantity, and Accuracy: As described in AABC's "National Standards for
Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems or NEBB's
"Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems,"
Section II, "Required Instrumentation for NEBB Certification."
F.
Instrumentation Calibration: Calibrate instruments at least every six months or more frequently
if required by instrument manufacturer.
1.
Keep an updated record of instrument calibration that indicates date of calibration and the
name of party performing instrument calibration.
1.6
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
1.7
Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy the site and existing building during entire TAB
period. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with Owner's
operations.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate the efforts of factory-authorized service representatives for systems and equipment,
HVAC controls installers, and other mechanics to operate HVAC systems and equipment to
support and assist TAB activities.
B.
Notice: Provide seven days' advance notice for each test. Include scheduled test dates and
times.
C.
Perform TAB after leakage and pressure tests on air and water distribution systems have been
satisfactorily completed.
1.8
WARRANTY
A.
Provide one of the following:
1.
National Project Performance Guarantee: Provide a guarantee on NEBB or AABC forms
stating that AABC will assist in completing requirements of the Contract Documents if
TAB firm fails to comply with the Contract Documents. Guarantee includes the following
provisions:
a.
The certified TAB firm has tested and balanced systems according to the Contract
Documents.
b.
Systems are balanced to optimum performance capabilities within design and
installation limits.
2.
Special Guarantee: Provide a guarantee on NEBB forms stating that NEBB will assist in
completing requirements of the Contract Documents if TAB firm fails to comply with the
Contract Documents. Guarantee shall include the following provisions:
a.
The certified TAB firm has tested and balanced systems according to the Contract
Documents.
b.
Systems are balanced to optimum performance capabilities within design and
installation limits.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
23 05 93 - 3
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover
conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment.
1.
Contract Documents are defined in the General and Supplementary Conditions of
Contract.
2.
Verify that balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flowcontrol devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers, are required
by the Contract Documents. Verify that quantities and locations of these balancing
devices are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system
and equipment operation.
B.
Examine approved submittal data of HVAC systems and equipment.
C.
Examine Project Record Documents described in Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures."
D.
Examine design data, including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design assumptions
for environmental conditions and systems' output, and statements of philosophies and
assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls.
E.
Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves. Relate performance
data to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects that can create undesired
or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system. Calculate
system effect factors to reduce performance ratings of HVAC equipment when installed under
conditions different from those presented when the equipment was performance tested at the
factory. To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and charts found in AMCA 201,
"Fans and Systems," Sections 7 through 10; or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems--Duct Design,"
Sections 5 and 6. Compare this data with the design data and installed conditions.
F.
Examine system and equipment installations to verify that they are complete and that testing,
cleaning, adjusting, and commissioning specified in individual Sections have been performed.
G.
Examine system and equipment test reports.
H.
Examine HVAC system and equipment installations to verify that indicated balancing devices,
such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and
fittings, and manual volume dampers, are properly installed, and that their locations are
accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and equipment
operation.
I.
Examine systems for functional deficiencies that cannot be corrected by adjusting and
balancing.
J.
Examine HVAC equipment to ensure that clean filters have been installed, bearings are
greased, belts are aligned and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for
operation.
K.
Examine terminal units, such as variable-air-volume boxes, to verify that they are accessible
and their controls are connected and functioning.
L.
Examine heat-transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
23 05 93 - 4
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
M.
Examine equipment for installation and for properly operating safety interlocks and controls.
N.
Examine automatic temperature system components to verify the following:
1.
Dampers, valves, and other controlled devices are operated by the intended controller.
2.
Dampers and valves are in the position indicated by the controller.
3.
Integrity of valves and dampers for free and full operation and for tightness of fully closed
and fully open positions. This includes dampers in mixing boxes and variable-air-volume
terminals.
4.
Automatic modulating and shutoff valves, including two-way valves and three-way mixing
and diverting valves, are properly connected.
5.
Thermostats and humidistats are located to avoid adverse effects of sunlight, drafts, and
cold walls.
6.
Sensors are located to sense only the intended conditions.
7.
Sequence of operation for control modes is according to the Contract Documents.
8.
Controller set points are set at indicated values.
9.
Interlocked systems are operating.
10.
Changeover from heating to cooling mode occurs according to indicated values.
O.
Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Add
additional balancing devices if required. Observe and record system reactions to changes in
conditions. Record default set points if different from indicated values.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Prepare a TAB plan that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures.
B.
Complete system readiness checks and prepare system readiness reports. Verify the following:
1.
Permanent electrical power wiring is complete and controllers are operational.
2.
Hydronic systems are filled, clean, and free of air.
3.
Automatic temperature-control systems are operational.
4.
Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed.
5.
Balance, smoke, and fire dampers are open.
6.
Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational.
7.
Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air-pattern adjustments are required and
access to balancing devices is provided.
8.
Windows and doors can be closed so indicated conditions for system operations can be
met.
3.3
GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING
A.
Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures
contained in AABC's "National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and
Air Conditioning Systems", NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing
of Environmental Systems", or SMACNA's "HVAC Systems - Testing, Adjusting, and
Balancing"; and this Section.
B.
Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the
minimum extent necessary to allow adequate performance of procedures. After testing and
balancing, close probe holes and patch insulation with new materials identical to those
removed. Restore vapor barrier and finish according to insulation Specifications for this Project.
C.
Mark equipment and balancing device settings with paint or other suitable, permanent
identification material, including damper-control positions, valve position indicators, fan-speedcontrol levers, and similar controls and devices, to show final settings.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
23 05 93 - 5
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
D.
3.4
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch-pound (IP) units.
GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS
A.
Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and
recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes with
required fan volumes.
B.
Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts.
C.
For variable-air-volume systems, develop a plan to simulate diversity.
D.
Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct airflow measurements.
E.
Check airflow patterns from the outside-air louvers and dampers and the return- and exhaust-air
dampers, through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers.
F.
Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.
G.
Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.
H.
Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path.
I.
Check for airflow blockages.
J.
Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning.
K.
Check for proper sealing of air-handling unit components.
L.
Check for proper sealing of air duct system.
3.5
PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS
A.
Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed listed by
fan manufacturer.
1.
Measure fan static pressures to determine actual static pressure as follows:
a.
Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as practicable and
upstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and transitions.
b.
Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection.
c.
Measure inlet static pressure of single-inlet fans in the inlet duct as near the fan as
possible, upstream from flexible connection and downstream from duct restrictions.
d.
Measure inlet static pressure of double-inlet fans through the wall of the plenum
that houses the fan.
2.
Measure static pressure across each component that makes up an air-handling unit,
rooftop unit, and other air-handling and -treating equipment.
a.
Simulate dirty filter operation and record the point at which maintenance personnel
must change filters.
3.
Compare design data with installed conditions to determine variations in design static
pressures versus actual static pressures. Compare actual system effect factors with
calculated system effect factors to identify where variations occur. Recommend
corrective action to align design and actual conditions.
4.
Obtain approval from Architect for adjustment of fan speed higher or lower than indicated
speed.
Make required adjustments to pulley sizes, motor sizes, and electrical
connections to accommodate fan-speed changes.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
23 05 93 - 6
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
5.
B.
3.6
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment
manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors.
Measure terminal outlets and inlets without making adjustments.
1.
Measure terminal outlets using a direct-reading hood or outlet manufacturer's written
instructions and calculating factors.
PROCEDURES FOR MOTORS
A.
3.7
Motors, 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following data:
1.
Manufacturer, model, and serial numbers.
2.
Motor horsepower rating.
3.
Motor rpm.
4.
Efficiency rating.
5.
Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase.
6.
Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase.
7.
Starter thermal-protection-element rating.
PROCEDURES FOR HEAT-TRANSFER COILS
A.
3.8
Refrigerant Coils: Measure the following data for each coil:
1.
Dry-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air.
2.
Wet-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air.
3.
Airflow.
4.
Air pressure drop.
5.
Refrigerant suction pressure and temperature.
PROCEDURES FOR TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENTS
A.
During TAB, report the need for adjustment in temperature regulation within the automatic
temperature-control system.
B.
Measure outside-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures.
3.9
TEMPERATURE-CONTROL VERIFICATION
A.
Verify that controllers are calibrated and commissioned.
B.
Check transmitter and controller locations and note conditions that would adversely affect
control functions.
C.
Record controller settings and note variances between set points and actual measurements.
D.
Check the operation of limiting controllers (i.e., high- and low-temperature controllers).
E.
Check free travel and proper operation of control devices such as damper and valve operators.
F.
Check the sequence of operation of control devices. Note device positions and correlate with
airflow and water flow measurements. Note the speed of response to input changes.
G.
Check the interaction of electrically operated switch transducers.
H.
Check the interaction of interlock and lockout systems.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
23 05 93 - 7
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
I.
Record voltages of power supply and controller output. Determine whether the system operates
on a grounded or nongrounded power supply.
J.
Note operation of electric actuators using spring return for proper fail-safe operations.
3.10
A.
3.11
TOLERANCES
Set HVAC system airflow and water flow rates within the following tolerances:
1.
Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus 5 to plus 10 percent.
2.
Air Outlets and Inlets: 0 to minus 10 percent.
3.
Chilled-Water Flow Rate: 0 to minus 10 percent.
4.
Heating-Water Flow Rate: 0 to minus 10 percent.
REPORTING
A.
Initial Construction-Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents as
specified in "Examination" Article, prepare a report on the adequacy of design for systems'
balancing devices. Recommend changes and additions to systems' balancing devices to
facilitate proper performance measuring and balancing. Recommend changes and additions to
HVAC systems and general construction to allow access for performance measuring and
balancing devices.
B.
Status Reports: As Work progresses, prepare reports to describe completed procedures,
procedures in progress, and scheduled procedures. Include a list of deficiencies and problems
found in systems being tested and balanced. Prepare a separate report for each system and
each building floor for systems serving multiple floors.
3.12
FINAL REPORT
A.
General: Typewritten, or computer printout in letter-quality font, on standard bond paper, in
three-ring binder, tabulated and divided into sections by tested and balanced systems.
B.
Include a certification sheet in front of binder signed and sealed by the certified testing and
balancing engineer.
1.
Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration.
C.
Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field report data, include the following:
1.
Pump curves.
2.
Fan curves.
3.
Manufacturers' test data.
4.
Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers.
5.
Other information relative to equipment performance, but do not include Shop Drawings
and Product Data.
D.
General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data in the final
report, as applicable:
1.
Title page.
2.
Name and address of TAB firm.
3.
Project name.
4.
Project location.
5.
Architect's name and address.
6.
Engineer's name and address.
7.
Contractor's name and address.
8.
Report date.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
23 05 93 - 8
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
Signature of TAB firm who certifies the report.
Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the report.
Number each page in the report.
Summary of contents including the following:
a.
Indicated versus final performance.
b.
Notable characteristics of systems.
c.
Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract
Documents.
Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment.
Data for terminal units, including manufacturer, type size, and fittings.
Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports varies from indicated values.
Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms including the following:
a.
Settings for outside-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers.
b.
Conditions of filters.
c.
Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions.
d.
Face and bypass damper settings at coils.
e.
Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter.
f.
Variable frequency controller settings for variable-air-volume systems.
g.
Settings for supply-air, static-pressure controller.
h.
Other system operating conditions that affect performance.
E.
System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems. Present
each system with single-line diagram and include the following:
1.
Quantities of outside, supply, return, and exhaust airflows.
2.
Water flow rates.
3.
Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes.
4.
Pipe and valve sizes and locations.
5.
Terminal units.
6.
Balancing stations.
7.
Position of balancing devices.
F.
Air-Handling Unit Test Reports: For air-handling units with coils, include the following:
1.
Unit Data: Include the following:
a.
Unit identification.
b.
Location.
c.
Make and type.
d.
Model number and unit size.
e.
Manufacturer's serial number.
f.
Unit arrangement and class.
g.
Discharge arrangement.
h.
Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.
i.
Sheave dimensions, center-to-center, and amount of adjustments in inches.
j.
Number of belts, make, and size.
k.
Number of filters, type, and size.
2.
Motor Data:
a.
Make and frame type and size.
b.
Horsepower and rpm.
c.
Volts, phase, and hertz.
d.
Full-load amperage and service factor.
e.
Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.
f.
Sheave dimensions, center-to-center, and amount of adjustments in inches.
3.
Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):
a.
Total airflow rate in cfm.
b.
Total system static pressure in inches wg.
c.
Fan rpm.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
23 05 93 - 9
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
Discharge static pressure in inches wg.
Filter static-pressure differential in inches wg.
Preheat coil static-pressure differential in inches wg.
Cooling coil static-pressure differential in inches wg.
Heating coil static-pressure differential in inches wg.
Outside airflow in cfm.
Return airflow in cfm.
Outside-air damper position.
Return-air damper position.
G.
Apparatus-Coil Test Reports:
1.
Coil Data:
a.
System identification.
b.
Location.
c.
Coil type.
d.
Number of rows.
e.
Fin spacing in fins per inch o.c.
f.
Make and model number.
g.
Face area in sq. ft..
h.
Tube size in NPS.
i.
Tube and fin materials.
j.
Circuiting arrangement.
2.
Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):
a.
Airflow rate in cfm.
b.
Average face velocity in fpm.
c.
Air pressure drop in inches wg.
d.
Outside-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F.
e.
Return-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F.
f.
Entering-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F.
g.
Leaving-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F.
h.
Water flow rate in gpm.
i.
Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig.
j.
Entering-water temperature in deg F.
k.
Leaving-water temperature in deg F.
l.
Refrigerant expansion valve and refrigerant types.
m.
Refrigerant suction pressure in psig.
n.
Refrigerant suction temperature in deg F.
H.
Fan Test Reports: For supply, return, and exhaust fans, include the following:
1.
Fan Data:
a.
System identification.
b.
Location.
c.
Make and type.
d.
Model number and size.
e.
Manufacturer's serial number.
f.
Arrangement and class.
g.
Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.
h.
Sheave dimensions, center-to-center, and amount of adjustments in inches.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
23 05 93 - 10
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
2.
3.
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
Motor Data:
a.
Make and frame type and size.
b.
Horsepower and rpm.
c.
Volts, phase, and hertz.
d.
Full-load amperage and service factor.
e.
Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.
f.
Sheave dimensions, center-to-center, and amount of adjustments in inches.
g.
Number of belts, make, and size.
Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):
a.
Total airflow rate in cfm.
b.
Total system static pressure in inches wg.
c.
Fan rpm.
d.
Discharge static pressure in inches wg.
e.
Suction static pressure in inches wg.
I.
Round, and Rectangular Duct Traverse Reports: Include a diagram with a grid representing the
duct cross-section and record the following:
1.
Report Data:
a.
System and air-handling unit number.
b.
Location and zone.
c.
Traverse air temperature in deg F.
d.
Duct static pressure in inches wg.
e.
Duct size in inches.
f.
Duct area in sq. ft..
g.
Indicated airflow rate in cfm.
h.
Indicated velocity in fpm.
i.
Actual airflow rate in cfm.
j.
Actual average velocity in fpm.
k.
Barometric pressure in psig.
J.
Air-Terminal-Device Reports:
1.
Unit Data:
a.
System and air-handling unit identification.
b.
Location and zone.
c.
Test apparatus used.
d.
Area served.
e.
Air-terminal-device make.
f.
Air-terminal-device number from system diagram.
g.
Air-terminal-device type and model number.
h.
Air-terminal-device size.
i.
Air-terminal-device effective area in sq. ft..
2.
Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):
a.
Airflow rate in cfm.
b.
Air velocity in fpm.
c.
Preliminary airflow rate as needed in cfm.
d.
Preliminary velocity as needed in fpm.
e.
Final airflow rate in cfm.
f.
Final velocity in fpm.
g.
Space temperature in deg F.
K.
System-Coil Reports: For reheat coils and water coils of terminal units, include the following:
1.
Unit Data:
a.
System and air-handling unit identification.
b.
Location and zone.
c.
Room or riser served.
d.
Coil make and size.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
23 05 93 - 11
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
2.
3.
4.
5.
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
e.
Flowmeter type.
Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):
a.
Airflow rate in cfm.
b.
Entering-water temperature in deg F.
c.
Leaving-water temperature in deg F.
d.
Water pressure drop in feet of head or psig.
e.
Entering-air temperature in deg F.
f.
Leaving-air temperature in deg F.
Evaporator Test Reports (for water-to-water heat pumps) (Indicated and Actual Values):
a.
Refrigerant pressure in psig.
b.
Refrigerant temperature in deg F.
Compressor Test Data (for water-to-water heat pumps) (Indicated and Actual Values):
a.
Suction pressure in psig.
b.
Suction temperature in deg F.
c.
Discharge pressure in psig.
d.
Discharge temperature in deg F.
e.
Oil pressure in psig.
f.
Oil temperature in deg F.
g.
Voltage at each connection.
h.
Amperage for each phase.
i.
Kilowatt input.
j.
Refrigerant low-pressure-cutoff set point in psig.
k.
Refrigerant high-pressure-cutoff set point in psig.
Refrigerant Test Data (for water-to-water heat pumps) (Indicated and Actual Values):
a.
Oil level.
b.
Refrigerant level.
c.
Relief valve setting in psig.
d.
Low-temperature-cutoff set point in deg F.
L.
Condenser Test Reports: For condensers (integral to water-to-water heat pumps), include the
following:
1.
Unit Data:
a.
Unit identification.
b.
Make and type.
c.
Model and serial numbers.
d.
Nominal cooling capacity in tons.
e.
Refrigerant type and weight in lb.
M.
Instrument Calibration Reports:
1.
Report Data:
a.
Instrument type and make.
b.
Serial number.
c.
Application.
d.
Dates of use.
e.
Dates of calibration.
3.13
A.
INSPECTIONS
Initial Inspection:
1.
After testing and balancing are complete, operate each system and randomly check
measurements to verify that the system is operating according to the final test and
balance readings documented in the Final Report.
2.
Randomly check the following for each system:
a.
Measure airflow of at least 10 percent of air outlets.
b.
Measure water flow of at least 5 percent of terminals.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
23 05 93 - 12
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
c.
d.
e.
f.
B.
3.14
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
Measure room temperature at each thermostat/temperature sensor. Compare the
reading to the set point.
Measure sound levels at two locations.
Verify that balancing devices are marked with final balance position.
Note deviations to the Contract Documents in the Final Report.
Final Inspection:
1.
After initial inspection is complete and evidence by random checks verifies that testing
and balancing are complete and accurately documented in the final report, request that a
final inspection be made by Owner.
2.
TAB firm test and balance engineer shall conduct the inspection in the presence of
Owner.
3.
Owner shall randomly select measurements documented in the final report to be
rechecked.
The rechecking shall be limited to either 10 percent of the total
measurements recorded, or the extent of measurements that can be accomplished in a
normal 8-hour business day.
4.
If the rechecks yield measurements that differ from the measurements documented in the
final report by more than the tolerances allowed, the measurements shall be noted as
"FAILED."
5.
If the number of "FAILED" measurements is greater than 10 percent of the total
measurements checked during the final inspection, the testing and balancing shall be
considered incomplete and shall be rejected.
6.
TAB firm shall recheck all measurements and make adjustments. Revise the final report
and balancing device settings to include all changes and resubmit the final report.
7.
Request a second final inspection. If the second final inspection also fails, Owner shall
contract the services of another TAB firm to complete the testing and balancing in
accordance with the Contract Documents and deduct the cost of the services from the
final payment.
ADDITIONAL TESTS
A.
Within 90 days of completing TAB, perform additional testing and balancing to verify that
balanced conditions are being maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions.
B.
Seasonal Periods: If initial TAB procedures were not performed during near-peak summer and
winter conditions, perform additional testing, inspecting, and adjusting during near-peak
summer and winter conditions.
C.
Air Measuring System Calibration Check: Compare transmitter output to traverse for Pitot tube
and differential pressure probe transmitters every 6 months throughout the warranty period.
END OF SECTION 23 05 93
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
23 05 93 - 13
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
SECTION 23 07 00 - MECHANICAL INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
This Section includes mechanical insulation for equipment, and pipe, including the following:
1.
Insulation Materials:
a.
Flexible elastomeric.
2.
Adhesives.
3.
Mastics.
4.
Lagging adhesives.
5.
Sealants.
6.
Factory-applied jackets.
7.
Securements.
DEFINITIONS
A.
ASJ: All-service jacket.
B.
SSL: Self-sealing lap.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated, identify thermal conductivity, thickness, and
jackets (both factory and field applied, if any).
B.
Shop Drawings: Show details for the following:
1.
Application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at hangers for each type of
insulation and hanger.
2.
Insulation application at pipe expansion joints for each type of insulation.
3.
Insulation application at elbows, fittings, and specialties for each type of insulation.
4.
Removable insulation at piping specialties, equipment connections, and access panels.
C.
Installer Certificates: Signed by Contractor certifying that installers comply with requirements.
D.
Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation
materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets, with requirements indicated. Include
dates of tests and test methods employed.
E.
Field quality-control inspection reports.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship
program or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau of
Apprenticeship and Training.
MECHANICAL INSULATION
23 07 00 - 1
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
B.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Insulation and related materials shall have fire-testresponse characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84,
by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label
insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, and cement material containers, with
appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.
1.
Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed
index of 50 or less.
2.
Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-developed
index of 150 or less.
C.
Insulation materials shall be tested and rated according to ASTM Test Method C-177 to
determine k-factors.
1.6
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate
ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.
B.
Protect all insulating materials from dirt, water and damage during storage and installation.
Remove damaged, wet or otherwise unsatisfactory insulation at Architect’s direction.
1.7
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate size and location of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in
Division 23 Section “Hangers and Supports for Mechanical Piping and Equipment."
B.
Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application,
equipment Installer for equipment insulation application. Before preparing piping Shop
Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for installation of insulation and fieldapplied jackets and finishes and for space required for maintenance.
1.8
SCHEDULING
A.
Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems. Insulation application may begin
on segments that have satisfactory test results.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.2
In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products
specified.
2.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
manufacturers specified.
INSULATION MATERIALS
A.
Refer to Part 3 schedule articles for requirements about where insulating materials shall be
applied.
B.
Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.
MECHANICAL INSULATION
23 07 00 - 2
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
C.
Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less
than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.
D.
Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable
according to ASTM C 795.
E.
Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing
process.
F.
Flexible Elastomeric: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. Comply with
ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials and Type II for sheet materials. Closed-cell
polyolefin/polyethylene insulation is not acceptable as a substitution for ASTM C534 closed-cell
rubber materials.
1.
Products:
a.
Aeroflex USA Inc.; Aerocel.
b.
Armacell LLC; AP Armaflex.
c.
Nomaco K-Flex; Insul-Sheet and Insul-Tube 180.
2.
Maximum K-Factor: 0.28 at 75 deg. F. mean temperature.
2.3
ADHESIVES
A.
Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding
insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Flexible Elastomeric Adhesive.
1.
Products:
a.
Armacell LCC; 520 BLV Adhesive.
b.
Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85-75.
c.
Childers Products; CP-82
2.4
MASTICS
A.
Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with
MIL-C-19565C, Type II.
B.
Materials shall comply with LEED Credits EQ 4.1 and 4.2 for low emitting materials.
C.
Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on below ambient
services.
1.
Products:
a.
Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-35.
b.
Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 30-90.
c.
ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; CB-50.
d.
Marathon Industries, Inc.; 590.
e.
Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 55-40.
f.
Vimasco Corporation; 749.
2.
Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96, Procedure B, 0.013 perm at 43-mil dry film
thickness.
3.
Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F.
4.
Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 59 percent by volume and 71 percent by weight.
5.
Color: White.
MECHANICAL INSULATION
23 07 00 - 3
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
2.5
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
SEALANTS
A.
2.6
Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants:
1.
Products:
a.
Childers Products; CP-76.
b.
Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 95-44.
c.
Marathon Industries, Inc.; 405.
d.
Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 44-05.
e.
Vimasco Corporation; 750.
2.
Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
3.
Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.
4.
Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F.
5.
Color: Aluminum.
FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS
A.
Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type I, unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Metal Jacket:
1.
Products:
a.
Childers Products; Metal Jacketing Systems.
b.
PABCO Metals Corporation; Surefit.
c.
RPR Products, Inc.; Insul-Mate.
2.
Aluminum Jacket:
Comply with ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105 or 5005,
Temper H-14.
a.
Sheet and roll stock ready for shop or field sizing.
b.
Thickness: 0.024 inch minimum.
c.
Finish: Stucco-embossed finish.
d.
Moisture Barrier for Outdoor Applications: 2.5-mil- thick Polysurlyn.
e.
Factory-Fabricated Fitting Covers:
1)
Same material, finish, and thickness as jacket.
2)
Preformed 2-piece or gore, 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius
elbows.
3)
Tee covers.
4)
Flange and union covers.
5)
End caps.
6)
Beveled collars.
7)
Valve covers.
8)
Field fabricate fitting covers only if factory-fabricated fitting covers are not
available.
C.
Self-Adhesive Outdoor Jacket: 60-mil- thick, laminated vapor barrier and waterproofing
membrane for installation over insulation located aboveground outdoors; consisting of a
rubberized bituminous resin on a crosslaminated polyethylene film covered with stuccoembossed aluminum-foil facing.
1.
Products:
a.
Polyguard; Alumaguard 60.
b.
MFM Building Products Corp., Flex Clad 400.
2.7
SECUREMENTS
A.
Bands:
1.
Products:
a.
Childers Products; Bands.
b.
PABCO Metals Corporation; Bands.
c.
RPR Products, Inc.; Bands.
MECHANICAL INSULATION
23 07 00 - 4
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
2.
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
Aluminum: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14, 0.020 inch
thick, 3/4 inch wide with wing or closed seal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and other
conditions affecting performance of insulation application.
1.
Verify that systems and equipment to be insulated have been tested and are free of
defects.
2.
Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry.
3.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PREPARATION
A.
3.3
Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will
adversely affect insulation application.
COMMON INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces;
free of voids throughout the length of equipment, ducts and fittings, and piping including fittings,
valves, and specialties.
B.
Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required
for each item of equipment, duct system, and pipe system as specified in insulation system
schedules.
C.
Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install
accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or
dry state.
D.
Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.
E.
Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.
F.
Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.
G.
Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.
H.
Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with
adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
I.
Install insulation with least number of joints practical.
J.
Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.
K.
Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at anchors
and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.
1.
Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.
2.
For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor
legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper
and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.
MECHANICAL INSULATION
23 07 00 - 5
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
3.
4.
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to
insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation
material manufacturer.
Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over
jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield.
L.
Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet
and dry film thicknesses.
M.
Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:
1.
Draw jacket tight and smooth.
2.
Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch- wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket.
Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip,
spaced 4 inches o.c.
3.
Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Install insulation with longitudinal
seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps
with outward clinching staples along edge at 2 inches o.c.
a.
For below ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.
4.
Cover joints and seams with tape as recommended by insulation material manufacturer
to maintain vapor seal.
5.
Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and
at ends adjacent to duct and pipe flanges and fittings.
N.
Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal
thickness.
O.
Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking
due to thermal movement.
P.
Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas.
Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches
similar to butt joints.
Q.
Replace insulation on existing piping, ductwork and equipment where indicated on the
drawings. Match insulation type and thickness indicated by the insulation schedule at the end
of this section.
R.
Replace insulation on new and existing piping, ductwork and equipment where insulation is
damaged during construction or removed for testing and balancing work.
S.
For above ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:
1.
Vibration-control devices.
2.
Testing agency labels and stamps.
3.
Nameplates and data plates.
4.
Cleanouts.
5.
Unions.
6.
Expansion joints.
3.4
PENETRATIONS
A.
Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation continuously
through wall penetrations.
1.
Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.
2.
For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor
applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant.
MECHANICAL INSULATION
23 07 00 - 6
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
3.
4.
B.
3.5
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at least
2 inches.
Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant.
Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated):
Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.
GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION
A.
Requirements in this Article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more
specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles.
B.
Insulation Installation on Fittingsand Unions:
1.
Install insulation over fittings, unions, and other specialties with continuous thermal and
vapor-retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated.
2.
Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from same
material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly
against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular
surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is
uniform with adjoining pipe insulation.
3.
Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same
material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt
each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with
adhesive.
4.
Insulate unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation. Overlap adjoining
pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe
diameter, whichever is thicker.
5.
Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "UNION." Match
size and color of pipe labels.
C.
Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated. Installation shall conform to the
following:
1.
Make removable union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of same thickness as that
on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as adjoining pipe insulation.
2.
When union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend insulation from union
long at least two times the insulation thickness over adjacent pipe insulation on each side
of union. Secure flange cover in place with aluminum bands.
3.
When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of
mitered blocks wired to stainless-steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its attached
insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Fill space between union cover and pipe insulation
with insulating cement. Finish cover assembly with insulating cement applied in two
coats. After first coat is dry, apply and trowel second coat to a smooth finish.
4.
Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules, finish exposed
surfaces with a metal jacket.
3.6
FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION INSTALLATION
A.
Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate
openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
B.
Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:
1.
Install mitered sections of pipe insulation.
2.
Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive
to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
MECHANICAL INSULATION
23 07 00 - 7
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
C.
3.7
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
Insulation Installation on Pipe Specialties:
1.
Install preformed covers manufactured of same material as pipe insulation when
available.
2.
When preformed covers are not available, install cut sections of pipe and sheet insulation
3.
Secure insulation to specialties and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended
adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being
insulated.
FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION
A.
3.8
Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end
joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with weatherproof
sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless-steel bands 12
inches o.c. and at end joints.
INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE
A.
Acceptable insulation materials, thickness and vapor retarder requirements are identified for
each application and size range. If more than one material is listed for an application and size
range, selection from the materials listed is Contractor’s option.
B.
Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following:
1.
Fire-suppression piping.
2.
Chrome-plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury.
3.
Exhaust ductwork.
4.
Flexible connectors.
5.
Vibration-control devices.
6.
Factory-insulated access panels and doors.
C.
Provide removable, replaceable insulation plugs at manufacturer’s equipment identification
plates and at ASME pressure vessel plates on insulated equipment.
INSULATION
MATERIAL
SERVICE
VAPOR
INSULATION
RETARDER
THICKNESS
REQUIRED
INDOOR REFRIGERANT SUCTION PIPIN
All Sizes, Generally
Flexible Elastomeric
1/2”
Yes
All Sizes, Unconditioned Space
Flexible Elastomeric
1½”
Yes
1”
Yes
1/2”
Yes
OUTDOOR REFRIGERANT SUCTION GAS PIPING
All sizes
Flexible Elastomeric
AIR CONDITIONING CONDENSATE DRAIN PIPING
Interior, All sizes
Flexible Elastomeric
SERVICE
Outdoor, all locations, piping systems, fittings and valves
FIELD APPLIED
JACKET TYPE
Aluminum or Self-Adhesive
Outdoor Jacket
END OF SECTION 23 07 00
MECHANICAL INSULATION
23 07 00 - 8
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
SECTION 23 09 00 - HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes control equipment for HVAC systems and components, including control
components for terminal heating and cooling units not supplied with factory-wired controls.
B.
The section also includes installing and wiring the following control components, furnished with
their equipment:
1.
Thermostat for air conditioning unit ACU-1
2.
Control connections between ACH-1 and ACCU-1.
C.
Related Section include the following:
1.
Division 23 Section "Mechanical Identification" for equipment labels.
2.
Division 23 Section “Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC” for system testing.
3.
Division 26 “Section Raceways and Supports for Electrical Systems” for instrumentation
and controls raceways.
4.
Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables" for wires and
cable installation.
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A.
Beneficial Use: Owner's operators are able to use the system and receive reliable information
in their normal work schedules for inputs and outputs in the automation system network.
B.
DCP: Digital control panel.
C.
DC: Direct-digital controls.
D.
DPDT: Double-pole, double-throw.
E.
DPST: Double-pole, single-throw.
F.
LAN: Local area network.
G.
MS/TP: Master-slave/token-passing.
H.
PICS: Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement.
I.
SPDT: Single-pole, double-throw.
J.
SPST: Single-pole, single-throw.
1.4
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
A.
Comply with the following performance requirements:
HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS
23 09 00 - 1
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
1.5
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
Graphic Display: Display graphic with minimum 20 dynamic points with current data
within 10 seconds.
Graphic Refresh: Update graphic with minimum 20 dynamic points with current data
within 8 seconds.
Object Command: Reaction time of less than two seconds between operator command
of a binary object and device reaction.
Object Scan: Transmit change of state and change of analog values to control units or
workstation within six seconds.
Alarm Response Time: Annunciate alarm at workstation within 45 seconds. Multiple
workstations must receive alarms within five seconds of each other.
Program Execution Frequency: Run capability of applications as often as five seconds,
but selected consistent with mechanical process under control.
Performance: Programmable controllers shall execute DDC PID control loops, and scan
and update process values and outputs at least once per second.
Reporting Accuracy and Stability of Control: Report values and maintain measured
variables within tolerances as follows:
a.
Space Temperature: Plus or minus 1 deg F.
b.
Ducted Air Temperature: Plus or minus 1 deg F.
c.
Electrical: Plus or minus 5 percent of reading.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
Control system consists of sensors, indicators, final control elements, interface equipment, other
apparatus, accessories, and software connected to distributed controllers operating in multiuser,
multitasking environment on token-passing network and programmed to control mechanical
systems.
B.
Operator workstations permit interface with the network via dynamic color graphics with each
mechanical system, building floor plan, and control device depicted by point-and-click graphics.
C.
System shall be capable of interfacing with the existing Salisbury University Campus Invensys
DDC System. New system shall be capable of incorporating all points, graphics, interfaces,
features, etc. on the existing system.
D.
System Architecture:
1.
Minimum one unitary controller with adequate resources and memory for input and output
points to be trended on 1 minute intervals.
1.6
SUBMITTALS
A.
System Interoperability Certification: Submit documentation that certifies proven capability of the
new system to interface with the existing Invensys DDC System.
B.
Product Data: Include manufacturer's technical literature for each control device. Indicate
dimensions, capacities, performance characteristics, electrical characteristics, finishes for
materials, and installation and startup instructions for each type of product indicated.
1.
Each control device labeled with setting or adjustable range of control.
C.
Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads,
required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field
connection.
1.
Schematic flow diagrams showing ACU-1, ACCU-1, and control devices.
2.
Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. Differentiate between manufacturerinstalled and field-installed wiring.
3.
Written description of sequence of operation.
HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS
23 09 00 - 2
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
Trunk cable schematic showing programmable control unit locations and trunk data
conductors.
Listing of connected data points, including connected control unit and input device.
System graphics indicating monitored systems, data (connected and calculated) point
addresses, and operator notations.
System configuration showing peripheral devices, batteries, power supplies, diagrams,
modems, and interconnections.
Settings of control devices.
Lists of proposed devices and equipment for each system drawing.
D.
Data Communications Protocol Certificates (one of the following):
1.
Certify that each proposed DDC system component complies with ASHRAE 135.
2.
Certify that each proposed DDC system component complies with LonWorks.
E.
Field Test Reports:
requirements.
F.
Maintenance Data: For systems to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 01.
Include the following:
1.
Maintenance instructions and lists of spare parts for each type of control device.
2.
Interconnection wiring diagrams with identified and numbered system components and
devices.
3.
Keyboard illustrations and step-by-step procedures indexed for each operator function.
4.
Inspection period, cleaning methods, cleaning materials recommended, and calibration
tolerances.
5.
Calibration records and list of set points.
6.
Start-up, normal, and emergency operating procedures.
7.
Names, addresses, and phone numbers of equipment suppliers, subcontractors, and
manufacturer’s field representatives.
8.
List of parts required for one year of continuous operation. Include parts numbers and
names, addresses, and phone numbers of supply sources.
G.
Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.
H.
Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of control components, including control
units, thermostats, and sensors. Revise Shop Drawings to reflect actual installation and
operating sequences.
Provide DCP data file construction including point processing
assignments, physical terminal relationships, scales and offsets, command and alarm limits, etc.
I.
Documentation of instruments and sensors field calibration.
1.7
Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is an authorized representative of the
automatic control system manufacturer for both installation and maintenance of units required
for this Project.
B.
Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing automatic temperaturecontrol systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful inservice performance.
C.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS
23 09 00 - 3
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
D.
Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems."
E.
Comply with ASHRAE 135 or LonWorks for DDC system control components.
F.
Comply with ANSI B16.104, “Quality Control Standard for Control Valve Seat Leakage.”
1.8
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate location of thermostats and other exposed control sensors with plans and room
details before installation.
B.
Coordinate supply of conditioned electrical circuits for control units.
1.9
WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranty: During the warranty period the entire system shall be kept in proper
operating condition and serviced at no additional cost to the Owner.
B.
Special Warranty: Corrective software modifications made during warranty service periods shall
be updated on user documentation and on user and manufacturer archived software disks.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.2
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
Control Systems Components: As indicated in product articles.
2.
Electric, Electronic, and DDC Systems:
a.
Invensys Climate Controls.
DDC EQUIPMENT
A.
Operator Workstation/Interface: Existing located in Salisbury University Physical Plant Energy
Manager’s office (remote from building).
B.
Application Software: Include the following:
1.
Input/output capability from operator station.
2.
Operator system access levels via software password.
3.
Database creation and support.
4.
Dynamic Color Graphic Displays: Color graphic floor plan displays, and system
schematics for ACU-1 and ACCU-1 shall be provided. Points in the system shall be
included in at least one dynamic graphic.
a.
System Selection/Penetration: The operator interface shall allow users to access
the system schematics via a graphical penetration scheme, menu selection, or
text-based commands.
b.
Data Displays: Dynamic temperature values and status indication shall be shown
in their actual respective locations, and shall automatically update to represent
current conditions without operator intervention.
c.
Windowing: The windowing environment of the PC Operator Workstation shall
allow the user to simultaneously view several graphics at the same time to analyze
total building operation, or to allow the display of a graphic associated with an
alarm to be viewed without interrupting work in progress.
5.
Alarm processing.
HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS
23 09 00 - 4
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
6.
7.
8.
9.
C.
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
Event Processing: Detection and accommodation of single or multiple failures of either
workstations, DDC panels or the network media. The network shall include provisions for
automatically re-configuring itself to allow operational equipment to perform their
designated functions as effectively as possible in the event of single or multiple failures.
Automatic restart of field equipment on restoration of power.
Data Collection:
a.
Message and alarm buffering to prevent information from being lost.
b.
Error detection, correction, and re-transmission to guarantee data integrity.
c.
Default device definition to prevent loss of alarms or data, and ensure alarms are
reported as quickly as possible in the event an operator device does not respond.
Maintenance management.
Local Control Units: Modular, multi-tasking, comprising processor board with electronically
programmable, nonvolatile, read-only memory; and backup power source.
1.
Units monitor or control each input/output point; process information; and download from
or upload to operator station, PC, mobile operator station, or DDC panel in the network.
2.
Units shall be able to extend performance and capacity through the use of remote Local
Control Units.
3.
Stand-alone mode control functions operate regardless of network status. Functions
include the following:
a.
Global communications.
b.
Discrete/digital, analog, and pulse input/output.
c.
Monitoring, controlling, or addressing data points.
d.
Control processes.
e.
Energy management applications.
f.
Operator I/O.
4.
Point Types: Support the following types of point inputs and outputs without the addition
of equipment outside the DDC panel:
a.
Digital Inputs for status/alarm contacts: Dry contract closure, pulse accumulator,
and voltage sensing.
b.
Digital Outputs for on/off equipment control: Contact closure.
c.
Analog Inputs for temperature, pressure, humidity, flow, and position
measurements: 4-20 Ma, 0-10 Vdc, Thermistors, and 1000 ohm RTD's.
d.
Analog Outputs for valve and damper position control, and capacity control of
primary equipment: 4-20 mA, 0-10 Vdc, and pulse inputs for pulsed contact
monitoring.
5.
Local operator interface provides for download from or upload to mobile operator station.
6.
Units shall directly support the use of mobile operator station. The capabilities of the
portable terminal shall include but not be limited to the following:
a.
Display temperatures.
b.
Display status.
c.
Display setpoints.
d.
Display control parameters.
e.
Override binary output control.
f.
Override analog setpoints.
g.
Modification of gain and offset constants.
7.
Surge and Transient Protection: Isolation shall be provided at network terminations, as
well as field point terminations to suppress induced voltage transients consistent with
IEEE Standard 587-1980. Isolation levels shall be sufficiently high as to allow signal
wiring to be run in the same conduit as high voltage wiring where acceptable by electrical
code.
8.
Powerfail Restart: In the event of the loss of normal power, there shall be an orderly
shutdown of Control Units to prevent the loss of database or operating system software.
Non-Volatile memory shall be incorporated for critical controller configuration data, and
battery back-up shall be provided to support the real-time clock and volatile memory for a
minimum of 72 hours. Upon restoration of normal power, the DDC panel shall
HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS
23 09 00 - 5
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
9.
10.
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
automatically resume full operation without manual intervention. Should memory be lost,
the panel will automatically receive a download via the local area network, phone lines, or
connected computer. In addition, the user shall have the capability of reloading the
Control Unit through the local area network, the local RS-232C port, or telephone line
dial-in.
Power fail Protection: System setpoints, proportional bands, control algorithms, and any
other programmable parameters shall be stored such that a power failure of any duration
does not necessitate reprogramming the controller.
Application::
a.
Continuous Zone Temperature Histories: Each Controller shall have the capability
to automatically and continuously, maintain a history of the associated temperature
to allow users to quickly analyze space comfort and equipment performance for
the past 24 hours. A minimum of two samples per hour shall be stored.
b.
Alarm Management: Each Controller shall perform its own limit and status
monitoring and analysis to maximize network performance by reducing
unnecessary communications.
D.
LANs: Capacity for a minimum of 10 workstations connected to multiuser, multitasking
environment with concurrent capability to access DDC network or control units. DDC system
shall tap into existing Salisbury University Fiber Optic Network.
E.
Software: Update to latest version of software at Project completion. Include and implement
the following capabilities from the control units:
1.
Units of Measure: Inch-pound and SI (metric).
2.
Control Algorithms: Pre-tested two position control, proportional control, proportional plus
integral control, and proportional, integral, plus derivative control.
3.
Air Conditioning Unit Control Programs: Monitor and alarm unit operation.
4.
Programming Application Features: Include trend point, alarm messages, weekly
scheduling, and interlocking.
F.
Data Control:
1.
The input/output summary tables specified in this section Sequence show hardware
devices required to be connected to the local control panel, and the standard control
software modules to be implemented. In addition, additional hardware and software
required to accomplish the detailed sequence of operations specified shall be provided.
The following also includes pseudo points required to be provided for display in logical
groups and graphics. Commandable pseudo points shall be commandable directly from
displays.
2.
Each analog point shall have unique remote panel resident dual high and dual low limit
alarm thresholds. Where specified, floating (a band above and below a setpoint) alarm
limits shall be provided.
3.
Each digital output shall have a software-associated monitored input. Any time the
monitored input does not track its associated command output within a programmable
time interval, a "command failed" alarm shall be reported.
4.
Where calculated points such as CFM are shown, they shall appear in their respective
logical groups. The respective unconditioned raw data (such as the logarithmic
differential pressure) points shall also be grouped in a special group for display and
observation independent of the logical groups.
5.
The primary analog input and the analog output of each DDC loop shall be resident in a
single remote panel containing the DDC algorithm, and shall function independent of any
peer or mux communication links. Secondary (reset type) analog inputs may be received
from the peer network, but approved default values and/or procedures shall be
substituted in the DDC algorithm for this secondary input if network communications fail
or if the secondary input becomes erroneous or invalid.
HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS
23 09 00 - 6
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
2.3
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
CONTROL PANELS
A.
2.4
Local Control Panels: Unitized cabinet with suitable brackets for wall or floor mounting, located
adjacent to each system under automatic control. Provide common keying for all panels.
1.
Fabricate panels of 0.06-inch- thick, furniture-quality steel, or extruded-aluminum alloy,
totally enclosed, with hinged doors and keyed lock (all on a common key) and with
manufacturer's standard shop-painted finish.
2.
Panel-Mounted Equipment: Temperature and humidity controllers, relays, and automatic
switches; except safety devices.
3.
Isolate low voltage and line voltage terminals.
SENSORS
A.
Electronic Sensors: Vibration and corrosion resistant; for wall, immersion, or duct mounting as
required.
1.
Thermistor Temperature Sensors: 10,000 ohm at 77 deg F; lead wires terminated on
enclosed terminal block.
a.
Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.4 deg F from 0 to 70 deg F.
b.
Wire: Twisted, shielded-pair cable.
c.
Insertion Elements in Ducts: Single point, 8 inches long; use where not affected by
temperature stratification or where ducts are smaller than 9 sq. ft..
d.
Room Sensors: element terminated on clamp type connectors or plug-in strip;
temperature indication; setpoint adjustment; and plug-in communications jack.
B.
Status Inputs for Electric Motors: Current-sensing relay with current transformers; solid state
type, adjustable and set to 175 percent of rated motor current, with the following characteristics:
1.
Rating: 0 to 135 amps.
2.
Sensor Voltage: Induced from monitored conductor
3.
Supply Current: Induced from monitored conductor
4.
Isolation: Minimum 600 VAC rms
5.
Trip Set Point: Adjustable to ±7% of range
6.
Zero Adjustment: None
7.
Sealing: NEMA 12
8.
Temperature Range: 15°C to 85°C
9.
External Current Transformers: For loads exceeding 135 amps.
C.
Duct Smoke Detectors: Photoelectric type complying with UL 268A.
1.
Detector address shall be accessible from fire-alarm control unit and shall be able to
identify the detector's location within the system and its sensitivity setting.
2.
An operator at fire-alarm control unit, having the designated access level, shall be able to
manually access the following for each detector:
a.
Primary status.
b.
Device type.
c.
Present average value.
d.
Present sensitivity selected.
e.
Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.).
3.
Each sensor shall have multiple levels of detection sensitivity.
4.
Sampling Tubes: Design and dimensions as recommended by manufacturer for specific
duct size, air velocity, and installation conditions where applied.
5.
Relay Fan Shutdown: Rated to interrupt fan motor-control circuit.
HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS
23 09 00 - 7
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
2.5
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
MISCELLANEOUS DEVICES
A.
2.6
Control Relays: Normally open (NO) or normally closed (NC) contacts and number of poles
required to perform the indicated functions.
1.
Contacts rated for no less than 110 percent of switched load, or a minimum continuous
rating of 10 amps at 120 VAC.
2.
Coils rated for continuous duty at 100 percent plus or minus 10 percent of the nominal
coil pilot voltage.
3.
Relays mounted within panels may be plastic encapsulated socket mounted type, or
modular design with multiple convertible contacts, as required.
4.
Relays located outside of panels shall be housed in enclosures rated for the intended
location.
5.
Manufacturers: Johnson Controls or approved equal.
ELECTRICAL WIRING
A.
General Wiring Requirements:
1.
Wiring shall comply with the requirements of local and national electric codes and
Division 26 specification requirements, and the requirements herein specified.
2.
Electric wiring and wiring connections required for the installation of the ATC, as herein
specified, shall be provided by this specification unless specifically shown or called for in
other specifications.
a.
Control wiring shall include connections to control devices, interlock wiring, control
relays, and minor power wiring to auxiliary components for major pieces of
apparatus. Minor power wiring, 120 volts and below, shall include requirements for
such equipment and interconnecting wiring on apparatus that has not been factory
installed. In general, control wiring that is not factory installed or provided under
other Divisions shall be provided.
b.
Power wiring, for the purpose of this specification, shall be defined as follows:
Wiring from the power source, i.e., panelboard, or motor control center, etc., to the
disconnect switch or disconnect switch and starter including wiring from these
switches to the apparatus.
3.
Power for control devices, whether or not interlocked with motor operation, shall be
obtained from a separate 120 VAC source at the ATC panel or where directed. The
Contractor shall be permitted to wire one control relay or one solenoid valve with
maximum power draw of 50 VA, to derive pilot power directly from the motor starter
control circuit. Devices are to be located remote and external from motor starter. Device
wiring is to terminate on terminal blocks provided in motor starter compartments. No
splices are permitted. Provide power wiring from the source to field mounted control
devices and panels.
4.
Coordinate with the work of others. The plans are diagrammatic only and are to be
utilized as reference. Interconnection and coordination requirements necessary for a
totally operational control system are the requirement of this Section.
5.
Operate electric and electronic mechanical controls at maximum 120 volts or less.
Provide voltage transformers and isolated relays where indicated or required for control
systems that operate at voltage other than 120 VAC.
6.
Transformers other than those used in bridge circuits shall have primaries wound for the
available current and secondaries wound for the correct control circuit voltage. Size to
have capacity capable to operate simultaneously components served plus 25 percent
overload for one hour. Enclose transformer in vented steel cabinet with conduit
connections and provide disconnect switch on the primary side and fused cut-out on the
secondary side.
7.
Provide contactors, relays, and authority devices for control of single-phase equipment.
HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS
23 09 00 - 8
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
B.
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
Control Transmission Cabling:
1.
2.7
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
Twisted, shielded-pair cable, rated for use in return air plenums.
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Perform manufacturer's standard shop tests for each component.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that conditioned power supply is available to control units.
B.
Verify that duct-mounted devices and wiring are installed before proceeding with installation.
C.
Examine areas and conditions under which control systems are to be installed. Do not proceed
with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Install systems and materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and roughing-in
drawings, and details on drawings.
B.
Mount controllers at convenient locations and heights.
C.
Install equipment level and plumb.
D.
Install software in control units and operator workstation. Implement all features of programs to
specified requirements and as appropriate to sequence of operation.
E.
Duct Smoke Detectors: Comply with NFPA 72 and NFPA 90A. Install sampling tubes so they
extend the full width of duct.
F.
Connect and configure equipment and software to achieve sequence of operation specified.
G.
Verify location of thermostats with plans, room details, and Architect before installation.
Generally, locate all 60 inches above the floor.
H.
Install labels and nameplates to identify control components according to Division 23 Section
"Mechanical Identification."
I.
Mounting of Panels: Control panels shall be installed so that they are stable and fully supported
throughout the entire panel, minimum one inch from the wall. Panels mounted on air system
housings or ducts are not acceptable. Ensure that panels are free from obstructions to allow for
ease of operation and maintenance.
J.
Load and debug software required for an operational DDC System, including data base,
operational parameters, and system control and application programs.
3.3
ELECTRICAL WIRING AND CONNECTION INSTALLATION
A.
Install raceways, boxes, and cabinets according to Division 26 Section "Raceways and Boxes
for Electrical Systems."
1.
Minimum conduit size: 3/4 inch.
HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS
23 09 00 - 9
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
B.
Install building wire and cable according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power
Conductors and Cables."
C.
Install control transmission cable according to industry standards and as follows:
1.
Install all cable in raceway.
2.
Control transmission cable may be run within drywall walls and above ceilings without
conduit protection. Support control transmission cable from structure with tie wraps. It
shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to ensure the integrity and proper shielding
and grounding of control cable.
3.
Bundle and harness multiconductor instrument cable in place of single cables where
several cables follow a common path.
4.
Fasten flexible conductors, bridging cabinets and doors, along hinge side; protect against
abrasion. Tie and support conductors.
5.
Number-code or color-code conductors for future identification and service of control
system, except local individual room control cables.
6.
No splices or kinks shall be permitted in control transmission cable. Terminations shall
be on panel-mounted terminal strips.
7.
Grounding shall be in accordance with ANSI C2. Ground wire shall be copper. Control
cable, including communication links and sensor wiring, shall be grounded at only one
point for the entire system. Sensor wiring ground wires shall be terminated at the DCP
and connected to the communication link ground wire. Communication link ground wires
shall be terminated and grounded at the CPU.
8.
Power wiring shall not be routed through the same raceway as control transmission
cable.
D.
Low voltage (50 volt or less) remote control and signal wiring may be run in multi-conductors
cable with PVC insulation, mylar binder and PVC jacket. Use "plenum approved" cable in return
air plenums. Entire installation shall be in accordance with Article 725 NEC, and shall meet
additional requirements noted. Cables carrying AC circuits sensitive to external field shall be
shielded. Exception: Control wiring shall be in conduit in mechanical and electrical equipment
rooms, in shafts and where exposed.
E.
Control power may be derived from line side of a starter provided circuits are fused and controls
so energized are associated only with this starter and motor.
F.
Control transformer furnished as an integral part of a starter shall not be used as a power
source for additional control.
G.
Starter disconnect or separate switch immediately adjacent to starter shall disconnect power
from line voltage or 120 volt control wiring entering starter.
H.
Controllers and Operators: Controls shall be designed to function properly with a power source
voltage variation of plus or minus 10 percent.
3.4
CONNECTIONS
A.
Ground equipment.
1.
Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published
torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those
specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS
23 09 00 - 10
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
3.5
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect
field-assembled components and equipment installation, including piping and electrical
connections. Report results in writing.
1.
Operational Test: Prior to testing, confirm system graphics are complete, points have
been mapped into the graphics, and the graphics have been reviewed for content and
completeness by the owner, architect, and construction manager. After electrical circuitry
has been energized, start units to confirm proper unit operation. Remove malfunctioning
units, replace with new units, and retest.
2.
Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls
and equipment, and retest.
3.
Calibration test electronic controllers by disconnecting input sensors and stimulating
operation with compatible signal generator.
4.
Instruments and sensors shall be field calibrated by comparison to known device, which
is traceable to National Institute of Standards and Testing and has a certification that is
less than a year old. Proof of certification shall be available on site for review upon
request. The standards and accuracy requirements for calibration equipment shall be
equal to or higher than the accuracy specified for the device being checked. Contractor
shall document the field calibration and submit the documentation.
5.
Coordinate calibration with space temperature measurements specified in Division 23
Section “Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC.”
B.
Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment.
1.
Start, test, and adjust control systems.
2.
Demonstrate compliance with requirements, including calibration and testing, and control
sequences.
3.
Adjust, calibrate, and fine tune circuits and equipment to achieve sequence of operation
specified.
C.
Verify DDC as follows:
1.
Verify software including automatic restart, control sequences, scheduling, reset controls,
and occupied/unoccupied cycles.
2.
Verify operation of operator workstation.
3.
Verify local control units including self-diagnostics.
3.6
DEMONSTRATION
A.
Refer to Division 01 Section “Operation and Maintenance Data ” for training requirements for
Owner’s maintenance personnel and building occupants.
END OF SECTION 23 09 00
HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS
23 09 00 - 11
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
SECTION 23 21 13 - HYDRONIC PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes piping for condensate drain piping.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
Division 23 Section “Identification for Mechanical" for labeling and identifying hydronic
piping.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
Product Data:
1.
For each type of pipe, fitting, and joint indicated.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate layout and installation of hydronic piping and suspension system components with
other construction, including building structure, electrical conduit and raceway systems, light
fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression-system components, and partition assemblies.
B.
Coordinate pipe sleeve installations for wall penetrations.
C.
Coordinate pipe fitting pressure classes with products specified in related Sections.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PIPING MATERIALS
A.
2.2
General: Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe and fitting
materials.
COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS
A.
Drawn-Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type L.
B.
Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22.
C.
Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, 95-5 tin antimony.
HYDRONIC PIPING
23 21 13 - 1
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PIPING APPLICATIONS
A.
3.2
Condensate Drain and Equipment Drainage Lines: Type L drawn-temper copper tubing with
soldered joints.
PIPING INSTALLATIONS
A.
Refer to Division 23 Section "Common Work Results for Mechanical" for basic piping installation
requirements.
B.
Install piping at a uniform grade of ¼” per foot downward in direction of flow.
3.3
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A.
Hanger and support devices are specified in Division 23 Section “Hangers and Supports for
Mechanical Piping and Equipment." Comply with requirements below for maximum spacing of
supports.
B.
Install the following pipe attachments:
1.
Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal piping less than 20 feet long.
C.
Install hangers for drawn-temper copper piping with the following maximum spacing and
minimum rod sizes:
1.
NPS 3/4: Maximum span, 5 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.
3.4
PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A.
3.5
Refer to Division 23 Section "Common Work Results for Mechanical" for joint construction
requirements for soldered joints in copper tubing.
CLEANING
A.
Flush hydronic piping systems with clean water.
END OF SECTION 23 21 13
HYDRONIC PIPING
23 21 13 - 2
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
SECTION 23 23 00 - REFRIGERANT PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes refrigerant piping used for air-conditioning applications.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
1.3
Division 23 Section “Hangers and Supports for Mechanical Piping and Equipment” for
pipe supports and installation requirements.
Division 23 Section “Identification for Mechanical” for labeling and identifying refrigerant
piping.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of refrigerant piping specialty indicated.
B.
Field Test Reports:
requirements.
C.
Maintenance Data: For refrigerant valves and piping specialties to include in maintenance
manuals specified in Division 1.
1.4
Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Brazing: Qualify procedures and personnel according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code: Section IX; "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
B.
ASHRAE Standard: Comply with ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration."
C.
ASME Standard: Comply with ASME B31.5, "Refrigeration Piping."
1.5
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate layout and installation of refrigerant piping and suspension system components with
other construction, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression-system
components, and partition assemblies.
B.
Coordinate pipe sleeve installations for foundation wall penetrations.
C.
Coordinate pipe sleeve installations for penetrations in exterior walls.
D.
Coordinate pipe fitting pressure classes with products specified in related Sections.
REFRIGERANT PIPING
23 23 00 - 1
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
1.6
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1.
2.
Refrigeration Oil Test Kits: Two each, containing everything required to conduct one test.
Refrigerant: One container with 5 lb of refrigerant.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.2
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
Refrigerants:
a.
Allied Signal, Inc./Fluorine Products; Genetron Refrigerants.
b.
DuPont Company; Fluorochemicals Div.
c.
Elf Atochem North America, Inc.; Fluorocarbon Div.
d.
ICI Americas Inc./ICI KLEA; Fluorochemicals Bus.
2.
Refrigerant Specialties:
a.
DME, Incorporated.
b.
Climate & Industrial Controls Group; Parker-Hannifin Corp.; Refrigeration & Air
Conditioning Division.
c.
Henry Valve Company.
d.
Sporlan Valve Company.
COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS
A.
Drawn-Temper Copper Tube: ASTM B 280, Type ACR or ASTM B 88, Type L.
B.
Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22.
C.
Wrought-Copper Unions: ASME B16.22.
D.
Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, Classification BAg (cadmium free silver alloy) for bronze
fittings and Type BcuP (copper-phosphorous alloy) for copper fittings.
E.
Flexible Connectors: 500-psig minimum operating pressure; seamless tin-bronze core, hightensile bronze-braid covering, and solder-joint end connections; dehydrated, pressure tested,
minimum 7 inches long
2.3
REFRIGERANTS
A.
ASHRAE 34, match refrigerant types specified for equipment in other Division 23 sections.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PIPING APPLICATIONS
A.
Aboveground, within Building: Type ACR drawn-copper tubing or Type L drawn-copper tubing
and wrought copper fittings with brazed joints.
REFRIGERANT PIPING
23 23 00 - 2
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
3.2
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
SPECIALTY APPLICATIONS.
A.
3.3
Install flexible connectors at indoor unit.
PIPING INSTALLATION
A.
Install refrigerant piping according to ASHRAE 15.
B.
Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Division 23 Section “Common Work
Results for Mechanical.”
C.
Install piping as short and direct as possible, with a minimum number of joints, elbows, and
fittings.
D.
Arrange piping to allow inspection and service of compressor and other equipment. Install
valves and specialties in accessible locations to allow for service and inspection.
E.
Install piping with adequate clearance between pipe and adjacent walls and hangers or between
pipes for insulation installation. Use sleeves through floors, walls, or ceilings, sized to permit
installation of full-thickness insulation.
F.
Slope refrigerant piping as follows:
1.
Install horizontal suction lines with a uniform slope downward to compressor.
2.
Install traps and double risers to entrain oil in vertical runs.
3.
Liquid lines may be installed level.
G.
Install unions at connections to exterior condensing units and indoor units.
H.
When brazing, remove solenoid-valve coils and sight glasses; also remove valve stems, seats,
and packing, and accessible internal parts of refrigerant specialties. Do not apply heat near
expansion valve bulb.
I.
Hanger, support, and anchor products are specified in Division 23 Section “Hangers and
Supports for Mechanical Piping and Equipment.”
J.
Install the following pipe attachments:
1.
Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal runs less than 20 feet long.
2.
Roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal runs 20 feet or longer.
3.
Pipe rollers for multiple horizontal runs 20 feet or longer, supported by a trapeze.
4.
Spring hangers to support vertical runs.
K.
Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:
1.
NPS 1/2: Maximum span, 60 inches; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.
2.
NPS 5/8: Maximum span, 60 inches; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.
3.
NPS 1: Maximum span, 72 inches; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.
4.
NPS 1-1/4: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
5.
NPS 1-1/2: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
3.4
PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A.
Braze joints according to Division 23 Section “Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods.”
B.
Fill pipe and fittings with an inert gas (nitrogen or carbon dioxide) during brazing to prevent
scale formation.
REFRIGERANT PIPING
23 23 00 - 3
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
3.5
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Test and inspect refrigerant piping according to ASME B31.5, Chapter VI.
1.
Test refrigerant piping, specialties, and receivers. Isolate compressor, condenser,
evaporator, and safety devices from test pressure.
2.
Test high- and low-pressure side piping of each system at not less than the lower of the
design pressure or the setting of pressure relief device protecting high and low side of
system.
a.
b.
c.
d.
3.6
System shall maintain test pressure at the manifold gage throughout duration of
test.
Test joints and fittings by brushing a small amount of soap and glycerine solution
over joint.
Fill system with nitrogen to raise a test pressure of 150 psig or higher as required
by authorities having jurisdiction.
Remake leaking joints using new materials, and retest until satisfactory results are
achieved.
ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust thermostatic expansion valve to obtain proper evaporator superheat requirements.
B.
Adjust high- and low-pressure switch settings to avoid short cycling in response to fluctuating
suction pressure.
C.
Adjust set-point temperature of the conditioned air controllers to the system design temperature.
D.
Perform the following adjustments before operating the refrigeration system, according to
manufacturer's written instructions:
1.
Check compressor oil level above center of sight glass.
2.
Open compressor suction and discharge valves.
3.
Open refrigerant valves, except bypass valves that are used for other purposes.
4.
Check compressor-motor alignment, and lubricate motors and bearings.
3.7
CLEANING
A.
Before installing copper tubing other than Type ACR, clean tubing and fittings with
trichloroethylene.
B.
Replace core of filter-dryer after system has been adjusted and design flow rates and pressures
are established.
3.8
SYSTEM CHARGING
A.
Charge system using the following procedures:
1.
Install core in filter-dryer after leak test but before evacuation.
2.
Evacuate entire refrigerant system with a vacuum pump to a vacuum of 500 micrometers.
If vacuum holds for 12 hours, system is ready for charging.
3.
Break vacuum with refrigerant gas, allowing pressure to build up to 2 psig.
4.
Charge system with a new filter-dryer core in charging line. Provide full-operating
charge.
END OF SECTION 23 23 00
REFRIGERANT PIPING
23 23 00 - 4
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
SECTION 23 31 13 - METAL DUCTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes metal ducts for transfer air-distribution systems in pressure classes from
minus 2-inch wg to plus 2-inch wg. Metal ducts include the following:
1.
Rectangular ducts and fittings.
2.
Flexible connectors.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
Division 23 Section “Common Work Results for Mechanical” for additional general
requirements.
1.3
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
1.4
Duct system design, as indicated, has been used to select size and type of air-moving and distribution equipment and other air system components. Changes to layout or configuration of
duct system must be specifically approved in writing by Architect. Accompany requests for
layout modifications with calculations showing that proposed layout will provide original design
results without increasing system total pressure.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Manufacturer’s technical literature for each specified product.
B.
Field quality-control test reports.
C.
For each duct system, the gauge, material, joint type, seam type, and reinforcement to be
provided for each duct size.
D.
No ductwork shall be fabricated or installed until submittals are approved.
E.
Certificates: For certification required in “QUALITY ASSURANCE” Article.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
NFPA Compliance:
1.
NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems."
2.
NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
METAL DUCTS
23 31 13 - 1
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
1.
2.2
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
manufacturers specified.
SHEET METAL MATERIALS
A.
Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible, Third
Edition,” and all addenda for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction
methods, unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam
marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.
B.
Galvanized Sheet Steel: Lock-forming quality; complying with ASTM A 653 and having G60 (for
circular ducts) and G90 (for rectangular ducts) coating designation; ducts shall have millphosphatized finish for surfaces exposed to view in finished spaces, suitable for field painting.
C.
Reinforcement Shapes and Plates:
galvanized sheet metal ducts.
2.3
Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A.
Building Attachments:
Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel
fasteners appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached.
1.
Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate concretes or for
slabs more than 4 inches thick. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for
lightweight-aggregate concretes or for slabs less than 4 inches thick.
B.
Hanger Materials: Galvanized sheet steel or threaded steel rod.
1.
Hangers Installed in Corrosive Atmospheres: Electrogalvanized, all-thread rods or
galvanized rods with threads painted with zinc-chromate primer after installation.
2.
Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards-Metal and Flexible" for steel sheet width and thickness and for steel rod diameters.
C.
Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible
with duct materials.
D.
Trapeze and Riser Supports: Steel shapes complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M.
1.
Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized-steel shapes and plates.
2.4
RECTANGULAR DUCT FABRICATION
A.
Fabricate ducts, elbows, transitions, offsets, branch connections, and other construction
according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" and
complying with requirements for metal thickness, reinforcing types and intervals, tie-rod
applications, and joint types and intervals. Fabricate ductwork to be free from vibration, rattle or
drumming under all operating conditions.
1.
Lengths: Fabricate rectangular ducts in lengths appropriate to reinforcement and rigidity
class required for pressure class.
2.
Deflection: Duct systems shall not exceed deflection limits according to SMACNA's
"HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible."
3.
Transverse Joints: Utilize prefabricated slide-on joints or formed-on flanges.
a.
Slip-and-Drive Joints may be utilized for transfer ducts, at Contractor’s option.
B.
Prefabricated Slide-on Joints: Constructed using manufacturer's guidelines for material
thickness, reinforcement size and spacing, joining methods, and joint reinforcement.
METAL DUCTS
23 31 13 - 2
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
1.
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
Manufacturers:
a.
Ductmate Industries, Inc.
b.
Nexus, Inc.
c.
Quickduc, Inc.
d.
Ward Industries, Inc.
C.
Formed-On Flanges: Construct according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards-Metal and Flexible," Figure 1-4, joints T-25a or T-25b (TDC or TDF) using corner, bolt, cleat,
and gasket details.
1.
Manufacturers:
a.
Ductmate Industries, Inc.
b.
Lockformer.
2.
Longitudinal Seams: Pittsburgh lock sealed with noncuring polymer sealant.
D.
Requirements for Prefabricated Slide-on Joints and Formed-on Flanges:
1.
Minimum sheet metal gauges shall conform to both Rectangular Duct Reinforcement
Tables 1-3 through 1-9 and Transverse Joint Reinforcement Table 1-12.
2.
Cleats or clips as manufactured for the specific purpose of joining adjacent flanges shall
be utilized in conjunction with transverse joints; sheet metal screws alone are not
acceptable for joining flanges.
E.
Rectangular Duct Fittings:
1.
Fabricate elbows, transitions, offsets, branch connections, etc., in accordance with
SMACNA manual Figures 2-1 through 2-10 and the following:
a.
Rectangular elbows shall be Figure 2-2 Type RE-2 with turning vanes. Vanes
shall be only double radius type Figures 2-3 and 2-4.
b.
Radius elbows shall be Figure 2-2 Type RE-1 only.
c.
Transitions and offsets shall follow Figure 2-7 and where space permits shall slope
a maximum of 15 degrees, unless otherwise indicated on drawings.
F.
Cross Breaking or Cross Beading: Cross break or cross bead duct sides 19 inches and larger
and 0.0359 inch thick or less, with more than 10 sq. ft. of nonbraced panel area unless ducts
are lined.
2.5
FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
Ductmate Industries, Inc.
2.
Duro Dyne Corp.
3.
Ventfabrics, Inc.
4.
Ward Industries, Inc.
B.
General Description: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics, coatings, and adhesives
complying with UL 181, Class 1.
C.
Extra-Wide Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip 5-3/4 inches wide
attached to two strips of 2-3/4-inch- wide, 0.028-inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel or 0.032inch- thick aluminum sheets. Select metal compatible with ducts. Fold and crimp metal edge
strips onto fabric as illustrated in SMACNA HVAC Duct Standard.
D.
Indoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with neoprene.
1.
Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd..
2.
Tensile Strength: 480 lbf/inch in the warp and 360 lbf/inch in the filling.
3.
Service Temperature: Minus 20 to plus 200 deg F.
METAL DUCTS
23 31 13 - 3
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
DUCT APPLICATIONS
A.
Static-Pressure and Seal Classes: Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings, construct ducts
according to the following:
DUCT SYSTEM
Transfer ductwork
B.
3.2
SMACNA
PRESSURE
CLASS
(INCHES WG)
1”
SMACNA
GAGE
SEAL
PRESSURE CLASS
Positive or
Negative
--
All ducts shall be galvanized steel.
DUCT INSTALLATION
A.
Construct and install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards-Metal
and Flexible," unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Install ducts with fewest possible joints.
C.
Install fabricated fittings for changes in directions, size, and shape and for connections.
D.
Install couplings tight to duct wall surface with a minimum of projections into duct. Secure
couplings with sheet metal screws. Install screws at intervals of 12 inches, with a minimum of 3
screws in each coupling.
E.
Install ducts, unless otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally and parallel and
perpendicular to building lines; avoid diagonal runs.
F.
Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent
enclosure elements of building.
G.
Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch, plus allowance for insulation thickness.
H.
Conceal ducts from view in finished spaces with suspended ceilings. Do not encase horizontal
runs in solid partitions unless specifically indicated.
I.
Install flexible connectors immediately adjacent to equipment in ducts associated with fans.
J.
Coordinate layout with suspended ceiling, lighting layouts, and similar finished work.
K.
Sleeves, Generally: Install minimum 22-gauge sleeves between duct or duct insulation and wall
or ceiling penetrations.
1.
Size sleeve to provide annular space specified or detailed on the drawings.
2.
Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry and
with approved sealant for gypsum board assemblies.
L.
Wall and Partition Penetrations, Generally: Seal annular space between sleeves and duct or
duct insulation, using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint.
1.
There shall be no direct contact of duct with sleeves.
METAL DUCTS
23 31 13 - 4
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
2.
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
Where ductwork passes through a wall, there shall be a clear annular space of 1”
between the duct or duct insulation and sleeve. After all of the ductwork is installed the
Contractor shall check the clearance, pack the voids full depth with mineral fiber batt
insulation and caulk both ends with a non-aging, non-hardening sealant backed by a
polyethylene foam rod or permanently flexible firestop material.
M.
Non-Fire-Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions or exterior
walls and are exposed to view, conceal spaces between construction openings and ducts or
duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as ducts. Overlap openings on
4 sides by at least 1-1/2 inches.
N.
Protect duct interiors from the elements and foreign materials until installed. Follow SMACNA's
"Duct Cleanliness for New Construction."
1.
Cleanliness Level: Advanced.
2.
Seal ends of ductwork and air devices with plastic as they are installed. In no case shall
a duct be left open ended.
3.
If cleanliness level is not achieved, clean all ductwork.
O.
Paint interiors of metal ducts that do not have duct liner, for 24 inches upstream and
downstream of registers and grilles. Apply one coat of flat, black, latex finish coat over a
compatible galvanized-steel primer. Paint materials and application requirements are specified
in Division 9 painting Sections.
3.3
HANGING AND SUPPORTING
A.
Support horizontal ducts within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inches of each branch
intersection.
B.
Install upper attachments to structures with an allowable load not exceeding one-fourth of failure
(proof-test) load.
C.
Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured.
1.
Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate concretes or for
slabs less than 4 inches thick.
3.4
CONNECTIONS
A.
Make connections to transfer fan with flexible connectors.
B.
Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for branch,
outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections.
END OF SECTION 23 31 13
METAL DUCTS
23 31 13 - 5
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
SECTION 23 34 23 - HVAC POWER VENTILATORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
Cabinet Centrifugal Fans.
B.
Related sections include the following:
1.
Division 23 Section “Common Motor Requirements for Mechanical Equipment” for related
motor requirements.
1.3
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Project Altitude: Base air ratings on sea-level conditions.
B.
Operating Limits: Classify according to AMCA 99.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories for each type of
product indicated and include the following:
1.
Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated.
2.
Certified fan sound-power ratings.
3.
Motor ratings and electrical characteristics, plus motor and electrical accessories.
4.
Material gages and finishes, including color charts.
B.
Maintenance Data: To include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 01.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
B.
AMCA Compliance: Products shall comply with performance requirements and shall be
licensed to use the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.
C.
NEMA Compliance: Motors and electrical accessories shall comply with NEMA standards.
D.
UL Standard: Power ventilators shall comply with UL 705.
1.6
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver fans as factory-assembled unit, to the extent allowable by shipping limitations, with
protective crating and covering.
HVAC POWER VENTILATORS
23 34 23 - 1
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
B.
Disassemble and reassemble units, as required for moving to final location, according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
C.
Lift and support units with manufacturer's designated lifting or supporting points.
1.7
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate size and location of support members.
B.
Coordinate installation of equipment supports.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.2
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
Greenheck Fan Corp.
b.
Acme Engineering & Mfg. Corp.
c.
Cook, Loren Company.
d.
IPennBarry.
e.
Twin City.
CABINET FANS
A.
Description: Centrifugal fans designed for installing for concealed in-line application.
B.
Housing: Steel, lined with acoustical insulation.
C.
Fan Wheel: Polypropylene double inlet forward curved centrifugal wheel directly mounted on
motor shaft. Fan shrouds, motor, and fan wheel shall be removable for service.
D.
Electrical Requirements: 120 volt, single phase connection, with exterior junction box and
interior plug-type disconnect. Provide unit mounted manual speed control for use in balancing
airflow.
E.
Accessories:
1.
2.
F.
2.3
Vibration Isolation: Rubber-in-shear vibration isolators between fan and housing.
Grille: White with concealed attachment screws.
Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section “Common Motor Requirements for Mechanical
Equipment."
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Sound-Power Level Ratings: Comply with AMCA 311, "Certified Ratings Program – Product
Rating Manual for Fan Sound Performance”. Label fans with the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.
B.
Fan Performance Ratings: Comply with AMCA 211, "Certified Ratings Program – Product
Rating Manual for Fan Air Performance”. Label fans with the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.
HVAC POWER VENTILATORS
23 34 23 - 2
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install power ventilators level and plumb.
B.
Support suspended units from structure using threaded steel rods.
C.
Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.
D.
Label units according to requirements specified in Division 23 Section “Identification for
Mechanical."
3.2
CONNECTIONS
A.
Duct installation and connection requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections.
Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make final duct
connections with flexible connectors.
B.
Ground equipment.
C.
Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torquetightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in
UL 486A and UL 486B.
3.3
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Equipment Startup Checks:
1.
Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed.
2.
Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections to
ducts and electrical components are complete.
3.
Verify that cleaning and adjusting are complete.
4.
Verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify fan wheel free rotation and smooth
bearing operation.
5.
Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in
connected ductwork systems are in fully open position.
B.
Starting Procedures:
1.
Energize motor and adjust fan to indicated rpm.
2.
Measure and record motor voltage and amperage.
C.
Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start unit to confirm proper motor
rotation and unit operation. Remove malfunctioning unit, replace with new unit, and retest.
D.
Refer to Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for testing, adjusting,
and balancing procedures.
3.4
CLEANING
A.
On completion of installation, internally clean fans according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Remove foreign material and construction debris. Vacuum fan wheel and cabinet.
HVAC POWER VENTILATORS
23 34 23 - 3
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
B.
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
After completing system installation, including outlet fitting and devices, inspect exposed finish.
Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged finishes.
END OF SECTION 23 34 23
HVAC POWER VENTILATORS
23 34 23 - 4
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
SECTION 23 37 13 - DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
This Section includes ceiling- and wall-mounted diffusers, registers, and grilles.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each product indicated, include the following:
1.
Data Sheet: Indicate materials of construction, finish, and mounting details; and
performance data including throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and NC-value noise
ratings.
2.
Diffuser, Register, and Grille Schedule: Indicate Drawing designation, room location,
quantity, model number, size, accessories furnished, NC-value, and pressure drop.
B.
Color Samples: For diffusers, registers, and grilles, Architect to select color.
1.4
SELECTION CRITERIA
A.
Air devices shall be selected for 5 DB lower than the listed Noise Criteria of the Room.
B.
Noise Criteria of Room:
1.
Rooms with NC 20 Criteria: Ticket Booth.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.2
In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products equal to
Basis of Design indicated, by one of the manufacturers specified.
GRILLES AND REGISTERS
A.
Adjustable Airfoil Bar Grille (Type SGA):
1.
Basis of Design: Titus Model 272RL.
2.
Manufacturers:
a.
Carnes.
b.
Krueger.
c.
Nailor Industries of Texas Inc.
d.
Titus.
e.
Tuttle & Bailey.
f.
Price Industries.
3.
Material: Steel.
4.
Finish: Baked enamel, color selected by Architect.
DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES
23 37 13 - 1
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
5.
6.
7.
8.
B.
2.3
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
Face Blade Arrangement: Adjustable horizontal spaced 3/4 inch apart.
Rear Blade Arrangement: Adjustable vertical spaced 3/4 inch apart.
Frame: 1-1/4 inches wide.
Mounting: Countersunk screw.
Fixed Airfoil Bar Grille (Type RGA):
1.
Basis of Design: Titus Model 23RL.
2.
Manufacturers:
a.
Carnes.
b.
Krueger.
c.
Nailor Industries of Texas Inc.
d.
Titus.
e.
Tuttle & Bailey.
f.
Price Industries.
3.
Material: Steel.
4.
Finish: Baked enamel, color selected by Architect.
5.
Face Blade Arrangement: Fixed horizontal spaced 1/2 inch apart; 45 degree deflection.
6.
Frame: 1-1/4 inches wide.
7.
Mounting: Countersunk screw.
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Verification of Performance: Rate diffusers, registers, and grilles according to ASHRAE 70,
"Method of Testing for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine areas where diffusers, registers, and grilles are to be installed for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of
equipment.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Install diffusers, registers, and grilles level and plumb, and in accordance with Manufacturer's
written instructions.
B.
Ceiling- and Wall-Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts,
fittings, and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design
requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make final
locations where indicated, as much as practicable.
1.
Refer to the Architectural floor plans, sections, and reflected ceiling plans for exact
location of air devices. For units installed in lay-in ceiling panels, locate units in the center
of panel. Where architectural features or other items conflict with installation, notify
Architect for a determination of final location.
2.
Ceiling diffuser outlets installed in gypsum ceilings shall not be installed with plaster
frames. Coordinate the installation of the air devices with the sequencing of the gypsum
ceiling installation.
3.
Support diffusers, registers, grilles, and plenums independently of ceiling construction.
C.
Install diffusers, registers, and grilles with airtight connections to ducts.
DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES
23 37 13 - 2
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
D.
Construct and install duct and plenum connections to diffusers, registers, and grilles in
accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.
E.
Modify duct systems (transitions, collars, etc.) as required to accommodate actual sizes of
grilles, registers, and diffusers.
3.3
ADJUSTING
A.
After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as directed,
before starting air balancing.
END OF SECTION 23 37 13
DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES
23 37 13 - 3
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
SECTION 23 81 26 - SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes split-system air-conditioning units consisting of separate evaporator-fan
and compressor-condenser components. Units are designed for floor mounting. This section
applies to system ACU-1 and ACCU-1.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
Division 23 Section “Refrigerant Piping” for refrigerant piping.
C.
This Section includes split-system air-conditioning units consisting of separate evaporator-fan
and compressor-condenser components.
1.
Indoor unit shall be designed for floor mounting.
2.
Outdoor unit shall be a direct expansion (DX), air-cooled cooling-only air-conditioning
system.
3.
The system shall be capable of refrigerant piping lengths indicated on the drawings,
without any oil traps or additional equipment.
4.
The system shall have a single stage of cooling.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories for each type of
product indicated. Include performance data in terms of capacities, outlet velocities, static
pressures, sound power characteristics, motor requirements, and electrical characteristics.
B.
Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring.
C.
Field quality-control test reports.
D.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For split-system air-conditioning units to include in
emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
E.
Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
B.
Energy-Efficiency Ratio: Equal to or greater than prescribed by ASHRAE 90.1, "Energy
Efficient Design of New Buildings except Low-Rise Residential Buildings."
C.
Units shall be designed to operate with HCFC-free refrigerants, unless otherwise noted.
SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS
23 81 26 - 1
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
1.5
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1.
Filters: One set of filters for each unit.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.2
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
Trane Company (The); Unitary Products Group.
2.
Carrier Air Conditioning; Div. of Carrier Corporation.
3.
McQuay International.
4.
York International Corp.
FLOOR MOUNTED, NON-DUCTED EVAPORATOR-FAN COMPONENTS (ACU-1 INDOOR
UNIT)
A.
Configurations: Cooling only air conditioning unit.
B.
Cabinet: 16 gauge galvanized sheet metal, with removable panels for servicing, and insulation
on back of panel.
1.
Insulation: ½” 2 lb foil-faced, glass-fiber material.
2.
Drain Pans: Removable, double-sloped, insulated, and corrosion resistant.
3.
Configuration: Spot-cooler with factory-furnished supply discharge plenum and return
grille assembly for field installation. Supply plenum shall have 4-way adjustable louver
grille. Unit shall have non-adjustable louvered side return.
C.
Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins, complying with
ARI 210/240, and with refrigerant distribution, nozzle, and thermal-expansion valve.
D.
Fan: Belt-drive, forward curved, centrifugal, with galvanized steel wheel (statically and
dynamically balanced at factory), permanently lubricated bearings.
E.
Fan Motors: Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Motors."
1.
Resiliently mounted on neoprene-in-shear motor bracket.
2.
Contactor: 24 volt, to provide fan starting mechanism.
F.
Controls:
1.
All controls shall be factory provided by manufacturer.
2.
Microprocessor based.
3.
Single point power entry.
4.
120 VAC control transformer.
5.
Internally wired with numbered and colored wires to a low voltage terminal strip.
G.
Filters:
1.
2.
Filter Track: For 1-inch thick filters.
Filter:
a.
Pleated-Type, Disposable Panel Pre-Filters: Factory-fabricated, dry, extendedsurface filters; UL listed as Class 2.
SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS
23 81 26 - 2
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
1)
2)
3)
4)
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
Media: Fibrous non-woven cotton and synthetic fabric material formed into
deep-V-shaped pleats with anti-microbial agent and held by self-supporting
welded wire grid.
14 Pleats per linear foot:
2.0 Square-foot of media per square foot of filter face area:
Media and Media-Grid Frame: Nonflammable cardboard, with diagonal
support members.
3.
2.3
AIR-COOLED, COMPRESSOR-CONDENSER COMPONENTS (ACCU-1)
A.
Casing: Steel, finished with baked enamel in standard color, with removable panels for access
to controls, weep holes for water drainage, and mounting holes in base. Provide brass service
valves, fittings, and gage ports on exterior of casing.
B.
Refrigeration system:
1.
Compressor: Hermetically sealed reciprocating or scroll compressor with crankcase
heater mounted on vibration isolation. Compressor motor shall have thermal- and
current-sensitive overload devices, start capacitor, relay, and contactor. Compressor
shall have manual-reset high-pressure switch and automatic-reset low-pressure switch.
2.
Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins, complying with
ARI 210/240, and with liquid subcooler.
3.
Valves and fittings: Factory-installed brass service valves for liquid and suction lines,
fittings, and gage ports on exterior of casing.
4.
Liquid line filter-dryer: Factory-installed permanent liquid line filter-dryer 350-psig
maximum operating pressure and 225 deg F maximum operating temperature; steel shell
and wrought-copper fittings for solder-end connections; molded-felt core surrounded by
desiccant.
C.
Fan: Aluminum-propeller type, directly connected to motor.
D.
Fan Motors: Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Motors."
E.
Controls:
1.
All controls shall be factory provided by manufacturer.
2.
Microprocessor based.
3.
Single point power entry.
4.
Internally wired with numbered and colored wires to a low voltage terminal strip.
5.
Magnetic outdoor fan contactor.
6.
Automatic-reset timer to prevent rapid cycling of compressor.
7.
Low Ambient Kit: Permits operation down to 0 deg F
2.4
CONTROLS
A.
Provide factory-furnished microprocessor-based thermostat for remote mounting. Thermostat
shall include temperature indication, setpoint indication, setpoint adjustment and fan On-AutoOff switch.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install units level and plumb.
SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS
23 81 26 - 3
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
B.
Install evaporator-fan components using manufacturer's standard mounting devices securely
fastened to building structure.
1.
Refer to Division 23 Section “HVAC Vibration Control” for vibration isolator requirements.
C.
Install remote mounted thermostats. Provide interconnecting wiring in conduit.
D.
Install and connect refrigerant tubing to component's fittings. Install tubing to allow access to
unit. Refer to Division 23 Section “Refrigerant Piping”.
3.2
CONNECTIONS
A.
Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B.
Install piping adjacent to unit to allow service and maintenance.
C.
Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section “Grounding and Bonding for Electrical
Systems.”
D.
Electrical Connections: Comply with requirements in Division 26 Sections for power wiring,
switches, and motor controls.
3.3
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Manufacturer's Field Service:
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to
inspect, test, and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation, including
connections, and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing.
B.
Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1.
Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest
until no leaks exist.
2.
Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm
proper motor rotation and unit operation.
3.
Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls
and equipment.
C.
Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
3.4
STARTUP SERVICE
A.
3.5
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.
1.
Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.
DEMONSTRATION
A.
Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain units.
Division 1 Section “Demonstration and Training.”
Refer to
END OF SECTION 23 81 26
SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS
23 81 26 - 4
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
SECTION 26 05 19 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
Section Includes:
1.
Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less.
2.
Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
Product Data: For each type of product.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Field quality-control reports.
PART 2
2.1
PRODUCTS
CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A.
Manufacturers:
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
Senator Wire & Cable Company.
American Insulated Wire Corp.; a Leviton Company.
General Cable Technologies Corporation.
Southwire Incorporated.
B.
Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658.
C.
Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658 for Type THHN-THWN-2.
D.
Multiconductor Cable:
Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658 for metal-clad cable,
Type MC with ground wire.
2.2
CONNECTORS AND SPLICES
A.
Manufacturers:
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
Hubbell Power Systems, Inc.
Ideal Industries, Inc.
O-Z/Gedney; a brand of the EGS Electrical Group.
3M; Electrical Markets Division.
Tyco Electronics.
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
26 05 19 - 1
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
B.
2.3
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type,
and class for application and service indicated.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B.
Comply with NFPA 70, “National Electrical Code.”
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS
A.
Feeders: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.
B.
Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and
larger.
3.2
CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND WIRING
METHODS
A.
Exposed Feeders: Type THHN-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.
B.
Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspaces:
single conductors in raceway.
C.
Exposed Branch Circuits, Including in Crawlspaces: Type THHN-THWN-2, single conductors in
raceway.
D.
Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions:
conductors in raceway Metal-clad cable, Type MC.
3.3
Type THHN-THWN-2,
Type THHN-THWN-2, single
INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A.
Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Complete raceway installation between conductor and cable termination points according to
Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" prior to pulling conductors and
cables.
C.
Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used
must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended
maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.
D.
Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will
not damage cables or raceway.
3.4
CONNECTIONS
A.
Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torquetightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in
UL 486A-486B.
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
26 05 19 - 2
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
B.
Make splices, terminations, and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that
possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced
conductors.
C.
Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches of slack.
3.5
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Section 260553 "Identification for
Electrical Systems."
B.
Identify each spare conductor at each end with identity number and location of other end of
conductor, and identify as spare conductor.
3.6
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
B.
Perform the following tests and inspections:
1.
After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized,
test service entrance and feeder conductors for compliance with requirements.
2.
Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA
Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.
Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:
1.
2.
3.
C.
Procedures used.
Results that comply with requirements.
Results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve
compliance with requirements.
Cables and conductors will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
END OF SECTION 26 05 19
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
26 05 19 - 3
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
SECTION 26 05 26 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
Section includes grounding and bonding systems and equipment.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL.
1.
Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing.
B.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
C.
Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.
PART 2
2.1
PRODUCTS
CONDUCTORS
A.
Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by
applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
Grounding Bus: Predrilled rectangular bars of annealed copper, [1/4 by 4 inches] <Insert
dimensions> in cross section, with 9/32-inch holes spaced 1-1/8 inches apart. Stand-off
insulators for mounting shall comply with UL 891 for use in switchboards, 600 V and shall be
Lexan or PVC, impulse tested at 5000 V.
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
APPLICATIONS
A.
3.2
Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for
No. 6 AWG and larger unless otherwise indicated.
EQUIPMENT GROUNDING
A.
Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits.
B.
Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with the following items, in addition to those
required by NFPA 70:
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 26 - 1
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
C.
3.3
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
Feeders and branch circuits.
Lighting circuits.
Receptacle circuits.
Single-phase motor and appliance branch circuits.
Three-phase motor and appliance branch circuits.
Flexible raceway runs.
Armored and metal-clad cable runs.
Isolated Grounding Receptacle Circuits: Install an insulated equipment grounding conductor
connected to the receptacle grounding terminal. Isolate conductor from raceway and from
panelboard grounding terminals. Terminate at equipment grounding conductor terminal of the
applicable derived system or service unless otherwise indicated.
INSTALLATION
A.
Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible unless otherwise
indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may
be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.
END OF SECTION 26 05 26
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 26 - 2
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
SECTION 26 05 29 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
2.
1.3
Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems.
Construction requirements for concrete bases.
DEFINITIONS
A.
EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.
B.
RMC: Rigid metal conduit.
1.4
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported
systems and its contents.
B.
Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported
equipment and connected systems and components.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.6
Comply with NFPA 70, “National Electrical Code.”
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete,
reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified together with concrete specifications.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS
A.
Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field
assembly.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
Allied Tube & Conduit.
Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.
ERICO International Corporation.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 29 - 1
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
d.
e.
f.
g.
2.
3.
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
GS Metals Corp.
Thomas & Betts Corporation.
Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd.
Wesanco, Inc.
Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA-4.
Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria.
B.
Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101.
C.
Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel and malleable-iron hangers, clamps, and associated
fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.
D.
Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded
body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non-armored electrical conductors or cables in
riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as
required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be malleable iron.
E.
Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints:
shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.
F.
Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their
supports to building surfaces include the following:
1.
Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement
concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for
supported loads and building materials where used.
a.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not
limited to, the following:
1)
2)
3)
4)
2.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not
limited to, the following:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
4.
Hilti Inc.
ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc.
MKT Fastening, LLC.
Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.; Masterset Fastening Systems Unit.
Mechanical-Expansion Anchors:
Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel, for use in
hardened portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities
appropriate for supported loads and building materials in which used.
a.
3.
ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates,
Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.
Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc.
Hilti Inc.
ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc.
MKT Fastening, LLC.
Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS
Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58.
Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for
attached structural element.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 29 - 2
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
5.
6.
7.
2.2
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325.
Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type.
Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.
FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES
A.
Description: Welded or bolted, structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions
of supported equipment.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
APPLICATION
A.
Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical
equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter.
B.
Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for
EMT and RMC as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch in diameter.
C.
Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted or
other support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future
without exceeding specified design load limits.
1.
3.2
Secure raceways and cables to these supports with two-bolt conduit clamps.
SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this
Article.
B.
Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength
will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits.
Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported
components plus 200 lb.
C.
Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten
electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods
unless otherwise indicated by code:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts.
To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts.
To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor
fasteners on solid masonry units.
To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners.
Instead of expansion anchors, powder-actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock
washers and nuts may be used in existing standard-weight concrete 4 inches thick or
greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight-aggregate concrete or for slabs less
than 4 inches thick.
To Steel: Beam clamps (MSS Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27) complying with MSS SP-69.
To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws.
Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets,
panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes,
transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 29 - 3
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
D.
3.3
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing
bars.
INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS
A.
3.4
Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation
to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment.
CONCRETE BASES
A.
Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated but not less than 4 inches larger in both
directions than supported unit, and so anchors will be a minimum of 10 bolt diameters from
edge of the base.
B.
Use 3000-psi, 28-day compressive-strength concrete. Concrete materials, reinforcement, and
placement requirements are specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
C.
Anchor equipment to concrete base.
1.
2.
3.
3.5
Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting
drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be
embedded.
Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.
Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions.
PAINTING
A.
Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas
immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop
painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.
1.
B.
Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.
Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply
galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION 26 05 29
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 29 - 4
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
SECTION 26 05 33 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
1.3
Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings.
Metal wireways and auxiliary gutters.
Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4
GRC: Galvanized rigid steel conduit.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For floor boxes, hinged-cover enclosures, and cabinets.
B.
Shop Drawings: For custom enclosures and cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, and
attachment details.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
METAL CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
AFC Cable Systems, Inc.
Allied Tube & Conduit; a Tyco International Ltd. Co.
Anamet Electrical, Inc.
Electri-Flex Company.
O-Z/Gedney; a brand of EGS Electrical Group.
Republic Conduit.
Robroy Industries.
Southwire Company.
Thomas & Betts Corporation.
Western Tube and Conduit Corporation.
Wheatland Tube Company; a division of John Maneely Company.
B.
Listing and Labeling: Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as defined
in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
C.
GRC: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6.
D.
EMT: Comply with ANSI C80.3 and UL 797.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 33 - 1
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
E.
FMC: Comply with UL 1; zinc-coated steel.
F.
Fittings for Metal Conduit: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B.
1.
2.
Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations:
NFPA 70.
Fittings for EMT:
a.
b.
G.
2.2
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
Comply with UL 886 and
Material: Steel.
Type: Compression.
Joint Compound for GRC: Approved, as defined in NFPA 70, by authorities having jurisdiction
for use in conduit assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded
conduit joints from corrosion and to enhance their conductivity.
METAL WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS
A.
Manufacturers:
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
Cooper B-Line, Inc.
Hoffman; a Pentair company.
Mono-Systems, Inc.
Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
Description: Sheet metal, complying with UL 870 and NEMA 250, Type 1 unless otherwise
indicated, and sized according to NFPA 70.
1.
Metal wireways installed outdoors shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a
qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
C.
Fittings and Accessories: Include covers, couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints,
adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as
required for complete system.
D.
Wireway Covers: Screw-cover type unless otherwise indicated.
E.
Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.
2.3
BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS
A.
Manufacturers:
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
Adalet.
Cooper Technologies Company; Cooper Crouse-Hinds.
EGS/Appleton Electric.
Erickson Electrical Equipment Company.
Hoffman; a Pentair company.
Hubbell Incorporated; Killark Division.
Milbank Manufacturing Co.
Mono-Systems, Inc.
O-Z/Gedney; a brand of EGS Electrical Group.
RACO; a Hubbell Company.
Robroy Industries.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 33 - 2
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
12.
13.
14.
15.
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Company.
Stahlin Non-Metallic Enclosures; a division of Robroy Industries.
Thomas & Betts Corporation.
Wiremold / Legrand.
B.
General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets: Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets
installed in wet locations shall be listed for use in wet locations.
C.
Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A.
D.
Metal Floor Boxes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Material: Cast metal or sheet metal.
Type: Fully adjustable.
Shape: Rectangular.
Listing and Labeling: Metal floor boxes shall be listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and
application.
E.
Luminaire Outlet Boxes: Nonadjustable, designed for attachment of luminaire weighing 50 lb.
Outlet boxes designed for attachment of luminaires weighing more than 50 lb shall be listed and
marked for the maximum allowable weight.
F.
Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.
G.
Box extensions used to accommodate new building finishes shall be of same material as
recessed box.
H.
Device Box Dimensions: 4 inches square by 2-1/8 inches deep.
I.
Gangable boxes are allowed.
J.
Hinged-Cover Enclosures: Comply with UL 50 and NEMA 250, Type 1 with continuous-hinge
cover with flush latch unless otherwise indicated.
1.
2.
K.
Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.
Interior Panels: Steel; all sides finished with manufacturer's standard enamel.
Cabinets:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
NEMA 250, Type 1 galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and removable
front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.
Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge.
Key latch to match panelboards.
Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage.
Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
RACEWAY APPLICATION
A.
Indoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:
1.
Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 33 - 3
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
2.
3.
6.
7.
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
Exposed, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: EMT.
Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: GRC. Raceway locations include the
following:
a.
b.
c.
4.
5.
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
Loading dock.
Corridors.
Mechanical rooms.
Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT.
Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,
Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet
locations.
Damp or Wet Locations: GRC.
Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4 stainless
steel in damp or wet locations.
B.
Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch trade size.
C.
Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.
1.
2.
3.
3.2
Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings unless
otherwise indicated. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.
EMT: Use compression, steel fittings. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.
Flexible Conduit: Use only fittings listed for use with flexible conduit. Comply with
NEMA FB 2.20.
INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except where requirements
on Drawings or in this article are stricter. Comply with NFPA 70 limitations for types of
raceways allowed in specific occupancies and number of floors.
B.
Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes.
Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.
C.
Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.
D.
Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 29 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems"
for hangers and supports.
E.
Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished slab.
F.
Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for
control wiring conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed. Support within 12 inches of changes
in direction.
G.
Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated.
Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines.
H.
Support conduit within 12 inches of enclosures to which attached.
I.
Stub-ups to Above Recessed Ceilings:
1.
Use EMT or GRC for raceways.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 33 - 4
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
2.
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
Use a conduit bushing or insulated fitting to terminate stub-ups not terminated in hubs or
in an enclosure.
J.
Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply
listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound
manufacturer's written instructions.
K.
Terminate threaded conduits into threaded hubs or with locknuts on inside and outside of boxes
or cabinets. Install bushings on conduits up to 1-1/4-inch trade size and insulated throat metal
bushings on 1-1/2-inch trade size and larger conduits terminated with locknuts. Install insulated
throat metal grounding bushings on service conduits.
L.
Install raceways square to the enclosure and terminate at enclosures with locknuts. Install
locknuts hand tight plus 1/4 turn more.
M.
Do not rely on locknuts to penetrate nonconductive coatings on enclosures. Remove coatings
in the locknut area prior to assembling conduit to enclosure to assure a continuous ground path.
N.
Cut conduit perpendicular to the length. For conduits 2-inch trade size and larger, use roll cutter
or a guide to make cut straight and perpendicular to the length.
O.
Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not
less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire.
Cap underground raceways designated as spare above grade alongside raceways in use.
P.
Install raceway sealing fittings at accessible locations according to NFPA 70 and fill them with
listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a
blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway
sealing fittings according to NFPA 70.
Q.
Install devices to seal raceway interiors at accessible locations. Locate seals so no fittings or
boxes are between the seal and the following changes of environments. Seal the interior of all
raceways at the following points:
1.
2.
R.
Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations.
Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.
Flexible Conduit Connections: Comply with NEMA RV 3. Use a maximum of 72 inches of
flexible conduit for recessed and semirecessed luminaires, equipment subject to vibration, noise
transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors.
1.
2.
Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage.
Use LFMC or LFNC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical damage.
S.
Mount boxes at heights indicated on Drawings. If mounting heights of boxes are not individually
indicated, give priority to ADA requirements. Install boxes with height measured to center of
box unless otherwise indicated.
T.
Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block,
and install box flush with surface of wall. Prepare block surfaces to provide a flat surface for a
raintight connection between box and cover plate or supported equipment and box.
U.
Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls so they are not in the same
vertical channel.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 33 - 5
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
V.
Locate boxes so that cover or plate will not span different building finishes.
W.
Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning two framing
members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose.
X.
Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support boxes by
conduits.
Y.
Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface.
3.3
FIRESTOPPING
A.
3.4
Install firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies.
requirements in Section 07 84 13 "Penetration Firestopping."
Comply with
PROTECTION
A.
Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage and deterioration.
1.
Repair damage to galvanized finishes
manufacturer.
with
zinc-rich paint recommended by
END OF SECTION 26 05 33
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 33 - 6
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
SECTION 26 05 53 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
1.3
Identification for raceways.
Identification of power and control cables.
Identification for conductors.
Warning labels and signs.
Instruction signs.
Equipment identification labels.
Miscellaneous identification products.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Comply with ANSI A13.1, “Scheme for Identification of Piping Systems,” and IEEE C2.
B.
Comply with NFPA 70, “National Electrical Code.”
C.
Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145.
D.
Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels.
1.4
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in
other Sections requiring identification applications, Drawings, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's
wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual; and with those required by
codes, standards, and 29 CFR 1910.145. Use consistent designations throughout Project.
B.
Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of
surfaces where devices are to be applied.
C.
Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors.
D.
Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
POWER RACEWAY IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS
A.
Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color
field for each raceway size.
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 53 - 1
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
B.
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less:
1.
2.
Black letters on an orange field.
Legend: Indicate voltage.
C.
Snap-Around Labels for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Slit, pretensioned,
flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeve, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway
or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.
D.
Write-On Tags: Polyester tag, 0.010 inch thick, with corrosion-resistant grommet and cable tie
for attachment to conductor or cable.
1.
Marker for Tags:
Machine-printed, permanent, waterproof, black ink marker
recommended by printer manufacturer.
2.2
ARMORED AND METAL-CLAD CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS
A.
Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color
field for each raceway and cable size.
B.
Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V and Less:
1.
2.
C.
2.3
Black letters on an orange field.
Legend: Indicate voltage.
Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant
coating and matching wraparound clear adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.
POWER AND CONTROL CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS
A.
Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color
field for each raceway and cable size.
B.
Write-On Tags: Polyester tag, 0.010 inch thick, with corrosion-resistant grommet and cable tie
for attachment to conductor or cable.
1.
C.
2.4
Marker for Tags:
Machine-printed, permanent, waterproof, black ink marker
recommended by printer manufacturer.
Snap-Around Labels: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeve, with
diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping
action.
CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS
A.
2.5
Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils thick by 1
to 2 inches wide.
WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS
A.
Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145.
B.
Self-Adhesive Warning Labels: Factory-printed, multicolor, pressure-sensitive adhesive labels,
configured for display on front cover, door, or other access to equipment unless otherwise
indicated.
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 53 - 2
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
C.
2.
3.
Preprinted aluminum signs, punched or drilled for fasteners, with colors, legend, and size
required for application.
1/4-inch grommets in corners for mounting.
Nominal size, 7 by 10 inches.
Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends:
1.
2.
2.6
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
Baked-Enamel Warning Signs:
1.
D.
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES."
Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN FRONT
OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36 INCHES."
INSTRUCTION SIGNS
A.
Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine plastic, minimum 1/16 inch thick for signs up to 20 sq.
inches and 1/8 inch thick for larger sizes.
1.
2.
3.
2.7
Engraved legend with black letters on white face.
Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners.
Framed with mitered acrylic molding and arranged for attachment at applicable
equipment.
EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS
A.
Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Punched or drilled for screw mounting. White
letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch.
B.
Stenciled Legend: In nonfading, waterproof, black ink or paint. Minimum letter height shall be 1
inch.
2.8
CABLE TIES
A.
General-Purpose Cable Ties: Fungus inert, self extinguishing, one piece, self locking, Type 6/6
nylon.
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.9
Minimum Width: 3/16 inch.
Tensile Strength at 73 deg F, According to ASTM D 638: 12,000 psi.
Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F.
Color: Black except where used for color-coding.
MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS
A.
Paint: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for paint materials and application
requirements. Select paint system applicable for surface material and location (exterior or
interior).
B.
Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine
screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 53 - 3
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Verify identity of each item before installing identification products.
B.
Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing
without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.
C.
Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.
D.
Attach signs and plastic labels that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical fasteners
appropriate to the location and substrate.
E.
Aluminum Wraparound Marker Labels and Metal Tags: Secure tight to surface of conductor or
cable at a location with high visibility and accessibility.
F.
Cable Ties: For attaching tags. Use general-purpose type, except as listed below:
1.
G.
3.2
In Spaces Handling Environmental Air: Plenum rated.
Painted Identification: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for surface preparation
and paint application.
IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE
A.
Accessible Raceways and Metal-Clad Cables, 600 V or Less, for Service, Feeder, and Branch
Circuits More Than 30 A, and 120 V to ground: Identify with self-adhesive vinyl tape applied in
bands. Install labels at 10-foot maximum intervals.
B.
Accessible Raceways and Cables within Buildings: Identify the covers of each junction and pull
box of the following systems with self-adhesive vinyl labels with the wiring system legend and
system voltage. System legends shall be as follows:
1.
2.
C.
Emergency Power.
Power.
Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: For conductors in vaults, pull and
junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use color-coding conductor tape to identify the
phase.
1.
Color-Coding for Phase and Voltage Level Identification, 600 V or Less: Use colors listed
below for ungrounded service feeder and branch-circuit conductors.
a.
b.
Color shall be factory applied or field applied for sizes larger than No. 8 AWG, if
authorities having jurisdiction permit.
Colors for 208/120-V Circuits:
1)
2)
3)
4)
Phase A: Black.
Phase B: Red.
Phase C: Blue.
Neutral: White
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 53 - 4
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
c.
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
Colors for 480/277-V Circuits:
1)
2)
3)
4)
d.
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
Phase A: Brown.
Phase B: Orange.
Phase C: Yellow.
Neutral: Gray
Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns for a
minimum distance of 6 inches from terminal points and in boxes where splices or
taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible
unwinding. Locate bands to avoid obscuring factory cable markings.
D.
Install instructional sign including the color-code for grounded and ungrounded conductors
using adhesive-film-type labels.
E.
Conductors to Be Extended in the Future: Attach write-on tags to conductors and list source.
F.
Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm, control, and
signal connections.
1.
2.
3.
G.
Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and
pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation.
Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent with system used
by manufacturer for factory-installed connections.
Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the
Operation and Maintenance Manual.
Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting:
adhesive warning labels.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Self-
Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145.
Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background.
Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access.
For equipment with multiple power or control sources, apply to door or cover of
equipment including, but not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
Power transfer switches.
Controls with external control power connections.
H.
Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs to facilitate proper operation and
maintenance of electrical systems and items to which they connect. Install instruction signs with
approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation.
I.
Emergency Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs with white legend on a red
background with minimum 3/8-inch- high letters for emergency instructions at equipment used
for power transfer.
J.
Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label
that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual.
Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control
panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power,
lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is
provided with its own identification.
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 53 - 5
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
1.
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
Labeling Instructions:
a.
b.
c.
2.
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
Indoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. Unless
otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch- high letters on 1-1/2inch- high label; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches high.
Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate for
viewing from the floor.
Fasten labels with appropriate mechanical fasteners that do not change the NEMA
or NRTL rating of the enclosure.
Equipment to Be Labeled:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
Panelboards: Typewritten directory of circuits in the location provided by
panelboard manufacturer. Panelboard identification shall be engraved, laminated
acrylic or melamine label.
Enclosures and electrical cabinets.
Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items.
Transformers: Label that includes tag designation shown on Drawings for the
transformer, feeder, and panelboards or equipment supplied by the secondary.
Emergency system boxes and enclosures.
Enclosed switches.
Enclosed circuit breakers.
Enclosed controllers.
Variable-speed controllers.
Push-button stations.
Power transfer equipment.
Contactors.
Remote-controlled switches, dimmer modules, and control devices.
END OF SECTION 26 05 53
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 53 - 6
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
SECTION 26 09 34 - EMERGENCY LIGHTING TRANSFER CABINET
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes the following components:
1.
1.3
Emergency lighting transfer cabinet (ELTC).
DEFINITIONS
A.
Low Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70, term for circuits and equipment operating at less than
50 V or for remote-control, signaling, and power-limited circuits.
B.
SCR: Silicon-controlled rectifier.
C.
Zone: A fixture or group of fixtures controlled simultaneously as a single entity. Also known as
a "channel."
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Prepare and submit complete shop drawings according to the requirements set forth in the
Contract Documents.
B.
Shop drawings shall show materials, finishes, metal gauges, overall and detail dimensions,
sizes, electrical and mechanical connections, fasteners, welds, provisions for the work of others,
and similar information.
C.
Shop drawings shall indicate complete details of equipment, including manufacturers' catalog
numbers for components, and shall include complete wiring diagrams.
D.
Control System Manufacturer shall provide installation instructions for all equipment. These
instructions shall include connection diagrams, termination designations, etc.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to
conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing
Association or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29
CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
B.
Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNational
Electrical Testing Association to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
EMERGENCY LIGHTING TRANSFER CABINET
26 09 34 - 1
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
C.
Comply with 47 CFR 15, Subparts A and B, for Class A digital devices.
D.
Comply with NFPA 110, emergency & standby power systems.
E.
UL 1008 listed and labeled.
F.
Meet all NEC requirements such as 701, 700, 540-11C, 520-7, 518-3C, etc.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
EMERGENCY LIGHTING TRANSFER CABINET
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Electronic Theatre Controls, Inc.
Stagecraft Industries, Inc.
Strand Lighting.
Description: The Emergency Lighting Transfer Cabinet shall provide automatic transfer of
branch circuits from normal to emergency power when normal power fails. The cabinet shall
automatically reconnect circuits to normal power when normal power has been restored.
1.
2.
Switches shall be electrically operated and mechanically held. The entire assembly shall
be UL 1008 listed and labeled This equipment shall comply with NFPA 110 for
Emergency and Standby Power Systems and comply with NFPA 70.
Enclosure:
a.
Dimensions:
1)
b.
3.
4.
2,4,8, 10, 12, 14 & 16 Circuit Cabinets - 24"W x 30"H x 9”D.
Cabinet shall be a. wall-mounted, NEMA 1 enclosure constructed of 14-gauge
steel finished in gray powder coat paint. All terminations and wiring shall be
accessible via a hinged lockable door. The cabinet shall be pre-wired and tested at
the factory with clearly marked terminals for contractor wiring of normal feed,
emergency feed, lighting loads and sensing feeds. ELTC shall he wall mounted
type.
Electrical Ratings: As indicated on Drawings.
Operation:
a.
The front panel of the cabinet shall contain a key switch to simulate power failure
for testing purposes as well as indicator lights to visually signal the presence of
normal or emergency power.
b.
Voltage sensing of the normal source shall cause-automatic transfer when the
voltage of one or more phases drops below 55%.
c.
Factory default settings for time delay of transfer are as follows: Normal to
Emergency - 0 seconds, Emergency back to Normal - 3 seconds. These settings
shall be field adjustable.
EMERGENCY LIGHTING TRANSFER CABINET
26 09 34 - 2
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
WIRING INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with NECA 1.
B.
Wiring Method:
1.
2.
3.
Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power
Conductors and Cables."
Install unshielded, twisted-pair cable for control and signal transmission conductors.
Minimum conduit size shall be 3/4 inch.
C.
Wiring within Enclosures;, Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points. Separate
power-limited and non-power-limited conductors according to conductor manufacturer's written
instructions.
D.
Size conductors according to lighting control device manufacturer's written instructions unless
otherwise indicated.
E.
Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Make connections only on numbered terminal strips in
junction, pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures.
3.2
IDENTIFICATION
A.
3.3
Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems" for
identifying components and power and control wiring.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Manufacturer's Field Service:· Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect,
test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.
Report results in writing.
B.
Tests and Inspections:
1.
2.
3.
Continuity tests of circuits.
Operational Test: Set and operate controls to demonstrate their functions and capabilities
in a methodical sequence that cues and reproduces actual operating functions.
Emergency Power Transfer: Test listed functions.
C.
Remove and replace malfunctioning components and retest as specified above.
D.
Test Labeling: After satisfactory completion of tests and inspections, apply a label to tested
components indicating test results, date, and responsible agency and representative.
E.
Reports: Written reports of tests, and observations. Record defective materials and
workmanship and unsatisfactory test results. Record repairs and adjustments.
EMERGENCY LIGHTING TRANSFER CABINET
26 09 34 - 3
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
3.4
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
DEMONSTRATION
A.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train maintenance personnel to adjust,
operate, and maintain the transfers.
END OF SECTION 260934
EMERGENCY LIGHTING TRANSFER CABINET
26 09 34 - 4
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
SECTION 26 22 00 - LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following types of dry-type transformers rated 600 V and less, with
capacities up to 1000 kVA:
1.
1.3
Distribution transformers.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Include rated nameplate data, capacities, weights, dimensions, minimum
clearances, installed devices and features, and performance for each type and size of
transformer indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads,
required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field
connection.
1.
1.4
Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For testing agency.
B.
Source quality-control test reports.
C.
Field quality-control test reports.
1.5
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.6
Operation and Maintenance Data: For transformers to include in emergency, operation, and
maintenance manuals.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations:
manufacturer.
Obtain each transformer type through one source from a single
B.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
C.
Comply with IEEE C57.12.91, "Test Code for Dry-Type Distribution and Power Transformers."
LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
26 22 00 - 1
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
1.7
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
1.8
Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat according to manufacturer's written instructions
within the enclosure of each ventilated-type unit, throughout periods during which equipment is
not energized and when transformer is not in a space that is continuously under normal control
of temperature and humidity.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate size and location of concrete bases with actual transformer provided. Cast anchorbolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified with
concrete.
B.
Coordinate installation of wall-mounting and structure-hanging supports with actual transformer
provided.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers:
following:
1.
2.
3.
2.2
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Products.
General Electric Company.
Square D; Schneider Electric.
GENERAL TRANSFORMER REQUIREMENTS
A.
Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, air-cooled units for 60-Hz service.
B.
Cores: Grain-oriented, non-aging silicon steel.
C.
Coils: Continuous windings without splices except for taps.
1.
2.
2.3
Internal Coil Connections: Brazed or pressure type.
Coil Material: Copper.
DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS
A.
Comply with NEMA ST-20 and list and label as complying with UL 1561.
B.
Cores: One leg per phase.
C.
Enclosure: Ventilated, NEMA 250, Type 2.
1.
Core and coil shall be encapsulated within resin compound, sealing out moisture and air.
D.
Taps for Transformers 25 kVA and Larger: Two 2.5 percent taps above and four 2.5 percent
taps below normal full capacity.
E.
Insulation Class: 220 deg C, UL-component-recognized insulation system with a maximum of
150 deg C rise above 40 deg C ambient temperature.
LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
26 22 00 - 2
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
F.
Complying with NEMA TP 1, Class 1 efficiency levels.
Tested according to NEMA TP 2.
K-Factor Rating: Transformers indicated to be K-factor rated shall comply with UL 1561
requirements for nonsinusoidal load current-handling capability to the degree defined by
designated K-factor.
1.
2.
3.
Unit shall not overheat when carrying full-load current with harmonic distortion
corresponding to designated K-factor.
Indicate value of K-factor on transformer nameplate.
Electrostatic Shielding: Each winding shall have an independent, single, full-width copper
electrostatic shield arranged to minimize interwinding capacitance.
a.
Arrange coil leads and terminal strips to minimize capacitive coupling between
input and output terminals.
b.
Include special terminal for grounding the shield.
c.
Shield Effectiveness:
1)
Capacitance between Primary and Secondary Windings: Not to exceed 33
picofarads over a frequency range of 20 Hz to 1 MHz.
2)
Common-Mode Noise Attenuation: Minimum of minus 120 dBA at 0.5 to 1.5
kHz; minimum of minus 65 dBA at 1.5 to 100 kHz.
3)
Normal-Mode Noise Attenuation: Minimum of minus 52 dBA at 1.5 to 10
kHz.
H.
Wall Brackets: Manufacturer's standard brackets.
I.
Low-Sound-Level Requirements:
IEEE C57.12.91, as follows:
1.
2.
3.
2.4
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
Energy Efficiency for Transformers Rated 15 kVA and Larger:
1.
2.
G.
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
Maximum sound levels, when factory tested according to
30 to 50 kVA: 45 dBA
51 to 150 kVA: 50 dBA
151 to 300 kVA: 55 dBA
IDENTIFICATION DEVICES
A.
2.5
Nameplates: Engraved, laminated-plastic or metal nameplate for each distribution transformer,
mounted with corrosion-resistant screws. Nameplates and label products are specified in
Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Test and inspect transformers according to IEEE C57.12.91.
B.
Factory Sound-Level Tests: Conduct sound-level tests on equipment for this Project.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine conditions for compliance with enclosure- and ambient-temperature requirements for
each transformer.
LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
26 22 00 - 3
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
B.
Verify that field measurements are as needed to maintain working clearances required by
NFPA 70 and manufacturer's written instructions.
C.
Examine walls, floors, roofs, and concrete bases for suitable mounting conditions where
transformers will be installed.
D.
Verify that ground connections are in place and requirements in Section 26 05 26 "Grounding
and Bonding for Electrical Systems" have been met. Maximum ground resistance shall be 5
ohms at location of transformer.
E.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
CONNECTIONS
A.
Ground equipment according to Section 26 05 26 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical
Systems."
B.
Connect wiring according to Section 26 05 19 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and
Cables."
3.3
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
B.
Tests and Inspections:
1.
Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA
Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.
C.
Remove and replace units that do not pass tests or inspections and retest as specified above.
D.
Infrared Scanning: Two months after Substantial Completion, perform an infrared scan of
transformer connections.
1.
2.
3.
E.
3.4
Use an infrared-scanning device designed to measure temperature or detect significant
deviations from normal values. Provide documentation of device calibration.
Perform 2 follow-up infrared scans of transformers, one at 4 months and the other at 11
months after Substantial Completion.
Prepare a certified report identifying transformer checked and describing results of
scanning. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and scanning
observations after remedial action.
Test Labeling: On completion of satisfactory testing of each unit, attach a dated and signed
"Satisfactory Test" label to tested component.
ADJUSTING
A.
Record transformer secondary voltage at each unit for at least 48 hours of typical occupancy
period. Adjust transformer taps to provide optimum voltage conditions at secondary terminals.
Optimum is defined as not exceeding nameplate voltage plus 10 percent and not being lower
than nameplate voltage minus 3 percent at maximum load conditions. Submit recording and tap
settings as test results.
B.
Output Settings Report: Prepare a written report recording output voltages and tap settings.
LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
26 22 00 - 4
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
3.5
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
CLEANING
A.
Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning.
END OF SECTION 26 22 00
LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
26 22 00 - 5
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
SECTION 26 24 16 - PANELBOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
1.3
Distribution panelboards.
Lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards.
Electronic-grade panelboards.
DEFINITIONS
A.
SVR: Suppressed voltage rating.
B.
SPD: Surge protection device..
1.4
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of panelboard, switching and overcurrent protective device,
transient voltage suppression device, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions
and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings,
and finishes.
B.
Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.5
Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of
installed devices, equipment features, and ratings.
Detail enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1.
Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings.
Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices.
Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent
protective devices and auxiliary components.
Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.
B.
Field Quality-Control Reports:
1.
2.
3.
C.
Test procedures used.
Test results that comply with requirements.
Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with
requirements.
Panelboard Schedules: For installation in panelboards.
PANELBOARDS
26 24 16 - 1
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
1.6
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 017823
"Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:
1.
2.
1.7
Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective
devices.
Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective
device that allows adjustments.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations: Obtain panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, components, and
accessories from single source from single manufacturer.
B.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
C.
Comply with NEMA PB 1, “Panelboards.”
D.
Comply with NFPA 70, “National Electrical Code.”
1.8
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside panelboards; install temporary
electric heating (250 W per panelboard) to prevent condensation.
B.
Handle and prepare panelboards for installation according to NEMA PB 1.
1.9
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations:
1.
2.
Do not deliver or install panelboards until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet
work in spaces is complete and dry, work above panelboards is complete, and temporary
HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions
at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise
indicated:
a.
b.
B.
Service Conditions: NEMA PB 1, usual service conditions, as follows:
1.
2.
C.
Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding 23 deg F to plus 104 deg F.
Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet.
Ambient temperatures within limits specified.
Altitude not exceeding 6600 feet.
Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by
Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to
provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated:
1.
Notify Architect no fewer than five days in advance of proposed interruption of electric
service.
PANELBOARDS
26 24 16 - 2
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
2.
3.
1.10
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Owner's written permission.
Comply with NFPA 70E, “Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace.”
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction that
penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment,
raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces.
Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors
and panels.
B.
Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast anchorbolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified with
concrete.
1.11
A.
WARRANTY
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace transient voltage suppression devices that fail in materials or workmanship within
specified warranty period.
1.
Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PANELBOARDS
A.
Enclosures: Surface-mounted cabinets.
1.
Rated for environmental conditions at installed location.
a.
b.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps. For surface-mounted fronts, match
box dimensions; for flush-mounted fronts, overlap box.
Hinged Front Cover: Entire front trim hinged to box and with standard door within hinged
trim cover.
Skirt for Surface-Mounted Panelboards: Same gage and finish as panelboard front with
flanges for attachment to panelboard, wall, and ceiling or floor.
Gutter Extension and Barrier: Same gage and finish as panelboard enclosure; integral
with enclosure body. Arrange to isolate individual panel sections.
Finishes:
a.
b.
7.
Indoor Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1 .
Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids:
NEMA 250, Type 12.
Panels and Trim: Steel and galvanized steel, factory finished immediately after
cleaning and pretreating with manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish
consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat.
Back Boxes: Same finish as panels and trim.
Directory Card: Inside panelboard door, mounted in
protective cover.
PANELBOARDS
metal frame with transparent
26 24 16 - 3
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
B.
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity.
Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment grounding
conductors; bonded to box.
Isolated Ground Bus: Adequate for branch-circuit isolated ground conductors; insulated
from box.
Extra-Capacity Neutral Bus: Neutral bus rated 200 percent of phase bus and UL listed as
suitable for nonlinear loads.
Split Bus: Vertical buses divided into individual vertical sections.
Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity.
Main and Neutral Lugs: Mechanical type.
Ground Lugs and Bus-Configured Terminators: Mechanical type.
Feed-Through Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for use with conductor material. Locate
at opposite end of bus from incoming lugs or main device.
Subfeed (Double) Lugs:
Mechanical type suitable for use with conductor material.
Locate at same end of bus as incoming lugs or main device.
Gutter-Tap Lugs: Mechanical type suitable for use with conductor material. Locate at
same end of bus as incoming lugs or main device.
Extra-Capacity Neutral Lugs: Rated 200 percent of phase lugs mounted on extracapacity neutral bus.
D.
Future Devices:
Mounting brackets, bus connections, filler plates, and necessary
appurtenances required for future installation of devices.
E.
Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating:
current available at terminals.
2.2
Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit
DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS
A.
Manufacturers:
following :
1.
2.
3.
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.
General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.
Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
B.
Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, power and feeder distribution type.
C.
Doors: Secured with vault-type latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.
1.
For doors more than 36 inches high, provide two latches, keyed alike.
D.
Mains: As indicated on drawings.
E.
Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes 125 A and Smaller:
Bolt-on circuit breakers.
F.
Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes Larger Than 125 A:
Bolt-on circuit breakers; plug-in circuit breakers where individual positive-locking device requires
mechanical release for removal.
PANELBOARDS
26 24 16 - 4
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
2.3
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS
A.
Manufacturers:
following :
1.
2.
3.
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.
General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.
Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
B.
Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch-circuit type.
C.
Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing
adjacent units.
D.
Doors: Concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.
2.4
ELECTRONIC-GRADE PANELBOARDS
A.
Manufacturers:
following :
1.
2.
3.
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.
General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.
Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
B.
Panelboards: NEMA PB 1; with factory-installed, integral SPD; labeled by an NRTL for
compliance with UL 67 after installing SPD.
C.
Doors: Secured with vault-type latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.
D.
Main Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on thermal-magnetic circuit breakers.
E.
Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on thermal-magnetic circuit breakers.
F.
Buses:
1.
2.
2.5
Copper phase and neutral buses; 200 percent capacity neutral bus and lugs.
Copper equipment and isolated ground buses.
DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
A.
Manufacturers:
following :
1.
2.
3.
B.
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.
General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.
Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB): Comply with UL 489, with interrupting capacity to meet
available fault currents.
1.
Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads,
and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip
setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.
PANELBOARDS
26 24 16 - 5
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
2.
3.
4.
5.
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with frontmounted, field-adjustable trip setting.
GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with Class A ground-fault
protection (6-mA trip).
Ground-Fault Equipment Protection (GFEP) Circuit Breakers: Class B ground-fault
protection (30-mA trip).
Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker (MCCB) Features and Accessories:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles.
Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor
materials.
Application Listing:
Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching
fluorescent lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity
discharge (HID) lighting circuits.
Multipole units enclosed in a single housing or factory assembled to operate as a
single unit.
Handle Padlocking Device: Fixed attachment, for locking circuit-breaker handle in
on or off position.
Handle Clamp: Loose attachment, for holding circuit-breaker handle in on position.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Receive, inspect, handle, and store panelboards according to NEMA PB 1.1.
B.
Examine panelboards before installation. Reject panelboards that are damaged or rusted or
have been subjected to water saturation.
C.
Examine elements and surfaces to receive panelboards for compliance with installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
D.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Install panelboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 1.1.
B.
Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and
temporary blocking of moving parts from panelboards.
C.
Mount top of trim 78 inches above finished floor unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed
panelboards with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish and mating with back box.
E.
Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers not already factory installed.
1.
Set field-adjustable, circuit-breaker trip ranges.
F.
Install filler plates in unused spaces.
G.
Comply with NECA 1, “Standard Practice for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction.”
PANELBOARDS
26 24 16 - 6
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
3.3
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning
signs complying with Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
B.
Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads; incorporate Owner's final room
designations. Obtain approval before installing. Use a computer or typewriter to create
directory; handwritten directories are not acceptable.
C.
Panelboard Nameplates:
Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying with
requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
D.
Device Nameplates: Label each branch circuit device in distribution panelboards with a
nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553
"Identification for Electrical Systems."
3.4
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Acceptance Testing Preparation:
1.
2.
B.
Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply,
feeder, and control circuit.
Test continuity of each circuit.
Tests and Inspections:
1.
2.
Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA
Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.
Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate
compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
C.
Panelboards will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
D.
Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies panelboards
included and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected,
remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.
3.5
ADJUSTING
A.
3.6
Adjust moving parts and operable component to function smoothly, and lubricate as
recommended by manufacturer.
PROTECTION
A.
Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according to manufacturer's
written instructions.
END OF SECTION 26 24 16
PANELBOARDS
26 24 16 - 7
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
SECTION 26 27 26 - WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
1.3
Receptacles, receptacles with integral GFCI, and associated device plates.
Twist-locking receptacles.
Isolated-ground receptacles.
Snap switches.
Pendant cord-connector devices.
Cord and plug sets.
Floor service outlets.
DEFINITIONS
A.
EMI: Electromagnetic interference.
B.
GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.
C.
Pigtail: Short lead used to connect a device to a branch-circuit conductor.
D.
RFI: Radio-frequency interference.
E.
TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor.
F.
UTP: Unshielded twisted pair.
1.4
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product.
B.
Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used for premarking
wall plates.
1.5
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
1.6
Field quality-control reports.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers' packinglabel warnings and instruction manuals that include labeling conditions.
WIRING DEVICES
26 27 26 - 1
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers' Names:
Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following
manufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
2.2
Cooper Wiring Devices; Division of Cooper Industries, Inc. (Cooper).
Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems (Hubbell).
Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. (Leviton).
Pass & Seymour/Legrand (Pass & Seymour).
Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate from single
source from single manufacturer.
GENERAL WIRING-DEVICE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Wiring Devices, Components, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a
qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B.
Comply with NFPA 70, “National Electrical Code.”
C.
Devices that are manufactured for use with modular plug-in connectors may be substituted
under the following conditions:
1.
2.
2.3
Connectors shall comply with UL 2459 and shall be made with stranding building wire.
Devices shall comply with the requirements in this Section.
STRAIGHT-BLADE RECEPTACLES
A.
Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A:
Configuration 5-20R, UL 498, and FS W-C-596.
1.
with
NEMA WD 1,
NEMA WD 6
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following :
a.
b.
c.
d.
B.
Comply
Cooper.
Hubbell.
Leviton.
Pass & Seymour.
Isolated-Ground, Duplex Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1,
NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, UL 498, and FS W-C-596.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following :
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
Cooper.
Hubbell.
Leviton.
Pass & Seymour.
Description: Straight blade; equipment grounding contacts shall be connected only to the
green grounding screw terminal of the device and with inherent electrical isolation from
mounting strap. Isolation shall be integral to receptacle construction and not dependent
on removable parts.
WIRING DEVICES
26 27 26 - 2
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
2.4
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
GFCI RECEPTACLES
A.
General Description:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Straight blade, non-feed-through type.
Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, UL 498, UL 943 Class A, and FS W-C-596.
Include indicator light that shows when the GFCI has malfunctioned and no longer
provides proper GFCI protection.
Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A:
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following :
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.5
Cooper.
Hubbell.
Pass & Seymour.
Leviton.
TWIST-LOCKING RECEPTACLES
A.
Single Convenience Receptacles: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration as
indicated on drawings, and UL 498.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.6
Cooper.
Hubbell.
Leviton.
Pass & Seymour.
TOGGLE SWITCHES
A.
Comply with NEMA WD 1, UL 20, and FS W-S-896.
B.
Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:
1.
C.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
Single Pole:
1)
Cooper.
2)
Hubbell.
3)
Leviton.
4)
Pass & Seymour.
b.
Three Way:
1)
Cooper.
2)
Hubbell.
3)
Leviton.
4)
Pass & Seymour.
Pilot-Light Switches, 20 A:
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
WIRING DEVICES
Cooper.
26 27 26 - 3
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
b.
c.
d.
2.
2.7
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
Hubbell.
Leviton.
Pass & Seymour.
Description: Single pole, with neon-lighted handle, illuminated when switch is "off."
WALL PLATES
A.
Single and combination types shall match corresponding wiring devices.
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.8
Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish.
Material for Finished Spaces: 0.035-inch- thick, satin-finished, Type 302 stainless steel.
Material for Unfinished Spaces: Galvanized steel.
Material for Damp Locations: Cast aluminum with spring-loaded lift cover, and listed and
labeled for use in wet and damp locations.
FLOOR SERVICE FITTINGS
A.
Type: Modular, flap-type, dual-service units suitable for wiring method used.
B.
Compartments: Barrier separates power from voice and data communication cabling.
C.
Service Plate: Rectangular, die-cast aluminum with satin finish.
D.
Power Receptacle: NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, gray finish, unless otherwise indicated.
E.
Voice and Data Communication Outlet: Blank cover with bushed cable opening
2.9
FINISHES
A.
Device Color:
1.
2.
B.
Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: Black unless otherwise indicated or
required by NFPA 70 or device listing.
Wiring Devices Connected to Emergency Power System: Red.
Wall Plate Color: For plastic covers, match device color.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with NECA 1, including mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise
indicated.
B.
Coordination with Other Trades:
1.
2.
Protect installed devices and their boxes. Do not place wall finish materials over device
boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against
outside of boxes.
Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust,
paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and
cables.
WIRING DEVICES
26 27 26 - 4
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
3.
4.
C.
2.
3.
4.
Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint
unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall.
Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete.
Do not strip insulation from conductors until right before they are spliced or terminated on
devices.
Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid
scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire.
The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70,
Article 300, without pigtails.
Existing Conductors:
a.
b.
c.
Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors.
Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter.
Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted, provided the outlet box is large enough.
Device Installation:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
E.
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
Conductors:
1.
D.
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
Replace devices that have been in temporary use during construction and that were
installed before building finishing operations were complete.
Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect
conductors.
Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last
possible moment.
Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches in length.
When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid
conductor tightly clockwise, two-thirds to three-fourths of the way around terminal screw.
Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by manufacturer.
When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice
No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections.
Tighten unused terminal screws on the device.
When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold
device-mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact.
Receptacle Orientation:
1.
Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles up, and on horizontally mounted
receptacles to the right.
F.
Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount
outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening.
G.
Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical
and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single,
multigang wall plates.
H.
Adjust locations of floor service outlets and service poles to suit arrangement of partitions and
furnishings.
3.2
GFCI RECEPTACLES
A.
Install non-feed-through-type GFCI receptacles where protection of downstream receptacles is
not required.
WIRING DEVICES
26 27 26 - 5
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
3.3
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Comply with Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
B.
Identify each receptacle with panelboard identification and circuit number. Use hot, stamped, or
engraved machine printing with black-filled lettering on face of plate, and durable wire markers
or tags inside outlet boxes.
3.4
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Perform the following tests and inspections:
1.
2.
B.
Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436.
Test Instrument for Convenience Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital readout
or illuminated digital-display indicators of measurement.
Tests for Convenience Receptacles:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V.
Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is unacceptable.
Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable.
GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943.
Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted.
Tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the circuit
breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or similar
problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new
ones, and retest as specified above.
C.
Wiring device will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
D.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
END OF SECTION 26 27 26
WIRING DEVICES
26 27 26 - 6
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
SECTION 26 28 16 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
1.3
Nonfusible switches.
Molded-case circuit breakers (MCCBs).
Enclosures.
DEFINITIONS
A.
NC: Normally closed.
B.
NO: Normally open.
C.
SPDT: Single pole, double throw.
1.4
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and component
indicated. Include dimensioned elevations, sections, weights, and manufacturers' technical
data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, accessories, and finishes.
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Shop Drawings: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers.
sections, details, and attachments to other work.
1.
1.5
Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1.
Current and voltage ratings.
Short-circuit current ratings (interrupting and withstand, as appropriate).
Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent
protective devices, accessories, and auxiliary components.
Include plans, elevations,
Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.
B.
Field quality-control reports.
1.
2.
3.
Test procedures used.
Test results that comply with requirements.
Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with
requirements.
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
26 28 16 - 1
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
C.
1.6
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
Manufacturer's field service report.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers to include in
emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
In addition to items specified in
Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:
1.
2.
1.7
Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting enclosed switches and circuit
breakers.
Time-current coordination curves (average melt) for each type and rating of overcurrent
protective device; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective
device.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL.
1.
Testing Agency's Field Supervisor:
testing.
Currently certified by NETA to supervise on-site
B.
Source Limitations: Obtain enclosed switches and circuit breakers, overcurrent protective
devices, components, and accessories, within same product category, from single source from
single manufacturer.
C.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
D.
Comply with NFPA 70, “National Electrical Code.”
1.8
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following
conditions unless otherwise indicated:
1.
2.
B.
Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by
Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to
provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.9
Ambient Temperature: Not less than minus 22 deg F and not exceeding 104 deg F.
Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet.
Notify Owner no fewer than five days in advance of proposed interruption of electric
service.
Indicate method of providing temporary electric service.
Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Owner's written permission.
Comply with NFPA 70E, “Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace.”
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components with equipment
served and adjacent surfaces.
Maintain required workspace clearances and required
clearances for equipment access doors and panels.
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
26 28 16 - 2
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
NONFUSIBLE SWITCHES
A.
Manufacturers:
following:
1.
2.
3.
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.
General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.
Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
B.
Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 600-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1,
horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with
cover in closed position.
C.
Accessories:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.2
Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground
conductors.
Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded;
labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.
Isolated Ground Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and
bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.
Hookstick Handle: Allows use of a hookstick to operate the handle.
Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, and conductor material.
MOLDED-CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A.
Manufacturers:
following:
1.
2.
3.
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.
General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.
Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
B.
General Requirements: Comply with UL 489, NEMA AB 1, and NEMA AB 3, with interrupting
capacity to comply with available fault currents.
C.
Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads and
instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for
circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.
D.
Features and Accessories:
1.
2.
3.
2.3
Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles.
Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor material.
Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent
lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity discharge lighting
circuits.
ENCLOSURES
A.
Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, NEMA KS 1, NEMA 250, and UL 50, to
comply with environmental conditions at installed location.
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
26 28 16 - 3
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
1.
2.
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
Indoor, Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1.
Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids:
NEMA 250, Type 12.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches and circuit breakers for
compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Install individual wall-mounted switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform height unless
otherwise indicated.
B.
Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and
temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.
C.
Comply with NECA 1, “Standard Practice of Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction.”
3.3
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Comply with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
1.
2.
3.4
Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide
warning signs.
Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B.
Acceptance Testing Preparation:
1.
2.
C.
Test insulation resistance for each enclosed switch and circuit breaker, component,
connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.
Test continuity of each circuit.
Tests and Inspections:
1.
2.
3.
Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA
Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.
Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate
compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
Perform the following infrared scan tests and inspections and prepare reports:
a.
Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days
after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each enclosed switch and
circuit breaker. Remove front panels so joints and connections are accessible to
portable scanner.
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
26 28 16 - 4
HOLLOWAY HALL RENOVATIONS
DCI 717-12-03
b.
c.
4.
D.
3.5
BID DOCUMENTS
JANUARY 2, 2013
DESIGN COLLECTIVE, INC.
BALT